Audio

068: How Albert And Mike Created MyFitnessPal.com And Sold It For 475 Million Dollars

MyFitnessPal

Albert and Mike are 2 of the most successful entrepreneurs that I know and what’s amazing is that they created a 475 million dollar company completely bootstrapped. Not only does MyFitnessPal.com boast over 100 million users today but it’s also an app that has helped countless people lead healthier lifestyles.

In today’s interview, Albert walks us through how MyFitnessPal.com grew to a powerhouse company and ultimately got sold to Under Armour for 475 million dollars.

Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How to get users to install an app without paying a dime
  • Techniques to engage your customers and create a community
  • How to create a thriving forum
  • How to find the right early customers to spread your product
  • How to leverage word of mouth to grow your company
  • Why social media didn’t work very well with MyFitnessPal
  • The secret to MyFitnessPal’s success
  • How MyFitnessPal generates revenue and what’s in the plan for the future

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

This episode was sponsored by Big Commerce. If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners, to each us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used earlier on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick a shout out to this episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store, and Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here is what I like about Bigcommerce, unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

Now there’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba which is new, so you can easily find products to sell online. Now if you are interested in starting your own online store using Bigcommerce is as about as easy as it gets. Everything from design to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products. You can literally start your online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, now on to the show.

Welcome to the, My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Albert Lee on the show. And even if you’ve never had of Albert, chances are that you’ve used his app called My Fitness Pal. Now My Fitness Pal is an app that helps you lose weight by keeping track of your calories and watching what you eat. And together with his brother Mike, Albert recently sold My Fitness Pal for $475 million to Under Armour. Now what’s cool is that they pretty much bootstrapped the entire business from the ground up.

And Albert is actually someone who I’ve known for many years and we mainly catch up at kids’ birthday parties of all places. Now here is what is funny, whenever we meet up, we almost always talk about our respective businesses, and I distinctly remember this moment five years ago when we were chatting, and Albert with his usual laid back head bob was like, “You know Steve, this is going all right. We are getting some traction and we are starting to hire some people.” And it turns out that that was the understatement of the century.

It’s cool how My Fitness Pal has grown to a giant with over 70 million users and has helped people lose over 200 million pounds in weight. Now what I find especially cool about My Fitness Pal is that it’s a business run by two brothers, Mike and Albert. And I’m totally inspired myself by how they completely bootstrapped and sold a $475 million company. With that, welcome to the show Albert. How is it going today man?

Albert: It’s going great. Thanks for having me Steve.

Steve: It’s too bad we couldn’t have Mike on today, but perhaps you can tell us the story about the idea behind My Fitness Pal and why you guys decided to start it.

Albert: Sure. So actually the company was formed about 10 years ago. It seems like an eternity to be honest with you. But what had happened was my brother had taken a little bit of time off and he was getting prepared for his wedding. Him and wife were having a beach wedding in Mexico. So one of the things they wanted to do where they were like, “Hey, we got to get in shape for this wedding.” So they went to see a trainer, and the trainer had talked to them. He said, “Hey it’s great that you are here. It’s great that you are trying to be more active in working out, but if you really want to see results you need to actually watch what you eat as well, and here is the way to do it.”

He can kind of handed out this paper notebook and a little reference guide. It said, “Track everything that you eat. You can see the calorie counts on this guide and just keep it in this notebook and make sure that you stay at a certain level and you will be good.” Even though it was 10 years ago my brother kind of looked at that and said, “Wow, there got to be some kind of software. There has got to be a better solution than me literally carrying around this notebook everywhere I go.”

So he looked around. There was some websites out there, there were a couple of apps for like the Palm Treo for example which was actually where my brother worked, but nothing that really worked the way that he thought it should. And that was kind of the impetus for building the first product. It was just something where he said, “I think I could essentially build something better.”

So he took it upon himself to do it. Luckily he had a little bit of time at that point. Once again he wasn’t working, that allowed him to kind of get the product launched. But he actually ended up going back to work, and MFP sort of remained a little bit of a side project for him.

Steve: Was the intention when he created the app, was it to actually turn out to be something huge, or was it more for just personal reasons in the beginning?

Albert: It was mostly for personal reasons. My brother has got a little bit of a strange story; probably like many people I think who end up starting businesses. He had started programming when we were both– when he was 10 years old. So when we were pretty little. My mom had actually gone back to school to get a degree in Computer science and she would drag him along to the classes, and he ended up learning the program that way. And he had written a lot of software during kind of junior high and high school and got a little bit burned out.

So when he went to college he didn’t major in any engineering discipline or didn’t major in computer science. He became a consultant, he started working in marketing. He ended up getting into medical school and declined to go. It was sort of like, I think like many people just kind of thinking, “Wow! There is got to be something else out there for me that I’d be really passionate about.” He kind of woke up one day and said, “I want to start writing software again.” And I think that kind of dog-tailed with time when he started thinking about the idea for out of picking around.

So it was really a perfect project for him to think about from a personal standpoint, chances like getting back into writing code and actually building something. I think he obviously also thought about like, “Hey, I think there is an opportunity here. I think there is something really big that can become of this.” But I don’t think that was like the driver. That wasn’t where the passion came from. It was really because he just felt like this was a problem that he wanted to solve.

Steve: And as the co-founder, when did you actually step in with MFP?

Albert: So Mike was working on the product for a couple of years really like– once again it was kind of this like couple of times a quarter, on weekends, here and there. He actually wasn’t really doing a lot of active development, but the product was still growing pretty slowly. There was a very small, but very active and loyal community of users. And right around 2008, the end– sorry, towards the end of 2008, it gotten to the point where Mike really thought like, “Hey, I think there is something here.”

The iPhone had come out not that long before that and the app store had launched, and some of the more popular apps early on things in the health and fitness area. So that was when he came and talked to me. He said, “I think there is a much bigger opportunity here. And unless we really dedicate ourselves to this thing, I don’t know if it’s going to happen.” So he convinced me to quit my job. People are always like, “Well how did your brother ask you to quit your job?” It’s like, “He didn’t really ask me. He just kind of told me to quit.” He said, “Albert you got to quit and work out this thing with me.” So that’s when we started working on it. So that was a little over six years ago.

Steve: So you guys didn’t take a salary, right?

Albert: No.

Steve: I vaguely remember.

Albert: So the business was being monetized through advertising. There wasn’t a ton of revenue there. Yeah, there was some, but we very deliberately decided that we weren’t going to take any money out of the business. In fact we obviously invested more at that point. But anything that we made from a revenue standpoint we plowed it into getting help or development or design or anything else that we thought would help the business move forward. So it was like, well we were two years before we actually took our first sort of pay check out of the company.

Steve: Actually in my mind My Fitness Pal is actually a pretty ambitious project as there is just tons of weight loss and fitness apps out there. So what would say makes the app truly unique, and how has MFP managed to help so many people?

Albert: Well there is a couple of things. So one is we have I think done a really terrific job in accumulating this amazing data set around nutrition, and that’s a big part of what makes My Fitness Pal easy to use– is the fact that when you come into the app, when you try to launch something that you need that we generally have that thing in our database. If we don’t, that means that you got to like go out and look for the information and perhaps try to input it all manually and that’s a little bit of friction.

So a big part of how we think about the product is it’s hard enough to ask people to change their behavior. So if you come in here and you say, “Hey I want to lose weight.” That means you got to start doing things differently in your life. Well the software and the service and the tools that we provide can’t get in the way of that. If we are adding more friction on top of that then your chances of succeeding goes down dramatically.

So getting all that data, really focusing on the user experience, the product and taking away all these really steps to make it something that you can do four, five times a day every single day for an extended period of time, removing all those barriers, I think was a big factor and just making it easy enough that people unmask and start using.

Steve: So you have all sorts of foods. For example if I looked at monkey brain, there would be something in there on the app too, and I would know instantly how many calories were in there.

Albert: Yeah. Monkey brains is probably fairly choleric, but I’m just guessing.

Steve: So one of the things I love about My Fitness Pal is that it’s a feel good company. I’m sure you got many incredible stories from people who you’ve helped in the past. I just thought it would be kind of cool if you could care to share a quick success story.

Albert: Sure. It’s funny because I think people get super excited to hear the story of the person who was like in really dire health, maybe they were incredibly overweight or obese and they lost a dramatic amount of weight. That’s like a super common story that people get excited about. But I think sometimes what we get really excited about; we obviously get excited about those stories also. But sometimes what we get excited about is just hearing about things that kind of fall under the category of non-scale victories, so that’s something that our members talk about a lot.

And so an example of that is like we got a letter from a woman and she just talked about how she’d always kind of struggled with weight and her health and never really found something that had truly worked for her, that really resonated with her in terms of helping her understand how to govern her behavior, and how to eat and be more active. But My Fitness Pal just worked and she knew that it was working because she got up from a chair– from sitting down and she didn’t have to use her hands to push up, and it was the first time that she had done that in like 20 years.

Steve: Wow!

Albert: And so to her that was like this really powerful moment. This non-scale victory, like I got up. I didn’t need even to assist myself. She literally took the time to write us about just that moment. I think that kind of stuff is incredibly powerful, it’s super motivating.

Steve: That’s amazing. If I got stories like that, that would just make me really happy. I bet you got a ton of those too.

Albert: Yeah. That’s really what keeps you going. I think– I’m sure people in your audience can understand there is so many sort of highs and lows in like building your business. Even when things are going great you are just stressed out. There is always something that you are worried about. And to be able to hear these stories from your customers in terms of how you are helping change something for them, how you are improving anything for them is just– it really forces the fact that all the work that you are doing is valuable, and it really helps you to kind of stay focused.

Steve: So let’s go back to kind of the very beginning of MFP. So first of all, how did two brothers manage to fund this company without a team of engineers? Did your brother actually write all the code for the first app?

Albert: He did. So my brother was kind of the primary developer and when I came on, one of the big things that I started working on was getting an iPhone app development. So what we decided to do was we both put in some money, plus we took the revenue that we were making and we hired this guy to work for us and he was like working for us for like two days a week. He actually still works for the company now. And his only job was to work on the iPhone app and I worked with him on that while my brother was working on the website and kind of [inaudible] [0:15:05] for structure.

Steve: And here is the question that’s always kind of been on my mind. You guys kind of bootstrapped the whole operation. If you can go back in time, would you have actually chosen to get funding early on to kind of increase the growth rate?

Albert: No. I don’t think that there are a ton of things in particular that we could have done early on had we had money that would have really changed the trajectory or the outcome of the business.

Steve: Interesting.

Albert: I think one of the things that’s kind of magical about our product is we don’t pay any money to acquire users. So from a marketing standpoint we never pay for installs and that’s a very rare thing to get to. We actually have 80 plus million users now, and we haven’t had to actually pay to get them. So it’s really been dependent on this kind of fly wheel of people coming in, using the product, loving it, going out, and telling others. So it’s been very product driven.

And so once again I don’t know that at those early stages having money, a lot of more money would have changed those kind of things. It also actually– the big thing is you get– the longer you can wait. And I think it’s a delicate game because you do want to be cognizant of course starting out the business when you could be doing better if you had more capital. But certainly if you can wait and you can really grow things, before you decide to take any institutional money it really changes the terms of what you do that, and that’s super valuable.

Steve: True. So you are saying that you never ran any Facebook ads, any paper click ads, or any sort of burner ads on any other site to get the word out?

Albert: Yeah, we didn’t do that. We did– well I shouldn’t say that. So like super early on, before I even got involved with the company, my brother did run like a little bit of PPC advertising on Google. But that was literally like in the $50 a month kind of range. And then sometime last year we did a little bit of experimentation as we were expanding internationally, but I wouldn’t guess that we spent more than five grand or something. So it’s really inconsequential in terms of the size and scale of business.

Steve: So that’s really interesting. So what was the early strategy for getting people to use the app? And so how did you get your first 100 users.

Albert: Well the first 100 users was absolutely kind of friends and family. And I think the good thing is we weren’t necessarily like reinventing the wheel at that point. We were taking a solution that had been around for probably like 50 years, like this kind of notion of keeping a food journal and tracking your activities. Dieticians and nutritionists have been recommending that forever. But we’ve provided a digital version of it, and made it a little bit more convenient and used the benefits of technology to make it easier for people.

So things like, hey you remember stuff that you eat most commonly that makes it easy to input it again in the future. Just like really basic stuff like that and I think that was enough to get just friends and other people out there to start using the product. And once you kind of get hooked into certain communities. So like one community that really engaged with our product early on were body builders. It sounds really funny because was like, “Oh my gosh. My Fitness Pal is like weight loss community.”

And that’s not necessarily how we see ourselves and that actually wasn’t really the demographic that was highly active in the app early on. It was these people who really wanted to track their nutrition down to a very detailed level like how many grams of protein am I consuming everyday because they are literally competing in competitions. And those guys became very vocal proponents of the product, and that helped because you see somebody at the gym and that person is like totally ripped and they are saying, “Hey I’m using My Fitness Pal.” Just the word of mouth power there is actually really, really amazing.

Steve: So were you guys apart of that community? Like how did you get the word out about the app to that community in the first place? I don’t remember you body building Albert.

Albert: Yeah. If the listeners could see me they’d be like, “Wait a second here. What is this guy talking about? ”We weren’t, but there certainly were a lot of places where you could actually go and say, “Hey, we’ve got a solution around some of this.” And the thing is like because there wasn’t anything out there people were really looking for this. We did a little bit of work on SEO early on, and thankfully that kind of paid off. We did some stuff, like we made it easy for people to have these weight loss stickers. And those things obviously were put into all sorts of forms and stamped everywhere and people caught up. And like once again it was like the really active users found it, and those people became really foundation of this community that started to get built around the product.

I think like one piece of advice that I’ve always given to people because they’ve asked a lot about, “Wow you got these really robust and highly engaged community of people. They are talking to each other; they are giving each other advice, and support, and knowledge. How did you guys foster that?” And I think one of the important things to consider is like, everyone wants that to be this very passive thing. But the reality is you have to invest super heavily in that. And it’s like basic things.

So like things that we did that other people weren’t doing at the time was we didn’t have like just a link on our site that said community and if you clicked on that link it went to the forums. We actually intentionally surfaced foreign content right into the application on its homepage, so that even if you were interested necessarily in like going and visiting community, like you would just see people talking to each other in there, and that would lure a lot of people in. And then the other thing that we did really early on is we had people who would post.

Like there is always those people who go in the forums, or kind of in the ghost town because there is not enough people yet to post, we made sure that we answered every post even if we didn’t have an answer. We just wanted people to know that if you post in here, somebody is going to post back. And eventually as more users get involved, they start becoming the ones that really take over and start answering other people’s questions, and it does have sort of take on a life of its own, but you have to be just super deliberate and very meticulous about going through that step early on. I’m glad that we did that.

Steve: Let’s talk about starting a forum because I know you need a lot of traffic to make sure that it doesn’t seem like a ghost town. And it’s like a chicken and egg problem, right?

Albert: Mm-hmm.

Steve: So did you guys have that forum early on in the product, or was it something introduced later on once you already had an established customer base?

Albert: It was something like initially used to actually asking for. I think there may be a dynamic here with regards to the space that we are in. It’s kind of digital health and fitness because you know its sort of– in general health and fitness people have more questions and answers.

Steve: Sure.

Albert: There is just so many things like, “If I exercise and I burn more calories, how am I supposed to like eat back those calories? Just like really basic stuff. So we constantly get like emails from people who are like, “Hey, I’d love to be able to just like talk to other members and ask them questions.” So that’s like– it was one of the first things that we ended up doing. Again, even when you do that you can’t just hope that other members are going answer any of those questions, you just got to go in there and do it yourself.

Steve: So did you guys create multiple personas in the beginning to make it seem like it was more filled out.

Albert: We did, we did. Actually Mike answered a lot on himself. He has thousands of posts in the forums to his credit, and people didn’t mind. I think they were happy that somebody was out there trying to get their answers for them.

Steve: And at time point Mike obviously was a consumer of the product and he probably had great results as well. And so he was showing that off in the forums as well, right?

Albert: I don’t know…

[Crosstalk]

Steve: I’ve actually never met your brother, but I picture this guy who is super fit now.

Albert: I think that’s a very powerful sort of concept. I think when you look at a lot of really successful products and kind of fitness and weight loss phase, certainly providing inspiration to customers can be very motivating. And that’s why like if you go on [inaudible] [0:24:16] you are going to see a lot of lazy success stories. Everyone that you see is going to be just like incredibly thin and they are going to look like what you want to look like.

But I do think that there is some level within our product that is very approachable because that isn’t necessarily what you see when you come and you use our service. One thing I think we recognize is just like everybody has challenges, even people who are really fit. It’s like we just wanted to make this very inviting and very open for people.

Steve: It sounds like to me at least from what you’ve told me so far that word of mouth was just so crucial in the growth of your app. And so what was your social strategy? How did you kind of foster the word of mouth about your app? Now you mentioned that you had– on the front of the app, you’ve exposed a lot of the conversations. What are some of the other things that you did?

Albert: Well we tried to– as I’m sure many people would have, we tried to utilize social media and outlets like Facebook and Twitter to try to increase the virality. But actually it didn’t work very well. And I think one of the reasons is that there is a little of a strange dynamic where– in the world that we are in, where people are very happy to talk to other people about something that they are doing that’s helping their health, but they want to sort of like prevent their audience first. So it isn’t thing where like I broadcast to everybody, “Hey, I am doing this and this is great.”

It’s more of like, hey I talked to that guy who sits next to me at work because like we’ve got a good relationship and I said like I started saying like hey I’m trying this new thing and it’s pretty cool. And so like I think the traditional methods work very effective in creating these viral loops, but, and this is something that unfortunately a lot of– how easy it is for other people to replicate, but the bigger focus for us is like, just to make people successful. If they go out, they use our product for the first week, maybe they shed a few pounds in that week, they are just going very quickly to become evangelists.

And that was the technique that we sort right away. And the funny part is with something like this is even for somebody who for example isn’t really naturally predisposed to want to go out there and talk about the product, they would lose so much weight for example, people will start haunting them about it. It’s like dude, you look awesome, how the hell are you doing this? And they’ll be like well, kind of shyly like well I started using this product and I’m like this [inaudible] [0:26:57] that kind of endorsement is just like super powerful. So, I’d like to say it was like this incredibly deliberate strategy, but I think the real strategy was make sure that people succeed with the product, do everything we can to make sure that they get through that first week, and if they do they are going to start talking about it.

Steve: Wow! Okay, so when people were bragging about it would they be posting this on the forums or would they post it on Facebook? Where was most of the activity?

Albert: Yeah. I think you know people would certainly love posting in forums because there is a community there that they know will be very welcoming to their stories, there’s a lot of people who post on Facebook now, we have a very-very active Facebook page, and now for example that’s the way the community comes and kind of engages with us and it engages with other community members. People are using Instagram a lot now.

Steve: Yeah.

Albert: And so they can view kind of hashtag [inaudible] [0:27:57] you’ll see like people just taking pictures of their– what they are eating, or their success or they’ll take a picture– and they take a picture with like an inspirational statement or something like that. So that’s like we have a lot of other conversations happening, there is also Reddit forum, that’s pretty big.

Steve: Okay.

Albert: That tends to get a lot of conversations going on.

Steve: So what I always kind of curious about was that giving out My Fitness Pal is actually a free App, how did it actually generate revenue earlier on? Was it just primarily advertising?

Albert: Yeah. And it’s still primarily advertising.

Steve: Interesting. Okay.

Albert: And so that’s– that was a tough part in the beginning because obviously it was harder to scale revenue, because you hadn’t just generated a tremendous amount of usage to create any significant amount of revenue, but I think the way that we looked at the business earlier on was, this is a service that gets better when more people are using it. We get more data, our community becomes more richer and more powerful, we have people who create more social connections in our service, and that’s really valuable, and it allows us to do bigger and better partnerships. And so we highly deliberately do not pursue other revenue opportunities like creating a subscription service for example, which was pretty popular amongst other companies that we recognize.

Steve: Right.

Albert: And entirely focused on our growth, and I think that was a horrible thing to do as a bootstrapped business, because you always felt sort of the pain of not being able to do some– you know hire engineers or do things that you wanted. But I think being forward looking I think has greatly contributed to our ability to get the skill that we did end up getting to and really, you know that led to the outcome, selling the company recently.

So, I think that’s like kind of my advice to somebody out there whose bootstrapping is like– it’s hard because I think, you have great discipline, you’re thinking really wisely about like how you are spending your money, how you’re generating more revenue access the fuel for your company. But being able to marry that with the long term view and sort of vision and mission for what you are trying to create, could be in a neighborhood for [inaudible] [0:30:31] even greater heights of success.

Steve: You know what’s interesting is I have a lot of experience in the advertising space, and it’s actually not a set-it-and-forget-it type of thing if you actually want to make significant money, so were you taking private placements or was it just automated services that filled up the ads for you?

Albert: We were– we didn’t have a lot of time to do private placements, and so we didn’t do very much of that, we did a little bit of it. But I think like you said even under– even in terms of like working with partners like adsense and Google obviously we’ve worked with like hundreds of different ad networks over time, like we’ve spent a lot of effort trying to optimize that, and there were huge dividends to be paid out and I’m sure like what’s to get explained, that’s something that is a great revelation to your audience, but like we– whether it was like trying to figure out something like day parting things like we spend probably a significant amount of time doing that and every time we’ve figured something out it ended up being really-really worth it.

Steve: Okay. So, you talked about money and that sort of thing, so when did you guys actually decide to take on your first hire?

Albert: So, we did– the way that it ended up working out is we had like just enough money to pay this guy who used to work for my brother who is a developer two days a week. So he was like the first hire, he worked for us like two days a week, and that’s all we could really afford. But literally like as it revenue grew it’s like hey I think we can pay one more day a week and he had another consulting gig that he was doing that he liked a lot less than working with us. And so every time we had a little bit more money and we were able to do that, he ended up kind of shifting one day until finally he was our first full time guy.

Steve: Okay. And then once you kind of had this space and you had the iPhone app, how did your investments in the business kind of evolve over time?

Albert: Well it was– we kept looking at growth opportunities, so we had the iPhone app, about I want to say seven or eight months offer that, we launched the android. That was another huge propellant for growth, I mean that was actually pretty early on in android, and so when we ended up going on there, we already had a disc [ph] track record on IOS, plus talking to the folks at Google, they were like, yeah we would love to really promote you guys and that gave us a huge amount of promotion earlier on and that helped a lot.

Steve: Did you guys do anything special to make the apps more visible on like iTunes, or in the play store?

Albert: Yes. So, one thing that I think at that time and I still think it’s really important that people potentially take for granted is the app description. And so, we actually tested a lot of apps descriptions and that was something like I don’t think people were doing at that time, and we found out that we were like 10 times better than the ones out there.

Steve: Interesting. Okay, so you guys are split testing description, what else? The titles?

Albert: Yeah. We are doing– we are, I think you get, the audience can see even today the name of our app is not My Fitness Pal, I think these days it’s like a lot more common for people to label their products in that way, but at that point like we were like the only people doing that. And I think it mattered in terms of kind of app stores, SEO but I think that iTunes was kind of search [inaudible] [0:34:07] and what not incredibly refined at that point. And I think we just had– I think even now you can see if you type like M-Y or something in search for iTunes like we are going to pop up the first thing, so we did do a lot of experimentation around that.

Steve: What about soliciting reviews? Did you guys have a strategy for that?

Albert: We didn’t, I think luckily for us when we really launched we– and this is different from a lot of people who ended up going into mobiles, like we had a website, we had a web community who loved us. And so as soon as we ended up getting our app in there, like our existing users went in there and they were like, we love this service, and so we’ve never really had to do anything there.

Steve: Okay. So would you– if you were to do it all over again would you go that same route of developing an audience first, and then launching an app or would you have just launched the app first?

Albert: I think it’s a luxury, not something like I think it’s like a very necessarily like a smart deliberate strategy, I think getting– if you can get yourself up there it really helps. I think people absolutely believe that it’s this incredible self-fulfilling prophecy like if you are the number one health and fitness app, and you are top 100 app in iTunes, that might– you’re just getting– continually getting tons of downloads because you are there on app, I think that is a little bit of a fallacy. I think what we see is yes there are some people who are downloading your app just because you are highly ranked, but a lot of it is really like still dependent on like do you have a good product?

You need to have a great product to really stick there and once again many of the people that are finding our product, even now are still finding us through the word of mouth, not because they went to the app store and just happened to see it there.

Steve: I can actually vouch for that in just running this podcast. Well it helps to actually be in that top of the ranks on iTunes, I’ve been– I feel like I’ve been generating most of the traffic just through building an audience on my website, and then pointing them over to the podcast, so I can totally vouch for what you just said. So let’s just briefly talk about the acquisition. Why did you choose to get acquired as opposed to remaining an independent company?

Albert: The is a lot of different factors, I mean I think for us one thing that is would be a piece of advice that we would give to anyone starting a business is you really focus in the beginning like getting your product, building it, getting it out there, but pretty soon after that you’ve– you really want to start thinking about like what kind of company you are trying to build, like what are you really trying to achieve? Like what is the mission? Like why do we exist?

Why is this product necessary? And so we’ve been very strong in mission driven in our company, and our goal is to really make it easy to be healthy, and so that becomes something that can be a very important lens for you as you’re looking like every other thing you do in the future, writing, responding or whatever. And as part of the acquisition it also became a really important thing which is like, this is going to help us achieve our mission.

And I think on a first level we felt like wow! With the support of Under Armour, their amazing products, their incredible brand, their amazing marketing capabilities, like that we would be able to kind of expand and reach areas that would be very difficult [inaudible] [0:37:31] potentially as an independent company, and then we obviously thought about a lot other things I can talk about like economically it’s just something that’s going to work out well for an investor, it’s something that’s going to work out well for our employees and for us. What does the market look like right now?

What are the dynamics, there’s a ton of competition out there, I don’t think we were afraid of that, our business was incredibly successful and I think we obviously believed even as an independent that we can continue to be really successful, but you just try to weigh all the different factors, you know there are risks out there and what– like you know we looked at working with Under, we just felt like well, these guys are people who can really help us build something amazing, and that made it kind of easy.

Steve: So let me ask you this, let’s say you guys chose not to get acquired, would you have chosen different monetization methods outside of advertising?

Albert: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Albert: Yeah. I think monetization is something that was actually becoming a much bigger focus for us, it just– it’s the fuel for growth and at some point you do need to have a lot of resources if you want to tackle really-really ambitious things. So we were– we still are looking at like subscription, it’s simply looking at other ways to monetize.

Steve: Interesting. So could you care to come in on some of those ways? You mentioned subscriptions, what about physical products or services?

Albert: Yes. We dabbled a little bit with physical products, not done very much there. I think it’s not because we don’t see great opportunity there, it’s just there are a lot of different opportunities and we just didn’t have, you know that capa– we wanted to be focused, so we didn’t have the capability to exploit them all. We’re going to be, as you can probably imagine exploring all physical products because we’re being acquired by a company that makes physical products.

But stuff like subscription revenue is, I think where we believe there are services and content that we could deliver to our customers, that’s really valuable to them, that they will keep willing to pay for on recurrent basis, that’s the more obvious, it’s like the parallels in– for other businesses in our space especially like once people would really have things like, weight watchers, those are all really– they are very well suited for a subscription model, and that’s where they make all their money.

Steve: Okay. So my next question for you is actually kind of more of a selfish thing. So I kind of started my businesses to free up my time, but you have three kids, so how did you actually balance your lifestyle early on before it was really successful?

Albert: It was pretty hard. I think though one thing that really worked out well for us was when we started working on this– my brother and I first started, I had– my daughter was two, and my other daughter, my second daughter was just a baby, she was just like an infant, and because of that, and I’m sure you know what it’s like or just like you are up at all hours…

Steve: Yeah. It’s crazy.

Albert: I needed a lot of flexibility, but we didn’t have like a ton of employees, our first guy actually I didn’t mention this, the first employee was actually revoked. So he was living in Austin I think at the time. And you just don’t have a lot of overhead in terms of like meeting with people, and all that kind of stuff, like my brother was like writing a lot of code and I was like working with this other guy, and so we dint have to be together very much.

So that meant that we actually had a lot of flexibility in our schedule, we worked super hard, but I could like– if I woke up at two in the night, so like help the baby I would just stay up. I would work till like seven in the morning, and then I sleep till like noon maybe– and it wasn’t like– and so there is actually a ton of flexibility in those early stages that you can leverage to make it easier on your family. And now it’s like we’ve got more employees, it happens to coincide with my kids like they’re all in school and stuff like that. So we had actually worked out nicely because now that they are on a more regular schedule, I’m also on a more regular schedule.

But before, when I needed to like kind of work all over the place, my family– I could kind of work around that and vice versa, which I thought was really helpful. It’s something that was like not obvious, and I don’t know if it’s something you can really plan for, but that was something that helped a lot earlier.

Steve: I was expecting you give [inaudible] [0:42:09] your wife, so I’ll give you a chance to do that right now in case she is going to listen to this interview.

Albert: She is yeah. Sorry honey, but my wife was actually working, that was a huge factor. She was still working, she had a good job and she was still making money for us, and you know obviously it was still on me kind of being all over the place, and so that was obviously really-really important. And I think just having the support of someone, there is just so much anxiety that comes with starting a business, like just going without a pay cheque, it’s not so much even like the everyday, like what are you doing like is my wife supporting me by making money, but if she’s supporting me by just like making me feel free to do this, to go out there and like take a chance.

And she was always very trusting and very confident that we would do right by her, that we were out there, that we were working as hard as we could and that we would eventually make this thing successful. So I can’t tell you how much I appreciated that, that she just– she never like, she never made me feel like that I was taking the success of risk even though she was a part of it too.

Steve: Absolutely. I’m always looking out for you over.

Albert: Thanks man, that was the hook up of the ages.

Steve: So today is MFP is kind of a remote company or is everyone in an office these days?

Albert: So, for the most part people are all in our office– most of the people are. We still have remote workers, and I think that is a way that you can certainly secure really great talent, in places where there are not really necessarily great companies to work at, and that’s how you compete with companies who maybe are willing to make that sacrifice and are willing to say like hey, we want to have– we were okay having people remote. So we had a bunch of people remote earlier on and that worked out fine, and almost all those people are still with us, and still working remote. So we can still make it work, but I think at some point you do or you’re trying to build this like culture in your company and that’s fine to do if there’s nobody in [inaudible] [0:44:24].

Steve: Of course. So I thought I’d close this interview by asking you if there are people out there listening who actually want to create an app or a company, what sort of advice would you give them.

Albert: Well I think, so I think there’s like a couple of things that usually come to mind, it’s like, one is people tend to kind of think about the business opportunity first, and they don’t think about like who the customer is, do they really need or care about whatever they are trying to create. I think it’s like something you gloss over because you are like hey! Won’t you want that, If you could have that? And it’s like yeah, I think a lot of ideas sound great would you say it that way, but then you can focus on like that a business is okay forward and it’ll make money through advertising, we can do all this stuff. And so I think the first thing is like, do you really focus on like trying to figure out in any possible way whether you really think customers are going to care about your product.

So like there are so many ways to do that. You don’t have to build anything. You don’t like say for example, like sometimes people would say I want to create this thing and it’s going to help you in circumstance when you need to like reference somebody’s information for like a sales call. And I’m like, okay, well how do you know that people need that, it’s like why, I feel I need it all the time. And I’m like well, why don’t you take this week, take a notepad and just keep it with you, or like use your phone notepad.

Every time you think you need that product just write it down like check the box, you know, put a tick, if that is like one or two by the end of the week, then you are probably wrong. It’s like you– if you feel like oh! crap I can– six times this week I needed that, this like really basic stuff like that you can do it. So just spend a lot of time validating that, and you can once again you can do that and you can do that while you have your job, you don’t need to go out and build anything.

If you want to try to and build something like draw it out, jot it out on people, like use a paper prototype and show it to people, I just think people get obsessed with like, I got to go out and hire developers and testing stuff, it’s like, no, you don’t have to do any of that.

Steve: So just as an aside, how did MFP do it’s early validation?

Albert: Well, I think Mike you know– luckily for him, and I think this is what everybody has the fortune of having, like he was able to build a bunch of things really early, but I think even in that case what he did was, he didn’t go too far.

He just showed people stuff, even if there was like supper wrath, like you can search and ad of food like how does this feel to you, and it’s like oh! Well that seems pretty simple, it would be cool if you could do x, y, z and I think going through that process and never feeling sort of ashamed of showing people stuff early is like a great thing to be thinking about as an entrepreneur. I think the one other thing that– I was listening to your podcast.

I’ve listened to just a bunch of different episodes and I think that one thing that I feel like is great about bootstrapped entrepreneurs is like it was really as experience for me as a bootstrapped entrepreneur that I felt all the time is like what I would tell people that we were bootstrapping, I felt that people would always make it seem like that we weren’t doing something important, or that we weren’t trying to build something big, and that kind of talk really– I think it can kind of poison your mindset in some ways. And so the one thing I just want to say is like dude, you should always be thinking about your business and like it doesn’t matter where the money is coming from, you can build something big and amazing. And don’t let other people’s opinion or thought process on bootstrapping affect that.

Steve: I here you there. I think it’s just RO [ph] factor of where we live and how the basic community, all my friends they are in funded start ups, so it’s actually kind of rare to see a bootstrapped guy especially one such as yourself where MFP has gone on to be a super successful company, and I think it’s just an RO factor where we live.

Albert: Yeah, it’s like you are working on this cool family business, that’s nice and it’s like, no it’s awesome.

Steve: Yeah, actually really quick last question. When did you guys know that it was going to be more than just a lifestyle business? Was that the intention in the beginning, or was it always to just kind of go big once it started getting traction?

Albert: We’ll I think the– maybe the way I will characterize is like we had big goals, but we knew that we didn’t need to be humongous for us to be happy and successful. So I would say that like we kind of went into the [inaudible] [0:49:06] like we’re not like conquering the world that–this isn’t what we want to become, this is about what we want from this. And so I think in that way maybe you could characterize it as a lifestyle business, we wanted to work on something cool that we were passionate about, and we wanted to make sure that like we can make it successful enough so we could keep doing it. And that’s how we thought about it, and unfortunately I think once we got out a mobile, things really took off and I think that’s when we started realizing well, this is like a millions and millions of people opportunity.

Steve: Okay. Cool, Albert I really appreciate your time, and I’ve learnt a lot from this interview and it’s just really nice to get an insight of someone who’s actually made it in the bootstrapped business world. So thank you for coming on.

Albert: Yeah. Thanks for having me.

Steve: So if anyone has any questions for you, do you have like a twitter handle that you use or-?

Albert: Yeah. It’s @Albertlee all one word.

Steve: Okay. Awesome, once again thanks a lot for coming on, and really happy to finally have talked to you.

Albert: Yeah. This is great, I’ll keep listening.

Steve: I’ll catch you at the next birthday party.

Albert: Take care Steve.

Steve: All right Lee.

Hope You enjoyed that interview, what I like about Albert is that he’s so down to earth and easy to talk to, and it just goes to show that you don’t need to get funding in order to produce a nine figure company, you just need to watch what you spend and focus on what matters most for your business.

For more information about this episode go to MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/episode68, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. Because when you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show very easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest gift you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

As an added incentive, I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/contest, and if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.MyWifeQuitHerJob.com for more information.

Once again I just want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend, if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. They’ve got an incredible theme store where you can choose from a wide variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need to hire a designer. And they also offer integration with AliBaba, so you can easily find products to sell online.

So bottom line, everything from design to sourcing to payment processing is all built in, and all you just have to do is populate it with your own products. And you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month absolutely free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

067: How Eric Cheng Created WetPixel The Leading Underwater Photography Community On The Web

How Eric Cheng Created Wetpixel.com The Leading Underwater Photography Community On The Web

Today I’m thrilled to have a Stanford classmate, Eric Cheng, on the podcast. Eric is an award-winning underwater photographer, aerial imager and publisher. His work has been featured in the Smithsonian’s Natural History Museum and he’s spoken internationally at events like TEDx, the Churchill Club, Good Morning America and more.

He’s also well known for being the founder of Wetpixel.com, the most popular community website dedicated to underwater photography and videography. As part of this site, he leads underwater expeditions all over the world which is pretty damn cool.

He’s also held leadership roles at Lytro, the first light field camera company and today, he’s the director of aerial imaging at DJI, a leading quad copter manufacturer.

What I like about Eric is that he has used entrepreneurship to facilitate his lifestyle as an artist. In fact, I recommend that everyone head on over EChengPhoto.com and check out some of his work!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Eric created a small niche underwater photography community
  • How documenting his experiences on the web got him to where he is today
  • Eric’s philosophy on pursuing your passions versus making a living
  • Eric’s advice on how to be successful as an artist
  • How to get your work noticed online
  • How to keep yourself afloat while pursuing your artistic endeavors
  • Why you need to realize that you are running a small business if you want to make a living with your art

Other Resources And Books

Sponsors

This episode was sponsored by Big Commerce. If you are interested in starting your own online store, then click here to get 1 month free

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners, to each us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcast where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the very beginning, and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used earlier on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information.

Now before I begin I just want to give a quick a shout out to this episode’s sponsor Bigcommerce. Now Bigcommerce is a fully hosted shopping cart platform that allows you to set up your own online store in minutes. And as most of you probably know, I teach a class on how to start a profitable online store. And Bigcommerce is actually one of the shopping carts that I highly recommend in my class. Now here is what I like about Bigcommerce, unlike other competing platforms, Bigcommerce doesn’t really nickel and dime you with every little shopping cart feature. And when you sign up, you immediately have a fully featured and extremely powerful shopping cart at your disposal.

Now there’s also an incredible theme store where you can choose from a variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t really need a designer. And they also offer integration with Alibaba which is new, so you can easily find products to sell online. Now if you are interested in starting your own online store using Bigcommerce is as about as easy as it gets. Everything from design to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products. You can literally start your online store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigkormas.com/mywifequitherjob, now on to the show.

Welcome to the, My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have a Stanford buddy of mine on the show Eric Cheng. Now if you don’t know who Eric is, he is an award winning under water photographer, aerial imager, and publisher. Now his work has been featured in the Smithsonian Natural History Museum. And he spoke at internationally at events like TEDx, the Chow Chow club, and most recently on Good Morning America.

Now he is also well known for being the founder of Wetpixel.com, the most popular community website dedicated to underwater photography and videography. Now as part of this side he leads under water expeditions all over the world which is pretty damn cool. He has also held leadership roles at Lytro the first light field Camera Company, and today he is actually the director of aerial imaging at DGI, a leading quad captor manufacturer. Now before we begin this interview, I just want everyone to just hit pause and go to echengphoto.com, that’s e-c-h-e-n-gphoto.com, and just go ahead and check out some of his work because it is breathtaking.

Now here is why I invited Eric on the show. Out of all my Stanford buddies, Eric has an incredible attitude about life. And in a nutshell, he pretty much does whatever the heck he wants to do and he uses entrepreneurship as a means to facilitate his lifestyle as an artist. Now today it is actually pretty rare to see him stand any place for long. He is often found travelling the world taking underwater photos in exotic locations, or flying quad copters over active volcanoes and he just got back from Iceland last week doing this.

So today’s episode is actually for all the artists out there in the audience, and I’m hoping that Eric’s story will inspire all of you to take a leap of faith and take a chance at lifestyle entrepreneurship. And with that welcome to the show Eric how are you doing man?

Eric: Pretty good, thanks so much for having me on the show.

Steve: Yeah, really happy to have you and it’s funny, you know we were in school, we were in undergrad together and we didn’t really hang out that much. You went into CS, I went to electrical engineering. And you took a CS job when you graduated right?

Eric: I did yeah.

Steve: Yeah, but then you decided to quit cold turkey kind of long time ago, like over decade ago right?

Eric: Yeah, it was in 2001, I think, I have to do math to go back that far. Yeah, I was at a company called [tiffany?] they were doing something that– actually I didn’t even know what they did when I joined. You know I sort of went to their company with the smartest people I could find and a lot of them were close kind of cohorts I guess at Stanford who were looking for similar things. And I worked there for a few years and really enjoyed a lot of aspects of it, but really just didn’t care what the company did. You know then it was really about, the motivation and the bigger picture view of what I was doing there. And that’s I guess a lot of what we are going to talk about today.

Steve: Yes, so actually let’s just start with that. So why did you quit and how did you get the courage to kind of pursue your own thing?

Eric: Well, I mean courage is relative. You know if you are in a tech company being paid pretty well it’s easy to have a lot of courage. At least I feel like it’s easier to have courage, but when I talk to a lot of friends who are in that situation they ask the same question because quitting is a big deal. You know and it doesn’t– we are taught sort of not to quit from when we were very young. And I ended up leaving– just because I looked around one day and realized that there were people at the company and my colleagues who seemed to actually be enjoying what they were doing in every way.

You know so what I enjoyed were little problems, little technical problems that we would solve together, and kind of the intellectual environment of being in software at a really exciting time, you know at the end of that tech gloom in the 90’s. But I just– I don’t know I thought something fundamental was missing and I was getting a lot of my creative energy out playing the cello, because you know pretty much before photography I was a cellist. And all of my creative energy and spare time went into playing chamber music and hanging out with classical musicians. And that was really missing at work you know in my primary job you know which at the time was taking out like 80 hours a week in a little start up.

I just felt like there was a huge piece missing and I would be escaping to kind of live my life and then come back to work which I also enjoyed, but something was missing. So I just really left, it was a leap of faith. You know I left and– it’s not like I just walked away one day and picked up a camera and became a photographer. You know there was a very long process involved and during that time with a few friends we started a consulting company and did– we did work on the side to fund ourselves. You know and we had health insurance, and so I would say the courage was really leaving the full time gig. But it wasn’t like I left and starved and tried to build myself up as an artist.

Steve: So you actually had a side gig, even though you were working 80 hours a week?

Eric: Well, I mean the side gig was fun, it was being a musician. And yeah, so it wasn’t like I was working as a photographer at the time. And you know anyone who has worked for a startup in Silicon Valley pretty much knows that it’s the most flexible job in the world. You know the goal is to do your work and that takes a lot of your time, most of your time. But if you need to get out for a couple of hours in the day or shop at 2pm and work through the night, that’s totally up to you.

Steve: So actually so had you been doing photography for quite a while?

Eric: I was always a hobbyist photographer, and you know so I knew how cameras worked from a technical standpoint. You know I could tell you all about the variables for exposure and you know in theory how to get a sharp well exposed picture. And I was kind of the guy who always had a camera, who would take pictures of what was around me. So you know I took pictures of my friend kind of constantly during school, but I would say that I didn’t– I wasn’t inspired to be a photographer at the time. You know I had a camera, I liked to take pictures, but I didn’t really know what I was doing with the camera. There was no kind of driving force to push me into doing it in a more serious way, and yeah.

Steve: So how did you discover underwater photography? I mean it sounds very nichy.

Eric: It is, it’s sort of yeah, it’s sort of the ultimate niche photography. I discovered it more or less on accident, but there were many factors that were pushing me in that direction kind of over the years. And the first is that I was really interested in nature and wildlife. So even during school you know at night I would watch animal planet and discovery channel. This is before reality TV, so the shows were actually still good. And yeah, and I was obsessed you know I watched everything you can imagine about every animal in every environment. Kind of between that like 11 and 12pm you know in the evening kind of while you are taking a break in between projects or something.

And so I was really interested in wildlife and I started keeping salt water fish and corals in my dorm room, kind of you know in secret because you are not really supposed to have a big fish tank in your dorm room. And you know when you keep corals; you’ll start to learn about rainecology [ph] and about the waste cycle and all the things that are necessary to keep you — to keep those animals thriving in an enclosed environment. So I became really knowledgeable about the ocean, kind of well I was just doing you know the normal sea stuff and like taking breaks to play music. And I was also sort of an amateur diver. You know I had around 20 dives or something in five years during school, I didn’t have time, I didn’t have the money to do it.

And I had a camera and so all of these things had to merge at some point, and what happened was I planned the trip to Palau, kind of during you know while I was winding down in software, and getting a little bit uneasy. And I went there with a friend and I just — I bought an underwater housing for the digital camera I had at the time, which is a Nikon cool pix 990, you know that, remember that swivel like 3.39 pixel Swivel digital camera. I took them underwater and the pictures are terrible. They are absolutely terrible. And you know I was kind of an amateur diver.

You know I have never taken a camera underwater. Advanced divers were with us and you know I was not an advanced diver at the time. But what I did was open up that world to me, and I just remembered this moment where I was under water and a school of fish swam by for 19 minutes. And we surfaced from that dive, and the dive guides who were with us on the trip just said, “We have never seen anything like that. “You know these guys had been working in that area for many-many years and they just — I mean that was a light bulb, it was this moment when I realized that the underwater world was more or less unexplored. And you could be doing it for 20 years and then go in the water one day and have something that no one had ever seen happen, right there in front of you.

And so that was really the motivation that drove me to become a photographer. I just — I started doing it as much as I could and being you know sort of methodical on the way that I’m about it, just I experimented constantly. I didn’t know that people actually did it in the real world. You know I didn’t know that there was sort of this industry around underwater imaging and it’s very small. But I just did it on my own and started publishing pictures wherever I could; I got published in a couple of magazines pretty early on. And I put everything online and very quickly ended up with a website called Webpixel, which we can talk about, and that’s sort of what kind of bolted me into that world.

Steve: Yeah, let’s talk about Webpixel. So was that just meant to be a repository of photos in the beginning?

Eric: Well, so Webpixel has actually had a long history even before I got involved. So I’m often credited as being the founder and in many ways, I’m the founder of Webpixel on the way that it exists today. But I was working, you know I was sort of going on these trips, I got hired to do satellite web publishing from a boat in Kona, and that was very painful you know to be on a satellite connection in the year 2001. Or maybe it was 2000 even, kind of Nansen [ph] web you know terrible connectivity 2400 [inaudible] [0:13:32].

Steve: Yeah, crazy okay.

Eric: And I started you know I was kind of like the technical guy. I had– I was shooting in underwater and– but I had all of this technical knowledge about digital imaging, about networking, kind of the computer stuff that was starting to become important. And I was posting about what I was doing online and I met a guy named David Bradigan who was running kind of– do you remember Steve, Digicams?

Steve: Steve, no I don’t actually.

Eric: It was before DP review there was a site in just reviewed cameras. And there was this underwater discussion forum that didn’t really fit into the site, and kind of span off into a one page kind of scrolling off into infinity website that had digital underwater imaging news. So kind of nobody was doing it at the time. And it was that community just existed for the few of us who were doing it. And we just teamed up and I rebuilt the site and put forums in as a way for all of us to communicate about it.

And I wrote articles constantly you know basically if I had to spend more than five minutes figuring something out, I would write about it and put online. And that sort of — that’s one of the major themes in my life is putting content that has taken me a while to figure out online in a way that it’s easy to find for people. And I’m really compelled to do it and I still do it even today.

Steve: Yeah, I was just looking at skypixel.org which is your latest site on aerial photography and you have all these recommendations and how to guides, and its sounds like these are just problems you experience you just write about it, right?

Eric: Yeah, yeah. That’s right. I mean some of them; some of the problems are really small and esoteric. It’s like, you know, what is this weird little connector called? If you don’t know what it’s called you can’t buy it, you know. And so it took me– if it took me 20 minutes to figure out something, I would just write about it and put it online. But the net-effective writing all the time is that I became really good at writing very quickly, and informatively and that is a skill I think everybody should develop you know, I think being able to communicate in writing online is really important.

Steve: So, in terms of just traffic then did all these articles get indexed? Like do most of the people find you through search or is it just through a community that you have built over time?

Eric: It’s definitely both. I mean, I think anyone who gets really into underwater imaging, maybe not today because so much of community has moved into social media, but certainly at that time everybody ended up finding the content because if you did a Google search you will find it, and if you made friends in the community, you know in the real world, they would all be on it already. And you know, we had people who might be from a little town somewhere, who had come up to me, you know, and if they met me in person and said just, you know, “Thank you, you are, like Webpixel is literally my community outside of work because nobody else in my town does this, and the only place I can find community is online.”

So the audience sort of found, you know, because it’s niche, they found it and it became kind of the place to talk about mostly technique and locations and how to shoot. And we started running expeditions out of it, and you know, I had a lot of places I really wanted to go, these trips became more and more involved over time because, you know we were sort of, we had done kind of like three weeks, and clearer water and started doing shark, lab shark work and whales and seal fish and each one of those has a place you go, and you know, local operator with a lot of expertise, but not necessarily kind of normal mainstream trips that might be run. And so we started organizing trips with the sole purpose of being photographically productive underwater.

Steve: Okay. And these were just members of the community that wanted to go on these trips with you, so you would organize them?

Eric: Yes, I would organize and run them, and members would join. Anyone could join really, but, you know you had to know about it and, so it’s typically kind of these same crew, you know, pull up people who would go with you on one or two trips a year. And these trips, I mean, the longest trip we run were 40 days, I mean they were…

Steve: Wow!

Eric: These are serious expeditions for people who are shooting at a very high level profession.
You know, they could have been professional imagers had they decided to do it, and some of them were. And it was really really fulfilling, you know, to go on these trips. I still some of the, but fewer than…

Steve: Sure.

Eric: I did it in, you know, when I was – when I had a lot more time. I was running six of those trips a year, and a couple of personal trips a year, maybe a couple of assignments for magazines, and then kind of running a publishing company on the side, which included a pre-magazine at the time.

Steve: Wow! That’s crazy, six trips and each one of those are like 30 to 40 days, that’s quite a long time.

Eric: Yeah. Up to, I mean some of the trips were less involved, but a lot of them ended up being, you know [laughing] for long periods of time in very remote areas, and the reason we run trips that long is that some of these places took three to four days to get to, and just because there wasn’t the local [Inaudible] [00:18:41] to just fly direct. And so, if it took, you know, if you are doing a week of travel, you can’t go for a week; you have really go for a serious amount of time.

Steve: Oh! Yeah. Sure. Yeah, so hey Eric, you know, before this interview I actually come through your, almost your entire journal. Just getting an idea of…

Eric: That is old stuff.

Steve: It is old stuff, you know, we didn’t really hang out much in school, but we share common friends which is kind of interesting, but in one of your posts, and you probably don’t even remember this, but you used to talk about how a lot of people used to ask you how you made money as an underwater photographer. Now, here is the thing, a lot of my listeners are– they are kind of hesitant about pursuing the lives that they love because they need to pay the bills, so I kind of want to kind of get your take on your passions verses the need to make money. So, when you first started out as this underwaterphotographer, how did you get by, and how did you get your name out there?

Eric: I, so, I have really– I am extremely opinionated about the right way for most people to go about what you just talked about.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Because I have seen so many people do it the wrong way, and the wrong way– it’s not really the right way to put it because, you know, there is a right way for every person, it doesn’t– they are not all going to be the same. But personally, I do not like to be struggling for money while I am pursuing something completely new, because first of all there is no guarantee of success. Most of these fields, the more you get in to these kind of esoteric photography, the lesser the market there is, and the more people potentially there are who are doing it for fun and actually paying to do it. So on these trips that I run, everybody paid to be out there, it was their vacation. And so, to expect to be paid for something that most people are paying to do, I think it’s a very bad– it’s not a good expectation. It’s not appropriate.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So, you know, this is kind of the hardest area, I think, to make money, and, you know this kind of adventure travel photography. And a lot of people go about it in a sort of round-about way. You know, they become educators, they lead trips. One of the biggest pitfalls, I think in this area is like is going into the dive industry, you know people– if you want to be an underwater photographer, people are “I’m going to go teach diving so I can be under water all the time.” But it turns out that if you go teach diving, you don’t get paid very much, and you don’t get to shoot, you are teaching diving, you are in the water training people and you know, holding people’s hands all the time.

And I just think it’s really hard to go through these industries, you know, to try to– you know, you just like, put blinders on, and like, put your head down and kind of push your way through this industry. So I like to think about ways to go around the existing industry, and you know, this is all sort of hand wavy, but you know, I mean the advice that I gave– that I have been giving to a lot of people who ask, especially young people who still have their whole lives ahead of them, you know, is to become generally educated.

Like make sure you are educated so that you have a lot of options, you know, and, I mean, for example, studying Computer science, Aeronautical engineering or Physics, or something technical, we’re not really studying Computers, you know, Computer science is really about problem solving, as are those other, you know, most technical fields, and I feel like that’s skill set let’s– if you can translate that skill set to another domain, then that you are just you are already ahead.

And so, in, you know, I think there are a lot of ways to make money out there, and you don’t have to just turn off what you used to do and start doing this new thing because it’s going to be very very painful. And so I’m a big fun of the technical industry especially, you know, web development. Some of these things you can do anywhere and make money to support this primary thing you do. And of course the risk is that you end up just making money and then you are like struggling on the side, and the [inaudible] [0:22:47] never takes off.

Steve: Yes.

Eric: And so there is definitely a trade off, and you have to take a leap at some point, and so you know, something that I recommended a lot is to develop an audience in the transition period. So, during this transition period in which you, maybe you have decided I can’t do this anymore what I’m doing for a living, you know I want to pursue this particular artistic endeavor, and I’m just going to go for it. Well, you know this is the age of internet, you can develop an audience, and I just, you know I’ve always recommended that people just publish constantly. You know, like have a goal and a routine and say every week, take what you did that week, collapse it into something presentable, you know, for this whatever your interest is, it could be, let’s say in photography let’s say its three images or one image, and write about it.

You know, write whatever you can, write a paragraph, a sentence, you know, two pages, and then share it, and develop a community online, and just do that for as long as you can. And this is essentially what I did to get into the industry. I just started writing about it and my work started to get noticed, and what happens is if you have aptitude for it, you know, if you are actually generating work that is valuable to other people, and you know this is where art is not– it doesn’t always work this way, but you’ll start getting noticed and you will start to develop commercial opportunities out of the work that you do.

Another hand, if you don’t do anything, if you just sit at home and you hold all your work and you are afraid to show it, nobody is going to notice you, unless you get really lucky. So, I think just getting your work out there, writing all the time, giving to the community at a very free way, you know, like just write about all of your challenges, there are other people who are trying to the same thing, they might be a little bit behind you, they are going to get a lot out of your journey. And the journey is really the important thing and you know I think, getting work out there like that is important. And you know, after a year, if your work hasn’t been noticed, then maybe you should be thinking about going about it another way, you know, like tweak a little bit but at least you are not kind of starting.

Steve: So let’s talk about that a little bit. Let’s say you’ve got good work, but just because you’ve got good work and you’ve put it out there, does it mean that anyone will be able to find it? So what are some ways that you could get people to actually find your work provided that it’s good?

Eric: I think the key is, I mean, there are a couple of ways I think you can do. One is to engage in a community for a long period of time, you know so nobody who just posts and then walks away actually ends up participating in the community. You know, you need to be someone that invests in a particular community. This doesn’t have to be online, this could be, you know, something local if it’s appropriate, and hold on a second, can you do that again because I need to close the door? My wife is laughing.

Steve: Yeah, go ahead, this is all edited, so don’t worry about it.

Eric: Okay hold on a second. She’s very happy, and laughs a lot on the phone. I don’t know this form of happiness.

Steve: That’s good.

Eric: She’s in the other room on a conference call. Okay, sorry about that. Can we back up to the last question?

Steve: Jeez! We were talking about how to get early traffic to your site.

Eric: All right. Okay. So we were talking about getting early traffic. Okay.

Steve: Yeah, you can just start wherever.

Eric: Yeah. Okay, okay. Yeah, so I think, I mean, my perspective is that you should engage in a particular community and actually participate in the community. So you know, you can reach out these days to basically anyone online, and if you are putting out work that is really interesting to a particular audience, people are going to re-share it. And, this might sound like, I’m putting a lot of emphasis on social network and stuff, and in some ways I am, and I think it’s certainly can’t hurt to be really involved in a community and engage in the community.

So this doesn’t mean that you post a picture and then walk away, you need to post pictures and you follow up with people who are engaging with you, and you become a notable person in that particular industry, or a knowledgeable person, you know, someone– when that person goes off and has a commercial opportunity related to say underwater photography, they might say, “Oh! Yeah! I remember this guy, he posted the screen pictures, he answered my questions, let’s go back to him and see if he’s available for work.”

Steve: Yeah. I’m just– I’m listening to everything you are saying right now, and it’s pretty much exactly how I started my blog. I– let’s see I started in 2009 and for that first year, I was just writing, and I don’t think anyone was really reading…

Eric: [Laughing] Right.

Steve: And it was only after a while something happened after the two year mark, and I started getting noticed, and then all of a sudden all these opportunities started coming in, but it was a long drawn out process where I wasn’t sure what the heck was going to happen.

Eric: Right.

Steve: How soon did Webpixel get traction or with your work that when you are posting photos online?

Eric: Webpixel, I mean, it was slow because digital cameras were not being taken seriously at the time, so you know at the time people who were interested would engage, but most people especially professionals weren’t, they weren’t considering digital as being a valid option for professional work. And in many ways I think they were right at the time, I gave a lot of talks about this stuff, this a thing that, you know any emerging industry, there only going to be a few experts in the beginning, and so they are going to call on you to come talk about what you do.

And I would go up and talk about digital imaging, and there would be, you know the old school guys in the back, I could see him sitting there with their arms crossed, and I just knew that they were going to challenge me, you know and ask questions and be upset about things. And the trick really was to not to be an ass hole back, you know the trick was to be– to talk about the potential of this, regardless of the current environment, you know. So it’s really about, I’m not trying to change anything you are doing, what I’m saying is that you should be aware that this exists, and that its moving forward very quickly and it could be really interesting.

So this is little off topic I guess, but in general I think, you know having a consistent voice when you are talking, that’s polite, professional and educational is important, which can be very– it can be challenging to stay that way, I have– I certainly have challenges in that area.

Steve: You know, so one thing that, so I’ve had a couple of people email me regarding, you know they have these photos that they want to sell, and so they kind of throw up an online store and they put their prints on there, but then no one buys. And it’s mainly because they don’t have their own voice, they don’t have a presence out there, and they don’t have a following. But in terms of just kind of making it as an artist, is there some sort of element of salesmanship? Did you ever feel like you were, you know salesman? Did you try to sell your own prints at any point and basically how did you keep afloat, you know did you try to sell your own works at the time?

Eric: I found that balance to be a difficult one to ride for me because I don’t really want to market my work you know, and that sort of I think the people that I know who are most successful as artists if they are 100% working in their art form you have to be a salesman, and you know and you have to go out and find those opportunities. And you know the trick is finding opportunities that don’t compromise your work and in photography unless you really love shooting something that’s commercials, and I certainly have friends who love the work that they do and the work happens to be commercially viable you know without much of a stretch in terms of imagination, but some people love to do things that are just not that interesting from a commercial standpoint.

Steve: Sure.

Eric: And that’s where it gets really hard and you know that’s why I talked about going around the industry a little bit. You know I think for me personally I am more fulfilled by doing what I want to do as a photographer say half time, than I would be if I struggled and if I were a photographer a 100% of the time and I had to do a lot of work I didn’t want to.

Steve: Okay, So you kept both worlds separate then?

Eric: Yeah, but the other world was publishing in the same industry and kind of expeditions and you know it was really– it was providing value for my audience in a different way than selling an image to them you know. So there are different ways to be valuable as an artist and one is in this way that is not like a drift sale here of the picture you’ve taken.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: I think I very much could have gone in that direction you know if I decided that I wanted to be a gallery artist or to be focused on stock photography or something, I could have changed the sort of work that I presented to the world, and instead of sharing stories, you know in some way that was interesting to people which might result in something which licenses you know some print sales and you know two more people signing up for the next expedition you know.

I could have just gone that route and tried to sell imagery, but I think I would have had to change the way that I shot and you know when I have done image sales. The pictures that sell are not my favorite images. They almost are never my favorite images, but they sell and so you know I might do an addition and just keep at a gallery or something. And I do this very infrequently you know, I have my work is only in very few physical locations and that’s 100% because I don’t have the time to manage that side of the business.

Steve: Okay and so it sounds like by keeping everything kind of separate in a way your art is your art, and you have the freedom to do whatever you want with it, and the way you make money it still related to your art, but it’s kind of more tangential, is that…

Eric: Yeah, I mean that just happens to be the way that I did it.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: You know I certainly have friends who have managed to be 100% artists, and you know I mean that’s almost impossible unless you are very lucky. You do have to run a business and you know I certainly know a lot of people who are photographers, but really what they are doing is running a small business, and they have to be smart about that. You know these are the guys after a one year licenses expires for a picture, you know they are on the phone with the company saying would you like to renew or would you like to take your picture down, take the picture down you know.

Steve: I see.

Eric: Most people don’t do that, they are not organized enough, they don’t have an office messenger or someone they can work with to do it, if they are not doing it themselves. A lot of artists just don’t think that way which is probably why they are artists you know and I just happen to be in the middle, you know I really think of myself as being– I’m usually considered to be an artist by technical people, and I’m considered to be a technologists by artists you know.

Steve: Actually that’s true, I’m an engineer, I consider you an artist, that’s true. So hey, let’s talk a little bit about community, so what were some of the things that you did to kind of foster this community of underwater photography or was it– did it just come naturally? Did you not even have to try that hard?

Eric: I mean I think I didn’t really have to try that hard, but only because I was producing a ton of content all the time

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So one of the things that I did for example in the industry was I went to the big industry shows, and I covered them exhaustively you know. I talked about every single product that was relevant for the particular audience, and I made relationships with the people who ran all those companies. And so I went back year after year and pretty soon everybody knew me at these conferences, and I was sort of cemented: I was in the industry without having to push my way through the industry.

Steve: I see.

Eric: You know I sort of just– I was a conduit from these companies to keep people who might be interested in their products and– but only because I was really interested in the industry. You know I was fascinated by all the gear, there was a huge shift happening in general photography between– you know from film to digital, and a lot of the established players out there were having a hard time in the transition.

The one that transitioned– everyone transitioned eventually, but you know, some transitioned earlier, and I just happen to be there as the guy who knew how to do it, and had all the technical information, but wasn’t you know shooting a 100% of the time necessarily. I wasn’t a threat you know.

Steve: Sure.

Eric: And this community is really friendly anyway, and everybody you know it’s a great, I mean underwater imagining world is fantastic you know, for the most part.

Steve: And you reviewed all these things and wrote these articles just for fun, right? Because it was something you were genuinely interested in.

Eric: I mean I think I would have done it either way, what I ended up doing was opening up advertising on the form, and it wasn’t advertising in that, that you know we didn’t– first of all there was no advertising infrastructure available at the time, so it’s not like I could use you know adsense or something from Google and just open it up. And even if I had it wouldn’t have been that useful because it turns up if you open it up for certain topics like, let’s say you write an article about photographing sharks, so the ads that come are about shark fishing you know because that’s a big industry, and people pay a lot of money to kill them or shark fins or whatever.

Steve: Which totally goes against what you believe in.

Eric: Yeah, so I felt we had a police and you know band companies in the system and so we– what worked really well is working with all of these small companies who were supporting this niche industry you know, who weren’t necessarily doing advertising anyway, but you know this was the ultimate targeted audience for those companies.

So if you go to Webpixel now and you look at the group of sponsors on the right hand side in the column, they are mostly smaller companies generating very specific tools for this audience and we also– and we kept the advertising really cheap because you know, I didn’t have the staff to, like a sales force going out looking for advertising and taking money from whoever would give it to us. You know we were very selective in who we accept as advertisers, because we didn’t want a giant player who could discount and run everyone else out of business.

Steve: Sure.

Eric: We didn’t want to necessarily support them you know explicitly on the site because that would have caused a lot of problems in the greater community. And so the advertising income at least ran he site you know, it enabled me to spend time you know technically in upgrading service like just doing whatever was required to keep the site up, hiring the coders eventually to help do the things that I didn’t have time to do. And so at least I wasn’t pouring money into running a website.

Steve: Sure. Okay and to all the artists out there who are listening, the people that want to sell their own prints and what not, what sort of advice would you give them today if they’re starting out? You already mentioned putting out content on a regular basis. You also mentioned– I don’t know if I’m saying this correctly, but don’t necessarily focus on selling your work. Find other ways to just get by why you kind of enjoy the art that you’re producing. Do you have any other sort of advice to give them?

Eric: Yeah. I think– and these are just the ways that I went about it personally, but of course there are a lot of different ways to do it. I’ve enjoyed doing some of these mainstream articles. They are usually articles that have– potentially have interesting content, but a terrible headline, like a buzz feed type headline.

Steve: I hate those.

Eric: Those headlines are terrible and I almost never click through. Unfortunately I have participated in producing the content for some of those stories, and what I found is that it’s not a particular picture that anyone wants; it’s the story around the picture that people want. So you can get a story to go viral or to be published, and you can get people to pay you for it if you actually have a story. If you went out in your backyard and took a picture of a bird, that maybe a really beautiful picture, but there is no story around it.

So the stories that I produce tend to be around some event or some series of weird things that happen that just led to a strange picture being taken. This happens a lot with sharks– people like sharks, so it’s pretty easy to get articles published. Some of these strange scripts I’ve done like volcano stuff, like volcanoes are just unusual, they look fake, they are really weird, and if you combine them with something like drones which are new and kind of– it looks like a sci-fi moment. That story is fascinating for people.

So if you do a trip like that, maybe you can piggy back on another trip, but a lot of these weird stuff is centered around access. So I think really it comes down to community, like if you don’t know– if you’re not a part of the community people don’t trust you. You are not going to have access to any of this stuff. So it’s really building your brand, your personal brand overtime and not doing things to compromise the integrity of that brand. That’s really important over time.

Steve: And then it’s a long term– so one thing I always emphasize is that it’s a long term process. You should be willing to invest at least three to five years I would say on developing your brand in order to bear the fruit later on.

Eric: Yeah, I agree. And I’ve seen some of my friends have done it really successfully. I’ve always been impressed by the people who actually go do it. Most of them I’ve found have some support network under them. They’ve saved enough for a couple of years, or they are married to someone who helps support them during that time, or there are still working and they are doing in all their spare time. Most of them have something that allows them to do– to pursue their artistic endeavors without this insane burden that would come with not being able to…

Steve: To pay the bills.

Eric: Pay your rent or something.

Steve: For sure.

Eric: On the other hand I think if you’re too comfortable, for many people it’s hard to produce interesting work. Many artists I know draw inspiration out of suffering or– you need an experience that motivates you. For me it happened to be going under water, from going to really remote places and seeing things that are really unusual. Everybody has that thing that motivates them, and it’s very rarely sitting in comfort on your backyard, by your pool or something.

Steve: That’s true. Actually that’s a good linden to your most recent project on Skypixel.org. What is SkyPixel all about, and is this your way of producing kind of like the next Webpixel for aerial photography?

Eric: Yeah. SkyPixel started in the very same way that WebPixel started in that I was figuring things out and spending a ton of time combing forums online to get some piece of information that was critical for me. I’ve just posted and it’s a Tumblr site. It’s very simple, and the goal was always to develop it into something else, something that was a community site for aerial images. And what happened was I ended up going to DJI. The aerial pursuit kind of threw me into the industry in a much larger way.

And then I talked to them about it, I think leaving the site up is fine. I’ve been posting to it constantly, but it’s very hard for me to develop it as a commercial enterprise while I’m working at DJI. So it’s a little bit of a conflict of interest there.

Steve: How did you get the position at DJI? Had you already established yourself as an authority in the aerial imaging space?

Eric: Yeah. I would say that I did establish myself as an authority, whether I actually was one at the time it’s different, because what happened was that there was an established long time hobby community doing– flying fixed wing RC aircraft, and then doing quadcopters, kind of building them from kits for many years before. I have been watching that space for a long time, but I wasn’t– I didn’t participate in the space. I was sort of a silent observer.

And then when things started becoming easier, a little bit easier I still had to build some stuff, but when it become actually feasible to put a camera in the air without spending most of your time trying to put the camera in the air, when it became a useful tool for photographers I jumped all in, and I’ve been waiting for a way to put the cameras in the air for many, many years. And so what happened was because I had come from the photography world and I was already established as a content producer, I wrote an article for Auto Photographer.

The magazines were really interested in the possibilities, and it wasn’t going to be someone from the hobby world because there are not in the photography world, and there are not necessarily out shooting interesting content. Some of them are certainly, but I became an authority only because I managed to kind of link the…

Steve: The two worlds.

Eric: That technical world and the photography world and in fact I was challenged online by it. These– in the hobby forums people would ask, “Where were you five years ago?” And I would just say, “I was in the field producing content. Where were you?” And I was very straightforward about it. I just said, “I think the intersection between our worlds is temporary and forced, and I expect for aerial imagery to move out of hobby into the mainstream as set of tools.” And hobby will be hobby. It will be there. You’ll still be tinkering, it’s great. I think the hobby world is fantastic because people test a lot of concepts there. But I think this is a much bigger thing than hobby and it will move right past and separate itself.

I would say that I was only an expert and that I was very early in putting cameras up in the air from a creative stand point. And DJI found me because I was producing interesting work, and I was of course posting about all the stuff that I was doing. And then I had a lucky introduction through the chairman of the board who is like a friends with– a friend of the family. Sort of a lot of different things pushed me in that direction. And that’s the thing I found is if you put thousands of hours into something, a lot of different forces are going to start pushing you into positions of expertise. And if you’re not putting that time in, if you want to be a photographer and you shoot one hour a week, you’re not going to make it. It’s just not going to happen, unless you get really lucky. Maybe there are people who manage to make that work.

Almost all of my spare time was spent tinkering in the garage during that time, and going out and flying all the time, developing the skill set necessary to not think technically when I’m in the field. And most of it is about overcoming the technical huddles, so that you can kind of direct your efforts creatively without struggling. And…

Steve: Right.

Eric: I think if you don’t put that time in, you can’t do it. It’s much harder.

Steve: I kind of have a selfish question for you here. You have a CS background, and it sounds like you’ve used those skills a lot over your career even though you we’re actually working at a tech firm. So my question for you is, for me right now I’m a little bit torn whether to go completely on my own, because my online endeavors have exceeded my day job. And one of the things that I’m struggling with is that if I were to leave, I wouldn’t not be able to develop hardware anymore. So do you struggle with that, with your software? And do you code anymore? Do you miss it?

Eric: Well, that’s a good question. It’s strange because I have ended up participating in a company that builds hardware. In the past I was software focused, and all about online web community. I don’t miss coding. I don’t miss it all. I think other people code really well. On the other hands, I think having the skill set has been really useful for just figuring out this, the technical parts of what I do. Because it’s just problem solving, and it’s not always straight forward. I think there have been some projects I have done that have brought me back in the coding, mostly scripting image processing stuff to allow me to build animations for example.

At Light Trail I was doing light field imaging and I what’s really in a product role there, but I did some coding on the side. I wrote a light field video player for example, because nobody else had the bandwidth to do it, and I could do it in a rough way that was the working prototype as a proof of concept. The computer science skills have been really useful for me in photography because everything is digital. Here’s a very basic example, storage is a huge nightmare, and this is something that I’m really passionate about. Storage backups, kind of maintaining the integrity of your work over many-many years is something that is beyond the scope of understating of most photographers.

Steve: Yes.

Eric: And so I feel like I get that for free, and it pisses me off. I’m very upset about it all the time because I feel like many photographers– especially if you’re going to the video world, you’re no longer the target audience for most consumer storage, but you’re not the target audience for enterprise storage, and nothing exists in the middle. And that’s kind of the space we live in. So I sort of get understanding of that for free with the technical background, and I feel sorry constantly for people who struggle with things like data. It’s not just a fun thing to have to deal with.

Steve: Yeah. Occasionally I’ll see a Facebook run pop by how you had to wait like three days for your volumes to sink up or something like that.

Eric: Yeah, yeah. There’s passion around that. I think there’s a company that I think to be in need.

Steve: Eric we’ve already been talking for quite a while, want to be respectful of your time. If anyone wants to check out your awesome work, where can they find you and where can they contact you?

Eric: Well, my main website these days is echengphoto.com. The same site you mentioned at the beginning. That’s E-C-H-E-N-G photo.com. Also if you’re interested in underwater photography, check out webpixel.com. I read about aerial imaging at skypixel.org, .com is now an aerial imaging sharing site that DJI does that I’m not really involved with, but it’s there as well. And I’m also really active on social media. I’m on Twitter as echeng. I’m on Facebook, I’m sort of everywhere.

Steve: Yeah, you are everywhere. Yes.

Eric: Yeah. I guess finally the site that I don’t share a lot, but I put a lot of my efforts into is my Vimeo site. So it’s vimeo.com/echeng. I do a lot of video work these days, it’s mostly experimental. But there are things like live broadcasts from [Inaudible] [00:50:41] and that was many-many months ago.

Steve: Yeah, yeah.

Eric: It led to things like this Good Morning America thing last week. So if you’re interested in kind of experimental use of video, that’s a good place to check out as well.

Steve: And you have your videos linked up on your sites too, right? Echeng Photo has a lot of videos on there as well, right?

Eric: Yeah, if you go to…

Steve: Yeah, okay.

Eric: If you go to echeng photo and click on video link, some of my work is there.

Steve: Okay. Well, Eric hey, it was great having you on the show, and finally I’m really happy we got a chance to connect. Thanks for coming on.

Eric: Yeah. Thanks so much for having me, and I’m easy to contact, so get in touch if you have anything you’re curious about.

Steve: Sounds good. Thanks Eric.

Eric: All right thank you.

Steve: All right. Hope you enjoyed that episode. I’ve known Eric for quite a while now and I really love his story. Basically he spent a couple of years working for the man, had an epiphany, and decide that he was going to take advantage of his life and do whatever the hell he want to do. And when I look back, he’s done some amazing things. From being a leading underwater photographer to now being the director of aerial imaging at a leading quadcopter company. It’s been awesome.

For more information about this episode go to MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/episode67, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. Because when you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show very easily, and get awesome business advice. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or to share on the web.

As an added incentive, I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to MyWifeQuitHerJob.com/contest, and if you’re interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.MyWifeQuitHerJob.com for more information.

Once again I just want to thank Bigcommerce for sponsoring this episode. Bigcommerce is one of the best shopping carts that I recommend, if you want to start your own online store without having to worry about anything technical. They’ve got an incredible theme store where you can choose from a wide variety of attractive store designs, so you don’t need to hire a designer. And they also offer integration with Ali Baba, so you can easily find products to sell online.

So bottom line, everything from design to sourcing to payment processing is all built in, and you just have to populate it with your own products. And you can literally start your store in a matter of hours. Simply go to www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, sign up and you’ll instantly receive one month free. Once again the URL is www.bigcommerce.com/mywifequitherjob, thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

066: How Tom Kulzer Started AWeber, A Top Email Marketing Provider With Over 150k Users

Tom Kulzer AWeber

I am a huge fan of AWeber, one of the best email marketing providers around. And I can say with a straight face that AWeber is responsible for probably 90% of the income for my blog. No joke. If you aren’t doing email today, then you have to get your butt in gear.

That’s why I’m thrilled to have AWeber’s founder and CEO, Tom Kulzer, on the podcast today. You’ll learn how he founded his company and the best practices for email marketing in this day and age. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Tom came up with the idea of starting Aweber
  • Why the heck his service is called Aweber
  • How Tom got his first few customers
  • How Aweber became the bloggers choice for email marketing
  • The techniques Aweber uses to reduce churn
  • The challenges involved in running a SAAS business
  • Where email marketing is headed going forward
  • How email marketing has evolved over the years
  • How to improve email deliverability
  • How to improve open rates and click through rates on email
  • Tom’s take on single versus double optin

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. Today I am thrilled to have Tom Kulzer on the show. Now if you’ve never heard of Tom, he is the founder and CEO of AWeber, the most popular email marketing provider amongst bloggers today. I personally use AWeber for my blog, my online store and my online store course, and I can confidently state that email marketing brings in probably 90% of the revenues for my blogs. Now without AWeber my blog definitely would not be where it is today, and I’m actually a huge fan of Tom and his service and I’m really ecstatic to have him on the show today.

So welcome to the show Tom. How are you doing today man?

Tom: Great, thanks for having me Steve.

Steve: I’ve always been curious actually how you got the name AWeber. What’s the back story behind that?

Tom: That’s one of my favorite stories. During kind of the beta phase and doing the development for AWeber, the service was always called the Automated Weber System. It was kind of the– you got to remember this was back in 98, and nothing like it had really existed. So we were just kind of calling it that and I was more interested in the product than necessarily coming up with a catchy name for it. And in the process I was literally sitting in the business registration office in downtown Baltimore about 10 minutes before five, before that office closed, and the process of setting up a business ID for the state in which case I needed then to be able to go off and get a tax ID for doing taxes and what not.

But the most critically it was involved in getting a merchant account. You got to have a merchant account in order to have an online business. Back in that point in time you couldn’t just go around the corner and get those sort of things. So I had to go all through all this rigmarole to get all of these set up, and I was literally sitting on the floor there going, “Automated Weber System– I can’t call a company that. That’s way too long.” We didn’t really have a domain name. I was just testing off of a random domain that I’d already had, and I was just sitting there racking my brain to come up with something short.

And I’m like, “Hey Automated Weber System– like AWeb Ass.” No, you can’t call a company AWeb Ass. That’s not good. So it became AWeber and the whole– the capitalization with the A and the W, a lot of people think that there is like a Mr. Weber somewhere.

Steve: Yeah, that’s what I thought.

Tom: There is no Mr. Weber. For me it was kind of the fact that we scooshed [ph] a couple of different words together. And frankly I think the A and the W look cooler capitalized than lower cased, and it just makes it more pronounced. So 16 years later we have AWeber, there is no Mr. Weber, there is no AWeb Ass and my parents did not disown me because I did not name a company AWeb Ass.

Steve: I probably still would have signed up even if it was AWeb Ass but…

Tom: We actually do own that domain now. We haven’t put anything there yet, but during my history classes that I teach here at the office for new team members, I always joke about that, that we need to put like a donkey or something up there.

Steve: So how did you come up with the idea of starting AWeber in the first place? What’s the back story behind that?

Tom: Sure. I was a college student at the time and I was selling wireless modems. I was like a reseller for a company that was selling wireless modems for connecting to the internet. Now this was back in late 96, early 97. And so when you say wireless modem, you don’t think like an iPhone in your pocket, think a big device that you would literally like [inaudible] [0:05:25] on the back of your laptop and connect to your laptop with a serial cable.

So no USBs, no lighting ports or anything like that, and that thing went blazing fast 92 kilo bytes per second. But at the time that was really quite remarkable and state of the art. So I was selling those on the side, going to computer shows and that sort of thing to sell this hardware and then the usage package of it. I was working with a bunch of other folks who were also reselling that, at that same product around the country. And I developed a website basically where I could put whoever sales information on the bottom of it and they could– they have their own site then to kind of represent and this little thing that I was running on the side.

And over a period of time they had these contact forms on the side where people could enquire and I saw a lot of people enquiring. And I touched base with the guys who were running those sites and it’s like, “So did you follow up with anybody? Are you making any sales, there was a lot of that. A guy– yeah, I sent an email or two where I tried to call him and they didn’t really get back to me, so I dropped them. He’s like, “No, you got to send more than like one or two messages. Just send out a whole sequence of messages. Here, I’ll send you the sequence that I am sending the people.”

And one thing led to another and I got tired of people telling me that they just– they’d only sent one or two because people didn’t respond. So I basically just automated it and I essentially created the first version of AWeber that wasn’t yet AWeber where it had sequence of seven follow up messages that went out over a period of about two months, to people that had enquired about that wireless model products. Over time the number of sales that those people started generating it increased dramatically and they were spending a whole lot less time manually following up with people.

So one thing led to the other, I ended up leaving that company that was selling the modems to focus on school. That’s kind of important.

Steve: To an Asian guy, it is very important. But go on, sorry.

Tom: A lot of those people that I was working with were like, “Hey can I get this automated follow up thing for this other company that I’m working with now?” I was like, “It doesn’t really exist,” and there was no other product on the market that existed like that where you can set up a sequence of emails to go out over a period of time. So one thing led to the other, I was busting tables at an olive garden and decided, “Hey, maybe this is a good idea to make some money on the side.”

So I figured out how to basically create a generic software to do what we do, create a log in, get a merchant account, sit in a downtown business office and get a new tax ID, all that jazz that’s involved in starting a business and making it legit there, and set that all up. Within the first couple of months we had several hundred customers and away we went. So I ended up taking a semester off from school to see where things went, and 16 years later I haven’t gone back.

Steve: Wow! So you ended not finishing school and just pursued AWeber full time.

Tom: Yep, exactly. I was a mechanical engineering major, switched to finance at the end of my first year, then I dropped out in my second year.

Steve: So are you technical guy? Are you coder?

Tom: I wrote all of the initial code. I have no formal training, I do not write code these days, but I can definitely look a code. I sit with most of our engineers on a daily basis, so it’s definitely the part of the business that is most fascinating to me is the building products and solving problems, connecting people with problems and using software to solve those problems. That’s the part that really fascinates me and keeps my interest.

Steve: So basically you kind of validate your idea early on with your other business. So you kind of knew going into this that it was going to work and you probably already had a couple of customers just at launch. Is that kind of accurate?

Tom: Yeah, absolutely. We had a thousand or two like beta testers and folks that were using the software already as I kind of developed and added on to it during the course of developing and probably the nine months or so, between the time when I said, “Hey, this is an idea I’d like to turn into something to make some money,” to the time when it kind of like launched, and it was open to general public where they could come and sign up. And it’s funny like when we– and I always say it was really friendly bunch, it was me, myself and I for a year and half or so before I hired anybody else.

But when I launched the site the very first time, it’s like I mentioned that merchant account. I didn’t actually have the merchant account approval setup, I had a secure gateway and I was able to collect credit cards, but I wasn’t able to actually process them. So it’s very much what you hear about today with the MVP product, minimally viable product. Get something out the door. I had no means of actually charging anyone at that point. So I stressed heavily to– that you could send us a check payment for your first year of service and that way it would be heavily discounted. But I also took those credit cards online.

So it wasn’t until probably about a month and a half later when I could actually charge those credit cards, where I ended up backing charge people for their first month of service. And surprising very few of the credit cards that were given at the time actually declined or were invalid in any way. So it was a nice way to be able to get out the door whereas I might I’ve otherwise had to wait another month or two for a merchant account to come through.

Steve: It’s really comforting to hear stories like this because a lot of people think when they start their businesses they have everything together right from the start. And it sounds like you just did the bare minimum to keep going, and then get the idea tested to the point where you were willing to invest a lot of money into it.

Tom: Sure, absolutely. It really comes down to– you have to get something out there because until you get something out there you have no validation in the market, and the sooner you can get it out there, the sooner you can avoid costly mistakes and time spent developing something that nobody has an interest in, and nobody is actually going to pay you for. I had people clambering right away to pay me to do this before I ever had an actual product to do it. So it was a matter of find a need in where people are looking to solve a problem there, and where they are willing to pay to solve that problem and kind of go from there.

Steve: How much did you end up investing early on into your business?

Tom: I ran my Penn State credit card right up to its limit. It was everything that we’ve done over the time. I was a college student at the time, so I didn’t have a crazy credit limit or anything. Everything that we’ve done over the years has been all organic growth. We’ve never taken any outside investment.

Steve: Awesome. So let’s talk about some of these early customers. Now how did you get the first 100 you mentioned?

Tom: Sure, I was– up to that point I was really involved in a number of online forums and discussion forums and what not about entrepreneurship. It was always like a passion of mine to learn more about that, like the whole business process just fascinated me: how you start a business, how you run a business, how you grow a business, all those sort of things. So I was involved in a number of online business forums exchanging tips and little tit bits on things that I had discovered: what worked and what didn’t work, etcetera. So when– and that was all around kind of the marketing of the wireless hardware product that I was representing then. So when I initially launched AWeber it just became– hey, I’ve got this new tool. We’ve talked about this sort of problem a number of times; I have this solution to solve it.

And it really became a word of mouth thing from there. I had an affiliate program, almost right from the start. It was really early that we had an affiliate program for having resellers and getting that word of mouth out there, but it really came down to– I solved the core problems for quite a few people. And it was just a word of mouth thing because there was nothing else out there like it at the time it really existed.

Steve: Just curious, did you actually have like a landing page and started collecting email addresses?

Tom: There was definitely an opt-in form on the homepage. At the time I wouldn’t say that it was like a landing page, specifically like you are trying to– it wasn’t like what you would call a [sweep] page or anything like that today where you had to enter an email in order to get anything further. It was here learn more, see a demo. I always kind of set it up as like a demo to see how things work and it was literally– you were being demoed on the product itself.

Steve: Yeah exactly, it’s kind of funny. So what were some of the early challenges with some of the first 100 customers? I imagine there was a lot of back and forth and debugging going on.

Tom: It was kind of a constant evolution of– of course everybody from a software product perspective, it’s always a fine line of balancing future requests with problems, and so forth that people are reporting. One of the biggest things and I think one of the biggest mistakes is have somebody come to you and say, “Hey, I want XYZ feature.” And you run off and start writing code to implement XYZ feature. I think the biggest and the most important step of all that is I don’t really care what features a customer is requesting.

I want to understand the problem that they are trying to solve with those features because a feature that a customer might suggest is not necessarily the best way to go about solving the problem, it’s just the one that they’ve thought of themselves. So I want to understand the problem so that I can understand all of the problems that are kind of about their need or system and how to best solve a bunch of those problems at the same time rather than a piece meal feature, feature, feature, feature, feature, feature kind of thing whereas eventually you end up with so many features that you solve so many different problems as– you actually solve no one’s problem because no one can figure out how to use it. So it’s a fine line, it’s a real balance to be able to…

Steve: And you were a one man show early on too with 100 customers, right?

Tom: Yeah. We had– I am trying to think. There were almost 2000 customers before I hired anybody. So yeah, it was a friendly branch. I didn’t sleep a whole lot– it’s like– folks would be like, it’s like it must be nice to be able to just like disappear from the business for a week or so kind of thing here and there. It’s like, yeah I do, but it’s like I put in my time. It’s like there were two or three years where literally like there wasn’t a whole lot of sleeping going on, let alone any hint of any sort of like day off or vacation kind of thing.

Steve: Yeah, for sure.

Tom: When you have a business like that it’s all consuming. Weekends don’t exist, night times don’t exit. And 24/7, if I wasn’t eating or sleeping the very little time that I took besides [Inaudible] [00:16:57] was anyway an active cyclist at the time. So if I wasn’t out riding and getting some exercise, I was usually planted in front of the computer working.

Steve: So I actually started blogging maybe in the end of 98 or early 99– actually sorry, 2000. And everywhere I went, everyone constantly recommended AWeber. So I am just kind of curious how you kind of built up that name share among– especially the blogging community. Like what was the process? How did you get the word out about AWeber early on?

Tom: I wish I can say that it was a more conscious effort than it actually was. I think I spent probably more time just trying to do really well by the customers that we had. Then a lot of that mindshare that you get from a market standpoint just comes from having really happy customers. You are looking at your things like MPS or net promoter scores and so forth. The more promoters that you can build around your product and around your company, the better you are going to be off. You wanted out ways with detractors and they are out there.

No matter how awesome you maybe you are always going to have detractors and over time you build that detractor base. At the same time you want to be making sure that you are building a promoter base, and hopefully those things will always be greater than any number of detractors you could have. So it’s really– do really well by your customers, always deliver a massive amount of value in comparison to whatever fee you maybe charging. It’s like there’s a– I always look at it from the standpoint, if I’m going to ask for a dollar from a customer I want to make sure I am delivering at least $100 in value to any particular customer that I am asking for that.

And then don’t be shy about asking for that either. It brings this full circle relationship where you are more than happy to help out your customers in a bend over and make that experience a really great one for each and every customer that you have.

Steve: Interesting. So your growth was primarily via word of mouth. Were you running any ads, paper click ads or any sort of search engines optimization for your site or anything along those lines?

Tom: We’ve always had our blogs. I have always– for the longest time, we never had anyone on staff that was considered as sales role. Everybody– they had a sales role from a title perspective. In my world everyone is sales whether it’s our customer solutions team, whether it’s our engineering team, whether it’s our product team or marketing team etcetera. We all do our jobs to create a remarkable experience for our customers.

We of course have PPC campaigns out there for ad words, and other sites, we have a blog for content placement and so forth. We write a lot of articles for other post blogs, we speak a lot at conferences. It’s just– one thing kind of feeds the other. The overwhelming majority of our customers come from word of mouth. Even after spending hundreds of thousands of dollars a month on advertising, the bulk of our customers still come from word of mouth, as well as our affiliate program has always done really well. And I look at that as a general extension of word of mouth. You’re not going to get somebody to personally refer to you to other people just based off of monetary incentive. You also have to be awesome, so that kind of goes along with it.

Steve: Yeah, the affiliate program is actually one of the more attractive ones in the industry, and you mentioned that you started that early on, were you getting a lot of affiliates early on in your product cycle?

Tom: Yeah absolutely it was really…

Steve: Okay.

Tom: Something where– I never really pushed the affiliate program directly. It’s always available on the site. It’s never really something that we like– we don’t place ads to try to find new affiliates. I always look at it as– excuse me. I always look at it from the perspective of, if we make a happy customer, three to four months into that customer relationship, I should introduce him to the fact that we also have this affiliate program, and not only can they continue to hopefully say good things about us to their network, but we’ll actually pay you for that as well. And it just kind of helps up the incentive for somebody to do that, and it’s really worked really well for us over the years.

Steve: And then can we talk a little bit about today. There’s just tons of email marketing providers today. So what are some of the challenges of running a SAS [ph] business among all the competition that’s available out there?

Tom: Sure. There’s always– in any good market, there’s going to be, where there’s opportunity, there’s going to be a lot of bad folks that flood in to fill that market. I think there’s a variety of ways to approach it. I always look at it– it’s funny. I actually said this to one of our product manager earlier today that at any given time in the world there’s probably ten people that have the same idea. And who is going to be successful with that idea frequently comes down to who executes on that idea and that vision first. So being able to get out there and actually execute.

There’s a million and one people that say they have a business idea, and that they want to get started with this business. And they’re making all these plans and doing this, that, and the other thing. It really comes down to like, “Okay you’ve got this idea. What the hell are you actually doing to get it out there in the world?” Because until the world actually knows about, it’s not doing anyone any good, it’s not creating any value for anybody and you’re just doing– you’re kind of wasting breath just talking about it. It’s like, “Get out there, execute and put something out there in the world.” You may need to iterate on it to make it better, but you got to get it out there in the world.

From our perspective, at this point once you kind of are in a more mature market where there’s a number of more established players that have a ground base of customers as well as kind of ground full of what the market expects in a certain product, you can’t just enter that market with something that just sends emails, you have to have a fully thought out product in order to enter it competitively, unless you have some totally different take on them. One of the biggest ways that we have really kind of differentiated ourselves over the years is kind of just what I spoke about with not having someone specifically with a sales title. We’ve always looked at marketing and sales as education.

Most small businesses these days understand that they should be doing some element of email marketing and communicating with their prospects, communicating with the customers and so forth. It comes down to how they go about doing that. And it’s that educational process that goes about doing that. And that’s why we spend so much time at conferences speaking about the subject. Why we spend so much time and energy and money frankly creating educational resources on our blogs, PDFs and so forth, and webinars, all that kind of stuff that goes along to educating people, because we can have the best tool in the world, but if people don’t know how to use and don’t know how use in their business specifically, it’s not going to do anyone any good, and they’re not going to any value out of it.

Steve: Okay.

Tom: So we’ve really approached that sales process and that differentiation process from a marketing education stand point as well as then going back to support. I don’t know if you’ve ever had the opportunity to talk with anyone here, but like you can actually call us seven days a week and get somebody live on the other end of the line to be able help, whether that’s via the phone, live chat or email, we’re here to help people and actually solve the problems that somebody might have specifically with their business, and not just with our product at large. And now we can….

Steve: Yeah, I have a couple comments on that. I’ve actually strayed from AWeber in the past, forgive me. But I’ve always come back…

Tom: Interview over. We’re done.

Steve: Yeah, I know, see you. But I’ve always come back because I just like the way the autoresponders are setup. And I like the fact that I can just get someone on the phone. There’s other competing providers that offer only email support and it’s just frustrating as hell when something goes down. So…

Tom: Sure.

Steve: Yeah that’s why I keep coming back to you guys.

Tom: Sure. Thanks a lot. I appreciate that.

Steve: Yeah. So let’s talk a little bit about just email marketing in general. So first of all where do you think email marketing is going? And how is it going to evolve going forward in the coming years?

Tom: Sure. Well, it’s– email marketing in 98 looked nothing like email marketing in 2000, looked nothing like email marketing in 2005, 2010 or 2015. It’s a constant evolution. I think the biggest things that are weighted these days is everybody talks about spam and getting to the inbox and these sort of things. Most of that comes down to individual senders and their overall reputation. And when I talk about reputation of a sender, I’m looking at things like your overall engagement with your subscribers.

So engagement can mean somebody opening a message, can mean someone clicking on a link in a message, can mean someone moving it to a folder in their Gmail or whatever other email client that they happen to be using, it can mean replying to that message, it can mean forwarding that message, anything that you’re doing to really engage with that email and interact with that email in some way that gives signals to the ISP that, “Yes I actually did want this message.”

The higher the percentage of your subscriber base that’s engaging with your messages, the higher your overall inbox delivery is going to be there. We’ve seen a continued evolution of that over the last five years or so where initially a lot of base spam filtering and what not was based on just the content of your message, and what words and such appeared in your message. And that’s really very rarely done these days. It’s more about the overall engagement of your messages and how your subscriber base is actually interacting with it.

The days of having a super large mailing list were only like a fraction of a tenth of a percent of people actually click on anything are really gone. You want be kind of holding in on those people that are most interested in what you’re doing and really kind of pruning your list, and getting rid of the people that have shown over time are none engaging with what it is that you’re sending there. So…

Steve: So let me ask you a question. Let’s say have this pretty large list and a bunch of them, they don’t open, but they don’t complain either. The fact that they’re getting the emails and not opening it, is that reducing the delivery rate that will make it in their inbox?

Tom: Over time yes, absolutely. So in much the same way like how in Google you can go and search for something, and you can type in a keyword and search for something and you’re going to see one set of results. I can go to Google and type in the exact same results or the exact same keyword and see totally different results. And that’s all based on the context of how I’ve interacted with Google over time. Gmail and other ISP providers are using the same kind of analytics and the same kind of data to be able to classify a message. So that’s why it’s often times one of those things where somebody will say like, “Well my messages are going to the spam folder.” And it’s like, “Okay. What address are they going to the spam folder on?” It’s like, “Okay.”

You’re seeing those going to a spam folder on Gmail. I can clearly see you’re getting lots of opens and clicks from Gmail and the spam folder. So the one thing that– one email going there, does not mean all of your emails are going there. And then you dig a little deeper and you go, “Oh, this is your test mailbox.” And when you get messages to this mailbox, all you do is delete them right away, or “What are you doing over time?” Overtime you’re training Gmail to know that you get this particular email from this particular sender, you delete it. That overtime is telling them– it doesn’t take a rocket scientist to kind of figure out that you probably don’t want that email.

So what are they going to do with that overtime? They’re probably going to start delivering it to your spam folder. And it makes sense that that be where you go, if all you’re looking at is the context clues of how you’re interacting with that message.

Steve: Okay.

Tom: So it’s really important to kind of think, kind of big picture about how somebody is delivering to a list. And overtime yeah. If you have somebody that’s on your list that hasn’t opened or clicked on anything, one I’d question whether or not you’re even getting to their inbox anymore because of what they have trained their particular ISP to interact with those messages. And that’s why you want be pruning that, because eventually, if you have too high of a percentage, eventually they just figure like, “Well 80% of the people that get messages from this guys just delete them right away. So we’re just going to stick the other 20% that are still getting delivered to the inbox, in the spam folder, because in all likelihood most people probably don’t want these.”

It’s a fine line and they’ve don’t publish those matrix for obvious reasons. So it’s just one of those things where you want to always make sure that you’re really holding in and targeting those people specifically that are engaging with your messages. And if people are no longer engaging with them, get rid of them because they’re not helping you in any way, and they’re not going to magically come back. And we’ve done many split tests where we segmented either our messages or our customers’ messages, where we’ve done tests on those. We segmented them off and you’ll get somebody that’s– let’s say somebody has 10,000 subscribers on their lists. And they’ll segment off like 8000 of those subscribers that haven’t clicked or opened anything in a year.

You always get the one person that– the multiple people on a blog post when you talk about this they go, “Oh well. They may not be interested now, but they’ll be interested in six months from now.” You can split them off and mail to those two different distinct segments for six or 12 months, and see like the percentage of people that actually turnaround from that 8,000 person list that was unengaged, and actually become engaged again is so infinitesimally small, it’s completely noise.

Steve: Okay.

Tom: That removing them affords you the ability to be more hyper focused on the people that are actually engaging with your campaigns. Think about the last time that you got something in your inbox and you ignored it for 12 months. Do you suddenly start reengaging with them later? Like no, you probably are annoyed 12 months later that they’re still sending you messages and they haven’t gotten the clue that you don’t like them anymore.

Steve: Yeah. That’s totally true. So do you guys do anything on your end, in terms of deliverability if you find that someone is not getting a lot of opens on their account?

Tom: Sure for every bit of repetition and engagement matrix that ISPs are doing, we also do that. It’s how we surface customers that are doing bad things from a [blinded] abuse perspective and it’s also how we surface customers that are just not following best practices and could use some additional education. So yeah, we rank in and sift and sort all of our customers based on their overall matrix and engagement that they have with their subscriber bases.

Steve: Yeah, because one thing I’ve been always curious about is, all it takes is a couple of bad seeds to kind of affect the overall deliverability of the service, right?

Tom: Sure.

Steve: Okay.

Tom: It can. When you’ve got a hundred plus thousand customers, it takes quite a few seeds but you have to be ever vigilant about those things, and making sure that they stay off your network, because it doesn’t take a whole lot to do damage in the eyes of an ISP, so you want to be hyper vigilant for that. We have really good automated processes, we have a whole reputation engine that’s, like I mentioned, it kinds of sifts and sorts our customers, and bubbles up those that are doing bad things, so that we can take action either on a manual basis or on an automated basis, which does happen.

Steve: Okay.

Tom: So…

Steve: Let’s, since you’re the expert, talk about some best practices here. How do you improve your open and click through rates typically for your emails?

Tom: That is wide open, isn’t it?

Steve: Let’s assume that people actually were interested in what you had to say at one point.

Tom: Sure. I think that– in starting at the very basic, go back to your opt in page. It comes down to are you setting expectations? So when I go to your opt in page, I should know both, what I’m getting from a content perspective, like what kind of value am I getting for signing up for this? And then how frequently are you going to send it? Because if I go to your– let’s say I go to your blog and I sign up and I say like, “I’m going to sign up for this.” And most reasonable people would expect an update maybe once a week, or maybe once a month, somewhere in that range.

But if I sign up for your mailing list and then all of a sudden I start getting like three emails a day or even an email every day, after like four, five days of that, I’ll probably going to be pretty annoyed unless you’re delivering like remarkable value in every single one of those emails. It kind of comes down to that signal to noise ratio. And in which case you haven’t really properly set my expectations for how frequently I’m going to receive that. And thus I’m much more likely to actually complain every time by not having those expectations set. Excuse me.

Steve: So let’s talk about frequency for a little bit because I know some people send once a week, some people send once a month, some people send once a day. And so are there any kind of guidelines or is it just a matter of setting expectations?

Tom: The biggest part of that is set expectations. If you want mail four, five times a day, I say that’s perfectly fine, but you better tell people upfront that you’re going to send them five times a day. And it’s so funny I have this conversation on a really regular basis with people. It’s like, “Oh I can’t figure out why I’m getting such a high complaint rate” or “why people unsubscribe after like the first four, five days.” And I’m like, “How many emails are you sending?” They’re like, “Oh we only send ten emails in the first four days.” You send ten emails on first four days? Like what are you sending?

I go to their opt in page and it’s like there’s no hint of any sort of expectations being set there, or worse yet they frequently say like, “Sign up to get monthly updates.” And I go, “Your opt in page says you’re going to send them monthly updates, and you’re sending them like five months worth of updates in the first three days. Like what’s up with that?” And they’re like, “Oh, well we haven’t got around to changing that.” It’s like, “Well people are getting around to unsubscribing, so the sooner you can get around to changing that probably the better.”

So there’s no real like– I wouldn’t say there’s a guideline to how frequently to send. I would say generally in this day and age with mobile phones and people reading things on the go, shorter is usually better when it comes to the content that you’re delivering. So if you have a lot of valuable content to deliver, delivering it in smaller bytes more frequently is probably the better way to go. Make sure that there’s– when you’re sending something out that there are some reason that you’re sending it out.

One of my– and it was funny. I was just talking about this with one of our new education marketing folks a couple of weeks ago. We had this blog post, did it probably three, four years ago where it was just pictures like some stock photo of a group of people. It was started out with like a group ten people, and then it was a group of 50 people, and a group of 100, and then 1000, and then 10,000, and then a 100,000, like what those looked like. So it was like a small concert and then a big conference, and then a giant football game or something like that, like a super bowl game where you see the size of the crowds and you estimate the capacity of an actual stadium and you put actual numbers on top of those.

You’ll hear numbers especially in the blog world of like, “Oh I have 10,000 subscribers” or “I have 50,000 subscribers, I have 100,000 subscribers or 500,000 subscribers.” The number of people that have more than even 1000 subscribers out there is so small, like as a percentage of overall businesses that are out there.

Steve: Really? Okay.

Tom: It’s kind of ridiculous that– it’s so funny too because I frequent a number of forums where people talk about how many subscribers they have. And it’s like, they’ve got AWeber accounts. I’ll just go and look and it’s like, “You just said that you had 100,000 subscribers, and I know in your account that you have 4,000 subscribers, did you”– so take…

Steve: Shoot! What did I tell you man? I forgot.

Tom: I didn’t go look but don’t, I think, don’t take people and what they’re saying as a basis. Look at your market and the number of people that are in your market. If you’re a mainstream kind of yoga studio, like how big is that market for that particular yoga studio. They might have like a 100 customers that visit them regularly, 200 on the upper hand. So they might have like 500 or 600 people on a prospect list. Those are reasonable numbers for a brick and motor business like that that’s interacting with people in the flesh.

Bloggers have a bigger sphere of influence, because they are just reaching so much, so many more people, but when you look at the overall traffic volume of a particular blog and you know you look at somebody the number of twitter followers and the number of Facebook follower that they have, you can generally get the numbers of email subscribers then tend to correlate fairly closely as a percentage overall, and so you can kind of get an idea when somebody is feeding you a line, feeding you a total line of BS there so. You know don’t take people for what they are often saying you know, you really have to look at what your actual list is and how you are engaging with it but– So we are way off on a tangent down, I forgot where we even started.

Steve: It’s okay I actually was– another question just popped into my mind just now and I was going to ask what your take was on single versus double opt in. When do you use that?

Tom: Sure, I would always use confirmed opt-in, so many people in the market often call it double opt-in, folks in the actual mailing email marketing industry and you know the ISP industry look at it as confirmed opt-in and what you basically do is you are confirming that an email address that is entered in your form has actually been the one that requested it. So you run a blog, I know you have comments on your blog, you know give me an idea just off the top of your head like how many spam comments do you get on the bottom of your blog on a daily or a weekly basis? Probably quite a few I would imagine.

Steve: Yeah, quite a few, but now so many ever since I started using different plug-ins, but yeah, it used to be out of hand completely.

Steve: So you are doing a lot to be able to get rid of a lot of that, the spam comments that are coming in through that, so looking at this from a holistic big picture perspective you put an opt-in form on a website. An opt-in form looks just like a blog comment form. It looks just like any number of forms that lots of bought spam and so forth go around the web randomly filtering out with the email addresses and names and little like the you know the names like Viagra, the names like Louis Vuitton shoes and such websites and those sort of things.

Like those boughts [ph] all they tend to submit your opt-in forms as well, and for everyone one of the invalid addresses that they ask, they attempt to add there, they also add email addresses that are owned by real people. And those real people are real people that didn’t ever hear of your website, have never requested anything from your website, and when you are not using that confirmed opt-in process those addresses then end up on your mailing list, and you start emailing them. And people make all kinds of arguments about why that is not spam but at the end to the day that’s spam.

Any email that you send that was not requested by somebody else is spam. Even in this day and age the definition of spam has really evolved over time that it’s not just email that you didn’t request, it’s email that you no longer want anymore. So somebody might have requested it at one point, but they don’t want it anymore it’s now spam in their eyes and they will usually call it that.

Steve: So here I what is funny Tom, so I recently switched to single opt-in because I found that 50% of my confirmed messages weren’t getting hit, and I found that overall the engagement didn’t really suffer and I was getting a lot more subs as a result and it turn that you guys do a really good job of filtering out some of those spam email addresses, so that’s why I asked you the question.

Tom: If you are only getting a 50% confirmed opt-in rate, we got other things to talk about so.

Steve: Okay, maybe after this podcast is over.

Tom: Typically you see anywhere from 70 to 80% of folks do a confirmed opt-in, the you know other things that you know that lead to that being lower either– a number of different things can lead to that being lower, but it could– right now, our spam detection algorithms that we look for in boughts, over 25% of all opt-in form submissions are box spam. So when you are using single opt-in the protection layer that you have there against people doing bad things or boughts doing bad things and really harming your mailing list can cause some serious issues over time.

And you may not have seen it yet, but I would really-really strongly recommend against using single opt-in, so it’s generally a really bad way to go unless that page is protected, and the only people that can possibly get to it are real people meaning like you can always after like you know shopping cart check out, or it’s after you know on a part of a landing page that you are only mailing to and it’s not generally accessible to the web from spiders and that sort of thing so.

Steve: Interesting, interesting. Yeah, maybe I’ll have you take a look at my account at some point or have someone over there look at it.

Tom: Yeah, absolutely.

Steve: But it’s been good so far and I prune every month, so practically and so yeah.

Tom: So who are you pruning?

Steve: I prune people who haven’t opened in the last couple of months who joined after certain amount of time, a certain period.

Tom: Okay, you are kind of doing it at the — yeah you are doing it at the– you are getting rid of a lot of those, but I would, you are probably still ending up with a lot of addresses on there that shouldn’t be there, but you are by far the not the norm as far as people that would prune that regular and that liberally so.

Steve: It’s because you know, I’m getting charged for them so you know.

Tom: It’s interesting because people often you know ask us about that and it’s like you know I recommend and everybody here at AWeber recommend using confirmed opt-in, and you would be hard pressed to find anybody in the email marketing industry that doesn’t recommend using confirmed opt-in. And it’s like completely cut, they always say well I don’t want to use it because it artificially limits how big my subscriber base can be, and it’s like if I was looking at this purely from a business perspective I’d say hell yeah use single opt-in and get as many subscribers on there as you possibly can, because at the end of the day you pay us based on the number of subscribers that are on the mailing list, and they are like the two things are at odds with one another.

It’s like on one hand I’m telling you to keep your mailing list to only the people that actually really want your mail, and on the other hand like you know that is artificially constraining the revenue that we could be generating from our customers overall. And it really kind of comes back you know, you can have that short term perspective of looking at the email ecosystem and saying like yeah, out of all those addressee you want, but in the long run all you need up doing is harming the overall email ecosystem and mailing to addressees that didn’t actually request it. And it just– in the long term it generally will cause more problems than it’s actually solving. So it’s just– it’s one thing that I would caution you to reconsider, and to take a bigger longer term picture of it.

Steve: So here is what is interesting Tom, I come from ecommerce world, that’s actually kind of how I started out, I didn’t even here about double opt-in till I stated blogging because most people on ecommerce, it’s all single opt-in and so that’s where I kind of got you know a little confused.

Tom: They are also getting those from topic cart check out typically where there has already been a sales transaction. Usually that is the case, we just-

Steve: It goes both ways but yeah.

Tom: Which is very different than a general like somebody happens to drive by and enter an email into a form. You know you’ve had to whip out a credit card and you’ve got, you’ve given me your address and all those sort of things, and there is business relationship and what not there. From a single opt-in, confirmed opt-in stand point that is totally different in my view, but if you’re just dumping that form on the front page of your website and asking for opt-ins or something, there should be confirmed opt-in.

Steve: Okay, cool. So Tom hey, we’ve been chatting for quite a while, and I just wanted to thank you for coming to the show. In case anyone has any questions, where can they get access to you? Do you have a twitter handle that you use or?

Tom: Sure, I’m on twitter @Tkulzer, K-U-L-Z-E-R, you can also find a whole bunch of my info on– I just have like it’s kind of embarrassing actually, but I have a personal site at Tomkulzer.com, and I’m also really hard to find here at AWeber at Tom@aweber.com, so yeah, so I’m not shy about giving up my email address and you know I only ask that if you generally have a like a question that our front line solutions team can handle, please try to ask them there first, I can’t become the sole support person for 100,000 people, so-

Steve: Absolutely.

Tom: That doesn’t work, if there is ever an issue that needs escalating you are not able to get response to you know free to drop me a line, I’m am more than happy to reply, so to get something to get an issue sorted out so we have…

Steve: And you know I use AWeber and I’ve used it for probably five years, maybe six years now. I’ve strayed, and I’ve always come back, and I think your support is top notch and whenever there is a problem I seem to always get the answer right way, and that’s why I am sticking with you guys here on out. No more straying.

Tom: Sure, I appreciate it. You know I always look at that as you know it give you context for what else is out in the market place, and I feel that is important for people to do it. You know I want folks to know what’s out there and to have tried it and to realize what the differentiators are, and you know often can’t tell that without having given them a shot. So you know I always hope that everyone comes back and that’s awesome to hear, and I really appreciate your business over the such a long period of time.

Hope to continue to earn that going forward, and I think from a business perspective that’s always really important to realize, because it’s like you know you can earn a customer, but you have to keep earning that customer every single day, so you can’t take that relationship for granted.

Steve: Absolutely, hey Tom thanks a lot for coming to the those man, it’s great talking to you.

Tom: I appreciate it, thanks for having me on Steve.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode, I am a huge fan of AWeber, and I can say with a straight face that AWeber is responsible for probably 90% of the income from my blog no joke, and if you aren’t doing email today, then you really have to get your but in gear. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode66.

And if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review, because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud but it helps keep my podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month, for more information about this contest go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

065: How To Create An Email AutoResponder That Converts With Austin Brawner And Chad Vanags

Austin Brawner Chad Vanags

I met Austin Brawner and Chad Vanags at the Ecommerce Fuel conference and I was really impressed with their ecommerce knowledge. They have a lot of hands on experience with running email campaigns for medium to large shops and they are very open about sharing their knowledge.

Austin and Chad also run an ecommerce blog at EcommerceInfluence.com and right now they are offering a free email autoresponder bootcamp which I highly recommend that you check out.

Click here to check out Austin and Chad’s free email autoresponder bootcamp.

Enjoy the show!

What You’ll Learn

  • The different types of autoresponders you should have for your online store
  • Why you absolutely need to segment your email list
  • What tools to use to do this
  • How to create a loyalty program for your best customers
  • How to create a high converting abandoned cart sequence
  • How to structure a post purchase email sequence

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’ve got two people with me on the show, Austin Brander and Chad Benix. Now I met both of these guys at the ecommerce fuel live conference in Austin Texas last year and they actually both really made an impression on me. So what they do is they create behavior based triggered email marketing campaigns for ecommerce, and if you don’t know what that means we are going to get into that today in great depth.

Now besides being cool guys, they both run ecommerceinfluence.com where they help other ecommerce stores improve their sales, they also run an awesome podcast that you should all check out called Ecommerce Influence as well, and I’ve actually had the pleasure of being a guest in the past on that show and it’s definitely one that you should check out. Now what’s fun about Austin and Chad is that they’ve helped so many different ecommerce companies in so many different ways, but today what we are going to do is we are going to focus kind of on the market personalization aspect of helping business and basically they had to tell the shopping experience via email differently based on the individual and what’s sort of actions they actually take on your website. And with that intro welcome to show Austin and Chad. How are you doing guys?

Austin: Hey great Steve, thanks for having us and we are pumped.

Chad: Yes super stoked to be here.

Austin: It’s been a little while since we hang out in Texas.

Steve: It has and I imagine we will see each other again this year at the conference again, you guys will be there?

Chad: Yeah, and more barbecue too.

Austin: Awesome men, so you know first off I’ve never interviewed two guys simultaneously before, so I want you guys to take a little easy on this poor Chinese guy here.

Austin: It’s all right we are one mind here, so it’s all good.

Steve: So before we start up I’m pretty sure a lot of the people listening don’t know who you guys are, so give us a quick background story and how you guys got together to start Ecommerce Influence.

Austin: Okay, perfect well, Chad and I actually worked together at a previous company for– what was it about? Two years, yeah, two years together and we split off, left the company separately, went kind of different ways, we’ve had a similar vision about transferring some of the stuff we learnt at the last company to where our real focus was which is ecommerce.

Steve: Was that last company an ecommerce company, sorry.

Austin: No, it was not, it was actually…

Chad: But they were really good at online marketing, they were huge.

Austin: It was incredible, it wasn’t– it was business to business and also like business to consumer, but mostly business to business, they were excellent at the domain marketing.

Chad: That’s kind of where we got our taste you know and it’s weird because we got the taste there then we left, kind of went off and did our own thing, and Austin was just crushing it with these ecommerce companies. He came back to me and he goes, hey you are doing your own– actually the weirdest part is we would meet every Friday for like a year to talk about marketing and we were still hustling by ourselves like really speeding wheels sometimes like you know launch forward then you had to back up and launch forward. And then one day Austin was just like hey dude, why don’t we just team up, and I was like oh man, that’s so smart.

Austin: Yeah, it was great because we were already meeting the other way, by the way which I highly recommend if you don’t have a business partner to find somebody else starting a business and like create a business relationship. We met up once a week and whenever our individual goals which worked out really well, but…

Steve: What if that person happens to be a wife or a girl friend, you guys still recommend that or?

Chad: No, I think we talked about this before, it’s really top anyway I was like ahh, we are going to meet, yeah, hold on.

Austin: Yeah, that’s how we found each other to talk about that stuff, but yeah so we were meeting up, and we’d really focused on it, the last company we worked out was inbound like email marking. So capturing people who come to the website and then build a company was almost ten million dollars, almost 100% through email marketing.

Everything was sold through email marketing, that and the combination of being on the phone, but there was really sophisticated sequences that we build for those B to B companies. We realized that there just are not out there, like ecommerce companies are not doing the same stuff and putting as much time into creating sophisticated, really powerful follow up sequences that business to business companies are.

Steve: You know it’s funny, I just interviewed Ezra Firestone, we were just talking about the same thing. A lot of the info product guys are doing a really great job at this, but the guys selling physical products typically don’t think in terms of funnels for some reason.

Austin: No, it’s true, it’s really– I think it has to do with maybe people thinking that they have so many different products that it’s not going to work, where info product guys have like one or two, but it really does work and it’s where we saw a huge opportunity.

Chad: Yeah, the other thing is like, what I’m actually astonished by is that not enough– like you said physical products or whatever maybe, most people aren’t using email marketing in any way except for the online marketer for the most part. I just met with a guy today who actually creates documentaries and he’s a friend of mine, he is making a feature film and I’m asking him like what, how are you marketing this, and it’s only like through twitter and facebook, I mean do you capture any emails at all? Do you use email marketing in any way to get your feature film out there, and he’s like no, I was like wow, we could really take this to the next level with email marketing so.

Steve: Yeah, especially for him it sounds like he could create a following really easily right.

Chad: Easily.

Steve: Yeah, easily. All right, let’s talk about some of your biggest wins; I want to hear about those before we get into the guts of the section here.

Austin: Sure.

Steve: So what’s some of the companies and what’s have been the boost in sales once you started using email marketing with these companies.

Austin: Well, I think it’s important to distinguish a little bit between like the different types of email marketing, so it is some bench marks that are run every quarter by a company called Absolunave; they profile how much email is sent and what percentage is sent to each different type of email. So there is usually two types people which people are listening are probably familiar with.

Number one is that like newsletter type email great, which a lot of companies actually do send out, a lot of ecommerce companies they send out either promotions, product launches, just a typical kind of business is usually know. That accounts for 96% of all email sent, the other type of emails are the triggered emails.

Triggered emails are based off of an event or an action that somebody actually does on your site, so and it’s– you can either, you can reward people for good actions, right. Somebody signs up for a newsletter or your ecommerce site well then, that’s a good action and you would like to reward them with something whether a follow up email or a coupon, that sort of thing, or like bad actions as well they can be followed up with where somebody abandons a cart. It’s considered a bad action, but that can link to an abandoned cart email that follows up with them to try to bring them back into a customer. And so those are only about 3.9% of all emails sent, but they are way- way-way more effective. I’m talking about– go ahead.

Steve: So when you guys go in and help a company does one replace the other, or do you still do both, like the newsletter style plus the triggered emails?

Austin: So absolutely working together, that’s where a lot of companies have a focus on the newsletter, but haven’t dug to triggered emails, and that’s where a lot of the money can be made, a lot of it actually comes from triggered emails. Those are the typically the money making emails are the ones that are triggered where the newsletter are the more a broadcasting content.

Steve: Okay, so here is a kind of a broad based question here, let’s say you are using the triggered email as a broadcast, now presumably that email won’t apply to everybody, but it will apply to a certain subset of people. So what are the disadvantages of sending out broadcast versus more targeted emails?

Austin: So the disadvantages of sending broadcast versus more targeted, well I think what happens is if people want to protect their brand right, and they want to provide– so you will see this in a lot of ecommerce with stores and other brands, they don’t want to give away discounts or coupons because if they feel like they are getting out, this may devalue the brand, right?

Steve: Okay, right, right, okay.

Austin: But still those are very-very valuable especially to people who have been with you for a long time. A customer who’s purchased let’s say, $300 worth of your products like six or seven time is way more valuable than somebody who has purchased one time. So you may want to reward the people who are previous customers and specifically like VIP previous customers with trigger emails.

So let’s say when someone passes a certain threshold maybe they hit $500,000 in sales, then they would receive some sort of a reward based action and you are not blasting your entire list. Likewise with somebody, you know customer acquisition is difficult, it’s something where it’s expensive to go use adwords, Facebook and often time you are very close, you can drive somebody to the website and they can be looking around, and they can be thinking about purchase and then they bounce instead of purchasing. So that’s kind of wasted money where you would rather capture those people with some sort of an offer, and then follow up specifically one to one with a potential new customer, to get them to convert and finally like and turn into a customer. And actually capitalize on the spend you’re doing, you’re putting out there for customer acquisition through AdWords or Facebook.

Steve: Okay and so does this work kind of in conjunction with retargeting ads as well?

Austin: Absolutely, it works in conjunction with retargeting ads. There’s also ways to set it up so that you can even determine if people click emails or open emails, it can disable or enable certain retargeting ads based on their behavior.

Steve: Okay all right, so let’s kind of like start from the very beginning.

Austin: Sure.

Steve: Pretend like I’m a company who doesn’t do any email whatsoever, I come to you guys, what are some of the questions that you ask me? And where do you kind of get started with this whole thing and setting it up?

Chad: Well yeah, this is Chad by the way. Normally when somebody comes in through the door here, they come to me and I start with a series of questions. First I want to find out about their business, and find out actually what they’re doing now to get to where they want to go. So we start off figuring out, all right where are you at now? Where do you want to go? What are you doing? And how is that working, right? Just kind of start this the whole thing off.

Then the following question is really these simple– honestly I call these disqualifying questions, this is when I know if they’re serious or not, when I say serious I mean have their stuff together. Either they are a perfect client for us or not, but it’s what is your cart abandonment rate? So most people don’t even know that, but on the flip side what is your cart recovery rate, right? Meaning how much revenue are you recovering currently, so if you’re losing let’s just says there’s $100,000 lost in abandoning carts in a month, you want to get 10% of that, which is 10 grand. So I say what is your abandoning cart rate and most people don’t know.

On top of that the other question is, what are you doing any way to recover? So we’re looking for our super number one question of recovery rate, but what are you actually doing? And a lot of people have something like abandon aid in place, or these one systemized emails through a plug-in in some capacity. And that tells me right away that they’re trying obviously not succeeding, because they usually don’t know the recovery rate. So there’s an opportunity for us right then and there to actually make a difference.

After that we really jump into a few other things which we might talk about later in this podcast, but one of them is list building, right. How are they building their list? What’s their conversion rate on their website in terms of the email list, and what kind of welcome sequence do you have post purchase sequence, and what kind of results are you getting from that. Obviously there’s whole suit [ph] of questions that I go through, but I think especially when we’re talking about abandoning carts, that’s really the first couple of questions. What’s your abandonment rate? What’s your recovery rate? And what are doing about it right now?

Steve: Okay so let’s talk about the abandon cart email sequence first. Now presumably if they’re not doing any email marketing, they’re probably not doing any abandoned cart stuff as well, so what does a typical abandon email sequence look like for you guys, like when you’re employing one?

Austin: Sure, well I think just to be clear if people are– yeah, if people aren’t doing email marketing they’re probably not doing abandon carts, but a lot of people are doing email marketing and still aren’t doing abandon carts. That’s also one thing that first question is what percentage of your emails are newsletters versus behavior base are triggered? And so going to abandon carts and what those actually look like, so and this kind of goes in to some of the wins that that you were asking about earlier, the type of stuff that we’ve been able to put together.

We focus on a much larger like kind of processor system than a lot of other people, it’s not just someone abandons a cart; let’s hit him with the email to trigger them to recover. There’s a couple of things you got to think about right, because different steps since– if someone adds something to the cart they’re surely interested right, if they leave that in their cart and don’t return for let’s says seven days, well they probably forgot about it. But that’s a lot different than somebody who’s left it in their cart for one or two hours.

Often sometimes something comes up; people may have to leave to go pick their kids up and couldn’t finish the order. So the way we approach it is we look at it as time based. So within the first day, we usually follow up with an email that focuses– it’s recovering– it’s trying to get the people who just got in and thrown off when they were checking out, or had trouble with check out, right. So it’s not sending an offer or anything like that, it’s just checking in with them, providing customer service, customer support, and giving them a direct line to the person who can help them check out.

Steve: Okay.

Austin: After one day then psychology kind of changes, because if they ignore that first email and don’t check out, that means probably they’re not as interested or maybe they’re thinking about somebody else, maybe they’re price checking that sort of thing. So then we follow up with emails that are more offer based with urgency, to try to get them to convert, a couple of emails, two to three days away, and a lot of this comes down to personal testing.

I can’t give a template for what’s going to work best for your business, because everyone is got a different kind of buying cycle. But usually two to three days later send an offer to them, and then a week later just checking in trying to like close the deal. And after a week you run to a period where you don’t want to lose these people, but it’s been a week since they added it to the cart and haven’t checked out, so you got a much higher chance of losing them, if that makes sense.

Steve: So when do you guys give up, by kind of like the week has passed?

Austin: Kind of like– well we really think about it’s like buy or die at a week, you give them your best offer at a week and then afterwards if they don’t convert you can follow up later on, but typically the process is about a week long, week to 10 days long.

Steve: Okay and then do you try to get them to opt in to an email list or anything at that point, or you’re just trying to close the sale?

Austin: That’s a good question, actually you don’t even need to get them– you don’t even need to get them to opt into an email list to send them emails, like these abandon cart emails because they’re transactional, you can send them directly to them. The whole point is just one point is just to get them to make that purchase, become a customer. There’s only one really thought process, that’s close the deal, they were so-so close; you want to get them to make that– to check out.

Steve: So does this process always include some sort of coupon code or discount?

Austin: Not always, but it’s way more effective if it does.

Steve: Okay, so that’s the abandon cart sequence. Let’s talk a little bit more about the post sales process; presumably you guys have some sort of sequence that you put in place also once a customer has made a purchase?

Austin: Yeah absolutely, and that’s going to depend once again on every brand, but I’ll give some kind basic rules of thumb and also talk a little bit about how like what we’ve being seeing. So after someone makes a purchase, this is a place where I think most companies just are totally negligent. They do not think about the ideal experience, and follow up that needs to happen after someone becomes a customer for the first time. This is really like the door opens, because a lot of times people continue to purchases more one after another and become big fans.

So we start outlining desired actions right, what is the best possible thing that can happen to somebody after they make a purchase? Typically it comes down to you want them to write a review for the product they just purchased. You want them to– if there’s social media channels follow on social media channels. You want them to share with their friends, those are three desired actions. And then ultimately the other desired action is to get them to make another purchase of a similar product, or a complementary product.

So we outline those desired actions and start building sequences based over 90 days that target people, 90 days is a typical range, but depending on your product it maybe longer or shorter. Replenishables often it’s quicker like socks or something, someone might want to buy them within 30 days or 60 days.

Steve: So what frequency do you send these emails out at?

Austin: That’s really depends on the type of product. I would give a general overview of like maybe six to eight emails over 90 days, like that is what we want to put together. Because remember you’re going to be supplementing these with newsletters emails. So these are specific action based, triggered emails, I mean they’ve hit 60 days after making a purchase and haven’t purchased again, it goes out. But you’re also going to be hitting them with whatever newsletter emails you’re doing on the other side.

Steve: Okay, so newsletters emails, meaning the traditional stuff like we’re having a sale here this is what’s new in the shop and that sort of thing?

Austin: Exactly.

Steve: Whereas these other emails that you’re talking about are more along the lines of where you kind of tell your own story and have people share their experiences with your company?

Austin: It’s a combination of like direct offers, especially with complementary products right. Because if you know someone has purchased let’s say a good example– okay so here’s a good example, let’s say someone purchases a straight razor from a [web] [00:20:34] shaving company.

Steve: Okay.

Austin: And you know by looking at their customer reference they’ve never purchased the strap whatever the sharpener, so then you’d follow up with a complementary product, to try to get them to add on to what they have already purchased. That can go on and on whether it’s they’ve bought boots and they want to follow up with either a complementary pair like or style, or something to clean them that sort of thing, there’s lots of different options and there’s a specific targeted of emails.

Steve: Okay and so that implies that your emails are being sent out based on some sort of customer database that you have?

Austin: Yes.

Steve: Is that– okay, so let’s talk about that, because that’s kind of the most interesting part of all this right?

Austin: Before we move on I want to say one thing about each, about the abandon carts, and the post check out sequence is– so typically right– actually you need some like aggregate email. Clavier there’s somebody Clavier that we’re going talk about in a second, does a great a job of providing that customer database. They averaged up all their emails and measured the number of emails sent divided by revenue created by those emails, and they found that on average every email that their customer sent brought in 20 cents.

Some of these emails– sequences we’re putting together are hitting like five and $10 an email, because instead of being a broadcast to everybody, they’re just targeting one to one, and specific places, during specific actions, and they’re recovering carts or they’re getting people to buy complimentary products, and they’re really-really effective. If you’re already running newsletter emails, getting these targeted emails is going to boost up the amount of revenue you’re bringing in without sending a ton more emails.

Steve: So without actually giving away your clients’ names, can you actually work through an example of one of your implementations?

Austin: Sure.

Steve: Okay.

Austin: So let’s start with– I guess I start with abandoned carts, that would be a good one. We put together abandoned cart sequence before the holidays for one of our clients and they were looking– they had like a really busy holiday season, it’s like they’re holiday focused.

Steve: Okay.

Austin: So we put together an abandoned cart.

Steve: I think I know what company this is already but go on, yeah.

Austin: So we put together a holiday focused abandonment cart sequence and we targeted the difference between– well they had some rules, right. Because most of their products, the products they wanted people to purchase were above, I think it was like $65. Below that were the smaller products that actually ate into their margin a little bit because of their shipping offerings. So they weren’t that excited about selling the smaller products, but they were very excited to sell products above the $65 mark.

Steve: Okay.

Austin: So we created actually two campaigns. The campaign for the above $65 mark included discounts, and was really aggressive to try target these people, because they knew if they converted they were making a lot of money off every purchase.

Steve: Okay.

Austin: So it was a four email sequence, customer service then there was a very like an offer. I think it was 15% off under a 48 hour deadline. Two emails for that. And then a follow up email from like a higher up person who was trying to get them to convert. And then we had also had the second sequence which was for lower than $65, which did not include a discount because it was not worth giving a discount to people who were lower than $65. That same thing can be done with international versus domestic orders, because often times people can give free shipping domestically, but not internationally. So there’s really good offers you can do when you segment.

Steve: So this is just based on what people actually put in their shopping cart? Is that correct?

Austin: Based on what they put in their shopping cart, and you can actually even segment them based on IP address.

Steve: Okay.

Austin: So…

Steve: And then…

Austin: And that one…

Steve: Just…

Austin: That one brought in over a 100 $10,000 in a month and a half of closed out carts, just putting those two things together.

Steve: I’m just curios how that would have compared to just kind of a generic abandonment sequence, where everyone got the same sequence like, “Hey, I know that you didn’t finish check out, why don’t you come back.” Versus– and then sending another email a couple of days later with a coupon code, that sort of thing. Do you have any sort of insight on that?

Austin: So you’re saying it’d just been a single email or two emails?

Steve: A series of two to three emails versus this sort of targeted approach, where you’re sending out coupons just to people in a certain segment. You kind of see what I’m asking?

Austin: Yeah, yeah. Well, the reason we don’t have the opposite is because they didn’t, as a company they didn’t want to send those coupons to those people who were lower.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Austin: Because they were like it’s not worth it. It‘s not worth it for them to check out with a coupon and so– I don’t know if we have…

Steve: No that’s okay.

Austin: It made sense for them because just purely because of their product offering. We had to go, we had to segment. They wouldn’t want to do it if it wasn’t segmented, if they had to treat everyone the same.

Steve: Yeah. It makes sense, because if they gave coupon codes for the cheaper items, then they might have lost money on that, right?

Austin: Exactly.

Steve: Perhaps, okay.

Chad: But I guess the other question I think maybe, I don’t know maybe you’re hinting at this is what is the difference between– really what’s the recovery rate difference between a segmented program that we just talked about, and then the standardized system that you’re referring to. Is that kind of how…

Steve: That’s kind of what I was getting at. More of like the advantages of doing it…

Chad: Like…

Steve: The segmented approach, yeah.

Chad: The segmented approach with Clavier versus the plug-ins you get with a standard cart, like…

Steve: Yes, yeah.

Chad: Is just blasting out to whoever and whatever they buy. Do we know the differences like any numbers on them?

Austin: That’s totally going to be company specific. We’ve been finding if you’re running a longer abandoned cart recovery sequences versus just one or two, often times we’ll pull in like 20 to 30% of our revenue from the last email that is sent in the sequence. And like 50% in emails three and beyond. So for people who are sending just one recovery email with an offer or two with an offer, or let’s say no offer, you’re missing out on a lot of revenue in those back emails. Because that’s where people are converting, it’s hard to believe that after seven days they’re going to convert. But that’s what’s happening and that’s kind of we’ve seen is error on the side of complexity and length, and you’ll have…

Steve: What happens during that last email; is that like the best offer of them all though, in that last email?

Austin: It depends. Often it really depends on the company. So yeah, we like to put a better offer in the last email. But sometime it’s matched the same. If we ever look at the lowest possible offer, it will be the same as offer three or offer two. But it will be just delivered in a different format. So instead of just an image with your stuff like a personalized email describing that you want to have them join the company– become a customer and that you’re personally putting together a coupon code for them, that’s sort of thing works well for them as well.

Steve: So are we kind of training customers to kind of wait for these coupons though? It’s becoming a pretty prevalent practice these days with these abandonment sequence, right?

Austin: Well, I wish it was more prevalent, but no people are– yes and no. It’s becoming more understood, but it’s not out there as much as it should be. And here is— it’s a really good question, because what you want to do is you want to make sure there’s a lot of options, that you’re a service not just a one off coupon deliver. You can divide it between first time customers; deliver something different for someone who’s been a customer for a long with no offer. That’s often another one we’ll do. We Segment out first time customers, and previous customer and give previous customers no offer. And first time customers be very aggressive because we know we want to acquire a customer for the first time.

Steve: I see.

Austin: So that goes back to– that’s all like segmentation.

Steve: That makes sense.

Austin: And so many advantages of segmenting between first time, previous customers, or even people, previous customers who’ve received an abandoning cart email one time in the past, you don’t want to give it to them again. So you don’t train them.

Steve: Do you guys do anything in terms of helping kind of like more of a cold customer? So let’s say a customer has landed on one of my content pages. And I actually got them to opt in to my list. Do you guys do any sort of segmentation on those kind of cold people coming in? How do you convince those guys to buy?

Austin: So segmentation for those customers when there is a prospects actually there’s couple things you can do. And we usually focus on building somewhat of a welcome sequence, where…

Steve: Okay.

Austin: Going to back to what we talked about with post check out.

Steve: Right.

Austin: And the desired actions. For welcome sequence we like to think of best possible things that they can be exposed to, to give them the highest chance of making a purchase. So once they sign up and often times we’ll help companies build a higher more compelling offer for them to sing up with. And sometimes that can be– whether it’s a coupon or some sort of a download, a buyer’s guide, those sort of things. We’ll typically deliver that and then focus on building a sequence that ultimately the number one goal is to get someone to convert from a subscriber into a buyer.

Steve: Right.

Austin: But at the same time you don’t want to just hammer people with discounts. You want to tell the message of your store, you want to have them complete other desired actions like follow you on Instagram or Facebook, tied with the offers, specifically with urgency. Because we talk about training people, it’s important to give them– if you’re going to give a discount make sure that it just lasts for like a day or two days. I don’t like giving open ended discounts, because if you train them when they get an email, they’re going to make a purchase within 24 hours, that’s something that consistently goes with them throughout their life cycle.

If you’re just giving discounts, discounts, discounts, it kind of just devalues what you’re doing. So the whole goal would be to convert that subscriber into a buyer. And then once they become a buyer you change your relationship with them, where you’re not giving them any discounts because they’ve already made a purchase.

Steve: Okay. So I would love to see kind of like an example of an on boarding sequence. So let’s say I came to you with my wedding handkerchief store. And I got someone to sign up by offering them some sort of arts and crafts guide, which is something we give out…

Austin: Sure

Steve: In order to get them on our list. So what would be kind of your sequence, your first couple of email sequences, and how would you get them to actually buy some of these things?

Austin: Well, the question would be what would be the– is there an introductory purchase or what is the most typical first purchase from customers?

Steve: I guess it depends who they are, but a lot of our customers let’s say are just brides.

Austin: Okay.

Steve: Brides to be who want to buy some of these items as a part of either a gift for the bridal party or as part of their wedding.

Austin: Okay. So obviously delivering the arts and crafts guide. Then thinking about well if the goal is to get them to go from arts and crafts guide to making a purchase, what differentiates you guys from everybody else? So for a lot of the brands that we work with, a lot of it is going to be telling the story if there is social aspects, exposing the people who get subscribed but haven’t seen like the important pages on your website, and then combining that with an increasing offer. So one email maybe a week later with an offer for them to get onboard and make their purchase.

If they don’t respond to that one, then maybe following up with something that’s not an offer a week later or 10 days later, then try again 10 days with a better offer thinking, “Okay what is the”– knowing what your allowable cost is to get somebody to convert, and then increasing it from where you want to be to your allowable cost, because you still– no matter what you want to get these people to convert. And once they convert and they make a purchase then kicked out of that sequence and they go to a new one which is not incentive heavy.

Steve: Are there any incentives other than discounts that you guys employ with your campaigns?

Austin: Yeah, there are. Discount is just one– it’s easy to talk about because it’s in eCommerce. What other incentives we’ve got– it really depends on the– what else do you offer besides discounts? We can relate to your store.

Steve: Sure. We tend to offer kind of information.

Austin: Okay. I see what you are saying. One thing we’ve been building a lot of that have been really, really helpful is like buyers guides. For example we just build one for one of our clients. He’s in the wet shaving niche. We went over and we built out a downloadable guide that explains the best materials, or the best type of products for the beginner being like intermediate and then the expert. And those are increasing based off of their reviews, like in-house, what people like, that sort of thing, and then each one has got a description and link back, so they can purchase it on the site.

And it’s been shared– people have been going crazy about these buyers guide because it answers the question they’ve already been asking, and does it in a way that they can just have in their computer and then go check out and they can forward to their friends. That’s one of the things we’ve been employing that works quite well.

Chad: I think there is a lot of things that I think somebody can do for this welcome sequence, like honestly a lot of is information, we’ve talked to a lot of eCommerce companies that have been using video. I think of Alex Icon from [Lexi Hair for One]. Think about the number question that he probably gets for– and this is hair extensions by the way. The questions that he gets from potential clients are about hair extensions, and he’s got a ton of videos. I think he’s got like a million subscribers and if somebody opts in to his website you can send videos over, “Hey, by the way here is how you do this,” and then another video on how to do this. “By the way would you like to buy something that helps you do this better?” I really think that content side is really a big part of it.

Austin: Yeah, well it is. And I think just to be clear from what you were saying earlier when I was talking about incentives, I was purely thinking of the offer discount I think. But you have to pair those absolutely with the information like Chad is talking about, because you don’t want to be just bombarding with– that’s like one of the biggest failures. People will just bombard with discount after discount.

Steve: Yeah. That is what I was getting at. What is kind of the email ordering and the mix look like? Do you do content offer, content content offer? Do you kind of get what I am asking?

Austin: Sure. And that’s going to depend a little bit on the brand, and how much information they’ve got or what type of a job they’ve done in creating quality content, but typically about 50/50 ratio is what I like to go with, what’s worked best for us. 50 between high quality content and then clear offers to make a purchase.

Steve: And how far out are these sequences before you kind of just stop trying to get that initial sale?

Austin: If you are in an ideal world it would never stop, but realistically 60 days is a good– 30 to 60 days is a good timeline. Maybe 90 days if you are more sophisticated.

Chad: But over time you can keep adding to it.

Austin: Yeah.

Chad: Because they are all automated.

Austin: That’s the…

Steve: I’m asking you these questions because we do– that’s what we’ve been doing. We’ve just been kind of adding onto the sequence, and I was just curious what you guys were going to say.

Austin: Now you just keep– yeah, you just keep adding. Just start with at least 30 days. If you are listening and you don’t have this setup, start with at least 30 days because that’s going to give you the ability to have like four emails in 30 days. It’s a great place to start.

Steve: So let’s talk about implementation very briefly. So you guys mentioned you use a tool called Clavier.

Austin: Yeah.

Steve: How do you use that tool to setup these complicated funnels? Is the functionality already built in there? Is it straightforward?

Austin: Yeah. It’s fairly straight forward. I think one of the advantages of using a program like Clavier for an eCommerce store is that the integration allows you to pull information from not only just newsletter subscribers, but from customers who you’ve ever had in your database which is awesome because then you pull it over. All the information you’ve got in your store is then easily sortable in Clavier. So then you can run basically segments and sort based on behaviors. You can create a VIP category where you filter people who purchase six times. Those are going to be very different customers than people who purchase one time and never come back.

Steve: Sure. Does that imply then that you kind of import in your shopping cart database over to their platform?

Austin: Yeah. It automatically pulls everything over there which makes it so, so easy. So once the integration happens it will be talking back and forth using the API and it will be– yeah, you’ll be able to see almost in real time. When people make a purchase they’ll be updated in Clavier and then all your funnels can be triggered from within that.

Steve: This is starting to sound like a Clavier advertisement here. It sounds really cool.

Austin: The thing is like– so…

Steve: Just for the record these guys are not affiliated.

Austin: I know, well the thing is [crosstalk]. You don’t have to use Clavier; it just makes it a lot easier. So I’ve used so many different platforms; MailChimp, AWeber, Infusionsoft, Get Response– literally like almost every single one of them. And the difference is that nobody– the stuff we talk about doing like segmenting and figuring out the difference between domestic and international orders, it’s not possible to do with a lot of the other programs. And that’s why I think we are just scratching the surface on what we can do is because now we are able to understand where people are coming from, what their intention is on a website and follow up with them accordingly.

And that’s why we like using it because it allows you to do all that stuff. I think Bronto does something similar as well but yeah, we just had a lot of success with it.

Chad: And it’s gotten to the point where Austin now requires me on the front end to require somebody to switch to Clavier on. And we have no financial incentive, that’s how good it has become.

Austin: Yeah, we don’t.

Chad: We don’t work with anybody who is not using Clavier and if they aren’t they have to switch to it. And afterwards they always ask, “Well can we still keep our old one,” and we said, “Yeah, keep it.” And then next thing you know they are like, “Let’s forget it. Let’s just move everything to Clavier.” And like I said there is no financial incentive for us on this.

Steve: I was just about to make that comment. You guys are not affiliated with Clavier in any way.

Chad: Exactly.

Austin: We do have a discount for all of our clients. People that sign up with us they get a discount for using it, but we don’t have a financial relationship with them. And then it honestly comes down to just us– we want people to use what’s best out there, and be impartial in that sense. We’ll switch if there is something better, but for the time being this is what we found and it’s worked to accomplish our goals in ways that things we’ve wanted to do for a long time are now possible are using the software.

Steve: Yeah, awesome. Hey you guys we’ve been talking for quite a while.

Austin: Yeah.

Steve: So just for the listeners out there, Chad and Austin– this is what they do and they do it well. So if you’ve got an eCommerce store that’s kind of struggling to hit the next level and you are not really taking advantage of email marketing, I’ve learned a lot from these guys. And so Austin, Chad where can they find you if they want to reach out?

Austin: Well you can go to our website Ecommerceinfluence.com, that’s a great place to start. It’s got all the information about our podcast; you can listen to it there. And also Chad has got– if you qualify, like if you are listening and you are really like above, typically like a $500,000 run rate we also create behavioral marketing, triggered email like audits to give you an idea of where your revenue could come from. And like if you are already sending emails or not sending emails, what that sort of thing would look like and that’s over to Ecommerceinfluence.com/apply.

Chad: Yeah. Basically that’s an audit plus a blueprint. So at the end of the day, like you said if you quality we’ll be able to do the duty audit or create a blueprint for you and what you need to do, and then you can either implement it yourself or we can do it for you.

Steve: Sounds good guys. Well thanks a lot for coming on this show men.

Austin: Thanks Steve. Hopefully– it was good. We will hopefully answer some questions about your own business which is kind of– we use our podcasts to get some insight about our own business. It’s a great little thing to do.

Steve: Cool men. Well take care.

Austin: All right. Cheers.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Austin and Chad are a few of my go to guys when it comes to using email to effectively boost sales for an eCommerce store. And hopefully you all learned something today. Now if you aren’t sending email to your customers then you are definitely leaving a lot of money on the table. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode65 and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review.

Because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud but it helps keep my podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month, for more information about this contest go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course, where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

064: Ezra Firestone On How To Create Raving Fans For Your Business With Content Marketing

Ezra Firestone

I first met Ezra Firestone at the Ecommerce Fuel conference in Austin, TX and I’m really glad that I did. Ezra is an expert when it comes to content marketing and PPC advertising and I was lucky to catch his presentation at the conference.

Ezra runs the popular pro age cosmetics company Boom! By Cindy Josephs. He also runs the popular blog Smart Marketer. Be sure to go and check out his websites!

What You’ll Learn

  • Why Ezra decided to focus on content marketing over other methods
  • How to structure your content to generate leads for your ecommerce store.
  • How to use third contact direct response advertising
  • How much you should be willing to invest before starting paid advertising
  • How to structure your content to entice people to click
  • How much profit do you need to be making to make Facebook ads viable
  • How to structure a pre-purchase campaign via email
  • How to drive people from Amazon to your own branded site
  • How to generate Amazon reviews for your products.

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m really excited to have Ezra Firestone on the show. Now Ezra is someone who I met at the Ecommerce Fuel Conference in Austin Texas, and the guy actually does a ton of stuff. First of he runs a pro-age cosmetic line called Boom by Cindy Josephs and he also teaches others how to start an effectively run ecommerce store at smartmarketer.com.

Now based on a lecture that Ezra gave in Austin at Ecommerce Fuel Conference, I actually followed his advice to make my facebook campaigns profitable. Now here is what I like about Ezra, the motto for his site is serve the world unselfishly and profit, now how cool is that. And Ezra holds true to that model with lots of free content and tutorials. Anyway we are going to explore the methods that he has used to make Boom by Cindy Joseph a powerhouse company and with that, welcome to the show man. How is it going Ezra?

Ezra: Thanks man, I’m happy, to be on MyWifeQuitHerJob.com, I get excited when I hear that URL just like as [Inaudible] [00:02:30] so I just want to keep saying it over and over, I’ve been repeating it, I’ve said it like four times most to my wife and she’s like okay, that’s enough.

Steve: Appreciate that man; hopefully we can turn your wife into a reader and a follower.

Ezra: Yes, she’s into podcast, so I’m sure.

Steve: All right man, so what is the background story behind Boom and how do you hook up with Cindy Josephs?

Ezra: Okay, so you know Boom– it’s kind of a long story, but I will give you the shorter version which is that well I’ll give you that version and you can tell me if you’d like more.

Steve: Okay.

Ezra: So I grew in an alternative lifestyle experiment, sort of a hippie commune of sorts in the Bay of California, and it’s a really-really fascinating place. And my parents and this group where I came from called [inaudible] [0:03:18] they teach courses and things like communication and jealousy and money and possessions and man-woman relationship, and kind of things about what it takes to have a successful relationship of any kind not just like across the gender line, but just relating in general, how do you win that relationship?

It’s really something that’s helpful you know, having successful relationships is kind of what you need in life to be successful in any venture.

Steve: Absolutely.

Ezra: You need to have successful business relationships, successful personal relationships, and so they teach these course and Cindy was– would come and take these courses, and when I was 18 you know, I decided that I wanted to move out to New York and I had made friends with Cindy who would come to our house and take these courses. And so I called her up and I said hey, I would like to move to New York, can I come stay with you? And she said yes. So I moved out of there and I was playing poker for a living, I played in all these underground clubs and I was doing quite well.

Steve: Interesting.

Ezra: Yeah, man the whole of the poker world in New York City is a whole other thing, but that was really wild times and really fun, but I become very close friends with Cindy. We were sort of like best friends and she was 55 at the time and I was 19. And I was a little bit of from the time I was 18 to 20, 18 to 20, 18 to sort of 21 and we would have all these conversations about sort of ageism and you know, the difference in how society treated the both of us you know, me as a young man and her as an older woman, and it turns that in western society and in America and in most western civilizations men are valued for production.

So like as we produce more, as we make more money and as we get older, we get more social power and more value in the eyes of society. And this is not a view point that I subscribe to obviously, but it’s the way that society views men and women. And women on the other hand are valued for youth and beauty, and so as they get older society you know, tells them that this power that they have goes away and you’ll notice that all the messaging towards older women is that, hey this process, this ageing process is a thing that is happening to you is bad, it’s wrong, it’s anti-aging, anti-wrinkle.

You know you want to stop this thing and you know we have 80 million baby boomers, half of them and which is the largest part of our demographic, the whole entire United States the largest demographic are the baby boomers, half of them are women, and they are all collectively having the experience of their hair graying, their skin wrinkling and their bodies aging on the outside faster than they are on the inside, or just ageing in general and society treating them differently as a result of it.

And so you know, she was experiencing this first hand and Cindy used to be a very famous and successful makeup artist. So she was a like a make put artist to Trya Banks and Cameron Diaz and all those people, and I was learning at the time about ecommerce and online marketing and I said hey, you know, we ought to leverage this celebrity that you have. She also became a fashion model, now she is a very famous fashion model because brands were realizing that, hey baby boomers have money, and we ought to use them in ads to sell them things, sort of a noble concept.

But so you know, her first response was, hey like you know, do you think the world really needs another [inaudible] [0:06:38] lipstick? And the answer is no, the world doesn’t need another [inaudible] [0:06:42] lipstick, but we ultimately decided was that we would create a cosmetics line that was Pro-Age, that was you know, all the cosmetics would be sheer and natural and organic, and it wouldn’t be about covering your skin up, it would be about you know, showing off and celebrating who you are now, and so our cosmetic line is a Pro-Age cosmetic line.

We were the first people, there are a bit of Pro-Age campaigns, a couple of people have done a Pro-Age campaign now, but that messaging to that group of people worked really-really well and the way this business is build is that it’s not like we didn’t have– there was no nobody searching for our products. We didn’t have any query based traffic which is how all my other ecommerce businesses were built up to that point; it was all the query based traffic. So this business was built 100% with content marketing, with engaging with a group of people in a conversation about what was happening on their lives, and then making them an offer from there. And it went really-really well because you know, there is nobody– it’s a good sort of example of the right message to the right market at the right time.

Steve: Yeah, those are some deep conversations to have at such a young age Ezra.

Ezra: Hey you know thanks I came from the cool place.

Steve: Hey, let’s talk about that, I mean you mentioned content marketing was this whole focus of Boom. So you mentioned query based advertising did not work, right? So there is…

Ezra: Well there just wants anyone searching. Everyone was searching for anti-aging everything.

Steve: Right.

Ezra: And we are not anti-aging and you know, we did some– we do some right, where we convert people and say, hey, you are looking for anti-wrinkle cream, but check this out and sort of like we try to convert them, but it’s much easier to catch someone through a piece of content.

So like, let’s look at content marketing in general, right. Like this is the– it’s been around forever, it’s not like we invented this thing, so soap operas are content marketing, like the Deb and Johnson and Johnson, all these companies created soap operas so that they would have their target audience is engaged and they can place products in that piece of content. American Idols is one big piece of content designed to sell you a record you know.

So this idea of engaging someone in a story and getting their attention and getting them enrolled in an idea and then moving them to a sales message has been around forever and is an, it’s the soul concept that we use, sort of soul bit, the main model or funnel that we use in all of our business. And if you look at how we use it from a contextual traffic stand point, what we do is we run facebook ads to what we call a pre-sell article. So an article on– that engages someone, that enrolls them, so for example, I’ll give you a perfect example right now. I just told you I’m running Pinterest ads, right? We started a couple days ago; we spent $8 to generate $200 of revenues.

So Pinterest ads are doing quite well, but the way we are doing it we are running people into an article that says you know, XYZ make up tips for older women, and then it takes them thorough this whole article about make up tips and what to do if you are you know, how to wear makeup as an older woman and this kind of stuff. And then it leads them over to Boom and says hey you know we have this makeup line and takes them over to our sales page, our product offering, and that funnel where we are taking someone form a traffic source where they weren’t looking for, they weren’t looking for makeup and we enroll them in a story because we know something about them, either age and their gender, and then we make them our product offers.

That’s sort of a good example of direct response content marketing. However, Boom was build not on direct response content marketing, Boom was build on just traditional content marketing where we would you know put up blog posts about– that had nothing to do with our skin care, just about you know, how we felt about XYZ topic, or what we thought about menopause or our view points on ageing. And then it would be on our blog which was on our website, so people would share that and they would end up back on our stores. So it was a little bit different how we did Boom, it wasn’t as direct response.

Steve: Yeah, I was going to ask you about that, so in the very beginning you just started out with a blog for the most part?

Ezra: Yeah we just– basically what we did, we created this blog and we just promoted content for about six months really heavily on all the social channels, we also had a press agent who would give us spots on magazines and you know radios and TV and stuff like that. And really through the promotion of this content we build the community of people who are interested in following this content. And then what we would do is we have sales and we make offers to that group, and so that’s still my business model in general. If you look at Smartmarketer.com, if you look at any of my other businesses my agenda is to build the community who is engaged with me around a specific set of topics and conversations, and then make that community offers that I believe are relevant to them.

Steve: So was the store up first and then the blog, or did you kind of start the blog first?

Ezra: The store was up from the start.

Steve: Okay.

Ezra: I mean we were not going– I mean we were getting some sales, but we weren’t really, we didn’t really, we didn’t have anyone to sell to and we didn’t, we couldn’t buy query based traffic. So we kind of just had our store there and we had the do concept for quite a while before we build that community, and now we have such a large community and our content is so viral, every time we post it because everyone shares it that it sort of significant, we are easier now.

Steve: I see and how did the people find your blog? Just through popular topics that women of that age experience?

Ezra: We bought ads on Facebook to promote our content.

Steve: You bought ads?

Ezra: We bought on you know, different– we did traditional contextual traffic sources to promote our content, so our content was not by any means, we didn’t just throw it out there and say you know hey good luck to us you know, we deliberately purchased traffic to our content from that demographic, most of them Facebook.

Steve: Okay and this– when did it start because Facebook ads didn’t come around until maybe like five years ago? Yeah.

Ezra: We didn’t, our business really took off in 2010 Boom, although Facebook has real ads, Facebook ads pretty heavily in 2009 but there wasn’t Boom yeah, but I mean without Facebook I think we would have been lost.

Steve: Okay, so let’s go into a little more depth since you mentioned you have such good Facebook success, how do you structure an ad, and how do you kind of structure this campaign and how does the whole funnel work?

Ezra: I mean for Boom it’s pretty simple, right. What we do is something called the third contact direct response advertising, where we take a piece of content, and we market that to a specific audience. And all we are doing is sending people from Facebook to our blog, or even most of the time from Facebook to our video on their news feed but we are not even asking them to leave Facebook, they just have to consume a piece of content right in our news feed, but then after they’ve seen a couple of pieces of our content, we then run a direct response ad to that same group.

That’s why we call it third contact direct response because we don’t run the direct response ad until they’ve had at least three contacts with our content. And the direct response ad might just be a simple email often which then leads to a funnel that has a webinar in it, or it might be a simple email often that just then leaves to our store page, or might be a sale. So that’s really the strategy that we use on Boom is really we promote our content and then we promote direct response offers. That’s pretty straight forward.

Steve: Okay and then how do you measure like the effects of a particular ad on conversions and that sort of thing? So you have someone you send to a piece of content, and then you can track that, but then you have them going to your email list like a special separate email list?

Ezra: Yeah, when you get to our blog we’ve got a bunch of– we’ve got– obviously I have retargeting pixels on the pages they’re landing on.

Steve: Okay.

Ezra: And we do really well with retargeting advertising off of our content. I think that if you want to start a business that is going to use content marketing as its source of visibility, and lead generation, and you know optimization strategy, then what you’re going to want is at least $1,000 a month to spend…

Steve: Okay.

Ezra: On advertising your content, and we spend a couple of grand a month, we don’t spend a whole lot believe it or not on Boom at this point with our content marketing anymore, just because we’ve built up such a great community and we get so much social shares and all that kind of stuff. But I think that you’ve got to be willing with content marketing to invest in five/six grand over the course of a couple of months to build that community, and to get the name out about your content before you start trying to optimize. And then from there what you do is you have direct response optimization campaigns, where you’re not really relying on your content to make money for you for monetization.

You’re relying on it to engage with people and get them back to your blog and get you email opt ins and stuff like that, and then you have direct response campaigns that you’re running to your current community, the people who are on your retargeting list, the people who are on your on email list and you’re using that to optimize. So the content is really about building the community, you’re not really measuring– what you’re measuring is how many leads you get, how big are you are your retargeting list? And how many leads are on your email list?

Steve: Okay and then so just for some of the listeners who might not have I guess products that might be interesting, like your product line caters to a very specific demographic. So how would you proceed with a business let’s say you’re were selling mops or something like that, how would you…?

Ezra: Yeah like we’re doing this kind of thing with a bunch of Amazon business owners who have like garlic peelers and like yeah, all kinds of random stuff, so it’s like, How not to Cry when you’re Peeling Garlic, what’s on– the Dirtiest Part of Your Floor, or like Do You Know What the Dirtiest Part of Your House is, or whatever it is the kitchen sink is what people say right, that has the most germs or whatever, like you can do content about anything.

If you are having a hard time being creative, then hire someone who can come up with ideas for you, but you can give me any product and I’ll give you some idea for a piece of content. Basically here’s what you want, you want people to be curious so you can ask the question, you want to scare people, fear is a very– you don’t want to scare them too bad right, you got to be cool. But fear is really important motivator like you’ll notice on the news they’ll be like, “There’s one thing in your fridge that will kill you,” and then they’ll say, “News at 11,” and it’s like 6PM you’re like, “Now I got to wait till 11, to find out what’s in my fridge.”

That’s gets used a lot– fear as a motivator to get your attention. So there is fear, there is curiosity, there is humor. We use humor a lot. And there is a bunch of other psychological triggers that you can use: shock and all. I’ve got a list of them that we look at before we write a pre-sell article. I think that essentially what you are doing is engaging someone in a story. It’s not really about your product in the end; it’s about something related to your product that’s interesting.

And in any product– like why would someone be buying a mop? Why would someone be buying an air filter, because there are afraid that there is like dirty stuff and other stuff in the air that they don’t want to breathe in, and so then you create an article about that. So it’s essentially related to the solution that your product provides.

Steve: So let’s talk a little bit about this landing page. So it’s just– you mentioned it could be just like a blog post.

Ezra: It should be a blog post actually. It should really be– articles work better than videos, best is to have a video on your long form article page, and you want to write it like a traditional article like with bullets points, five things, five reasons, five steps to this, or how to do this– any kind of article that’s engaging. And you can look at buzz feed, and you can look at a bunch of these other sort of big content websites to get ideas for– there is actually one– there is a place Zerg Z-E-R-G-N-E-T.com. It’s called Zergnet.com.

Steve: Interesting.

Ezra: And it’s a website that has viral content on it, for like all kinds of industries, a lot in the sort of Hollywood industry or whatever, the sort of celebrity world– Zergnet.com. And they’ve got like you can go on there and you can see all these different articles that are really popular, and I’m looking at it right now. I’ll just read them to you: six things you didn’t know about liquor’s most popular brands, crazy things you never knew about the Transformers movies, 10 games that are just relaxing to play, five weird games that actually exist. So you can kind of take some ideas from these blogs of what’s going to be a compelling article and then you can write that about your industry.

Steve: Okay. And then the goal of that landing page is it to get some sort of email sign ups so you can get that [crosstalk]?

Ezra: The goal of that landing page is to get people to click through to your product offer. It’s 100% to move them– to basically engage them in a story and then allude to the solution that solves the problem that you are telling them about, and the solution is your product.

Steve: Okay.

Ezra: And of course we retargeting pixels on the blog and we’ve got email opt-ins. We get quite a lot of email opt-ins and that kind of stuff, but it’s really designed to move people over to your product.

Steve: Okay. Yeah, no, when I was designing my funnel based on your advice that you gave at that conference, I had to experiment a whole bunch of time to get people to click over because often times they just read the blog post and then they leave, right?

Ezra: Totally, totally. You’ve got to– you put a bunch of blue underlined links and you can’t have a blog about– let’s say your product is a mop and you’re telling, “Here’s like– you want to know some good cleaning tips, here is how you clean your kids clothes” yardi, yardi, yarda. And you don’t even talk about your mop, because that’s not going to work.

Steve: Yeah, yeah. So what I ended up doing was I think I had pop ups to collect emails at the bottom, slide ins and then I also had links on each of the photos that I put in there, and then gradually it finally worked out where I could make a profit. But it was a long process actually.

Ezra: It’s going to take some optimization. We’ll find that like one out of five articles that were using for this pre sales strategy would be effective. So it’s not like this– I’m not saying this is easy. You got to be willing to work and test and tweak and put in energy and effort, but what I am saying is that if you can dial this funnel in, then I don’t think there’s a better one. There’s no better funnel out there. It’s the most profitable funnel that you can create because it’s– when you do it right, you’re engaging someone in a story, and then eluding them over towards a solution which is just so effective.

Steve: So in terms of budget, I know there are some listeners who drop ship, there’s some people who sell other people’s products, what should be your profit margins in order to make Facebook kind of a viable prospect?

Ezra: What do you mean as far as a…

Steve: In terms of how much it would– in your experience with like your healthcare products– with your beauty products, how much do you spend to get a conversion?

Ezra: Our store is a little bit different right, because we have such a big community now. But if you’re just talking about cold Facebook traffic, we’re spending between $10 to $20 to generate a sale.

Steve: Okay.

Ezra: I think for people on– I think in my view point is that drop shipping is quite difficult these days with buying cold traffic, and so if I was a drop ship retailer, I would probably switch my motto to purchasing emails, because there’s no market on Facebook right now where you can buy email addresses for five bucks or under. I mean with a little bit of optimization I’m talking about Facebook ads directly to like a lead page that says, “Hey learn XYZ thing, or get XYZ eBook, or find out XYZ trick about cleaning your house, where you’re generating email.

Then I would– if I was drop shipping I would have a 45 day sequence of some kind like that, sends people to a couple of pieces of presale content, this is through email not writing– generating your email with lead, and now you’re sending them to a couple pieces of presale content over the course of a week, but then lead up to your products, then you’re inviting them to a webinar where you’re spending and hour with them telling them how great your products are.

Like I would have a much longer form sales funnel for if my margins were lower than they are now, and I used to have significantly lower margins, because I was a drop ship retailer. So I needed longer form funnels to convert a lead into a buyer, and so it’s really about what can you a lead for, and what kind of profit are you making per sale? And I think it’s easier for me because I have a consumable, right?

Steve: Yeah absolutely.

Ezra: Like people come back they purchase from me a couple of times, and I very deliberately– and then markets where that’s the case, because I understand that these days if you’re breaking even on advertising you’re doing quite well, if you’re acquiring a customer at break even that’s like a really good thing. And you want to either have additional products on your line that you can sell people, or a consumable where people will back, or some way of getting repeat business. I think that it’s quite difficult to have a successful business if you are onetime sale only, unless that one time sale only unless that one time sale is a pretty high dollar value.

Steve: Okay, and just a couple of details regarding Facebook, do you advocate buying likes and then marketing to that crowd or do you…?

Ezra: I advocate purchasing likes from retargeting, so here’s– I don’t advocate purchasing likes straight up, I think that’s a terrible idea.

Steve: Okay.

Ezra: And there’s much better ways to spend your Facebook dollar, I do advocate purchasing likes from your retargeting list. So basically have a retargeting pixel on your website, right? And if you’ve ever visited my website or any of my websites, and you’ve been haunted by this ad because it follows you around everywhere where it says, “Hey thank you so much for visiting our website, please click like to stay in touch,” that’s all the whole ad that’s it, and then it’s a like ad to get them to like our page.

The reason we do that is because our Facebook fans are really profitable audience for us, but its only fans of people who actually visit our websites, it’s not just random fans off of Facebook, it’s actually people who have engaged to the degree of making it to our website. So I do recommend doing like generation in that way, I’m sorry if I’m sort of monotone, I’m a little bit sick.

Steve: No-no-no, no problem so I was just curious then, so we run retargeting ads that go back to the product pages, so you’re…

Ezra: I would do both.

Steve: Do both, okay.

Ezra: Yeah totally I think that…

Steve: So how would you separate out which to send to what, I mean you just run both and just let Facebook run with it?

Ezra: You just set up two ad groups; and one ad group has the– I’m sorry ad set rather two ad sets; one ad set is using the retargeting targeting to send people back to your website, and the other ad set is using the retargeting targeting to build likes, they’ll both run to that same audience.

Steve: Okay.

Ezra: And they’ll both get allocation.

Steve: Okay and then outside of Facebook have you tried anything else like Twitter, You Tube ads?

Ezra: Yeah we run a lot of different ads, I think that for content marketing Facebook is really the game in town right now, Twitter is quite expensive, it doesn’t work great for ecommerce retailers; it works pretty well for business opportunity stuff and information where you have much higher profit margins, because Twitter clicks are between a dollar and three dollars depending on your market.

You Tube at this point we do not have any– we’re tweaking around with it, and testing it, we obviously run retargeting for our videos and stuff like that, but we don’t have any kind of scale with regard to traffic on YouTube for our ecommerce businesses, we got a little bit, but I wouldn’t say it’s worth your time.

Pinterest ads is looking very promising, but I would say that your best sources of traffic for an ecommerce business are going to be query based traffic on Google, so that Google Shopping, Google Search, or Amazon if you’re on there, then Facebook display, and then Google Display. Google Display Network is phenomenal, if you’re– at the very least you should be retargeting using the Google Display Network if that’s all that you’re doing.

Steve: Let’s talk about that for a sec, because I have not being able to get the display network to work for me, it just hemorrhages money and fast.

Ezra: What are you using it for?

Steve: I’m using it to drive people– it’s similar to how my Facebook campaign is set up, I drive them to a landing page retargeting pixel everything, email sign ups, and the traffic just is like a black hole. And maybe I’m just putting the ads on the wrong sites, but there’s a wide swath of sites to choose, and it sounds like you need a large budget…

Ezra: Are you going through and like pruning– so basically the way that Google Display works is you basically put in your keywords, right? And then Google picks a bunch of websites for you…

Steve: Yes.

Ezra: And then you have to go in and look at what specific URLs on those websites are converting and get rid everything else.

Steve: Yes.

Ezra: So you’re probably going to lose money the first two months, but then you’ll find a couple of placements that work, and then those placements will really work. So it’s sort of a lost leader at the start where you’re trying to– when you’re figuring out which placements are going to work for you, but I would say at the very least throw a retargeting pixel up for Google on your website and run Google Retargeting, because that converts out quite well.

Steve: Yeah that’s the only thing that we’re using right now on the GDA network retargeting.

Ezra: The other thing is they have something called the Google Display Planner where you can go ahead and put in a keyword, and you can see the URLs that they’re going to suggest and then you can pick just those, and then you can run on those and then hopefully you got a better shot at getting some success right from the start. But the way we do it is the old school way we just put in some keywords and let it run.

Steve: And then you just monitor it like a hawk to make sure that the sites that were– that they’re putting your ads– okay…

Ezra: Yeah you say you got a $2,000 budget to test, right? Then we just let that run over the course of a couple of weeks or whatever, set our daily budget, let it run, have a conversant check and pixel there, and then come in and prune out anything that didn’t work excluding anything that didn’t work.

Steve: Yeah I made a lot of early mistakes where my ads were being shown on apps, and that just destroyed my…

Ezra: Ah yeah you got– they’re a little sneaky that’s the other thing about Google, Facebook is not this way yet where Google is going to show you on mobile, they’re going to show you on like whether webs like 404 pages.

Steve: Yeah exactly everything.

Ezra: Yeah so you’re going to turn all that stuff off.

Steve: Ezra I was hoping we could walk through also one of your email funnels, and how you kind of structure your emails. Is it primarily content emails, mixed in with sales?

Ezra: For which purpose?

Steve: For the purposes…

Ezra: Are we talking about pre purchase or post purchase?

Steve: Pre purchase.

Ezra: Pre purchase?

Steve: Yes.

Ezra: So I would say the most effective pre purchase campaign goes like this, you opt someone in, right? And then over the course of a week you send them three pieces of presale content that lead back to your product, and that presale content could be social proof, it could be authority, or science, it could be an engagement article, or whatever it is, it’s a piece of content that then leads back over to your solution, right? Then the next week or next week to 10 days, if you’re me you’re doing a webinar following, because I believe that live event selling is the most effective way to sell any product on the internet, physical products, ecommerce products, information products.

Like we really believe heavily in the use of live events to sell, and so you’re inviting someone, “Hey we’ve got this event happening where we’re going to tell you XYZ thing,” and it’s kind of just more presale content leading to your solution except that you’re doing it all live on a webinar, or you’re using a prerecorded webinar through something like Stealth Seminar. And you’re getting them excited about it, you’re inviting them to it, you’re getting them the opt-in for it, and then you’re actually running that event, and then you’re sending them out the replay, and you’re doing a whole webinar sequence.

And then I’d run a half off sale for the next seven to 10 days, because if you haven’t converted them with your presale content and the webinar, then you’ll get a bunch of more people with the severe discount. Because our goal at that point is you’re in your in your two three weeks in, you just want to see if can acquire a customer, if you can acquire a customer, then you just pull them out of that out responder and you drop them into your weekly content bucket, where you’re just sending them blog posts.

Steve: That’s interesting, I mean this– what you just described is kind of how I run my info product funnel but, for ecommerce we…

Ezra: Info product and ecommerce are the same thing man, you have a subscriber.

Steve: They are, but sometimes the product is not webinarable, so…

Ezra: I disagree.

Steve: Okay, so let’s take your garlic peeler…

Ezra: I think that all products are webinarable, okay let’s take your garlic peeler for example, so I’m going to do a webinar on five gadgets that will change the way you cook or whatever. I’m going to do a webinar on something some– people love to be told stories man, and given solutions to stuff, and then I’m going to– at the end I’m going to elude to the– I’m going to have the garlic peeler be the main thing that I talk about, and then I’m going to say, “Hey you want to get this garlic peeler at a significant discount?”

I mean how does– you look at infomercials, right? The QBC, and the HSN, all that stuff, basically those are just many webinars for that product. They don’t go into all a bunch of story, but any product can have a story told about it, and then be pitched. I mean even if it’s a 20 minute webinar, a 15 minute webinar, even I mean obviously you’re probably going to prerecord it. So essentially what you’re doing is you’re creating a 10 or 15 minutes sales video, if you feel like you don’t have a lot of content that you can create for your product, and you’re sending people to that, but you’re framing it as a live experience.

Steve: That’s interesting.

Ezra: It’s worked really-really well for us; I mean I think that…

Steve: No I’m sure yeah.

Ezra: I think that basically what we’ve been doing is taking all these funnels and all these models that we use in the information marketing world, and apply them to our ecommerce businesses and having great success with it.

Steve: That is good food for thought, yeah maybe we’ll try some– I mean we’re wedding industry, it’s ripe with webinar potential.

Ezra: Oh man, what are you guys selling?

Steve: We’re selling personalized wedding handkerchiefs, we sell linens…

Ezra: Dude you can target people who are on Facebook who just got engaged…

Steve: Yes.

Ezra: And you can say, “Ten ways to make your guests say wow.”

Steve: That is the title of our landing page actually, pretty close to it.

Ezra: No way.

Steve: It is yeah.

Ezra: No way, really?

Steve: It is yeah I mean we followed you instructions to a T, it’s actually “Nine Unique Wedding Ideas to Make your Wedding Extra Special,” it’s something…

Ezra: Oh man I guess I’m pretty predictable with what I suggest.

Steve: And we’re targeting people who are engaged, who make over $50,000, these are all…

Ezra: That’s so funny.

Steve: Ezra reasons.

Ezra: Yeah man I would have a webinar for sure, I would totally add a webinar, I’ll be talking about, “Man, you can personalize these handkerchiefs, you can–” I would go crazy with it.

Steve: So let’s talk about the post sales funnel then, what do you do post sales?

Ezra: Post purchase?

Steve: Yeah.

Ezra: Obviously you want to thank them for their order, and then I recommend having some pre-arrival sequences going where you’ve got a bunch of emails going out before the product arrives to get them excited about it, man you’re about to get this product, it’s going to be the craziest thing you’ve ever seen. Get them super juiced up, like get them really excited, there was a story of this hotel that immigrated pre-arrival marketing where they were like, they know when you’re going to show up, right? They know what day you’re going to get there, and so they send you these videos– I can’t remember who told me the story.

And they’re you sending these videos, “Hey, this is Bob down in that restaurant. Man I’m going to cook you a shrimp skimpy when you get here.” And they got another one that goes, “Hey, I’m Joe” or “I’m Jane from the”– Jane probably doesn’t have that deeper voice. “Hi, I’m Jane. And I’m from the massage therapy lounge and I’m going to give you a massage.” And they basically tripled their sales and their amenities through this pre arrival sequences.

Steve: Huh?

Ezra: And so I use pre arrival sequences to get people excited and to frame the fact that we’re going to be asking them for a review, and to lower my returns and stuff like that. And it really works. So I have a couple of pre arrivals emails going on. Then I’d have a social promotion where I’m like, “Hey, here’s your chance to win a $50 Amazon gift card” or “here is your chance to win xyz thing. What we want you to do is take our product and grab your iPhone, and take a selfie” people love taking selfies, “of you with our product and upload it here or have it in Instagram and hashtag this.” So you get social proof, like people are using your product, so holding your product. They don’t have to be using it, just holding it up, and smiling.

Then, we have a little banner on the bottom of our product detail pages with little feed of all the people who are using our products. And then we get a higher conversation rate on those product detail pages because we got social proof. So I put a social commercial in there. And then I would a survey go out page, can you tell us what you liked about our product or didn’t? And then I’d have couple of emails going out trying to sell them other stuff.

Steve: So does that happen at end, where you try to sell them other stuff? And do you put on them on like this– like in your product is a consumable right?

Ezra: Right.

Steve: So do you have emails going out every month asking them to the refill and re-buy? Or–

Ezra: We’ve got automation based on what product they bought. If they didn’t buy this product then we try to get on a webinar for another product. Like we’re doing some pretty sophisticated stuff, but I think that most important is that you get them excited first, then you try to get some social proof and you frame the review, then you get them take your survey, and then you start selling stuff. You don’t have to sell them right away, they’re– you can take some time.

Steve: And let’s talk– you talk a lot about split testing on your blog. So what have been some of your biggest split testing triumphs when you’re optimizing your site?

Ezra: We talking about for the blog or for the ecommerce store?

Steve: For your ecommerce store.

Ezra: Okay. For the ecommerce store, I would say have unique selling propositions in image format under the cart button. So that’s like the fast shipping and great customer service and whatever. Have images right under the cart button because you want to get people to click that. Have a video, a start video, on your product detail page just above the fold and easily visible. What else? I’ve got a whole course dude on my blog where we talk about conversion rate best practices for ecommerce store, it’s free.

Steve: I will link up to it for sure.

Ezra: I think I did like, I don’t know, an hour of stuff, of split tests on that, conversion rate optimization for ecommerce stores. And actually I’m going to release one on the Shopify blog pretty soon too. So it’s sort of an updated version of the one that’s on my blog.

Steve: Okay.

Ezra: It’s not quite ready yet, but in a month or two here on the Shopify blog we’ll have– kind of release all of our split tests for ecommerce which will be an updated version of the one that’s currently on my blog.

Steve: Okay. And last question here. Let’s say you’re just starting out, you had no idea what you’re doing, what is your first plan of attack to get customers? I think I already know the answer but…

Ezra: Well, if you look at– I wouldn’t even be looking at Facebook ads or anything, right? Because my first plan of attack would be to start an Amazon business.

Steve: Okay.

Ezra: And then market. Because I think that it’s just so easy to get sales over there man. It’s so easy dude. It’s like really incredibly– the opportunity is incredibly large right now on Amazon. And you need less money because you don’t have to build your own platform. It’s sort of just built for you. So all you have to worry about is marketing the product, but there’s no design and development or anything like that.

So you basically have to purchase your product and then market it through Amazon, which is all about getting reviews essentially. Right now, what we’re heavily investing in is Amazon businesses because the opportunity to grow them to six figures and beyond, it’s the easiest way I believe to do that right now is physical product retail. So that’s kind of…

Steve: That’s funny you say that. I have actually started restructuring my chorus myself to focus more on Amazon in the beginning.

Ezra: Oh yeah, you have to man. Because if you’re on ecommerce, you’re a new ecommerce retailer, you need some time to start to understand keyword research and it gives you a way of making money while you’re just getting started and understanding how ecommerce actually works.

Steve: So how do you bundle people over from Amazon over to your own site?

Ezra: It’s quiet difficult actually. What you do is– the only real way to do it is to have package insert in your product that goes out from Amazon that sends them over to your site for some kind of sweet offer like another $1 coupon or something. But the way that we do it is we get a lot of our Amazon buyers from Facebook. And so we get a lot of leads that way.

And all of the leads that we’re getting from Amazon, we don’t really have– there’s not great way to get them to become leads for your own website. Basically a lot of people once you start getting successful on Amazon, a lot of people start searching for you and that’s helpful, so you get leads that way, because your brand is well known. But at this moment there’s not a great way to take all the buyers from Amazon and get them over on your own platform.

Steve: So do you actually run Facebook ads for your Amazon products?

Ezra: Yeah, same way I just told you about, through pre article, through long form sales page that then leads over to Amazon.

Steve: Interesting. What’s the incentive of doing that versus sending them to your own site?

Ezra: The incentive of doing that is to grow the Amazon business, and also because Amazon converts like ten times as well as your own website.

Steve: Okay.

Ezra: So it’s an easier way to generate conversions. And most people are going to not be successful at driving contextual traffic to a presale page to a long form sales page for their product right out of the gates, while as with Amazon they could be pretty successful, because it’s quite easy to get someone to buy an Amazon product.

Steve: Cool.

Ezra: Conversion rates are like 30% higher. It’s ridiculous.

Steve: And I assume you’re running the Amazon sponsored ads on your…

Ezra: Yeah, but you can’t get a whole lot of volume from that.

Steve: Yeah.

Ezra: You know.

Steve: Yeah.

Ezra: It’s kind of tough. You have a business that’s making a 100 grand a month and you’ll only be able to spend like four grand on Amazon sponsored ads. So it’s a little bit difficult right now.

Steve: And since we’re talking about Amazon. So what are some of your tactics for getting reviews?

Ezra: Well, I have a whole course on that. But essentially what we do…

Steve: You got a course for everything

Ezra: Well, not really but I have a course for that. What we do is it’s a pretty straight forward sales funnel, where we are giving our product away at a steep discount. We’re selling our product at a really steep discount with the goal of getting a review. We say, “Hey, please try our product for $2. And here’s where you can opt in to get a coupon for that.” And then they opt in, they get their coupon, they buy the product at a discount and then we follow up with them through email and say, “Hey, we hope you loved our product, would you please gives us a product review, tell us what you thought of it.” And that’s essentially the funnel.

It’s a little bit more complex than that. We use re-targeting, all kinds of stuff. But basically we’re selling our product at a discount in exchange for– to get it out there into the market place and get people to find out about it and to get their feedback on it. And then those reviews help us to rank organically in Amazon. And then we get organic sales from Amazon which is the life plan of our business.

Steve: And how many reviews are you shooting for during this initial process?

Ezra: I think in any new product you want to get up to a 100 reviews. If you can get up to 100 reviews, you’re probably going to get yourself up to ten to 12 sales a day pretty quickly. And I think once you’re up to ten to 12 sales a day on Amazon, then your product is starting to take off. We have a product now it’s doing like 100 sales a day, it’s got like four, 500 reviews. So I think that first 50 to 100 reviews is really important on an Amazon product.

Steve: Okay. Sounds good…

Ezra: Obviously they should be good. Five star reviews.

Steve: Of course, of course. Dang Ezra we’ve been chatting all over the place.

Ezra: Yeah, sorry. I’m a sort of– my voice is going out on me here, I got– I’m hoarse.

Steve: Yeah, we’re good. We’ve been talking for 40 minutes. You held off for this long and so it’s pretty cool. So let’s end it right here. If people want to find you and then find all those tutorials that you mentioned, where can they find you?

Ezra: Yeah, I’ve got those courses– thanks man, on smartmarkerter.com. It’s just like it sounds smartmarketer.com and there’s a blog post on there, instant courses and stuff like that. And also if you get on my email list over there, you can find out when I do stuff like events, and masterminds and things.

Steve: Okay. I was on your website earlier and none of the courses that you mentioned were actually listed on there. So is it all just part of your email sequence or…

Ezra: Once you click on the courses tab, on the main tab menu, there’s a button called courses and it’s got the conversion best practices course as well as the content marketing course. The Amazon course where I teach about Amazon products is a course that’s published by another company that doesn’t– it’s not available all the time. They do this launches for it. So it’s not available right now that Amazon course. But those other two courses the content marketing and the conversion courses is all there.

Steve: Awesome, I’ll definitely send people that way.

Ezra: Cool well thanks man. I appreciate it. This has been Ezra and Steve from My Wife Quit Her Job.

Steve: Signing off man.

Ezra: See you.

Steve: All right take care. Hope you enjoyed that episode. The world of ecommerce is constantly changing and it’s important to understand how to leverage content based marketing to create a brand and a mind share for your business. And I love how Ezra broke everything down very clearly, and how he creates these funnels for his pro-age cosmetic company. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode64 and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review.

Because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show very easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month, for more information about this contest go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

063: How To Make Millions Selling Wholesale To Retailers With Bill D’Alessandro

Bill D'Alessandro

Want to grow your business into a large, national brand? The best way to expand quickly is to sell wholesale to large retailers.

Today, Bill D’Alessandro shows us the exact process he goes through to sell wholesale to retailers and the main differences between selling to a business as opposed to a consumer.

Because most shopping carts do not handle wholesale very well, he’s also developed his own software to specifically help run a wholesale business.

His “made for wholesale” ecommerce service can be found at OrderCircle.com. If you are interested in selling wholesale, Bill is offering everyone 25% off his service!

What You’ll Learn

  • Why you need to be selling wholesale in addition to your website
  • How to find wholesale clients
  • Whether you should jump right into wholesale or sell online first?
  • What your sales should be before you jump to wholesale
  • How to land a big fish retailer
  • How to price your products with wholesale
  • How does billing work for wholesale sales
  • What are some standard payment terms for wholesale
  • What you should set your minimum order volume to
  • When to go after the big boy retailers
  • How to get visibility for your products on the shelves
  • The main differences between selling wholesale vs selling directly to the consumer

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast; today I’m excited to have Bill D’Alessandro back on the show. Now if you don’t remember Bill he was featured in episode 48 where he talked about how he purchased an ecommerce business and doubled its sales in just one year, now it turns out that he’s actually man of many talents and he’s got a lot of projects on his plate. Now we’ve had a lot of ecommerce entrepreneurs on the show at this point, but we haven’t really discussed some of the intricacies of the selling process. Some online stores like mine cater mainly to the end customer, but there are others that sell wholesale and serve as suppliers to other retail stores.

Now because Bill is an expert on the topic of selling wholesale, I actually asked him to come back on the show to talk about how to create a profitable wholesale shop. So with that welcome the show Bill. How are you doing man?

Bill: I’m doing good, thanks for having me Steve.

Steve: Yes, you run a whole bunch of ecommerce stores and do they actually all sell wholesale today?

Bill: Yeah. So when I started we were just selling B to C– business to consumer, shipping via post office and UPs and everything, and as we got bigger you know, we have our own brands and this is more applicable if you have your own brand versus if you are retailing other peoples brands, but as our brand started to get bigger we realized that in order to get really big we had to go into retailers. You can build a big business online, but if you want to build a really big business you really have to be in stores. And what I discovered is that is a whole different ballgame going to the stores than it is selling direct consumers online, and so hopefully I can share how to do that.

Steve: Yeah.

Bill: How to take your brand from an ecommerce store to an ecommerce store that also sells wholesale and get your products in the retailers.

Steve: Yeah, I’m actually interested in this myself because with my store, I didn’t really want to deal with the quality control and then kind of like the buying and selling of huge quantities of goods to retailers, so you know what was your primary motivation just for selling wholesale in the first place? Like can you factor in the decision making process versus the pain in the ass factor?

Bill: It’s close, it’s close, it is the pain because there is more pain in the ass factor for sure is bigger orders but there is more pain in the ass factor, but really the reason I did it is I wanted as I mentioned before I realized that you’ve got to do it to get big. Like I’m sure everybody is heard of Bonobos, the brand of mans pants, and now shirts and everything else. Andy Dunn the founder of that, if you know, kind of read in his writing in the early days of Bonobos he was pounding the table you know.

We are going to build a men’s wear brand online only. Men didn’t want to go on the stores to shop, this is the new way that men are going to buy pants, and he was right and they did very well, but they topped out at about 10, 20 million in revenue. And then about, I guess it’s maybe 18-20 months ago now, Bonobos announced that they had taken funds from Nordstrom and that Bonobos would be in all Nodstrom nationwide.

Now they not just in Nodstrom they are in other big box retailers and they are also opening their own guide shops all over the country. So I think the realization that Andy had of Bonobos was, we can build a nice company online only, but if we want to build a global brand, a big business you just have to go to retail because that’s where the people are, you know, they are walking through just go into Nordstrom just watch all people walking through.

Steve: Right, okay, and in terms of the progression note you probably would still recommend going B to C first and then once you get tapped out there then start going B to B.

Bill: You’ll have to, you’ll have to.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Because you won’t have, you don’t have to, but it would be easier to go to a big box store and say hey, I analyze our ecommerce records for the past year; we’ve done 1,000 orders into the city where you are located. You know I have customers already here that like this product and want to come in and buy from your stores. Because they are going to want to see some proof that you are– because they get pitched every day, so they are going to want to see some proof that you are legit, and having a track record is one way to show that and plus it’s just you can get started and I know you’ve done a number of blog posts like how you can get a Shopify store going for like I forget the numbers– like $86 or something.

Steve: Yeah.

Bill: It’s going to be more work to do that wholesale. So yeah I would start B to C first.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So this is really for– if you are doing B to C you are doing well and you want to kind of know how to take yourself to the next level, wholesale might be a way you can do that.

Steve: So what is considered doing well, and what do some of the larger retailers kind of demand from you?

Bill: So a lot, I would recommend, so let’s just take for example my products.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: We do sunscreens, shampoo; you know moisturizer, all sorts of things like that. They are organic, so Whole Foods is a big sort of target account for us. That would be the home run smash it for us.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Wholesale we’ll just kind of use Whole Foods as the example, but you can search it to your favorite retailer in there. So we approached Whole Foods a couple of years ago and they basically immediately told us to get lost, and the reason they told us to get lost is because we didn’t have any proof. We had online sales as I mentioned earlier, but they said we don’t know does it move at retail. And so what we did over the last two years before going back to Whole Foods is we got in to a bunch of Mom and Pop retailers.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And so we did Mom And Pop first and it’s tempting to go elephant hunting and call Whole Foods, but it’s much easier to call Bob’s organic market on the corner because you can just walk in with your product and Bob is probably there. And then you can go, hey Bob, check it out this is pretty cool and he can make a decision right there. With Whole Foods and big box stores there is a whole structure like you can only submit at certain times during the year, like there is a whole presentation, you know there is a million decision makers, but if you go a local shop they could just write you cheque on the spot.

I’ve had, I’ve walked into stores locally here in Colorado, we have a sunscreen product called Ski Bum. So I have walked in like Ski shops, out of brokerage and stuff and with a case and they are like yeah, that’s cool and they literally take money out of the cash drawer and hand it to me, and put the thing on the shelf right there.

So it’s just easier if you start with the small guys and then after you’ve been in the small guys for a while, what Whole Foods is going to want to know and really what any retailer is going to want to know is does this sell through, does it move it.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So like the key thing is you will say yeah, we are in 100 stores and then the immediate follow up question will be how many of them reorder, and how often do they reorder and how many cases do they move you know, what’s the velocity?

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So when you go Whole Foods you can go hey we’ve been in a 100 small retailers for the last two years, they each move about two units a day or three units a day or a case a week whatever it is, and then you can get Whole Foods some proof that your product actually does move through.

Steve: Okay and when it comes to getting these Mom And Pop guys just from listening to your answer, it implies that you actually had to physically go and visit these guys one by one.

Bill: Yes, unfortunately.

Steve: Okay, all right.

Bill: I mean you don’t have to, it just massively easier. The other way to do it is to email first, follow up with a phone call, and then send them samples.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Which you can do and will and can work, but it’s so- you know it a longer sale cycle and you are going to send a lot of samples and never hear back, but chances are for whatever you are selling there are a couple of stores in your town that will carry it. So I recommend if you are going to start, start there.

Steve: Okay and I understand that the pricing is got to be different when you are selling in these large volumes. So can we talk a little bit about how pricing works?

Bill: Sure, because you are selling in large volumes and also because they have to make money, when you go to wholesale a typical margin retailer wants to make is 50%, we’ll just call key stone pricing.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So take your retail pricing divide it in half and that’s what they want to buy it from you for.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Some Mom And Pops, maybe that’s negotiable they’ll take 40% off. Some perishable food items like bread will drop even as slow as 30, but for almost for all durable goods, I mean my products included, shampoo all that stuff is 50% off retail.

Steve: Okay, so that implies that you actually have to be making at least 4X profit on your own stuff then to consider doing this?

Bill: Exactly:

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So my rule of thumb for everything is if your product for it to be viable at wholesale your gross margin has to be 75%.

Steve: Okay and it also implies that since you are doing large volumes like your margin of error is a lot smaller too?

Bill: What do you mean by margin of error?

Steve: What I mean by that is if you have like a bad batch or something that can just really screw you over.

Bill: Yes because they will send it back to you.

Steve: Okay, and are there any sort of terms such as like you give them the product and they only pay you for what they sell or is it only typically they buy a big batch from you?

Bill: It depends, it depends.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So what you just mentioned is called, will be called consignment. So typically when I go into the store what I do- the standard way to do it would be what’s called net thirty.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Which means that you send them the product, and they pay you thirty days later. And they do that because they want to have some time to get their money back out so they don’t have so much money sitting on their shelves.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So it’s a financing thing for them. So what they want to do is, and so this is different than B to C, when you sell online you swipe all those credit card right way, you get the money, you ship the product, not so with wholesale. They’ll say great, they’ll send you an order and they’ll say send me an invoice and go ahead and ship it. And so what you will do is send them an invoice that says here is what you bought, here is how much of it and we shipped it to you and here is the payment due date which is 30 days from today, almost standard, almost always 30 days.

Some larger retailers will try to push you for 60 or 90, net 60, net 90 which is, I wouldn’t agree to unless it was an account you really wanted. I’ve even had of I have a buddy that sells auto parts to O’reilly and they pay net 365.

Steve: Wow, okay. That’s crazy.

Bill: Which is outrageous, I’ve never had anyone else doing that, but most likely it will be net 30 and even Mom And Pops would want net 30.

Steve: Okay, so I mean that means you are like a bank, you are loaning money so to speak. So do you have to do a lot of due diligence for these Mom And Pops shops as well.

Bill: You can, so if they ask you for terms or they say hey, we want payment terms, that means they want net 30. If they ask you for terms you are totally legit trying to go okay, can I have some credit references. And they are used to hearing that and they are probably have a sheet that is already printed they’ll just hand it to you, and there will be other vendor of theirs, so you just call and you go, hey does Bob’s Organic still pay on time all the time, and if they say yes I extend them the terms.

Steve: Do you do any other due diligence like, like do you take their dones numbers and do a look up or anything like that?

Bill: No, it’s just; I mean it’s not that much money, right?

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I mean if it’s wholesale they are going– if it’s a lot of money it’s probably is a big order its Whole Foods and they are going to pay, but if it’s a Mom And Pops it’s just not that much money typically.

Steve: So what’s the typical minimum order that you force them to make?

Bill: So that’s, that’s– I’m glad you mentioned that because this is one thing that you can do as a wholesaler to kind of take a little bit of the power back for yourself, because if they are going to be getting 50% off retail and they are going to get 30 days to pay and everything in exchange the whole point is that they are buying in volume, right?

Steve: Right.

Bill: And so you– it is your right to enforce a minimum order. This is highly negotiable; I would say I usually start at about 250 bucks, as a minimum order.

Steve: Oh, that’s really low okay.

Bill: Well, for a Bob’s organic store it is, but at Whole Foods you might say it is $5,000.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: You know, but Whole Foods would not order less than $5,000 because it would not even move the needle for them.

Steve: Right.

Bill: What you want to do or you might say instead of using a dollar amount you might say your minimum order is one case, or some quantity unit that is easy for you to take off the shelf and mail them, because what you don’t is them going like yeah, send me one shampoo and one moisturizer and one of these and I’ll take 50% off of all of it. Because that now it’s looking like a B to C order and you got to pick pack it and it’s a pain in the butt and they are getting 50% off, and that’s not really the agreement that you had. So either enforce the minimum dollar amount or a minimum quantity.

Steve: Okay, and then once you’ve sold them a case is it up to them to reorder or do you kind of have to remind them to reorder? Like how does it work?

Bill: Well so just like you know with your B and C orders you know you do email marketing, you do all these things to remind them, it’s even worse in wholesale because they’ve got I mean, think just like walking in Whole Foods, how many products are on their shelves you know millions. And most retailers don’t have good systems to know what they are out, so they could very easily be successful with your product and sell it though rapidly and just be out and not even know.

Steve: Yeah, exactly, yeah I can see that happening.

Bill: So you’ve got to be on top of them, so you should know and this is again so you should start paying attention and say in a store like Bob’s Organic shop, how often does my product turn over. And if you know that small stores like Bob’s typically order every three or four weeks and you haven’t heard from Bob in five weeks, you need to call him.

Steve: Okay, so that implies that you have to keep track of the orders of all of your customers in order to be successful?

Bill: You should.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: You could probably be successful despite that, but that is a very good best practice to get them to reorder.

Steve: Okay and all right, so let’s start, let s take a step back a little bit, how do you actually find these retailers that are going to willing to buy from you? Like what’s your strategy for finding people?

Bill: So it can be tough right? Because you are saying like, okay, how many places sell shampoos and you know Borough Colorado or whatever. It’s kind of hard to get your arms around you know who would be interested, who is still in business like who carries stuff like this, and so I have a really good sort of track for this.

So everybody if you’ve got a brand you probably have some competitors, so the products that are most like yours. The easy trick is to go to your base competitor’s website and click on the store locator like. These are all the stores that are carrying your competitor’s products. And call them all because– and if they are carrying your competitors products they are probably interested in products like your competitors and like yours. So you just got a pre-curate it already trimmed down list of all the stores in your area or nationwide, you know filter by zip code or whatever data into your product.

Steve: Okay, that sound like a really good strategy, so then after that you go visit them and bring your products along or?

Bill: Yeah, go visit them if they are local, the other thing you do is call them, send free samples and a brochure. So for wholesale it’s really good, a lot of people will go, do you have any literature? It’s really good to make up like a one and a half by 11 page or like a couple of pictures of your products, hit the highlights and the pricing.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So like a leave behind, like a brochure.

Steve: So one thing I was a little bit curious about you know, normally when you go B to C you kind of advertise, you do paper click and sort of thing, is that happened in wholesale? Like are you going to attract other retailers through advertising?

Bill: That’s pretty non-viable in wholesale.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I don’t know anyone that makes paper click or traditional advertising work. The way that you find new retailers besides the trick I just mentioned is to go to [Inaudible] [00:17:06]

Steve: Okay.

Bill: You know because buyers will be there cruising the booth saying hey, what products they want to pick up. The other thing you can do is hire a sales rep or a sales rep group. These are you know, independent companies that represent a lot of products, so they might you know, my case might not represent a brand of granola bars, and my brand of shampoo and brand of milk. And so when they go into Whole Foods they check on all those place in the store. They make sure none of them are sold out, talk to the buyers at Whole Foods about all of them, non competitive you know, none of these products are competing. So one person can touch Whole Foods and also they’ll go hey, my brand of milk is in this one store maybe I can get my brand of granola bars in there too, and those people are typically compensated with 15% commission on the wholesale price.

Steve: Wow, okay.

Bill: Yeah, so as you mentioned you got to have big margins to go wholesale.

Steve: Okay and then how do you– let’s say you’ve gotten a whole bunch of Mom and Pops shop on board, how do you know when you are ready for like the big guys? Like the Whole Foods or the department stores?

Bill: When the Mom And Pops are reordering regularly.

Steve: Regularly meaning like, every month in quantity like in your case for your products?

Bill: Predictably I would say.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I mean because, you could sell them, I mean maybe you are them a three months supply and they reorder every three months. Maybe you are selling them a month supply and they reorder every month, but when they are reordering predictably and regularly and they are happy with it that’s when you know you’ve kind of hit this fit where people walk into a store see your products and buy it off the shelf, and that’s when you can go to a bigger chain.

Steve: Okay so the predictability from that I’m hearing is almost more important than the absolute quantity it sell, is that accurate?

Bill: Yes, that’s accurate and it depends also by category, so like in Whole Foods for example in some categories if you sell two units a week and three units a week that’s good. In some categories it should be two to three a day; it depends on what you are selling.

Steve: Okay, yeah of course. Another question I had was let’s say you get in one of these Mom and pops shop, how do you ensure that your products actually gets some visibility on their shelf? Like is there something extra you have to do?

Bill: Yeah, so that’s– I mentioned the reps before and you can hire reps for this or you can do this yourself.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I would recommend you go into it when you know ship it, I would ship it to him and if they are local show up a week later and look for it on the shelf, and make sure it’s you know arranged correctly to make sure they didn’t give you a crappy bottom shelf or something. And if it’s on the bottom shelf and looks bad, go talk to Bob and go, hey man, this is not going to move down here you know, it’s been our experience that mid height are better, you know, our product sells better, and I want you to sell this through, like we are in this together. I want you to make money on it, and my best advice to you is how to merchandise it correctly, that’s called merchandising, how it’s presented in the store.

Steve: What about like displays, so does this all kind of factor into the negotiations? I’m just trying to get an idea of how all this works.

Bill: So I would say the negotiations, there is not usually a negation, the negation is do you like this products enough to put it your store, and then there is usually zero negotiation on price because it is 50% off period. And sometimes like if they feel your price is too high, your retail price is too high they won’t tell you that, but after the fact you go in the store you’ll see they’ve dropped it and they are accepting a little bit less than the 50% margin. But if they think your retail price is really too high they’ll go, no the retail price is too high, I don’t think it will sell, I’m not taking it in at all.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So there is typically no discussion on price, and there is typically no discussion on terms either. They like if you are like pay me up front, they are like we got net 30 from everybody else, what are you going to say? You know.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So the negotiation is more of a sales process of get it in and then the key thing to remember in wholesale is in B to C you are kind of done once you’ve sold your product. In wholesale you are not done until they’ve sold your product because if you sell a case to them and it doesn’t sell through and they’ve got to throw it out or they eat the cost of that case like yeah, it didn’t cost you any money, but they are not reordering.

Steve: Yeah, I was just thinking like let’s say I had like a slightly more complicated product or let’s say I had one of your lotions and I really wanted the store to kind of really express the value proposition, and so how would I– would it just be kind of like a negotiation on how to get like a display, like you know when you walk to like Wal-Mart or something there is like a display right front and center.

Bill: Yap.

Steve: Do you kind of, is that rampant to the negotiations or the terms in order to get one of those things up there because…

Bill: Yes.

Steve: That floor space is limited, right?

Bill: Yes, so it’s kind of again the Mom Pops and the Walgreens [Inaudible] [00:21:55] here.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Mom And Pops typically they will see themselves on the same team as you as soon as they agree to take your product in.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And so at that point I typically approach it as hey, this sells better if you do a, b, c, d and if you want a display like the anchor display you are going to have to provide that, but they will typically put it out if you push.

Steve: Oh, okay, okay.

Bill: However when you go to Walgreens like walk down the isle of Walgreen, just to be out on end cup, just to have your peanut butter or whatever it is on the end cup is 20 grand a week or something at Walgreens in addition that you pay them you know and if you want display of something, there is a whole different negotiation when it comes to big bucks.

Steve: Okay, okay are you at any big buck store right now with your stuff?

Bill: We are working on the Whole Foods right now.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So hopefully with the year we will be in Whole Foods and that’s, like when I say within the year that’s I mean we’ve been working with them for three months and its probably– it’s a year process or six month between the time they say yes and the time you end up on the shelf at Whole Foods.

Steve: Okay, and how many Mom And Pop shops did you have your stuff in prior to deciding when to apply?

Bill: Pushing a hundred.

Steve: Pushing a– oh wow, that’s a lot, so that’s a hundred stores that you’ve visited and have been talking with and have keeping track of their sales of.

Bill: Yes.

Steve: Okay, well that’s a lot of work, okay.

Bill: Yes.

Steve; How do returns work if they don’t work your products, do they just send it all back to you?

Bill: So again negotiable, a little bit, and when I say negotiable on this stuff my recommendation to people would be to have a policy. So like you just come in and go here is our policy. If you are selling something that is perishable sometime stores will say hey if it spoils on our shelves you got to take it back for a full refund which sucks. Some stores will say if it’s not perishable they still can return to you if it doesn’t sell, you know if it’s been on their shelves for 90 days and they hadn’t sell they can return it, but you also it’s, that’s not– it doesn’t happen all the time, so you could say sorry no returns and that would be fine. But if the store gets– like a consumer returns it to the store the store generally eats it, or they will sometimes they will bill it back to you also. It kind of depends on how the store already does it.

Steve: Okay, what are some of your terms just an example?

Bill: So we don’t take returns.

Steve: Okay, okay.

Bill: We don’t, because it is- you know not perishable but it’s semi perishable, we want to encourage them to kind of order lean and move it through and that’s another thing too. It’s much better to sell someone a one month’s supply and have them reorder every month than to have sell them a three months’ supply and they reorder every three months, because it gives the perception that’s it’s moving.

Steve: I see, interesting.

Bill: And you know, they order from you more often and that they think of your brand as a brand that sells for them and moves. You know if you only get to do something every three months it’s easy to forget.

Steve: So when you go in there you actually don’t even try to sell them a long term supply? So you aim for like a month?

Bill: Yeah, aim for a month.

Steve: Okay, that makes you work more though, also right?

Bill: Yes, but it’s better for the long term.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Because it will move through faster and also if you try to sell them a long term supply they won’t do it, because they don’t know you, you are new, why would they a take three months gamble when they can take a one month gamble.

Steve: But once you’ve been working together for a while then all bets are off, right?

Bill: Yeah, then all bets are off if you want to, if they want to take it more you know I would kind of resist if someone wanted to buy a six months’ supply from me for the reason I just mentioned but-

Steve: Okay, another kind of thing that just popped into my mind is do you actually advertise your products even if they are sold at the retailer? So let’s start with that question first I have another one after.

Bill: Yes, so and again Mom And pops and big bucks are going to be different. You go into Walgreens and they might require you to spend like 50 grand to market and say available at Walgreens. And you will see those ads if you watch TV sometimes you will see like such and such and then at the end there is a Walgreens logo, and some branches do that because they want to sell through at Walgreens and for Walgreen too, maybe they know they are in 100 Walgreens in Florida and they want to be in 6,000 Walgreens nationwide. So they’ll run ads in Florida to try to convince Walgreen that it sells through.

Steve: Interesting, okay, how do you do it, do you advertise your own products?

Bill: So we no, we really don’t, because we are not, I mean we are not like at national brand scale, I mean we are not Coca-Cola and if you are listening to this you are probably not either. So you probably don’t have to. What I have offered occasionally in the past like when I’m talking to a really big account like Whole Foods, we are here in Borough and we trying to get them to try us in all of their Colorado stores.

So what I said to him is look guys, we got a ton of customers already in Colorado, they buy online already, if you roll us out of all the Colorado stores, I’ll do an email blast, I’ll pull every one that’s ever bought from us and shipped it to Colorado and say hey, now available in Whole Foods go and get it at 20% off this week. And the buyer will be like, oh cool first of all they are blown way that I have the capability to do that because they are used to, they are used to working with you know, people who are to that sophisticated, but you know they think that’s cool.

But really the fact of the matter is to your benefit. As I mentioned before it’s not– your job isn’t done until it’s moved off their shelves, so anything that you can do to move it off their shelves is helping you sell because that means they are going to reorder and they are going to roll it out in more stores. And plus everybody that buys it from them, there is a chance they come back and buy it directly from you, and I meant to say this at the top, but this is really one of the other main reasons I do wholesale is I see it as marketing.

Even if you break even, even if you don’t make a dime, even if you move thousands of units and don’t make a dime, that’s thousands of units of your products that are out in the world now, and you probably put your URL on every label. So hopefully some fraction of those people are going to come back and buy direct.

Steve: That actually leads into my next question, so you are selling to the consumer and wholesaler here right? And so does that mean that you can’t undercut them on price, like how does it work?

Bill: So you typically you want to greet anything like that, but it’s kind of widely regarded as a dick move. So if you are like, if you are selling online which you probably all are if you are listening, and you are a small brand in smaller stores they probably won’t care, but if you start to go into like some smaller chains like ten stores or whatever, they all start to ask you, do you sell online and you’ll say yes and they’ll start to get squarely.

And then immediately what you want to do before they get too squarely you just see their face kind of turn upside down as soon as you say you sell online, and you are going to say right away before they even have a chance to open their mouth don’t worry we are here to map pricing and what map pricing is minimum advertise price, which means that they have to sell it for the same price as you sell it for as all the other retailers sell it for.

You know, we don’t undercut you, to undercut them would be what’s called a channel conflict meaning you are trying to jump out in front of them with the consumer. So you have to make some promises, and they might make you sign something but it’s very hard for them to enforce it or for you to enforce it for that matter.

Steve: Okay, because you know in your own story you have the infinite ability to drop the price right? Since you are making four x and they are only making two, right?

Bill: Right.

Steve: So okay, so let’s talk a little bit about the logistics here because based on our conversation thus far it seems like it’s a pain in the butt to sell wholesale, right?

Bill: It is and it just works a little bit different too.

Steve: So the advantages I can see also is that you have a consistent revenue stream unlike a consumer who just buys it once and disappears, these businesses will hopefully consistently buy from month to month from you, so it’s a more predictable revenue stream, is that accurate?

Steve: Yes.

Bill: Okay, if you know if your stuff moves.

Steve: If your stuff moves of course, so you know for shopping carts and that sort of thing, do you just use an off the shelf cart to manage all this stuff, or do you have something custom? What do you do?

Bill: So it’s funny you ask because you can’t really, it’s hard to use an off the shelve cart because the process is a little different. So when you buy B to C right, you go, you add the things to your cart and you put it in your credit number, you pay instantly and it ships, but with wholesale let’s say some, a big store says we want to order five hundred units but you only have 510 units in stock, you probably don’t want to sell them 500 units because now you only have ten units to sell on your websites or to anyone else.

So you really need to review wholesale orders before they come in or before you approve them and they are used to that, stores are used to that, they are used to stuff going on back order. So you can’t just blindly accept all the orders that come in because then you could end up in awkward spot of calling them back and going we can only sell you 200, we can’t sell you 500 right now.

So it’s kind of hard because regular carts don’t have approvals. The other thing regular carts– the two other things regular carts don’t have are support for terms. So like I use BigCommerce for my B to C sites and BigCommerce has the ability to do multiple payment methods, but what they can’t do is multiple payment methods only for some people. So if you enable people to place orders without paying for them like you need to do for wholesale, that’s going to enable it for you website, you know for people that come to your website to just place orders and not pay for them at all.

Steve: Right, right.

Bill: Which you don’t want. So you need different payment methods for wholesale, and the other thing for wholesale is you might have different pricing, like Whole Foods might get 50% off Bob’s Organic shop might get 40% off. So you need to be able to show different prices to different prices to different, you also need to be able to enforce minimum orders.

Steve: Okay, that implies that everyone has their own account right? And they log in and they get a completely different experience on your shop.

Bill: That’s kind of what you need yes.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And so as a result I couldn’t find, it’s very hard to this on off the shelf cart, so I actually just launched a software to do this, it’s called Order Circle, and you would think of it really as Shopify For B to B commerce because you’ll find that if you start selling wholesale very quickly most people are emailing you orders, calling orders, faxing orders and it turns into a giant logistical mess. So we need a software internally to run it, so we built Order Circle about nine months ago internally, we’ve been using it to run all the wholesale for all my brands for most of 2014, and just in the end of 2014 we opened it up to other brands to sign up.

So it helps you know, manage all of your customer accounts, it helps you generate those invoices to see how many days left on those 30 days they have to pay you, they can leave a credit card on file that you can charge after the 30 days you know with one click, you can sort and see who is late, you can see who still needs to be shipped, you can also view a customer page, you can see like when the last time was they ordered and how frequently they order. So as I mentioned earlier you can do that follow up, like hey, it’s been too long we should call them. So it’s really designed with this wholesale order flow in mind which most B to C carts are not, not any fault of theirs because it’s not what they are made for, and so we have, we use everything on Order for Circle and it’s really streamlined things for us.

Steve: You know it’s funny, as we kind of doubled into B and B recently, I mean actually from the start we’ve had event planners contact us to buy stuff in bulk and each time what happens is they call us up, and then they place their order that way, so each time it’s a phone conversation so does that imply then with your system like they just go on the website and it’s just all self serve so to speak?

Bill: Yes it can be.

Steve: Okay, okay.

Bill: So there is, they’ll go to you know, nurturemybody.ordercircle.com and they’ll log in and they’ll see their customized pricing you know they won’t know, they only see the one price, but it could be different for different people. So they’ll see their customized pricing, they’ll be able to see all their old orders, they’ll be able to reorder with one click…

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Etcetera and that goes into your, into the order circle back end, so you can see all their orders and then if they— but if they still call you and I’m sure you guys will have you know, I’m sure you have with event planners people who don’t to do that, or they want to order on the phone, there is a back end for you where you just open up orders while they are calling, you can key the order in on their behalf, all their information is already saved. So whether the customer inputs it, or you input it, it all ends up in the same place in the same flow.

Steve: Okay, and I’m just curious, I mean you pose that inventory dilemma which we actually have all the time. Someone comes in and they want to order like almost all the units we have in the inventory, so how do you kind of manage that with your shop.

Bill: So we have in Order Circle, we have built in order approvals. So when someone places an order and when the customer logs in and places an order, it’ll say your order is pending and it sends a ping to one of my sales reps and says hey, your– and depending on which sales rep is signed into their account. Hey, new order login and check it out. So the sales rep logs in and they can see the total inventory on hand and how much was ordered, and then they go, and they decide hey we are going to accept this order as is, we are going to reject this order or I need to edit this order, and you know take it from 500 units to 200 units and then approve it.

Steve: Okay, and so in terms of just your own operations with your store, do you kind of reserve a set of inventory just for B to B versus B to C?

Bill: Yeah, I don’t do it that formally, I just kind of know, I have like kind of a danger zone for like how much I like to keep on hand for B to C, and then I know anything above that is kind of game for wholesale.

Steve: Okay and in terms– since it’s like the wholesale side of the business it seems more predictable, do you just order when it comes to time for ordering inventory based on the months projections?

Bill: Yeah, yeah, I try to guess and some it depends on how long your lead times are. Some wholesale customers are cool at ordering [Inaudible] [00:35:54] in a month. It depends, if it’s not a seasonal product, now if it’s a wedding they probably won’t be cool with that, but sometimes you know they are just going to put your widget on their shelf and it’s not seasonally specific or it’s not anything like that, and there is a one month lead time, they might not like it, but that might be okay.

Steve: Okay, interesting and so Order Circle manages all this stuff as well?

Bill: Yeah, so you can see all the– everything you have on hand, everything you have pending, what’s kind of available to sell and we are also launching soon a sync with Shopify so you can keep your whatever inventory in Shopify is up to date with Order Circle and vice versa, so you never sell anything you don’t have.

Steve: Okay and so just looking at your store kind of like a high level you have wholesale sales, you have B to C, and then you also have Amazon, right?

Bill: Correct.

Steve: Okay, and then all those just kind of tie together and you sell on all channels just full blast.

Bill: Yap, so it is Order Circle basically is like another cart, so I think if we sell on BigCommerce, we sell on Amazon, and we sell on Order Circle.

Steve: Do you find that your retail customers, do they kind of eat into your online sales, or they are just completely separate channels?

Bill: You know, I think we are not big enough, you know and I mean and I’m too afraid for that to happen, I think you would need to be you know a national brand. There is so many people who have not heard of Nurture my Body in America that I think is additive. I really don’t think– the person that is in the store and is going to grab some shampoo is probably not the same shopper that is going to buy some shampoo in the internet, I don’t think.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And hey, even if it- even if it’s slightly cannibalized it, it’s worth because the overlap is not a 100%, if the overlap is 5%, I still expanded my total market.

Steve: And in terms of just overall sales, is the wholesale portion of your business a lot larger than the rest of it?

Bill: No, not yet which is good because it means my margins are better, no I think wholesale it depends, so for Nurture my Body organics and skin hair care products we do, it’s probably 10% right now as wholesale but growing because we really-

Steve: Okay.

Bill: You know we just started in earnest you know a couple of years ago, but for Ski Bum which is a wind bum protection sunscreen for your face, something that you really want to kind of grab while you are on the slopes right, you forgot sunscreen, that is 90%-95% wholesale.

Steve: Oh, okay, but at the same time you are still driving like paper click traffic and other advertising to your own website, right?

Bill: Yes, yes.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And they kind of exist really independently.

Steve: Okay, and then is the plan to grow the wholesale business so that one day it’s larger than the rest of yours, like what’s the overall strategy?

Bill: I think that will happen just because I think the ceiling on the wholesale business is higher than on the B to C business. I mean look at– I mean when you look at ecommerce, ecommerce I think the numbers for 2014 are not yet, but for 2013 I think ecommerce was like 11% of total retail sales, which means Brick and Motor retailers are 89% of total retail sales, when you think about it that way. So if you restricting yourself to ecommerce only, you are taking yourself out of 89% of the market, just you are not even addressing.

Steve: I’m just thinking like as an individual business owner there is only like finite amount of resources that you can allocate, and it sounds like this B to B stuff requires a lot of legwork.

Bill: It does unless you use good software.

Steve: Right, and just like how do you allocate your time– like how are you allocating your time?

Bill: So I take– I have a full time sales rep who I hired, who works for me and reps my brands only, and she goes to stores and that’s been good. But then we also have a wholesale section on our website that says, hey if you are a retailer we get leads for this, people would say hey, I’ve been a customer direct for years and I love it, I own this store and I’d love to carry your stuff. I own a saloon or whatever it is and they are like they just submit the form and then we picked up accounts that way too. So if you definitely have mentioned on your B to C site that hey, put in the photo of wholesale information that takes them to a form that says, hey fill out you know how you are and then you follow up.

Steve: Interesting, cool that’s definitely something I’m thinking about looking into and maybe I’ll check out your software as well. Hey Bill we’ve talking for 40 minutes, so where can people find you if they have questions on selling wholesale?

Bill: So you can always find me at rebelceo.com and I have a contact form on there it goes right to my inbox, or if you want to check out Order Circle, you can go orderCircle.com. And if you are a My Wife Quit Her Job listener, we’ll give 25% off forever, so all you have to do is sign up and just reply to the sign up email, and I’ll give you the discount.

Steve: That’s awesome, that’s a generous offer, does that apply to the owner of My Wife Quit Her Job also?

Bill: It does, are you a listener?

Steve: Sweet, sweet, all right Bill, hey man thanks a lot for coming on the show again, I learned a lot.

Bill: Sure, thanks Steve this is fun.

Steve: All right take care.

Bill: See you.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode, while our online store primarily focuses on the consumer, we also have many event and wedding planners that have very similar characteristic to a wholesale customer, and overall I learned a ton about the differences between B to B and B to C from talking to Bill to today, and I hope you did too. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode63 and if you enjoyed listening to this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review.

Because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month, for more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

062: How Nellie Akalp Started CorpNet.com To Help Entrepreneurs Launch Their Businesses

Nellie Akalp

Nellie Akalp was the founder of MyCorporation.com which she later sold to Intuit for 20 million dollars. And today, she runs CorpNet.com which specializes in helping small business owners create their businesses.

She’s an expert when it comes to the legal and logistical aspects of setting up a business including the formation of corporations, legal permits, LLCs, you name it.

In this podcast interview, Nellie teaches us how she got started and how she managed to create 2 multi million dollar businesses from scratch.

In addition, Nellie was kind enough to offer MyWifeQuitHerJob.com readers 10% off any service.

To redeem the discount, click on this link and use coupon code: MWQHJ.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Nellie got the idea to start CorpNet.com
  • Why Nellie didn’t call it day after making 20 million on her first startup
  • How and why Nellie’s strategy has changed with CorpNet.com from when she started MyCorporation
  • Why Nellie has taken a much more personal stance with CorpNet.com
  • How to stand out in a sea of similar competing businesses
  • How to launch a million dollar business with 4 kids
  • How to juggle a large family with running a business
  • How Nellie validated her business before investing a lot of money
  • How Nellie utilizes social media and blogging to promote her business
  • Why Nellie reduced her PPC spend for CorpNet.com

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m excited to have Nellie Akalp on the show. Now, Nellie was the founder of MyCorportaion.com which is a business that she eventually sold for $20 million to Intuit back in 2005. Now after making 20 million bucks a lot of normal people would just call it a day, but Nellie got back on her entrepreneurial feet and started CorpNet.com which helps entrepreneurs start their own businesses and this business is now a multimillion dollar business as well. Now I’ve had a lot of entrepreneurs on the show but here is what stands out about Nellie in my mind at least.
For one thing she has four kids which are her life and spending more time with family was actually one of the big reasons she started to start her own business in the first place, plus her husband is her business partner. Now does this story sound familiar to you? And with that welcome to the show Nellie, so happy to have you today.

Nellie: Thank you for having me Steve. It’s a pleasure.

Steve: So I am curious myself you know, after making 20 million bucks what’s the story behind kind of starting copnet.com which I understand is a very similar business.

Nellie: I was too bored to retire early and I was too passionate and I decided to start it all over again, and really completion is what really drives me, a good challenge is what really drives me and frankly I love the do it yourself business startup industry, I’m good at it. I stated back in 1997 and I thought you know, this is a great challenge to start all over again in 2009 and come up with you know similar services, but you know now we are in a different landscape and do it all over again and challenge myself and see if I can land on top again, and here we are.

Steve: So did you take any breaks after the sale, or did you just kind of jump into it?

Nellie: No, we sold in 2005 and when we sold we decided to take three years off. I was also under a non-compete in that I couldn’t do anything for about three years. So I decided to take that time, focus on my then three growing children, my family and then we decided to have another one along the way, and then after my non-compete run out in 2009 I was crawling out of my skin, so I decided to start CorpNet.com.

Steve: Did you have kids when you started MyCorporation or…?

Nellie: We actually did not. MyCorporation.com was founded in 1997 and back then Phil and I were just actually married, we had just gotten married back in September of 1997 and we were both in law school. And we lived in two bedroom apartment and we founded MyCorp out of our two bedroom apartment, and really put everything we had in it and really there was no risk for us because we had nothing to lose, and then along the way we had our twins in 2001.

Steve: Oh, twins.

Nellie: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: Yes, my first were a set of twins.

Steve: Wow! Wow! So you know what’s really funny about this is I used to promote MyCorporation.com. Is CorpNet.com essentially the same business?

Nellie: It is, it’s essentially the same business just different people, different time frame, and you know different owners.

Steve: Okay, And then I’m just curious, what the differences that you’ve seen in starting CorpNet versus back in the day when you started My Corporation, what are some of the differences?

Nellie: So when we started MyCorporation.com it was in an era where it was at the birth of the internet and when we started CorpNet the internet was you know at its maturity and we starting during the age of the social media era, and when we started Corpnet.com we were actually at the height of a recession in 2009. So the landscape was much different for us, back in 1997 you could put up a one page website, you would get linked on the search engines. There was no Google. You know we were dealing with Laicos [ph] and EarthLink and…

Steve: Right.

Nellie: NetScape and AOL and Yahoo and you would just literally, you know put up a one page website and you would get indexed really quickly and the orders started rolling in. I mean you didn’t have to have a credit card type of mechanism on your website. People would just leave their credit card numbers on your answering machine. So it was a different landscape, you know we didn’t have a ton of competitors back then in the online incorporation industry, so it was a much less competitive landscape for us. And it was easy to you know, build the business up and really you know, start making money and the dough stated rolling in really quickly for us, whereas in 2005 when we launched CorpNet.com I was dealing with a whole different ball game.

I had to you know deal with hundreds of thousands of competitors that had now you know gotten hold of the idea of starting businesses online and offering different types of– going after different angles of providing do it yourself services such as the one we provide even you know, free services. And then you know I had to deal with my previous company that I’m now competing with in addition to LegalZoom.com, which everyone refers to as the 800 pound gorilla and the household brand, they have done an excellent job marketing themselves.

So it was a complete different landscape for me and you know I followed my heart, I followed my gut and I followed my mantra which is and has always been there is plenty of business to go around for everybody if you have a model, if you have a niche and if you niche yourself and market yourself properly. And I decided to come out and brand myself as a small business expert who’s done this several times, and has started and sold multiple companies and has also sold a company to a publicly traded company. And by doing that and coming out and launching CorpNet in a very saturated market, you know we were again on top and we did it the right way, and I consider myself, you know, one of the big players out there.

Steve: You know one thing I noticed about CorpNet.com, I went on the website and right from the center is a picture of you, and so it feels a lot more personal to me than some of the other legal zooms and Mycorporations out there was that your intention?

Nellie: Yes, it was. I really wanted people especially small business owners and entrepreneurs to connect with me at a very personal level, and it actually carries through to the way I engage on the social mediums with my friends and followers as well. I’m very personable with my clients, my followers, my fans, and I’m very consistent in doing that because I think we are in an era whereby if you are familiar with that whole zero moment of truth concept about– with Google, you know you can’t hide behind your company. You have to engage with people, and that’s what clients we are looking for, and that’s how we differentiate ourselves from our competitors.

Steve: So does that imply that if I were to call or get on the website I could actually have access to you if I signed up for CorpNet today?

Nellie: Oh, my goodness, so I don’t know if you are familiar with Andrew Warner, he runs the Mixergy podcast.

Steve: Yeah, I know Andrew, yeah-yeah,

Nellie: So if you’ve actually seen my podcast interview with him, he actually challenged me and while we were actually doing the podcast he called here and…

Steve: Is that right?

Nellie: Yeah.

Steve: And the answer to that question is yes, if you call and you specifically ask to talk to me and if I’m in the office you’ll get me, you’ll get through to me.

Steve: Oh, wow!

Nellie: Yes.

Steve: Okay, so I had some questions written down here about why you would a start a competing business, and how you could possibly succeed in such a saturated area, but it sounds like you are standing out with CorpNet by just your whole personality so to speak. Is that kind of accurate to describe your strategy here?

Nellie: I would say it’s my personality, I mean I don’t like talking about myself and tooting my own horn, and that’s where you know, but I feel that people connect with me because I am very genuine and I’m very sincere in my posture, and I truly love doing what I do, and it’s really been something that I’ve been passionate about since a very young age. You know entrepreneurship and having a business for yourself is not in my opinion for everyone, you know. You have to have the stomach and the– in my opinion you have to have the stomach and really the patience to want to do it yourself, and to be able to be so organized and motivated, to bring that motivation from within.

And so in my opinion it’s really not for everyone, but it is for those who can really motivate themselves, they can be organized and be able to make themselves excited and to be able to create, and to really–really not be at the mercy of wanting to get guidance or you know direction from anybody else, and are willing to do it themselves. And in addition to that it’s just you know, in my opinion it’s that drive that I have and what drives me is interest, curiosity, and that passion I have about learning and trying new things and really-really finding out what others are doing and really helping them blaze their trails, because that’s what makes me excited is when I see someone else being as successful as I am, in my opinion I have done what I’ve needed to do.

Steve: Yeah, you know there is no doubt that you’re very successful in what you’ve done and I’m just curious for myself, like I have two kids and you have four, and my two kids are already occupying almost all of my time, like I have to kind of find time in the nights and that sort of thing. It sounds like you are very actively involved in CorpNet, so how do you kind of juggle the four kids and the business?

Nellie: You know I take it one day at a time, because you know it’s a challenge and I’m not going to sit here and you know paint this rosy picture of, oh you know, we have the perfect family and the perfect kids. You know my kids are, kids are kids, and I have two kids that are teenagers, so-

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: They are pushing back right now and they are pushy you know we are in this era of social media with Instagram, Facebook, Twitter, texting and face timing and you know my daughter pushes me and challenges me on a daily basis. My son is a football player and he’s a complete athlete, so you know he’s got girls following him all over the place and you know they give mea hard time when it comes to just kind of settling down and doing their homework.
And you know at the end of the day I just take a deep breath, I meditate and you know, they know who the boss is and that there is time for playing and there is time where we all have to get serous because at the end of the day mom has her mommy time and moms got to work to provide for the family and I you know I treat my kids like little adults and I always talk with them, and I always try to communicate with them and keep the lines of communications open because you know, what they have and the privileges that they get to have– it’s all a privilege, but they wouldn’t have those if mommy and daddy weren’t able to work.

Steve: So would you generally try to keep your weekends free for the kids and the family?

Nellie: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: Weekends are specifically for family and friends and just pure fun. I keep my work at work, and I’m very-very– you know one of the things about me is I’m a very– I’m an A type personality, so I’m organized as you’ll ever get. At the end of the day there is zero emails in my inbox.

Steve: Wow!

Nellie: And my desk is clear with everything I’ve had to do for that day, and this has been something that you know I’ve done most of my time that I have been an entrepreneur is that you respond to things timely, and you get things done as they come across your desk. And that really helps with staying organized and staying afloat and you know, I try to do 80% in 20% of the time, and I follow that 80-20 rule and it works for me.

You know I come in here around nine or ten o’clock in the morning. Sometimes I break it up, I come in, in the morning really early after I drop off the kids, and then I’ll take a break, I’ll go to the gym and then I’ll finish the day up with working a little bit more. Some days I’ll just drop them off early because drop off is by eight and I’m in the office by eight, and I finish by three. Everyday I’m normally done by about three or 3:30 which is the time that I need to pick up my kids from school.

Steve: Nice, okay, it sounds very similar to the schedule my wife has. I mean that’s one of the reasons we started, so my wife could get that flexible schedule to be a personal taxi driver for our kids, you know.

Nellie: That’s exactly what- a personal taxi driver, and sometimes we get called even while I’m on a podcast or an appearance, “Hey mom, I forgot my book or text book or my gym clothes, I need you to drop it off,” and for me it’s an honor you know, because kids they group so fast you know. I look at Nadia and Nicholas who are 13 years old right now, and I kid you not, it’s like I miss their baby years, and I probably have just a few more years with them before they are off to driving themselves to school and off to college.

Steve: I know, I know.

Nellie: So in my opinion it’s a privilege to be a parent, and that’s my utmost priority in life and then it’s my business.

Steve: And that’s one of the reasons why I like you so much Nellie.

Nellie: Oh, thank you, well, the feeling is mutual.

Steve: So a lot of the readers, I mean not readers– listeners out there, they want to start their own business and I teach a class on how to do this, and one of the things I kind of tell them is to try and stay away from really saturated areas unless you have a really unique value proposition. So would you advice people out there to and you know starting corporations and helping people start businesses is kind of a very saturated niche, right? You mentioned LegalZoom and Mycorporation. So do you– what’s your thought process involved in going after a saturated niche, and would you advice this for other people out there thinking about starting their own businesses?

Nellie: I think it’s a case by case scenario and you really hit the nail on the head because my business CorpNet.com is in a market that’s as saturated as it gets. I mean what a small world that you used to promote MyCorporation.com.

Steve: Yeah.

Nellie: I mean that’s as saturated as we get, and then in my opinion the answer to your question would be to– if you’re really thinking about going into a saturated industry, I don’t want to say, you know not to do it, but if you are going to do it, you better have a plan and you better have a plan and be able to fall back up on a backup plan. So not only have a plan but a have a backup, and you better know your numbers very well and stay close to your numbers because at the end of the day it’s all about the numbers and your analytics, and really if it’s going to be a business that’s going to make you money, you know.

And in addition to that, I mean passion of course you know I talk about passion and how whatever it is that you do you got to be passionate about it, but if your passion lies in launching a product or service that’s in an extremely saturated market, then my suggestion is to test it out and see what sort of a commitment you are going to be getting from ultimately the potential clients that are going to be buying your products or services, because if they are going to ultimately write you the cheque, you might as well test
it out with those people who are going to be ultimately writing your cheque and supporting your business, so…

Steve: Okay, can we talk about CorpNet specifically? So what was your plan? How did you validate your business before you are starting and what was your back up plan? That’s the three loaded question there.

Nellie: So with CorpNet and truly, there is no BF about this, we started CorpNet because of my boredom, I was bored, and I was crawling out of my skin. My husband was not ready at all to jump back in, and I really-really wanted to start all over again. And I had tried everything from a clothing line in addition to dabbling in some you know fitness types of businesses, and I often found myself sitting at my friends businesses and trying to excite them about building their business.

So when my non compete run out I literally went to my husband and said I got to get back into this you know because this is really where my heart and passion lies. So we went online and we searched for domain names on the internet, and there was not many available. Inventory was really low. So we came up with the shortest name possible which was CorpNet seven letters, two syllables.
So we decide to go with that name, launched it, and really-really thought that we could launch a business following old models and old behaviors, and really follow it to the T as to how we started our first company, soon to realize that what worked then would not work today, and what worked then would not work now.

Steve: Let’s talk about that. So the year is 2009, what’s your strategy for getting customers in the door?

Nellie: Today well, I can’t give all of it out because I don’t know who’s listening, and most of my competitors you know follow me very closely, but again you know our strategy is we take a very-very strong social media strategy with CorpNet.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: And it’s all content based.

Steve: Okay, so let’s– can we get some examples? So when you mention social media that encompasses a lot of things, so what do you focus on? Is it Facebook, Twitter, blogging, what’s your– what have you been focusing on?

Nellie: All of the above.

Steve: All of the above, okay.

Nellie: All of the above. I mean I have a very-very-very strong, you know stand, a strong-strong presence across the board in every small business related website ranging from Mashable to TechCrunch to Huffington post, Entrepreneur INCs, Small business trend, all business, Forbes, Fresh books, you know, I write for the majority of the blogs out there. In addition I have my own blog, startup starting line, which really serves as a place for entrepreneurs to come and whatever they need, whether it’s motivation, inspiration, tips on how to start a business, tips on how to market their business.

Anything and everything as related to small business, they can come there and they can find really great tips. My blogs is one of the highly read blogs out there right now, and in addition to that you known, I run my own brand Nellie Akalp and under Nellie Akalp, I speak a lot. I’m an author and I’ve written several books that are in the process of being published, and I speak nationwide you know as a blogger, as a motivator and then you know I do my own you know, social posts on Facebook, on Twitter, Google plus, you know anything and everything you can thing about.

I try to do, I mean even from the stand point of running a small business and giving my ideas as to on my spare time for example what do I do? And so just last week I was on this real estate blog you know. So I try to stay very active and stay very consistent with my social media efforts, but I also I’m not picky you know, I think that arrogance can really-really bite you big time you know in a negative way.

I’m very humble and every opportunity that comes across I take it you know, and I don’t say no, I mean if I’m not here, if I’m not travelling or speaking or you know have another commitment, I will take on the opportunity and I will participate in that opportunity, because my motto is, you know, I was once that small and people gave me chances. So I’m going to give it back, I’m going to pay it forward, I’m going to pay it back to somebody else you know and right now you know I’ve made a very strong brand for myself and you know, I’m in a very-very highly frequently visited outlets, but I stay true to my core and I stay true to who I am as a person.

Steve: Yeah, that’s a really great attitude to have, and a lot of times you never know, you know someone who’s just starting out may become big someday as well and so-

Nellie: Yes, I always say don’t bite the hand that feeds you.

Steve: So you mentioned a lot of things, now if I were to start out with a business, which one of those outlets would you kind of focus on first, and which one’s would you kind of put off till later?

Nellie: You know as a small business owner as a startup you know, in my opinion for those people who don’t have a lot of you know money to start a business with, you really want to start it on a shoe string budget and go after you know types of marketing that really doesn’t cost you much. So in my opinion you know, start with Facebook, start with Twitter. If you are you know someone who is good on camera you know, why don’t you start by posting some videos of you yourself talking about your products and services and create a You Tube channel for yourself.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: I mean there is a ton of things that you can do that don’t cost anything, you know start a newsletter, you know if you have a base, if you have a customer base, so have your hands on you know network of email addresses that you can market your products and services to, you know start that way. Another option would be to offer your services, you know by speaking somewhere for free you know, network with people. I mean back in 2009 when I started, I would just go to trade shows and you know, start networking with people without purchasing a booth, or you know paying those horrendous types of dollars in marketing ourselves. We started very-very-very lean and made some mistakes along the way, and learned very quickly from them.

Steve: Okay, so how did you get your first CorpNet.com customer?

Nellie: My first CorpNet.com customer was through paid advertising.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: Brand advertising on Google.

Steve: Okay, so let’s talk about that a little bit.

Nellie: Which was a big mistake by the way.

Steve: It was really? So okay, let’s talk about that. So do you use paper click today?

Nellie: Very minimally.

Steve: Interesting.

Nellie: We were at one point probably spending about a 100-$150,000 a month Steve on paper click advertising. Again this is something that we learnt very quickly, in that again what worked then will not necessarily work now. And what we realized is that I have such a great following and such a huge following from a social media aspect that CorpNet has really created a brand for itself.
So my New Year goal was to cut my advertising budget to literally 1% of what it was last year. And not only we’ve increased revenues and units last year, but we’ve also increased our bottom line and increased our profitability and profit margin as well.

Steve: Interesting, so with paper click, we run paper clicks campaigns and they are profitable, so when they are profitable there is no reason not to max it out, so does that imply that your paper click campaign started showing diminishing returns?

Nellie: Again you are– you can’t compare paper click in my industry to paper click in your industry you know.

Steve: Sure, of course, right.

Nellie: It’s two different ball games and in our industry you are dealing with hundreds of thousands of people that are offering similar services to what we offer, and they drive prices high you know, by competing over key words.

Steve: Right.

Nellie: So we decided that it just wasn’t cost effective to us, it’s not that it doesn’t work, off course it works and it brings you the traffic, but at what cost? You know and that’s really the question you have to ask yourself, is at what cost are you willing to spend money on paper clicks? For us we decided that there was a ton of other ways that we can bring traffic to the site at a much less costly way than paper click advertising.

Steve: Okay. So to make up for the lack of paper click traffic, what did you guys focus your efforts on to make up for it?

Nellie: We focused our efforts on increasing our publicity out there, our public relations, our networking, again putting more focus on content and building out content and publishing it on the internet.

Steve: Okay, okay and then public…

Nellie: And content creation.

Steve: Content creation on your own properties or just spread around on all the other properties that you kind of listed earlier?

Nellie: A little bit of both.

Steve: Okay, I mean I can tell you now just you know before I didn’t know a whole lot about you prior to this interview, but once I started looking around and just looking at your competitors, I have come to realize that CorpNet.com, I feel a lot better about your business because you are so friend centered. It feels like a lot more personal than some of the other services which would incline me to use you as opposed to someone else, and I think that was your goal because you’ve done a pretty good job at that.

Nellie: Yes, that was the goal and you know in addition we really don’t hide ourselves, you know. We are very-very intuitive with our clients and you know we are constantly engaging with our clientele and asking for clients to share their experience about CorpNet with other people that are considering starting a business. So you know if you haven’t been on our review sites you may want to check out the raves that you know people talk about CorpNet.

Steve: You know, and I mentioned I have promoted a lot of these type of businesses in the past because I teach this stuff, and I had kind of stopped over the years because I have gotten bad reviews from people who I referred over, and so I kind of stopped all together.

Nellie: Yeah.

Steve: It sounds like that’s what the industry kind of needed, someone who is more personal who would actually be more actively involved in helping someone start up a business so-

Nellie: Yes, and you know Steve, really I want to touch on something that you just brought up, you know any company in my opinion is going to have a customer that may not be satisfied with their products and services. And at the end of the day it’s how you deal with that client to make them whole and make them feel happy, because I think clients, even unhappy clients at the end of the day will become happy as long as the service provider took the necessary steps to really validate their dissatisfaction with whatever it was that they were having or feeling, and what it turned out like? How did it end?

So you know CorpNet had– most of the time we have really happy clients, but there has been times where a client may have been dissatisfied with our products and services, but for me and what differentiates us from the rest is how we deal with that client, and how that client is dealt with. So you know if I get a not so happy email over the weekend, every email comes across my phone, and I see it, I will personally respond to that client and I will make sure every step is taken to make that client happy at the end of the day.

Steve: Yeah, and often times once you resolve that they became raving fans of your business, right?

Nellie: Every time, every time.

Steve: Yeah. Okay, I want to switch gears a little bit because this question has kind of been on my mind. Now, your husband has always been your business partner, right?

Nellie: And my best friend.

Steve: And your best friend.

Nellie: Yes.

Steve: Okay, so I’ve worked with my wife for the past eight years, and let’s just say that it hasn’t always been smooth. So how do you work…

Nellie: We’ve thrown tables at each other FYI. I mean we are best friends, we are business partners, but it doesn’t mean that we always agree.

Steve: Yeah, what are some of the methods that you use to kind of work effectively with your spouse, like especially when you kind of disagree on some sort of direction or strategy?

Nellie: Okay, so working with your spouse again is not for every small business owner. For Phil and I it works because we are both only children and our relationship started when we met in college, finding that we had similar interests. In fact we graduated you know, both under the same major and then decide to pursue law together. So we had very similar interests and the foundation of our relationship was we met as study buddies you know, as classmates.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: And what works for us and now as married individuals, married for over 18 years, been together for over 20 years, having been parents of four children is a lot of hard work, a lot of therapy. I told you, I’m very honest, a lot of therapy and you know what I’ve realized is that when I actually met my husband, I didn’t love him as I love him today you know and how close I am to him today. But really it’s about validating each other’s feelings, leaving egos aside, and really when you are a partner in a business working towards one goal is really to look at things as to what’s in the best interest for the business, because I’ll tell you, Phil and I are very different people. He is a very nice individual, you know very-very nice.

Steve: So does that imply…

Nellie: I, you know most people would refer to me as the bad cop, him as he good cop, but I’ll tell you this, if things get to a point where he needs to step it up, he will step it up you know. He just doesn’t come out that way when you first meet him, but at the same time he– I would not be here if it wasn’t for my husband you know, and I– he’s my best friend, he’s my biggest supporter and he’s my greatest supporter, my biggest critic.

He always pushes me out of my comfort, but it’s respect. We respect each other, you know, when you work with your spouse there has to be respect. You have to be working in linear type rules where you are not above each other, and frankly at the end of the day you got to look at what’s best for the business. You can’t always win you know, and that’s what comes first.

Steve: I never win, I don’t even know what it feels like so. So actually one thing that you said was very key, you have to work linearly which means people– each of you have to work on kind of separate projects and be the owner of that project, that’s kind of what has worked for us. But just the other day we had this argument about how we were going to run our Valentine’s Day promotions, so sometimes it still happens. That’s the only thing we fight about is the business, we don’t fight about anything else.

Nellie: Yes-yes linear roles in a business especially when you are running a business with your spouse in my opinion is my first tip if you want to have a successful business running it with your spouse, and in addition with that have a healthy marriage. My second tip is that you have to keep it separate. You got to keep your business separate from your personal life because ultimately it’s going to creep in if you let it creep in, and for us we mandate date night every week [Inaudible] [00:39:43] because we are together literary eight hours a day at the business, and we have meetings that are together with different team members.

So we are always in work mode when we are in the business. So we try to keep work at work and our home life very separate because otherwise you literally become business partners, and that intimacy, that feeling of love and passion kind of gets a little bit blurry along the way.

Steve: Okay, yeah I know, that’s great advice and something that I wish you had told me before I got in all those arguments but…

Nellie: I’m sorry it’s not too late Steve.

Steve: Okay, so switching gears again, so let’s say I want to start a business today, it’s 2015 what would be the very first step that you would have me take to kind of go out and promote and decide which niche was the correct one for me to pursue?

Nellie: My first suggestion to you is test the idea.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: Test the idea, talk to people. Talk to people who– listen everybody is going to come up to you and they are going to give their opinion and two cents. Some people are going to just tell you it’s a great idea because they want you to have you like them. Some people are going to tell you your idea sucks, at the end of the day none of those suggestions matter. You have to go people are going to ultimately write a cheque for your products and services. So test it out.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: If you- if it’s a go and if you are passionate about it, you are going to have to ask yourself, “Am I really cut out for this, am I cut out to have obstacles in the way that come up unexpectedly?” Am I going to have the stomach for ups and downs with the business? Do I have the financial backing to fall back on? And a lot of it goes to talking with your family. If you are having a household that you are have to support, talking possibly to your significant other, to your wife, to your children and really making sure that everybody is in because running a business, starting a business in my opinion is like giving birth to a child you know.
When you give birth to a child, you have feed them at every given minute, you know night, day, middle of the day, afternoon, the business is like that too. When you start a business you have to roll your hands up, and you cannot have your lifestyle dictate that business. That business in its infancy just like a child is in their infancy, it needs that love and care and that you know, day and night kind of TLC from you as the business owner. And if you have that in you then I would say go for it, and then otherwise– other than that would be the legal steps that you have to take to make sure that the business is properly getting off the ground.

Steve: Okay, and then you mentioned, you know, you focused on validating your niche, any particular methods that you recommend? Landing pages, legwork, anything that you could suggest or maybe an experience that you did when you started out with CorpNet?

Nellie: Again you know I would suggest for you to do a competitive analysis out there on what niche, what market it is that you are trying to enter depending on what your industry is and what products and services you are trying to market out there, and you know talk to people, get a mentor, if you have a friend who is a running a successful business. If you know people in the same industry, start talking to them you know.

Steve: Okay.

Nellie: And just to a lot of soul searching fact finding and then come up with a business plan, and a backup plan as well.

Steve: Okay, hey Nellie you seem like a really driven person, but are you influenced by anyone through either a book or presentation, like who’s your idol?

Nellie: Wow! I think for me you know, the entrepreneurship again is something that has you know been in me since a very young age you know. I am an only child, I come from a set of parents that were divorced, so I always had to take care of myself and I always had to, kind of had that survivor mentality, but you know I always align myself with people that know more than me and I can you know take direction from both good and criticism as well.

My husband is my best friend; again he’s one of my idols. I think he is very inspiring to me and in my opinion he’s amazing at what he does, and he has a very-very innovative mind, and I consider him my idol, my best friend and someone that I would probably want to be partners with for the rest of my lie. In fact that’s my rule, I never partner with anybody else, but I love reading books and Tony Hseih, he is the– he’s actually the CEO of Zappos.com. His book really inspired me at the inception of CorpNet.com, and that was something that really pulled me through and really-really gave me a lot of tools and tips as to how I want to model CorpNet and how I want to run CorpNet.

Steve: Yes. It shines through, I mean customer service is everything and it just feels like CorpNet.com is a very– it feels like a family business as opposed to a large corporation so-

Nellie: It is, it is, it is and we like it that way, and we like to continue growing it that way.

Steve: And so Nellie we’ve been talking for quite a while now. I want to be respectful of your time. Should I just suggest that people just dial your phone number to get a hold of you, or are there other ways to get a hold of you as well?

Nellie: Absolutely, the best way to reach out to us is by obviously visiting our website at www.CorpNet.com. You can always reach out to us by calling us toll free at 188-4492-638 or email us to info@corpnet.com, you can visit me on Twitter, follow me on Twitter @Corpnetnellie or @Corpnet, and I will make sure that your business is set up legally and professionally in any state that you want to set up in.

Steve: That sounds great Nellie, thanks a lot for coming in the show, really had a great conversation.

Nellie: It’s a pleasure Steve, thank you for having me.

Steve: Okay, thanks.
Here is what I love about Nellie. She already made enough money to retire when she sold MyCorporation.com to Intuit, but instead of resting on her laurel, she got back on the horse, started another multimillion dollar company with CorpNet.com, and I just overall I just love her passion for helping others. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode62 and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review.
Because when you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this info, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month, for more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mfwifequitherjob.com.

Thanks for listening to the Wife Quite Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.MyWifeQuiteHerJob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

061: Natalie Sisson On How To Create A 6 Figure Location Independent Business

Natalie Sisson

Today I’m thrilled to have my friend Natalie Sisson on the show. Now if you’ve never heard of Natalie, she is known as the Suitcase Entrepreneur, and her story is pretty damn cool.

Since 2006, she left her hometown of New Zealand and she’s basically been traveling the world by living out of her suitcase while running her location independent business. She’s got a popular blog, a bestselling book, a podcast and she is just an all round great person as well.

Enjoy the episode!

What You’ll Learn

  • Natalie’s motivations for creating a location independent lifestyle
  • Why documenting what you do can eventually lead to a steady income
  • The basic tools you need to go location independent
  • How Natalie created over 8 streams of revenue
  • How to have an effective launch of your product
  • How Natalie has attracted thousands of raving fans for her blog and products
  • How Natalie got her first customers in the door
  • How to make your first 1000 dollars
  • How to attract JV partners
  • How to handle payments, bank accounts etc…when you are a nomad

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have my friend Natalie Sisson on the show. Now I first met Natalie randomly when I went to attend a conference in Austin, Texas. Now Natalie didn’t actually attend the same conference, but I ran into her randomly at a party completely by accident and I’m really glad that I did. Now if you’ve never heard of Natalie, she is known as the Suitcase Entrepreneur, and her story is pretty damn cool.

Since 2006, she left her hometown of New Zealand and she’s basically been travelling the world by living out of her suitcase while running her location independent business. She’s got a popular blog, a bestselling book, a podcast and she is just an all round great person as well. And what is especially cool about Natalie is that she is an incredible ultimate Frisbee player which is actually a sport that I really been into for the past decade. Now Natalie specialty is building amazing businesses online that can be taken anywhere, and today I am hoping that she can teach us her secrets on living such an exciting and free lifestyle. And with that, welcome to the show Natalie. How are you doing today?

Natalie: I am doing amazing actually. As we talked about just before we jumped on here. And by the way you have an awesome audio voice. Not that I mean you’re made for radio, but you have a really great voice on audio.

Steve: Well thank you.

Natalie: Look at that, well thank you Natalie.

Steve: So you are already buttering me up for the interview. I am going to throw you some soft balls I guess. So you know, for those of you out there listening who do not know who you are Natalie, what was your motivation for actually living out of your suitcase, travelling the world? And what’s the story behind the Suitcase Entrepreneur?

Natalie: I hope most people listening know who they are. So if they don’t who I am– this is where it started actually. I am Kiwi, so I am from New Zealand hence the accent. And I have been living out of my suitcase now for almost five years. It’s actually going to be– yeah, it’s just over four and a half years now. And my motivation for it was kind of just came about by the fact that once I had a little bit of an online business where I was actually starting to generate some revenue, I said, “ Ha, why not take this on the road? No need to be based in Vancouver, Canada where I was at the time, one of the most beautiful, but the most expensive cities in the world.

And I said, “You know what, I’ve just launched this program and it made me like, “Uuh, a whopping $1000.” For sure I can just keep going with this and then head off to Buenos Aires, Argentina and live there and then live in other places. So it wasn’t– I wouldn’t say it was by accident, but it was definitely by choice. I wanted the freedom to be able to work from anywhere.

Steve: Okay. And did you have like a day job in the beginning at any point?

Natalie: I have had eight years in the corporate world. So I feel pretty okay with the nine to five. You know, a really good experience on the whole but the last couple of jobs have stirred me over the edge. And I am really glad they did because they forced me to get off my back and go and launch my own business. And I actually cofounded a text startup before launching my business.

So I had that nice sort of [inaudible] [0:04:19] the entrepreneurial world, well I wouldn’t say nice because I just got dropped in the deep end and had to figure out how to create a tech company and develop a product and act for Facebook, get financing, get investors, all those things, but it was really great setup for me then launching my own business.

Steve: So is that what drove you over the edge, that startup or…?

Natalie: No. The startup was just a great experience and as I said, a deep dive in into the entrepreneurial world. The thing that drove me over the edge was my last job in London and it was like perfect on paper, it was highly paid, I was head of a new department, I got to setup a new team, I got even a new office, I got to travel around the UK, I got to help doctors become business people. So on paper it was amazing, right, and as I said really well paid. But it was just the organization that was just an old boys club.

There was so much sort of political bias, there was office politics, there was people who would just clop in at nine and leave just on five and nobody wanted to do anything extra. And I just felt everything I tried to do in that organization was stopped by the very people who hired me to do it and it just stirred me now. It’s like it actually made me miserable which is pretty hard to do.

Steve: So did you start the Suitcase Entrepreneur during one of these jobs, or did you…?

Natalie: No, I started during the text startup. So I was blogging and I was doing the online marketing, I was trying to figure out how to use social media to build a business from scratch with zero budget and zero customer base. And I started my own blog at the time around 2009 just because I was fascinated by what I was learning and I thought, surely other people would be interested in what I’m learning.

And surely my main blogging which is quite methodic, people will learn something and I can also interview other people and see how they got to succeed, specifically women at the time, in the tech field where I was like how did they become CEO, how did they deal with this male dominated industry, what else can I learn from them. So that was really the reason behind my blog which is– became my business.

Steve: So it wasn’t intentionally made to make money in the beginning.

Natalie: Absolutely not.

Steve: It was just a document.

Natalie: Yeah. It was just a journey.

Steve: Okay. And you know what’s unique about you is that most businesses have kind of some sort of a home base, but in your case you travel a lot, you are literally in a different country every couple of months. So I kind of want to ask how the heck do you run a mobile business and can we just kind of talk about some of your revenue streams a little bit and how you make money.

Natalie: Yeah, for sure. Well I mean all you need and I talk about this a lot. There is three things you need; electropas smartphone and an internet connection, but more importantly you need a freedom based mindset. So I think the biggest thing that holds people back from just working from anywhere and taking their business on the road is that they are kind of bamboozled by how do you that or what that means. And I think once we get past this sort of constructs of our normal daily routine and what is defined as normal like: you should be in an office, you should be working these hours, you should be off on these weekends– that’s when you really start to make some magic to happen.

So I think for me, once I realized that I could do everything from my laptop, I didn’t need to be in meetings with people, I didn’t need to have a permanent office, I didn’t even need to work the normal five day week, then I was able to kind of runoff and travel the world and set up by business in a way that I didn’t have to be online or always there for it. That’s pretty much all you need, is just that mindset to go, yeah anything is possible. Let’s do it.

Steve: Okay. Does that mean that you are pretty much solo right now? Do you have a team of people helping you out or…?

Natalie: No I have really cool team. So I have a virtual assistant who works 20 to 30 hours a week and I have an online business manager, online freedom manager as we call it who helps with some of the content and the copy writing and the podcasts. So I actually had outsourced a lot. I’ve got a really lovely stream line business so I just focus on the awesome stuff like interviewing people on my podcast, like writing the great guest posts, like being interviewed on other people’s podcasts on Skype and working out the strategies for future launches and the whole plan of the tech for my entire business.

And then I hire contractors for certain projects like for membership sites, for any tech stuff that I don’t want to do, and copywriting from time and time like videographers. So I just hire the right people when I need them.

Steve: Okay. And then would you classify yourself as a kind of like a tech savvy person?

Natalie: I am, yeah. Do you know what? I think I always have been but over the years I’ve been less inclined to like look at all the new stuff and I have just become a deck to outsourcing. So when I first started I had to do everything obviously, I had zero budget and I really loved playing with all these tools, but I have got it down. Right now I have a few key tools that I use all the time and I love, I’m pretty good at working stuff up but where possible now. If that’s not the best use of my time, I just get somebody who is an expert to do it.

Steve: Okay, yeah. That’s completely makes sense. So before we start talking about your businesses, I was just personally curious, what does your day to day look like? Like I see your postings on facebook and you are always out having fun. You just played tennis before this interview. How do you kind of separate your work and your play time?

Natalie: It’s a good day. So yeah, I got up this morning and made myself a smoothie, went off and played tennis for two hours, came back and dived into my 15 day blog challenge that I am about to launch and also a little bit of my freedom planning launch which is coming up in April, then I am here with you and next time I’ll be going on a motorbike ride up across to visit a friend. So I guess I’m very cognizant of what my priorities in life are and for me freedom is my underlying ultimate value. So if I feel I am not getting enough of it, I make a means to get more of it.

Also as I said, I’ve really worked hard over the years to build a team to create really great systems so that I don’t have to be online all the time or I don’t have to be doing everything. And I also have really clear goals, like I have a three year vision for where I want to head, so that just helps me to bring it back to on a daily basis what’s the most important thing I could do today that’s going to make a huge difference.

And so there are some days I work really hard and sometimes when I work weekends if I feel like it, but more recently in the last six months, I’ve pulled back quite a lot to focus a lot more on lifestyle and freedom, and nurturing friendships and spending time with family and enjoying travel for what it is. And that’s just really come out of having clear focus priorities and really great goals and as I said great systems and a cool business.

Steve: Okay, yeah. And we are going to delve deeply into all those things, now I kind of know that you sell a bunch of different products and you make money in a variety of different ways. So let’s talk about first the one that makes the most money for you and then let’s talk about that first.

Natalie: Perfect. So I actually have about eight revenue streams but I am dialing those down because I looked at my 2014 annual review and I was like, “Man that was an amazing year,” but my God, I did way too much stuff. So if I look at it, I have various online revenue streams and offline. Currently the one that makes me the most money is the Freedom Plan program which I launched as my flagship program last year.

It’s a combination of everything I have learnt and applied and done over the last four and a half years in business and I run it once a year. Last year I did it as a pilot which was hugely successful and then I ran the full program, and I’m amping up to have a huge launch this year. I want it to be the one definitive thing I’m known for, I want it to get amazing results from people which it has, and I want to put all my focus and energy into this program for the first half of this year. So when that launch is at [Inaudible] [00:11:29] and my biggest honor.

Steve: So can you talk about this project a little bit. So it’s a purely digital product.

Natalie: Yeah. It is– yes and no. So there are– it’s basically– I went through a learning mastery education person to actually really make sure that I got results of people in this. So I stripped back everything and figured out what do they need to know to build a profitable online business and a lifestyle they love. It’s broken into three parts. It’s very much based off kind of the fundamentals behind my book and what I do. So its starts with what’s your vision for your life, like what do you actually want out of life? Then what’s the business that you are going to build to make sure that becomes a reality and the third part is, what’s your lifestyle going to look like?

Does it involve travel or does it involve more freedom at home? So it’s kind of that three part area that I think a lot of people overlook the travel and lifestyle aspect and they focus always on the business, so they do the other part and they don’t really get clear on their vision. It’s got 11 modules which are video based and audio based, they are very progressive, and also there is weekly coaching with me. So it’s a really nice formation of that plus the Facebook community.

And I have found over the years that all the programs that I run you need to show up live, you need accountability, you need direct access to a great person who knows what they are talking about, just in this case me. And then you need modules that like are progressive and take you through this learning aspect with really great actions that you can apply. So basically people come out at the end of eight weeks with their freedom plan either partly done, fully done or well on their way to making happen, which is all that I am about by getting people to take action.

Steve: Okay. And then so when you run this weekly live class you just run it out of your laptop with an internet connection wherever you happen to be?

Natalie: Absolutely. Go to a meeting, internet, laptop, perfect, so much fun.

Steve: And in terms of just getting people to purchase your product, are you just leveraging your audience from your blog in order to get people to sign up?

Natalie: Yeah. Actually it was really interesting because last year I did this for the first time I ran a pilot; I didn’t advertise it to anybody. All I did was reach out to people who joined my community, told me about themselves and looked like a great fit. So I didn’t do it to everybody but I get a lot of people replying, “So cool to be in your community. Here is what I do,” because I was just on that you know, where are you at, what are you looking for?

And so for the few people that just seem like a perfect fit, I said, “Hey, I am actually launching this product program. You’d be great for it, no obligation but here is the sort of outline.” And I hadn’t even produced it at that point, and I literally had a payment button on that page. I was like; if you want to sign up go here. And I got 35 people which was five more than I wanted without any external advertising which is a first for me, just very small into a couple of people in my community. And then I…

Steve: When you say community, is that your email list? Is that your Facebook group?

Natalie: It’s actually just people who joined my email list, yeah.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Natalie: And people who are in– I have another revenue stream as my highflier cup which is established entrepreneurs who are earning pretty good money, and I wanted to look more at their mindset lifestyle in business. So I approached a couple of those people in there as good piloters, but the rest was really just this type on the show, that kind of approach which was really cool and very personal. And then I launched it fully in September after I got feedback from those people and for that I did a full launch. So I did Facebook advertising, I went out to my community, I had a VIP list, I did webinars, I ran webinars with affiliates, I had affiliates promoting, I did blogs, I did interviews. It was very full on.

Steve: So let’s go into depth about your launch. I mean you mentioned this full on launch. What is involved in a full launch and which aspects of the launch are the most effective? Like if you had to choose, it sounds like you did a bunch of stuff so…

Natalie: I love launches, right? I have been doing them for quite a while now. Every single time they never meet my expectations and every single time I learn more and more about it, like I have really high expectations. So I am not saying I haven’t had great launches and this was my best year, but there is just so many moving parts and every time you run them you think, I could have done this better, I could have bought this [inaudible] [0:15:20], I could have done a better webinar here etcetera.

So I guess the bits that proved the most effective because I’ve done a breakdown of the launch were definitely running webinars. It’s not for everybody but I love them. I love live training, I love live coaching, it’s where I’m at my best, it’s where I give my best value. I love being able to answer those questions directly, like an open book I can answer almost anything, if I don’t know find the answer for you. And that’s why I think people really buy into who I am and my style and my credibility of what I am about, and that’s where I convince most people whether they want to join me or not. So the webinars have worked really well.

Steve: How did they find you to sign up for the webinar?

Natalie: So I had around 1500 people registered through my existing community of email lists. So my one list is the most I’ve ever had on a webinar, like crazy nuts.

Steve: That is a lot of people.

Natalie: It is a lot of people. I mean, that’s how many registered, they were around 600 or so live which is so crazy.

Steve: That’s a lot too, yes.

Natalie: To be a part of that many people on a New Zealand internet connection, always fun with a loud hungry cat in the background which was quite amusing because I was house sitting at the time. And then the second one we actually ran to people who were not in my community at all, through Facebook advertising. So we did a non-targeted fans and community Facebook advertising campaign and got around 600 people registered for that although [inaudible] [0:16:38] 300 turned up live.

That definitely wasn’t successful– as successful in terms of conversions because these people didn’t know me from a bar of soap. But the great thing is that now my community and since then some of those people have gone on to buy stuff and become a much more integral part. So when I come around to launching it this year, it’s highly likely that many of those people might be like yeah I am ready.

Steve: Can we talk about your Facebook campaign real quick. So how did you set that up and how did you– like how is it structured?

Natalie: So I hired an awesome lady who is actually in my highflier club and has become a good friend, but she is also extremely savvy on Facebook advertising so shout out to Marie Corner [ph]. And we just worked through what I wanted to achieve like my goals, how many registrations, how many people to the email list and worked through the kind of wording and the copy, and the imagery and what we really wanted and then she just set to work doing that.

I’ve done Facebook ads myself in the past but honestly, they are such a gold mine now and they have also become pretty complex and I think you really need to know your stuff. So I handed over to her, I said, “This is my budget, here is how much I am going to invest in you and you just go and make it happen.” So we used customized audience, downloaded my email list, did a really good job of that and targeted the likes of all the people that people think about when they are probably thinking about lifestyle entrepreneurship and me. So Tim Ferriss, Marie Forlio, Chris Decker and just a bunch of people that were really doing well that people would be searching on as well.

So yeah, it was great. It is also what I’m going to be using again in this launch because as much as I love and hate facebook in terms of advertising and targeting the right people, it’s a fantastic tool and vehicle to really get granular and know exactly who you are targeting and who is in your audience. And I know my audience demographic really well, so we can get very specific on that.

Steve: So I’m just curious, how much were you paying per sign up?

Natalie: We got it down to pretty amazing, actually to I think for the regular person, so it was anywhere between a dollar twenty and three dollars per sign up. And for somebody to come on to my email list, I think that’s more than worth it. Like this program is $1000 in value, so if you are spending $1000 and just one person signs up through that period then you’ve made your money back. But it depends, we actually had even less on clicks, on just likes and stuff but to actually join into the list and to be part of that or register, it was around that price and I was happy with that because my market and my category and industry is really competitive.

Steve: I think we are in the same market, which is why I was asking. So I have been paying around two fifty to three dollars per sign up.

Natalie: That’s good, that’s really good.

Steve: But the sign up rate is obviously for my course, I guess we are somewhere in that aspect. I sell the course; I teach people how to start eCommerce stores. And so what I do and I was just curious what you do, I send them to this email funnel where I basically teach them stuff, and if they like what they see then they sign up, but the conversion rate for that is a lot less than obviously the people that read my blog already and already know me. So just curious how you kind of track the conversions from your Facebook since they are so much longer term?

Natalie: We actually only tracked the conversions of who registered and then of those who registered, who signup via the webinar. So that’s the only thing we tracked for now. If I was now to track those people and see if they bought anything, that would be interesting as well. I probably should do that. But that is because we were just sending them straight into a webinar from a cold prospect, but I really like the style that you are doing and that’s what we’ll be doing pretty much from this month on, is sending people to get a free starter kit, and going to get all that free information and keep them as warm customers first before they then get information about the Freedom Plan.

Steve: Okay. And then in terms of the actual live webinar when you’re talking, how do you structure what you’re going to say to kind of entice people to sign up for your full blown class in just one session?

Natalie: Yeah. It’s a great question. So I’ve watched– I’ve been to a lot of webinars and I always take notes. And I’ve done a bit of Clay Collins’ training; I think he’s done an excellent job at that. I’ve run a lot of webinars with experts in my community and I always loved seeing how they structure, what they talk about, how they close. I’ve also seen a lot of really bad webinars where people talk about themselves for way too long and don’t give out any value and piss people off.

So I was clear that I wanted to offer a lot of value. I probably offered too much information and left people going, “Gosh, that’s a lot to take in. I think I’ll just use the info Natalie’s given me for the day and go away with that and came back later.” So that was a great lesson learnt. But I’ve structured it through really kind of going through the three steps to creating your freedom plan which is what the program is based around and giving out lots of value adds there and actions they could take, and then in the last 25 to 30% was taking them through what they get in the program.

And this time around I’ll be definitely spending a little bit longer on that and giving it more I guess– it’s not all about promoting it but really being clear on what they get so that people literally have no questions. I kind of changed the gloss over a little, I don’t always like the pitch and selling, but I feel that just through adding value, people will make up their mind and make a decision, but there’s definitely a lot to be said by just being very clear on what you offer and how it differs from other programs and what the unique element is and then obviously having a really short time call to action.

Steve: So I’m just curious myself, so when you say you help people start online businesses, there’s obviously a whole bunch of different classes of online businesses like eCommerce, blogging, selling digital class and that sort of thing. Where does your program tend to lean?

Natalie: Yeah. And it’s a great question, that’s something that is starting to frustrate me is just how many people are moving into this area all saying, “Hey, here is how to quit your job and start a business.” So I would say definitely prioritizing and monetizing yourself. So I work with people who are finding their sweet spot, the intersection between what they are good at, what they get paid for and what they enjoy, rather than starting an eCommerce business, rather than starting an affiliate marketing kind of business. I talk about, how do you monetize yourself and create a business that works around you?

Steve: Okay, that makes sense. So it’s very tailored then to a person’s personality if you mean– okay.

Natalie: Yes, it is. And so it’s not for everybody, right, like I think during– like I do cover off on a lot of different stuff, you know, the basics that you need on a website, how to build a social media community because it’s something I’ve done really well. It’s also about building your brand, but there are many introverts and many extroverts who go through the program who do it in a really great way. So yeah, it comes down to how motivated are you, how much freedom do you want in your life and how important is it for you to be able to build something for yourself that you are really proud of.

Steve: Okay. And then obviously you have a lot of members in this class. What systems do you kind of have in place to automate your processes? Like you mentioned that you– a lot of your training seems to require tailoring to a certain person’s personality, but you’re just one person. So how do you kind of create that tailored effect for everyone and obviously have some systems in place to do that?

Natalie: Yeah, it’s a great question. I think my training is– I wouldn’t ever call it generic but throughout it I do get people to consider how that relates to them. So if this is something that has been applied successfully by myself and others over the years, how do you take that and work it yourself? Because I really don’t like when people teach you, “Hey, here’s how I made money online, this is how you should do it too.” That just drives me nuts because it’s not true of everything.

So I think that is probably where actually getting them to go through the books and work through it themselves comes out really well. The coaching course that I do is a group coaching because that’s where the brilliant questions come through and people really are starting to think through, and then I can give them customized and specific advice. And then also in the Facebook group, the questions that are asked and answered by myself and everybody else.

I think that’s where people get their lot out of it, like that’s when it becomes individual to them because outside of that, the modules are there and they get released, the emails come through. And I would say for me the biggest amount of feedback I’ve heard is just how accessible I am and how personable I am to helping each person kind of do their thing without being spread really thin and feeling like, all I’m doing is investing my time into tons of people which is a fine line though.

Steve: So what’s an example of one of your successful students and how you’ve helped them?

Natalie: Yeah. It’s really fun to see actually right now because I challenged everybody just before new years to complete their painted picture which is the fundamental of the program. It’s not my idea, but I’ve taken it and put it on steroids and I just loved seeing how people stepped up to do that and get it done before the 31st of December. And from that also what came out of it is just what people are wanting to achieve or had achieved. So Maxi Lang [ph] has launched an Amazon book and the time that she’s been through it setup their whole website, got super clear on their ideal customer, and avatar and they’re in the process of launching a program right now.

And the interesting thing that I find about it– like she’s given me an amazing testimonial and video testimony, all those stuff just because for them I think they just got major clarity on who they were serving and why, and the importance of what they wanted to achieve during this next year even. And the biggest thing is I don’t think people are going to build a business in eight weeks that’s going to suddenly return the profit, right?

Steve: Right. Absolutely, yes.

Natalie: I’d never claim for that to be true but the point is, two months down the track, three months down the track when they go through it again I am just going to see more and more people getting great results. And there have been some people who went through and just blessed it and there are others who were still– have gone right back to the beginning to redo it and are now like go, “Ah, I’ve got it,” like it made sense the second time. So I love that.

I just love the journey that people have gone. For some people they got the first hundred people on their email list, for somebody else they launched a product to make their first five grand but everybody was kind of at different stages. So as long as they see immediate results in their own small piece of their world, then I’m happy.

Steve: It’s almost like you’re a mixture of life coach and entrepreneur in training, right? You’re trying to help people figure out what they really want out of life and then you kind of tailor some sort of business that will allow them to achieve that lifestyle. Is that accurate?

Natalie: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Natalie: Yeah. I mean I don’t really like the term life coach because I’m not trained in that and how do you coach on life? It’s a huge thing.

Steve: Sure.

Natalie: But I am absolutely passionate about people figuring out what lifestyle they want and then building a business to support it, because I’ve seen way too many people who let businesses take over their life and then build a job and then suddenly they are making all this money and doing really well and they have zero life.

Steve: Yeah.

Natalie: You know? You know the people I’m talking about. Like they are making…

Steve: I do.

Natalie: …a mint and they’re very unhappy. They have no friends, they have way too much stuff, they don’t live life and life is passing them by. And I’m like, “Seriously that’s the worst thing in the world,” so yeah.

Steve: So it’s interesting that you teach this stuff because a lot of my listeners are trying to create their own lifestyle that they want to live. So what sort of advice would you give to someone kind of starting out from complete scratch? Like when you launched your program, you already had a sizeable email list, you already had contacts and groups and that sort of thing to rely on. For someone just kind of brand new, who wants to kind of live your lifestyle, what sort of advice would you give?

Natalie: Well for the very first program that I launched I really didn’t, but the biggest thing that I would say is to believe in yourself much earlier on. I really wish I’d done that from the beginning, it sounds a bit nah but I think I’d come from this corporate background and then I’ve been in this [inaudible] [0:27:48] and this technology startup and I still just didn’t fully believe that I had what it took to be able to teach others to do their own thing.

And I really wish I developed that sense of self and purpose earlier because it fundamentally changes your mindset when you say, “Yep, I’m worth it. Yep I’m turning [inaudible] [0:28:04],” I love that book by Steven Pressfield and you step up and you go. “Here’s the people I want to help and here is how I’m going to do it and I’m going to master everything I can and learn as much as I can in the mean to get ahead and be able to do that for them.

So I’d say the biggest piece of advice I have, you know, you guys listening is to become a leading learner. You don’t have to be an expert, you just have to be a couple of steps ahead of the people that you really want to serve and help. So if you know that you’re pretty good at this thing and you know that you really enjoy it, and you’re willing to put something out there that’s of value, that’s going to help somebody they will pay for it and it’s a beautiful thing.

It’s a beautiful thing when you finally go, “You know what, I have this skill people always tell me I’m really good at, but I kind of dismiss it because it comes naturally.” And you finally do something about it and you release that gift into the world and then everybody benefits.

Steve: So you mentioned just now earlier that– you said you didn’t have a sizable audience when you first launched your first product.

Natalie: Oh gosh no.

Steve: So how did you get the first customers in the door? Was it webinars or…?

Natalie: Oh yeah. Do you know what– so I actually ran it as a physical boot camp in Vancouver, Canada. I built up enough of a network there over the two years building the startup that I was like, “You know what, I think I can do a social media boot camp and maybe people will come.” And that was sold out because I tapped into some government funding and I just had the right networks, and I worked really hard, right? I was a bit worried at first, but I ended up selling the workshops for only 10 people per workshop.

And then I turned that into an online program and just naturally thought that my small blog readership and my small email list would be interested and I ran my first ever webinar for which I lost my voice on the day which was awesome, so I sounded like super hoarsky [ph]. I had 30 people, 30 people who turned up to that webinar and I made one sale and you know what, I was super excited because I made a sale. And I went on to make about six or seven more and over the space of that next month I think I got maybe 15 people on my program. So I’m not talking about like I crushed it here.

Steve: Yeah. No but I mean even…

Natalie: But the point was I made a sale, like that’s a big exciting thing when I you are first starting out, that you’ve convinced somebody that you’ve build something of value. So it’s just starting, right? You just have to start somewhere and then build on that, and I would say the first two and a half years were called strategic hustling, like I wasn’t throwing spaghetti at the wall all the time, sometimes I was very strategic and I just kept hustling and pushing and learning and being mental, or reaching out to the right people and basically emulating what they, did but in my own way that was going to succeed.

Steve: Okay. And so if you can pretend for a moment that I have just joined your program, completely lost, what are some of the things that you would have me do to figure that out, what I should do?

Natalie: You are completely lost, you are not completely lost; you’ve just joined my program, logged in and gone, “My God, what’s happening here?”

Steve: Exactly, yes.

Natalie. Okay, a really great question, so I would get you to focus on the sweet spot and I do get people to do this in the program even if they’re really advanced and they’ve already got a business. It seems to really help people. So once again the sweet spot is not my thing, it’s been around for a long time, but it’s that intersection between what you’re good at even if you are semi mediocre at it. You’re good at it or you’re excellent at it, you like it or you really enjoy doing it, you may even love it and people are willing to pay you for it.

So a really cool example of this that I think people overlook is let’s say you are really good French cook. I’m not by the way a great cook, I make amazing breakfast, but that’s about it. But let’s say you are really good French cook and you’ve loved doing it for a while and you hold dinner parties for your friends because you enjoy cooking for them. And they always say, “Oh my God that was excellent. How did you make it?” And you’re like, “Oh no-no-no, it was no big deal.” You know, a lot of chefs do that, right?

Steve: Yeah.

Natalie: They kind of go, “Oh, it’s just something I whipped up earlier,” and I’m like, ouch. Sorry I have just made this an explicit iTunes podcast. Yeah, so they go, “Look could you teach me how to do that because you make it look so simple yet it’s not.” And they go, “Oh yeah sure or you know, maybe next time we’ll do a cooking workshop.” So they come over earlier and they stand in your kitchen and you just take a video of that and you show them through it and they help you cook and put it out, and then you decide to start running a weekly video series.

You decide to just go out and put it on YouTube and people really like it and then they come across in your blog and you put out your favorite recipes. And then you keep doing these instructional videos which really help people to cook and then you decide to create a recipe book or maybe how to start basic French Cooking Made Easy, oh in 10 minutes a day. And before you know it you’re kind of off and running. You got an audience of people who really wanted to know how to become better at cooking French. You’re not the expert, you’re not a trained chef, but you’ve got an ability to make it easy for people to do those who aren’t chefs at all.

It’s just a– often people just overlook stuff that they are really good at or have a neck for because they’ve been born with it and they don’t think much about it. But you know how there’s those people who are just great at connecting people and getting them on blind dates that work, or those people who are just amazing at introducing you to the right people and just knowing– well there are people who make, you know, their complex seem really simple.

You’ve got to listen to those things that people are always telling you, “Hey, you know, you really good at this,” “Well thanks so much. It’s something you really helped me with.” And you’ve got to tune into that and think, how can I maximize this and create something that’s actually going to monetize your skills.

Steve: Yeah. I was just– when you’re talking about people who are good at introducing people I just thought of our mutual friend Jamie tardy who pretty much knows everybody, and she’s a great connector of people, and she’s created a great business for herself interviewing popular entrepreneurs.

Natalie: Absolutely.

Natalie: Just curious though. This is a kind of a funny story on my end. So you mentioned doing something you enjoy and trying to get the word out about that. A while ago my wife used to be really into embroidery, and then what happened was I kind of convinced her to monetize that for our online store, and then pretty soon orders would come in and she just did not enjoy doing that anymore. So what do you have to say about the fine line between turning a hobby into a business and losing that interest and actually that hobby?

Natalie: Yeah, absolutely. That’s why I get people to run through it and pick up three to four sweet spots, and then try out some of those sweet spots. For example, I love tennis but I’ve tried coaching tennis when I was younger and I coached little ones and I was like, I don’t want to coach anymore. It drives me nuts, they’re shooting balls all over the place, it’s frustrating, I’m inpatient as a teacher of tennis, I just want to play. So the same would apply to ultimate Frisbee. I have coached some people before but I always like captaining teams or being really part of really great teams and winning and partying hard.

So you do have to really look at the ones that you absolutely love and adore because you just love being in that moment, and then you have to look at the one that you genuinely like teaching people about. And I think this may sound odd for people, but if you think about conversations you have with friends, what are the things that you are always maybe helping them do? I go into business coaching mode with almost every person I meet unless somebody tells me to shut up, because if somebody’s struggling and they are genuinely asking me questions and I know I can add value and help them out, that’s when I go into that mode.

Now would I do that on some other things that I love? No, and that’s where I define the difference. So you know I think the things that you want to keep just to your yourself selfishly that you will always love and they are kind of like your guilty pleasure or the thing you just love to do and be in the zone of, and there are the other ones where genuinely feel I do like doing this and I think I can get paid pretty well for it.

So yeah, it’s something I think you figure out. And a lot of people go down that path and they are like, “Oh, no that wasn’t for me, great.” And then there is also that fine line that you have to figure out, is this just you being lazy or you being scared or you know really wanted to take this seriously. So lots of things you have to listen for and get a tune to.

Steve: So let’s say as your student I kind of found my sweet spot. How would I proceed to go ahead and generate let’s say my first $1000?

Natalie: Well first of all you will sign up for the Freedom Plan program.

Steve: But that would put me in debt Natalie.

Natalie: Whatever, it’s an investment that’s going to have a huge return for you. So what I’d look at then is– let’s say coming back to the chef or the French cook, I would look at the– I actually get people to do this as well. I get them to actually detail out the ideas that they have for revenue generation and then look at them all on a cost benefit analysis of what’s going to be the best and actually take them through this profit matrix.

So let’s say you are going to produce an eBook or recipe book, the cost of– uh some siren in the background. The cost of producing that might be, let’s say you pay $500 for a designer and maybe a little bit of formatting. So your baseline costs the 500 plus the time you put into it and let’s say you’re paying yourself $30 for an hour and it takes you 20 hours to write that. So 600 and you’ve spent $1100 on this book. If you are going to price it at $47, then you don’t need to sell a huge amount of copies to make that fair amount. And in addition if you can sell 20 or 30 copies a months, it’s not huge, but its bringing in the money, you’ve got a pretty good automated hopefully sales funnel to set you up and after a while you could earn a couple of grand a month from that book depending on what your sales funnel is for the very low and baseline costs.

Then the other option is you might want to run cooking workshops and you might want to hold them at a venue that has a baseline cost that’s not too much so you can charge quite a lot more. Let’s say you charge 300 for the day and you get 10 people along to each one and you run one a month. So it’s three grand from there and you cost– you can look at these after a while and go, “Okay, this is a great use of my time. This is a terrible use of my time. This has got a high return on investment; this has got a massive commitment upfront.”

And depending on where you’re at with your business and what type of business model you want, how much time you have to commit, whether you prefer to do stuff in person, whether you prefer to automate things, you can start to work out which revenue streams are going to be easiest for you. And online products, programs and places when you can monetize information on your knowledge can be very quickly put out online and make you money very quickly as opposed to some other things which take you a lot longer to setup. So it really comes back to your preferences.

Steve: So let’s say I wanted to sell something online and let’s say I’m not tech savvy at all. What sort of tools do you recommend to put up websites or collect e-mail addresses and that sort of thing? What’s your strategy that you would teach me if I was a student in your class?

Natalie: Well absolutely first off I think everybody knows that WordPress is like the gold standard for what used to be blogs but now great websites and there’s all these amazing web pristines that instantly allow you to create some form of basic shop, obviously not a full ecommerce store, but a membership site or even just a landing page and then you can actually put information behind that. Leadpages is probably one of my favorite tools for landing pages, launch sequence and sales pages, even mini-websites.

So I mean I kind of think there is no excuse now for not getting a website up in a day or two. It’s very basic, that has the minimal information but looks good and has the right call to action. And then in terms of delivering that, I mean there’s so many different ways. You can just do it via e-mail, you can send people to a secure page on a site, you can go for something like wish list or optimized press to have a membership site setup. I mean, there is a lot more tools and they’re all coming out on the last few pages etcetera.

And then you just need to figure out how you want to deliver that. Is it audio, is it video, is it a combination of both, is it PDFs? And I’ve seen a couple of posts recently and watched a few people do incredible and launches and do really well with very basic systems, because I think some people like to over complicate it. They have all these whiz-bang amazing things. I’ve done that in the past, like here is a membership forum, and here is a program in place, and here is a Facebook group and here is this and this and this. People are like, “I am just freaking confused. Give me the information.”

So I think there is a certain trend to getting back to basics and just minimalizing stuff and making it really simple so that it’s about the learning and the output, not about the whiz-bang, I look so beautiful up front.

Steve: And do you have an opinion on how to get the word out? Like there is blogging, you have a podcast, there is YouTube videos. I know you have experience in all the mediums and what kind of has worked the best for you.

Natalie: So interesting. Over time I think it’s different but I tend to pick the things that work best for my personality now. So for me interviews on podcasts or videos as well as webinars I think would be my number one choice over anything else. Guest posting fine, but takes a long time, a lot of effort, can have a long lead time, doesn’t seem to get the same amount of traction as it used to because there is lots more players in the industry. Obviously writing fantastic e-mails, really, really well crafted great copy to your email list and to key joint venture partners is another great way depending on what you’re launching.

So it really comes back to I think one the relationships you have with your existing audience and community to the relationships you have with influencers and people who have an existing community. So if I had zero audience right now and I was wanting to launch something, I would partner with one to five or 10 great people that I’ve built a relationship with and use their community instead. So there is always ways when you have nothing, right? But a lot of these things take time, and leverage, and you have to give value to get value back.

Steve: It sounds like networking and getting to know people is a large part of your strategy as well, right, as you just mentioned.

Natalie: It is now because I just think you can’t do this all alone and it seems silly to try and go and build something yourself when other people have already done a really great job of that. So I think it’s all about leveraging your time and skills there to really help them and help others.

Steve: Okay, because I was just curious. You mentioned you’d get JV partners. Let’s say you had nothing, how would you convince someone with a sizeable list to take part as a JV partner for what you are trying to sell?

Natalie: It’s a great question. You are trying to get everything out of me today. You are a good interviewer. It is a really great question. If I had zero knowledge of who that person was but– like I didn’t have any way into contact them directly, I would definitely ask around my own existing network, “Does anybody know this person or how to get in touch with them or could they do an intro? Because getting an into to somebody is far more beneficial than just cold calling them.

And if that doesn’t work, what I generally do is spend at least a week or two first off in their community, commenting on their blog, tweeting them. Like a lot of people are very active on Twitter and Facebook and just being active in person and kind of getting in their face in a good way makes you less of a stranger when you finally do hit them up via email or Twitter etcetera. I would even go the extra length these days to create a personal video and post it and ask somebody to either share it or get it to them directly so they get in front of them because it’s just a little bit more different than yet another email.

Steve: That’s a good, that’s interesting.

Natalie: It is interesting and a few people have done it for me and it’s really rocked my world. I am kind of like, “Oh I went to the effort of making a short video or a short audio and just saying, ‘You know what, here is why I love your work,” it’s always good for flattery and be credible about– like just don’t lie. So I really loved your latest blog post on this, I’ve been following it for a while, I love how you talk about this. I think this is an area that your community are calling out for and low and behold it’s something I’m really good at.

I would love the opportunity to be able to either guest post or be on your podcast show or do something to help you on this front. I just so happen to have– you know it depends how much you want to pitch them. But I happen to have a program that covers this, I would love to give you free access to it so you can look at it yourself to see whether it’s right for you and if you did like it, would you be willing to open up and to do [inaudible] [0:43:30] or introduce it to your audience or do something around it.

So I mean at the end of day think about how you’d like to be approached. You’d like to be one, know that the person knows you, that they understand the work you do, that they understand your community or who your customers and clients are and that they can add value and that it’s no pressure for them at all, like they have to do zero work. That’s going to get you know a yes.

Steve: Okay. And do you attend conferences as well?

Natalie: I do. Yeah, I love traveling around the world. I generally try to make the countries that I go and visit– either they have an ultimate Frisbee tournament, they have a conference or event that I want to go to, they have really good friends of mine or I have never visited it. And if it’s all those four things then it’s like a win. So I tend to try and go to the right kind of conferences and events that are really going to help me and also where my kind of people are going to be.

Steve: What’s your favorite entrepreneurship conference to go to?

Natalie: I have loved the World Domination Summit for the last four years in a row, I’ve been to it. I won’t be going this year unfortunately because I’ll be in Europe, but it’s my kind of people who are attending and speaking, and then my community is there in droves. So I think that one’s a really good one to go to and if not go to [inaudible] [0:44:35] because he’s a good friend. At least be in Portland during that time because there is just so many people now.

I haven’t been to NMX, you know, what formerly was BlogWorld for a very long, long time now. I think it’s grown really big but honestly when I went to it in 2010, it was fantastic for meeting the likes of like [inaudible] [0:44:52] and just some of those people that are key people now. And then this year I’m actually speaking in quite a few cool ones like Social Media Marketing World, the first digital nomad conference, NMX in Europe. So I just– you tend to be a bit choosy.

I actually prefer small in person events where there is maybe 10 to 50 people like [inaudible] [0:45:14] unmistakable creative conferences coming out of this very small and application only. I love doing my own mastermind retreats, I like going on retreats. So you really got to pick and choose what’s going to be the most beneficial for you and for what you are trying to do.

Steve: Okay. And I just have some random questions that are just out of my own curiosity here. Do you have health insurance? And since you’re always moving around, how does it work? How do you get mail, payments, checks, taxes?

Natalie: I’ve done some fun videos on this and I also have it on my Suitcase Entrepreneur book.

Steve: Oh you do, okay.

Natalie: But it makes me laugh how it’s always Americans who ask if I have health insurance. Just because I think you guys are obsessed with health insurance I frankly don’t care about it which is probably a silly attitude. I do usually go with World Nomads for insurance and that covers health, medical and liability in depth and all those wonderful things, and I used to take out a yearlong policy for the whole world which covers, you know, if I lose my luggage or whatever.

I frankly don’t care if I lose my luggage. I don’t really care about stuff, but obviously health and those things are quite important to me. So I’m bit lax on that, thank you for reminding me. I probably should sign up for one again. Most countries so health care is fairly minimal apart from if you’re in the US which is the only time I would probably cover myself. A lot of countries, you know, if you’re in Southeast Asia or South America it’s quite minimal to actually go and see a doctor or get some operations done, and so I kind of tend to know those places now, and often it’s way cheaper than doing it in the country, your own country of residence.

In terms of mailing address, I’m really good at relying on my friends. So if people are like, “Oh I need to send you my book or do something,” I just email the person I’m going to be with next or there is the hotel I’m going to stay in or the apartment and I just give them that. And outside of that I do have an address in New Zealand now which is on my mailing list because I bought the apartment, not that I’m going to be here.
But yeah, I just use that or I will use something like Regis offices where you can set up your own postal address with them and a couple of other resources in my book totally escaped my brain right now, but there are some really cool global offices that will take your mail and scan it, post it, send it, do whatever you want with it and they give you this kind of address that people can email to, so really useful.

Steve: Okay. Interesting yeah, it just blows my mind, your lifestyle– it’s not something I don’t think that I could live, but it sounds very interesting for sure.

Natalie: It is. It’s fascinating. I like the challenges that you get with it as well, you know, slowly bank some things are coming round to it. Whenever I phone them, I just have to call ahead and say, “I am going to be in this country, so please don’t stop my credit card.” And then, “Okay great, what’s your phone number and your address?” “I’m like I have no idea, just deal with it.” Like this is who I am, I think they’ve become used to me now.

Steve: Well that’s cool now. You know, we have already been talking for quite a while and I want to be respectful of your time. For those of you out there who are interested in Natalie’s program, so Natalie where can they find you and what’s the name of your website?

Natalie: I would love for them to come across and say hi, it’s suitcaseentrepreneur.com. I know it’s hard to spell so you can also Google Natalie Sisson. I used to misspell it all the time, and if they want to know about the Freedom Plan, suitcaseentrepreneur.com/freedomplan. But I am all over social media, they will find me there. I just love for them to say hello.

Steve: Okay. And do you have a Twitter– what’s the best way to reach you?

Natalie: Twitter is great, I am @Nataliesisson. I’m also Natalie Sisson on Facebook; I’m Suitcase Entrepreneur pretty much everywhere. Natalie Sisson on Instagram, come look at my photos from around the world. And yeah, those places are great.

Steve: Awesome. All right, well thanks a lot for coming on the show Natalie. Really appreciate it.

Natalie: Thank you so much for having me and absolutely drilling me with those great questions.

Steve: Drilling, that’s a little harsh. All right, well take care.

Natalie: Thank you.

Steve: Natalie is one of my favorite entrepreneurs. Not only does she have a cool accent but she’s super fun, down to earth and very easy to get along with, and I really admire what she’s done with her businesses to facilitate her lifestyle. In other words she makes her business adapt to her and not the other way around. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode61 and if you enjoyed this episode, please go to iTunes and leave me a review.

When you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show. And please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month, for more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

060: Brad DeGraw On How To Maximize Your Sales On Amazon

Brad Degraw

Brad DeGraw is my go to guy when it comes to selling on Amazon. Not only does he run many of his own businesses using FBA, but he also helps small to mid size companies establish their online presence as well.

In this episode, Brad gives us an inside scoop on all of the tips and tricks he uses to maximize his sales on Amazon. Do not miss this episode and be sure to check out Brad’s site at AZDoneForYou.com.

Quick Note: At the time of the recording Brad thought that his new website AmazonSherpa.com would be complete but unfortunately there were some delays. Please visit AZDoneForYou.com instead. Thanks!

What You’ll Learn

  • How to create a profitable business on Amazon
  • Why you should be selling on Amazon today
  • The best way to sell depending on your budget
  • How to find profitable products to sell
  • Why Brad likes to source domestically at first
  • The components to a high converting Amazon listing
  • Brad’s tricks for pricing products on Amazon
  • How to combat Amazon fraud

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Brad DeGraw on the show. Now Brad is someone who I met at the Ecommerce Fuel live conference and I’m really happy to have met the guy. Brad is probably the most knowledgeable person I know when it comes to selling on Amazon.

Now, not only has he published a successful book on the topic called The FBA Hot List piece also well know as an Amazon selling coach, and today he’s actually going to tell us his story and educate us on how to take a product and sell it on Amazon successfully. And with that welcome to the show, Brad, super happy to have you today.

Brad: Thanks Steve, thanks for having me.

Steve: Yeah, and so Brad, you know, tell us the back story because I actually looked online for it and I couldn’t find it. How did you get into E-commerce and how did you get into this whole Amazon selling game.

Brad: So for me I had no background in online sales when I got started. I made my money on the phone. I did phone sales, I sold buildings over the phone, and that’s a real thing, you can sell buildings over the phone with people you’ve never met before.

Steve: Interesting, cold calling a regular person to sell a building?

Brad: Yeah, it was warmly.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So, we have in bound calls and ironically the buildings we sold didn’t even exist. It was not a scam, we sold them pre-engineered buildings. So they came to us with an idea, we took the idea, we got them hot and bothered, and we sold them a future building.
Steve: Okay.

Brad: And after getting fired from that I took my hand with selling consultant over the phone, so business consulting, and that was fantastic again until I got fired.

Steve: So I get trend here, Brad.

Brad: That’s when the light bulb went off, it’s– I know how to provide value for people. I know how to bring in revenue; I just maybe don’t know how to get along with the owner and sometimes the owner’s wives. Maybe I should just be the owner.

So that’s how I got my start in Ecommerce, you know I read a book and I just got started with a $100 and a Wi-Fi connection said, if I’m going to fail I’ll probably fail within the first two weeks and it’s only going to cost me a $100, and it worked. Sure enough you can buy– at the time I was doing arbitrage, which is buying low and selling high.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So I sold other peoples brands and that worked, made great money, did that for a few years and realized, you know what it’s time to really start selling my own brands. I don’t like to compete and price erosion just doesn’t work for me.

Steve: Aha.

Brad: And that’s when I learned that I could sell my own brand of products. First I started bundling other people’s products to create unique skews, and then I went out to the manufactures. They were happy to sell me things directly with my label on it.

Steve: Uhh.

Brad: And now we make most of our money working directly with manufactures.

Steve: Okay, and this is all on Amazon that you’ve mentioned so far, right?

Brad: And this is all on Amazon.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: It’s the easiest place to get started. It’s not that you can’t make fantastic money beyond Amazon, but it’s the best place to get started.

Steve: Okay, so the motivations for just selling on Amazon was, that was your primary source of income at the time because you got fired from your jobs, is that?

Brad: Yeah, exactly.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: The thing is I didn’t know how to build websites and put together hosting and auto responders. None of that, I’m not very technical.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So this was the place where I could simply upload the information, the pictures on Amazon. If you are selling other peoples brands, everything is already there. You just enter your quantity and your price and you make money. Now…

Steve: Okay so– oh sorry go on.

Brad: Well, it gets more complicated than that once you are launching your own brands, but that was an easy place to get some traction.

Steve: So is that a place where you recommend that people get started selling other peoples products first on Amazon, or do you recommend that they just kind of jump into selling their own stuff?

Brad: It depends on your budget, if you only have a 100 dollars and a Wi-Fi connection, go ahead and start with what we call arbitrage, buying low selling high. Go to any drug store, hit the clearance aisle, buy something for 90% off, sell it for four retailer more. That’s an easy way to get started. However if you already have a few thousand dollars, that you can get started, go ahead and start looking to sell your own brands.

Steve: Okay, and then just as an example so I run a class and often times they get hung up on what they want to sell so I thought it would be useful to go over some of the stuff that you’ve sold and how you’ve come up with the idea to sell those specific products

Brad: Sure and can I just tweak the question a bit is because when I find when people come to me and say that they don’t know what to sell, what that really means is that I don’t really understand my market. Because when you really understand your market, then the products are easy.

So if we take it back one step and no one is teaching this, which is a shame, we teach how to have a market based business rather than a product based business. What that means is that a market is a group of people who are passionate about spending money on a particular problem or product. That’s worth writing down.

When you have your market, and a market can be Moms. So I’m a Dad and it’s almost like saying. I’ll spend any amount of money that shows and proves that I’m the best Dad. For example, I spent 180 dollars to buy flash cards to help my son read. At six months, he could read elephant. And it wasn’t so much that he could read elephant, it was that I paid 180 dollars because only the best Dad in the world would spend that kind of money. I could have easily printed out the flash cards on my printer.

A couple other good markets to target come to mind, Moms, Dads, kids, pet owners. People with health issues. People who want their straight hair to be curly and vice versa.

Steve: Could I ask you a side question before we continue? How does mixing selling on Amazon versus having your own online store website come together in the way you’ve advised people to do things.

Brad: Well, it really depends on your resources. For me I didn’t know how to build websites.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: Or drive traffic, so I stuck with Amazon longer. Now if you already have a background in building websites, and hosting and traffic methods, then you may go ahead and make the transition sooner, but here is what I teach.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: We show people first build your empire on Amazon and then as soon as you have something worth protecting, you need that Amazon proof your market. So use Amazon because it comes with all the traffic and credibility and then you can build your own in parallel to that. So as soon as it’s worth protecting, and it’s covering your bills and then some, go ahead and start diversifying.

Steve: Excellent, that’s actually a strategy that I’m transitioning to in my class. It will be very interesting; we’ll get into that a little bit later.

Brad: Awesome.

Steve: Sorry I interrupted you though. So we were still talking about finding a market and then products that serve that market. So what is kind of– what are some of your guidelines in doing so?

Brad: So first thing is, you want to make sure that there is already money being spent there.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: It’s– we are trying to compress time, some of the values that we teach is you have to compress time, minimize your risk and then scale up on your winners. If you are following that system, then the first thing you need to do is figure out your market, after that you figure out maybe it’s pet owners.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: Then you figure out where they are spending their money online. So you can type in if– let’s see, Chihuahua owners.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So you just type in Chihuahua on Amazon and see what comes up, or Chihuahua, color, pet, products, and you see what are the best selling products there. Now that you see the best selling Chihuahua color, you read the one, two, and three star reviews, and again we are teaching something here that’s a little bit against the traditional thought, but is the most effective way to do it.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: After you find the number one best selling products, you do not make a me too product, you do not copy it. What you do is you read those one, two, and three star reviews and you find out how can you build a better mouse trap? Where are people’s missed expectations? And when you understand where their missed expectations are, you can make a better product. Does that make sense?

Steve: It does, absolutely. That also implies however that you would need to be able to manufacture your own products, is that accurate?

Brad: Yes and no, I don’t own any manufacturing equipment. Most products with name brands on them, those companies don’t own their manufacturing equipments either. You have a manufacturing market and you put your branding on it or you can even put your branding in on it afterwards, put it on the packaging.

Steve: Okay, it’s just in my experience, when you want to make customizations to a product that you are having manufactured overseas, for example, the minimum order quantities tend to be a lot higher. So using your methodology, what would be some– what would be the estimated order investment that you would have to make to describe the methodology that you outlined?

Brad: Well, and if you haven’t notice by now, I’m a little bit of a contrarian.

Steve: Okay

Brad: When everyone else says start overseas manufacturing, I do the opposite, I say start domestic. If you are selling product here in the States, you probably need to have a manufacturing care in the states and the same goes with Europe.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: If you are selling in Europe, have it made in Europe and your minimal orders go down. You don’t have to have a palette or a shipping container. So half the products I’ve ever gotten start with were under a 1,000 dollars and the other half were beyond 35,000. So-

Steve: That’s very interesting Brad, yeah.

Brad: It’s not that big of a deal financial wise. The reason why you want to start domestic, and again this goes against a lot of the gurus out there. One, your minimums can be much lower. Your communication is much easier, but most importantly, the size of your shipping time is much-much less. You can ship it ground and it’s a lot cheaper than shipping it air. You can build the relationship, it’s easier to build a relationship with folks here in the same time zones, in the same culture, it’s much-much easier, and that relationship will save your neck. It’s not all about the margin; you have to make money, but building that relationship will save you more often that you can imagine.

Steve: I would tend to agree with you Brad. So a lot of times what we do know is we actually have prototypes made in the US just because the whole designing, communication process will be really miserable doing that with someone overseas, and then once we have that prototype then we actually go on and actually have something made.

Brad: Excellent, Yap.

Steve: So, just curious though, where do you find your vendors in the US?

Brad: We use a service called reference USA, it’s free if you have a library card or you can pay for it, it’s called info USA, is the pay version.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And what that is, is that’s a data base of data bases. You can find anything there. So if you want a plastic bottle manufacturer, you type in plastic bottle manufacturer and you can search by region, by state, by area, and you’d be surprised at how many manufacturers are in the United States and want to have your business, it’s insane.

Steve: And then what– this is going to be a very vague question, but what is the order of– what is the difference in price typically between getting something made in the US versus something equivalent in Asia with higher minimum order quantities?

Brad: It really depends on the labor. The labor is where you are going to see, the big cost differential.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So plastic is plastic, all over the world is basically the same price.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: It’s how much labor that goes into it is your real increase in cost, so if you could on your first few products, try to find something that there is not a lot of moving products and pieces to it, there is not a lot of technology, it’s a real low risk winner.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And then as you scale up then you can have more complicated, more labor intense products.

Steve: Okay, do you have any example of that that you could you use to illustrate?

Brad: Sure, you know Rocco & Roxie is a product I like to put out as a sacrificial lamb.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: That’s not one of my products; it’s not one of my clients. With dealers it’s a pet odor spray, so your dog has a little accident in the house, you spray this and you know it doesn’t stink and the stains come out. So there is not a lot to it, it’s basically a disinfectant perfume in a bottle, no moving parts and well, the sprayer is a moving part of the piece, but it’s a bottle, it’s a sprayer and it’s fluid.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: Not a lot to it, you can’t fail.

Steve: And is that fluid– is that something they design themselves or is that a white label product?

Brad: I don’t think I’m letting any cats out of the bag when I say most the products have the same ingredients and formulas.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So yeah, what you do is– on this example you’d read the one, two and three star reviews, you’d find out that people hate the smell of this particular product, you call the manufacturers and you say, hey listen, I know you do pet odor sprays, I’d like one that smells like lemons or anything. I want it to smell like apple cider, can you do that? And chances are they do, the already have that technology, they already have a research and development department and it’s just a matter of saying, that’s what I want and they’ll do that for you.

Steve: Okay, so you are saying that I could actually contact the makers of that odor spray and then have them formulate my own concoction for sale?

Brad: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay, and what would be hypothetically some of the minimum order quantities I would have to purchase for something like that?

Brad: Most of the time I’m able to get it under 200, 250.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So it depends on how many fit in a case, what the configuration is. Worst case scenario you are looking at 500 units, but I can’t remember the last time I had to order 500 units for a minimum first order.

Steve: Okay, and this all in the US so it could just be delivered with ground shipping, right?

Brad: Exactly, and so that’s much-much affordable. They probably have their own account or you can use your account.

Steve: Okay, and so now that I have my product and I have– so hypothetically speaking I have already done the research on Amazon that this pet order spray is a good selling product, and I have gone through the one or two star reviews and I have found out that people don’t like the odor so the I formulate my own concoction, what is the next step?

Brad: Next step is create your Amazon listing.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So you want to make sure the listing can be seen, and there is two dances that you are doing. One is with the search box and the other is with the actual human eye balls. You have to be appealing to both.

Steve: So we want to have great images, high quality, professionally taken– don’t use your iPhone, actually have a photographer do it. You want a title that is key worked rich, and when I say key word rich don’t duplicate it, don’t put that odor-odor-odor-odor. Once is enough.

In Amazon key word density doesn’t mean anything, so don’t duplicate your key words, put most of your high end relevant traffic key words at the front of the title, don’t put your brand on trial, Brads pet owner because that’s– no one is looking for that, the search posts will think you are invisible.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And then hire a copy writer, if you are not one hire one, that’s the easiest way to do it. You are looking at two to three hundred bucks there. They’ll put your title, they’ll put your description, your bullets, all the benefits, it’s huge, it’s worth it. This is going to encourage your conversion rates.

Steve: Okay, I have actually been experimenting with different product descriptions and what not with some of my listings. I noticed that by far, I think the photos make the biggest difference for conversions, because the description is kind of buried down below.

Brad: Yeah, I totally agree. Amazon customers have been trained. They are hungry buyers, they want to do a key word search, whatever is in the top half the first page, they click through based on the image, your click through rate is based on the images. So not only do you want to have a good looking image, it needs to be compelling, and when I say compelling, it can’t just be a hero shot just with the product standing there with its chest popped out. You need to tell a little bit of a story.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So open a loop is another way to put it. Have a story started so if it’s something that can be worn, have a person– have it on a person, have the person in motion using it, have a compelling look on her face. It could be disgusted, it could be excitement, it could be curiosity, get them to click through.

Steve: Interesting, so in this case of pet odor spray would you have something stinky maybe in the picture and then I don’t know, human with their facial expressions, I don’t know.

Brad: Well, I found that humor doesn’t necessarily compel people to buy.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: We’ve tested that, but pictures of pets and babies do really-really well.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So you could have a picture of the pet looking all sad, you can have them looking all happy. Have an emotional pet there and of course a picture of the product, so you can have it as if you are spraying right behind the dog, yeah definitely.

Steve: So I was just curious you know, Amazon has some guidelines through their photos, words just suppose to be their product on a white background, how do you get around those guidelines?

Brad: So, some of the things we teach are what we call grey hat, and just so every one hears this very-very clear, white hats are the good help cowboys and the bad cowboys are the ones who wear the black hats. White hat means every rule is followed not just to the letter but also to the intent of the rules. Black hat is where people get deceived, we don’t do black hat, we don’t teach it, we run away from it and try to correct people every time we can. Amazon’s cardinal rule is no customer should ever feel deceived, whether you meant it or not, if someone feels deceived you could loose your entire business.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So we stay away from that. But a grey hat is where we like to play and that’s where we do go against the Amazon terms of service, but we stay within the intent. Amazon’s intent is to match up people who want to buy stuff with people who want to sell stuff, that’s all Amazon is, it’s a search engine. So we will do things like make compelling images, we will do things like put line spacing in the product description, or bolding the fonts, technically those are against the rules but we do it because it helps the buying experience.

Steve: Okay, So what are some of your tips or your grey hat tips when it comes to writing compelling product descriptions?

Brad: So product descriptions, forget about the technical things. No one cares that it is 32 ounces, no one wakes up and says man, I really wish I had 32 ounces, they wish they had the solution. So whatever you are selling sell the experience, sell the emotions. So there is three ways to market a product, you have what the thing is, what the thing does, and then who it’s for.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: If you are taking notes you need to write that down, what the thing is, what the thing does and who it is for. Your key word strategy is your copy; everything needs to fall into one of these three categories, because you have to be consistent.

Now what we found is the third option is where the premium sales are. Nobody cares that salt is salt, nobody cares that salt is salty, but what they do want is to enhance their culinary experience, and so we talk about their day to day issues, about what is going on in this persons life. Why they would even need this product and where they are from where they want to be. We bridge that gap and that’s why the transactions comes in so frequently, is because helping people live a whole new life from where they are in real life to where they want to be on Facebook, that’s where our product comes in.

Steve: Do you have…

Brad: Does that make sense?

Steve: Yeah, absolutely. Do you have any examples, maybe if you don’t have these on hand I could just post links to them maybe after we are done, just as an example of very compelling copy that creates an experience.

Brad: Yeah, just pull out the Rocco & Roxie example.

Steve: Okay, I’ll definitely link to that.

Brad: They are doing a really compelling day to day. They are not talking about this once in a life time thing that happened. It’s just a day to day– oh man, it’s Friday the boss made your work late and you got stuck in traffic and all these things happen, and your best friend had an accident in the house, don’t worry we are here to save the day, boom. So yes, they don’t care what it’s made out of, they don’t care, they just care that it saves the day.

Steve: Awesome. So let’s assume now that we have the photos down, we have a compelling product description, it’s still at this point just a brand new listing on Amazon. So are there any tips that you have to drive traffic and then how does kind of the whole pricing thing come into play. Do you play any tricks with pricing at all?

Brad: Oh, yeah, pricing is a fun game to play and you are never done.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So what we found is changing the price helps conversions and that may sound strange but it works, test it and you will see that it works for you, and it doesn’t matter whether we go up or down, changing the price works. So you can go up or down pennies or tens of dollars, it doesn’t matter, you will see an increase in conversion.

Steve: Can you elaborate on that a little bit, it just…

Brad: So yeah, let’s say you are selling the product at 20 bucks 19.99, lowering it to 19.95 on Sunday and raising it to 19.99 on Wednesday you will see a spiking conversions, and it’s because people put it in their cart and it’s also called cart abandonment. The door bell rings, the dog barks, the baby cries, something happens and they are not able to complete the transaction and then they are there later looking you know, they should be working on something and they are distracted shopping on Amazon, Amazon says wow, the price on this changed, do you want to buy this, and that little, that little inspiration, that little input forces some people to buy and others not to, but you will see in overall conversion in– increase in conversion just because of that.

Steve: That is very interesting, I’ll have to go and try that, okay. Now– oh, sorry go on.

Brad: One more thing on pricing, we’ve tested the last digits, so 99, 95, 88, 77 and 50 are the best converting prices, so, if you are going to compare $35 flat to 35.99, 35.99 will outsell 35 flat.

Steve: Interesting, what about the 88 and the 77 and the 50?

Brad: Those all convert really well and those will also exceed the flat numbers or random like 35.23, 35.50 will still out sell it.

Steve: Okay, and do you actually recommend pricing your products very low in the beginning to generate some quick sales and reviews?

Brad: I like to keep my prices high and then do promotion codes.

Steve: Uh okay, can you walk me through that process?

Brad: So yeah, let’s say you are selling a product for $40, something to get free shipping. So between 35 and 40 dollars is kind of a sweet spot. I want to say, even if I could afford to sell it at $20 and make a healthy margin, I want to sell it at 40, I want to go for premium, because you have already done this homework and if this is truly a product that has an emotional response from people and you are tying in to that emotional response, the price doesn’t even matter, it really doesn’t.

So start high and then reach out to your network, maybe it’s your friends, your families, your– the other coaching students that you are working with, do a promotion, you can do it at half off, you can do it for a dollar, you can do it for free. Get some sales, get some verified reviews. This is important for your credibility. You want user generated content. So those could be reviews, those could be customer questions and answers, those could be votes, those could be customer images. Make sure that you get some user content before you go and start running ads.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And then as you get some traction, Amazon will understand what your product is and who it it’s for because of the traffic. Amazon algorithms is sensitive to traffic patterns. This is huge, so what you can do is once you have few reviews and this looks like a product people want to buy, you can click on the number one bestselling product and then back to yours. It doesn’t have to be the same competing product, it can be irrelevant. If you are dealing punching gloves, click on the number one bestselling punching bag and then over to your listing and the hardware and the magazines and the foot wares and the pants back to your product, and now Amazon algorithms starts to recognize that.

Steve: Does that imply then that if I were to include a link to one of my Amazon products for example in one of my email new letters that goes out, and I just had a whole bunch of traffic over to my Amazon listing, would that affect the search results?

Brad: It depends on what kind of link you sent.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: We call it Amazon’s magic tail, so if you do a search on Amazon, the key word search and then you get to your page and you use that entire URL, the whole thing, it includes on the far right it says REF equals, and then it’ll have page number, position number, unique time stamps, key words, equal, patch plus order plus fray. If you use that whole thing yes, that would be huge, you got great value out there, now if just copied and paste, if you were in seller central and you clicked on it through there, you lose all of amazons magic tail, you lose that tracking code, that REF equals. REF equals is the bread crumbs of how did we get here, does that make sense?

Steve: Okay so to summarize basically, you are taking the key word portion of the search query in Amazon, and you are driving traffic to that to kind of tell Amazon that people are using that key word to find your product.

Brad: Yes, they look super organic.

Steve: And does the conversion rate matter? I would think that if you drove a bunch of traffic that way and people didn’t buy that would reflect negatively on your listing, right.

Brad: Honestly there is this myth that conversion rate is a big deal for the algorithm. We’ve tested it to the X factor. We went way overboard testing this and we found that that’s just a myth, conversion rate does not affect your search position.

Steve: Interesting, okay. So Brad so just try and focus the discussion here, so I got a brand new product, I put it on, is the first thing that you do is you put some promotional codes on and get some reviews, is that the first step?

Brad: Yeah, get some reviews on it, verified purchase reviews, you can’t tell people what to say, but tell them that you are looking for an honest review and if there is an issue to contact you privately and directly. So this is still legitimate, this is still within Amazon’s terms of service.

Steve: We have the listing looking sexy. Any human eye ball that sees it, it say man why wouldn’t I buy this, why wouldn’t I buy two. Now it’s also time to also use Amazon ads, responsive listings.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: Amazon ads are really-really cheap, I mean we are talking nickels and dimes and they convert really well, double digits conversion. Then it’s also time to go ahead and go beyond Amazon, go ahead and see what your natural plateau is on the Amazon for a week or two and then move in to Facebook, Pintrest, anywhere else that you can get some traction.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: I like the deal sites, that wallet, slick deals.

Steve: Aha, okay.

Brad: Those are nice and so that’s another place for you to put it for like half off. Do another half off code and you can– not with your personal account, have someone else do it on their account, make it look organic, don’t just the first post on day one brand new user put up there. Season that account a little bit, like some other stuff, put some key mark clients deal up there, really try to make this look as organic as possible.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And you will be amazed at what you can get from these deal sites, it will be insane, and that brings us to another thing, don’t sell out of your inventory, do not run out of stock. Raise your price through the roof, buy that at 10X if you have to, just don’t run out of inventory.

Steve: Uh, okay, and so, regarding the Amazon ads, that’s paper click, is that correct?

Brad: Yes, yap.

Steve: And you are saying that the– it’s just like on the order of nickels and dimes per click and the then conversion rate is really high, so it’s really a no brainer to run those.

Brad: It’s a no brainer. That’s– we call it day two activities, it could be week two for you but don’t just put a listing and stop, these are the things that you do on the next day when you show up to work. So you’ll get your hands on ads going, you’ll do your traffic patterns, you make sure that you have some engineers– engineered reviews and again you are not writing the reviews, but you are just making sure friendly people who are willing do to it are the first in line.

Steve: Okay, got it, and at some point there is enough inertia that the sales will start generating their own organic reviews, is it?

Brad: Absolutely, you can do a few things, there are, there are services, Feedback Five is one of them, Feedback Genius is another. They will do your Amazon messages for you, so for examples we do a three message campaign. So as soon as someone orders we say hey, thanks for your order, you are smart, you are safe, it’s okay, welcome to the family, because the moment someone clicks the button all they know is they spend money, but they don’t have anything to show for it, so there is a little bit of vulnerability.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And the whole thing we are trying to do with Ecommerce, is eliminate that feeling of vulnerability, we are trying to build that trust. So we let them know here is your order number, it’s going to be shipped to you right away, welcome to the family, you are going to be so happy, by the way if you need anything, reach out for our store record. That is message one. We are not asking for anything. Message two is hey, your product is about to deliver or just delivered, either way you want to set it up; it’s about the same process.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: If you have any issues, if the box is damaged, if it’s not exactly what you expected and more, please reach out to us, and again it’s just service-service-service.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And then the third one if they are happy you can ask for a review, you can ask for referrals, you can really put your acts together by the third one, but you really want to show service first.

Steve: Okay, and typically in practice, what percentage of the people who buy actually bother to leave a review?

Brad: It’s low.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: Single digits.

Steve: Okay, single digits, okay-okay. That’s what I’m getting, I think it’s like 1% or something so I was just curious if that was on…

Brad: It really depends on the market and their motivation for buying. You know if you are doing something, sex toys that maybe they don’t want their minister to see their review, they may not be so willing to do it but yeah, you are going to look at single digits, somewhere between one and five is realistic.

Steve: Okay-okay, and then, okay so we’ve done that we are starting to go through the deal sites, at some point when in this whole process do you start creating your own site? Like when do you start protecting your moat like we talked about earlier?

Brad: Once it’s something you start to brag to your friends about, hey listen, I’ve got a business that pays for my boat, or whenever it’s something you would cry for, if it would make you cry that you lost it, now it’s time to protect it.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: So now you can do a few a things, you can– you don’t have any website experience and you are not comfortable there, go ahead and start your next platform as e-Bay or Open Sky or Racket Top. Go ahead and start maybe shifting to other platforms, so you are a little bit Amazon resilient. If you do have some website experience, just go ahead and do, I mean there is Shopify and Bigcommerce, there is not a lot, it’s just plug and play right there. You can do this without a whole lot of stress.

Steve: And is there like a way that you can actually somehow get your Amazon customers over to your own property?

Brad: That is a sensitive topic, the answer is yes, but you have to thread the needle. So you could do that with– the old school way is registering the product, hey we will give you a lifetime warranty, you just need to register, or we will give you a free refill just you know, give us your information. We will give you a bonus, a free E-book, a recipe guide, a care kit, just come over here. So you can do that with QR codes and the images are products, inserts are fantastic, put it in a box. Nobody has to see about the customer, following up with them by mail, by phone and discreetly by Amazon message service is an option.

Steve: Okay. How do you get their phone information and what not.

Brad: Amazon gives that to you in the orders.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: You just click on the orders and you will have their phone numbers.

Steve: Uh okay, I guess I have not tried that yet.

Brad: And again be very-very discreet depending on what your product is. If it’s a pregnancy issue, the teenage daughter may have got it, it might not be a legitimate, just be very-very conscious of who the people are and why they bought it because you– if you are not very-very cautious, you can make some people very upset.

Steve: Okay. It’s hilarious Brad, these examples you keep bringing up kind of implies that you sold products, like a wide variety of products that are really random.

Brad: Yes-yes, I have learned all these the hard way so.

Steve: All right cool, so at that point things are going smooth and then we started on site and we were just kind of steering stuff over, what are some other tactics that you use to kind of further extend your moat, your Amazon moat?

Brad: Well, you’ve done what you need to do now, now you’ve proven your market and like you said it’s about compressing time, eliminating risk, now it’s time to scale up because as you have your own sites and other platforms, you are going to have better margins now. So now you scale up, buy traffic, hire professionals, don’t just go take another F course on how to do Facebook ads. Just hire someone to do it as long as it’s profitable, you are in the money.

Steve: Okay, and then you have a couple of options. We like to– once we get into the top 20, we knock off our own brands, so we will be our own competitions. So now we take up half of the top 20 rather that just focusing on the number one spot.

So you can duplicate your own success or you can pivot and do relevant products. If you are doing baby products, well those babies turn into infants and those infants turn into preschoolers and as preschoolers turn into schoolers and just chase that market, because whatever the market is, whatever that problem or fantasy, it doesn’t go away. Throughout life they are always going to have that. So keep selling it.

Steve: So given– you mentioned margins, given that Amazon takes a pretty hefty fee especially if you use fulfilled buy, what are some of the margins that you recommend before even thinking about selling on Amazon.

Brad: Minimum five X, so when I say five X that means if you bought it for five dollars, you need to be selling it for twenty five dollars.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And ideally you’d aim more for 10X, so if you buy it for five you are selling it for 50. That’s a healthy place to be because now you can scale the business. If you can’t afford to advertise, then you don’t have a scalable business, which means you probably can’t sell it; it’s not worth a whole lot to anyone else but you.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And by the time it shrinks, if you have new competition that comes in and it erodes the prices, by the time you get to three X, it’s time to look at moving on.

Steve: Interesting, okay, and so manufacturing stuff in the US you can still see those margins?

Brad: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Brad: And another thing, just to dial into this is a concern I hear all the time, you know I’m not making enough time, you know. I’m not making enough money if I start with that, it’s okay, your first production run is just to eliminate the risk. I have made stuff for $16 a unit and sold it for five on the first production run, and that’s losing money, a lot of money, but I wanted to prove the market because I knew as I could scale, that I could maximize my margin on the next production runs, it’s that important.

Steve: Okay, and then along the way you are garnering reviews, I mean you are still getting value out of your sales, right?

Brad: Exactly.

Steve: So, Okay. Let’s see, what else is there to talk about? I had a couple of questions for you just on Amazon fraud.

Brad: Sure.

Steve: A lot of people are copying listings, copying photos, and what not, how do you combat all those things?

Brad: Well the first thing we do is we send them a scary letter, so that works about a third of the time, hey you are a bad guy, this is against the rules, this is against the law, this is against whatever. That will work, one in three will actually disappear, and they will stop bothering you. That other two out of three times we go ahead and buy out their inventory and then we complain to Amazon saying, listen, I’m highly concerned that this inventory may not be legitimate and for the customer’s best interest. Amazon only cares about the customer and in the customers best interest I’d love you to look into it, we’ve already bought the inventory and we’ll be sending you an update, I just wanted to get the case– the ball rolling and the case started now.

So document everything and then one of two things is going to happen, you are going to see that the inventory is exactly what it was supposed to be, which case you have a leak at your manufacturing level, or it’s something completely different, and now you have a legitimate case against them. So either way you just kind of follow up with whatever your reality is once the merchandize gets delivered.

Steve: How important is it to register your brand on Amazon?

Brad: Very, that’s another day two or week two activity. So once you have a product up, go ahead, and get registered. It may be three or four emails back and forth to Amazon, that’s what we found. It doesn’t matter what shift, who it is, they will always ask for something a little bit different but by the fourth time we say is this everything you need? Normally by about the fourth time they approve it.

Steve: Okay, I have just noticed some stories on some of the Amazon forums that despite having your brand, people still manage to use you know, use your skill and try to hijack your listing as well, but I imagine the safe guards are a little higher once you have your brand registered, right?

Brad: Well, yeah. What it is, is I make it difficult for the people who are going to hitch hike on my listing. So if I’m selling at two buck and they are going to hitch hike on, as soon as I sell that inventory I’ll have a sale, I’ll blow through my inventory, and I’ll ship this in as a three pack, update the images and the description, and then I will let them know hey, this is a three pack, you are selling a two pack, you are about to have some serious problems and especially if other customers are saying hey, this is a three pack and they gave me a two pack.

They have to ship all that inventory back to themselves and make it a three pack and then ship it all in, and if they do it again and they are messing with the price and the sales, then I’ll sell through that inventory and I’ll make it a four pack.

Steve: Interesting.

Brad: And I just make it so ridiculous for them to follow along and ride on my cocktails that it’s just easier to go bother someone else, because knuckle heads will always be knuckle heads, I just make it difficult for them to bother me.

Steve: Okay, okay, yeah, that sounds like a good strategy and what are your views on using fulfilled by Amazon versus self-fulfilled. Are you FBA all the way?

Brad: Yeah, all the way. You could do this yourself; however you are missing out on Amazon’s prime customers. Prime customers pay a membership fee so that they can get a few extra perks, but the main thing that they do is that they want it yesterday.

Amazon prime members have an option and Amazons skews the search results to show FBA merchandize first. So you will be missing out on Amazon’s best premium customers if you don’t put it in Amazon’s ware house, plus it’s not that much extra money, a dollar or two here or there to not have the headaches, it just makes it, it makes it a no brainer.

Steve: I completely agree, cool. So Brad, we’ve been chatting for quite a while, I did want a couple of words and motivation for the listeners out there. If they want to get started selling on Amazon, you have a couple of words to say to motivate these people to give things a try?

Brad: Absolutely, you can do this, you just have to make up your mind that this is something you are willing to do, and then also before you get started you need to look at why you are doing it. Are you doing it to increase your lifestyle? Are you doing it to save the whales? Are you doing it to improve the lifestyle of your family? Figure out why you are doing it, and tell yourself why you are doing it every single day, because you will have bad days and if you know your why, you will be able to get through those bad days. Things will happen that you didn’t understand, you couldn’t have planned for. Knowing your why will get you over those bad days.

Steve: Awesome, thanks so much for that Brad and more importantly where can people actually find you if they have questions about selling on Amazon and where can they find the product or get some coaching from you.

Brad: Oh, yeah. Check us out, our site is Amazonsherpa.com. We are the Amazon Sherpa because we will take you Amazon business to the next level. We have all kinds of tips, stories, news, what’s working right now on Amazon because things change from time to time. So yeah, go over there, check us out, sign up for the newsletter.

Steve: Sounds good Brad, hey thanks a lot for stopping by in the show, there is a lot of tips you shared today on Amazon that I did not know and thank you for that.

Brad: Thanks for having me, we’ll talk again soon.

Steve: All right take care, Brad.

Brad: Thanks, bye.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode; Brad DeGraw is actually my go to guy when it comes to selling on Amazon, and he’s got a ton of experience and he has a bag full of tips and tricks on how to make more sales on the platform. He also knows enough to give an exclusive lecture to the students of my ‘Create a profitable online store’ course, and for that I’m very grateful.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode60 and if you enjoyed this episode please go to ITunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud but it also helps keep my podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else, either in person or to share it on the web.

Now, as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

059: How Will Mitchell Makes 6 Figures Selling Online And Teaching Others How To Import From China

Will Mitchell

I became a huge fan of Will Mitchell when I accidentally stumbled on his blog, StartupBros.com. Not only is Will an excellent writer but he always writes from experience which is quite rare when it comes to the Internet.

In this episode, Will teaches us how to find products to sell online and how he has created an incredible business importing goods from Asia and teaching others how to do the same. Enjoy the podcast!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Will got started in ecommerce
  • What Will sells in his ecommerce store
  • Will’s techniques for finding the right product to sell
  • What margins Will likes to see on his products
  • What tools Will uses to find products to sell
  • How to import goods from China
  • How to get around high MOQs
  • How to distinguish good sellers from bad sellers on Alibaba

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. Today I’ve got someone really special on the show, Will Mitchell. Now let’s see, how did I come across Will? First off, I’ve never really met the guy in person, but I kind of feel like I know from his blog Startupbros.com. Now if you’ve never been Startupbros.com, I highly recommend that you check it out. Every single post is just so detailed and well written that I have been guilty of spending hours reading it when I should have been working on my businesses.

Now unlike me, Will started his entrepreneurship journey at a very young age. He actually started importing and selling online at age 16, then he dropped out of college at age 19 to help start Affluence which is a social network for affluent people, and after this company went public, he started a successful consulting firm and today Will focuses his time on Startupbros.com, and I believe he also leads people on tours to the Canton Fair. So with that, welcome to the show Will. How is it going man?

Will: Pretty good Steve. Good to be here, thanks for having me.

Steve: Yeah. You’re a hard man to track down.

Will: Yes. Finally here though.

Steve: So how did you get into eCommerce and what happened at age 16 that made you try to import goods from China?

Will: You know, when I was really young, you know, as young as 12 or 13, my parents had me really young and my dad was just a hardcore entrepreneur, did some amazing things. So I kind of got a back seat to watch all of what he did and through that from a really young age I decided that I probably wasn’t going to go to college. So I pretty much decided that school in general– I didn’t really see how it connected to the entrepreneurial journey, and I didn’t see how people that were really dedicated to the education system got further in the entrepreneurial world.

So I kind of decided from a young age that I was going to use entrepreneurship and trial and error as my schooling sort of thing. So the first business I got into was– and this was 13, 14 years old, I started doing counterfeits and things like that.

Steve: What does that mean?

Will: So counterfeits purses and counterfeit wallets.

Steve: Oh okay. Got it, okay.

Will: All the fake Gucci and Chanel stuff you see.

Steve: Right.

Will: So that’s actually how I started off. So it gave me a good footing and everything but obviously it was a little risky, but that’s actually how I got started off. So I started selling those on eBay, Amazon. Back then it was a little bit lucid than it is now, they are not as strict. So made some good money doing that for a good two years until I got a cease and desist from– you know, I started getting them from pretty much everyone: Nike, Burberry and Gucci. So luckily for me I respected the cease and desist, didn’t get sued or anything, but kind of took all the profits that I had from the counterfeits. That’s funny, I actually I still have like a box of a whole bunch of fake Chanel purses and Gucci purses and stuff in my garage.

I kind of took to the– what I learned from that and profits from that and I started trying to go legit with it, so tons and tons of failed products before I really figured out what I was doing. And back then– this is 2002, 2003, early 2000. So it’s still pretty almost like the Wild Wild West of the internet. There were a lot of scams out there; doing business on Alibaba, doing international business in general was really quite risky. So I did make a lot of mistakes, I got scammed quite a few times. I’ve seen pretty much every scam in the book, but eventually success did start to happen. I only had four or five failed products before I really started to figure things out.

And yeah, so from there I kind of transitioned into– I was selling everything from decorative knives and swords to eventually I really focused– like you said, by the time I was 16, 17 I had pretty much figured out that I only wanted to sell airsoft goods. So I really started focusing on that, really built relationship with the manufacturer. He helped me get– setup a distribution center in the US, and yeah, just kind of grew it from there, and it went pretty well for a while. Eventually China actually made airsoft guns illegal, so that’s actually what eventually shut my business down, and it actually happened around the same time I was supposed to go college. So at that point I kind of started to go on a direction but…

Steve: Okay. Do you sell anything today?

Will: Yeah, definitively. We sell a lot of beauty products, a lot of cosmetic products, things like that.

Steve: Are these white label or have you created your own formulations?

Will: So we have two or three brands, product lines that are white label and then four that are private formulation.

Steve: Okay. And just– since you’ve sold– it sounds like a wide variety of stuff, like what is your thought process when you try to decide what to sell online?

Will: Oh that’s a good question. Yeah, I really have sold just a whole world worth of stuff, so pretty broad categories, but yeah, it’s really all about the numbers for me. We have a few– we have this product selection check list that we give to all our clients and it basically in a nut shell it says that if I can pick up the product and toss it around with my hands comfortably, then it’s good to ship and everything. So that’s one of things I look for that’s not super complex to ship, it doesn’t have tons of regulation surrounding it, it’s not going to have crazy labeling requirements, it’s not going to be something like a computer or a car where if one little piece goes bad, the whole piece, you know, I’m down.

I try to go for things that have a high margin there and then in addition to that, really just looking for fast moving products that have great margins. I really focus on finding products that have 67% plus margin. So if I am buying a product for five bucks, I’d really like to be selling it for 15. I think at that kind of margin and that kind of mark-up, that’s where you can really grow a business quickly and have a lot of fun with it, so that’s what we encourage our clients to do.

Steve: So that pretty much excludes drop shipping or domestic wholesale for the most part, right, would you say?

Will: Yeah, we tend to encourage people to go with importing either private labeling. Most of our clients will start off private labeling and then eventually know once they really start to figure out what the customer wants, what makes the customer tick as well as obviously testing their product out and proving their product. At that point we try to transition them from that into creating a really established brand, building their own website and kind of transitioning from getting off the ground private label to real sellable company or real sellable brand.

Steve: Okay. And in terms of– so you mentioned some of the aspects of the products that you like to sell, how do you actually come up with the actual goods and what is your kind of formula so to speak on how to evaluate whether a product is going to sell or not?

Will: Okay. I use a tool that you’ve probably heard of and I’m sure a lot of your listeners have heard of called Terapeak, one of the only tools out there that I absolutely say every entrepreneur really needs to– every importing entrepreneur really needs to have, really every eCommerce entrepreneur. So I have this production selection spreadsheet that essentially just has a list of products, and then what I can buy it at, what I can sell it and just kind of figures out roughly my margin and everything. So I literally– my goal and I do product research is to fill up that spreadsheet with as many products as possible.

So I kind of just let my mind go wild. There is a lot of little tips, like for instance if you find like a good private label or a good importer on EBay, Amazon you can take that seller and put that seller into Terapeak and actually do the research on that seller’s name and figure out the other products that they are selling. So in terms of brainstorming, there is a lot of good ways to get ideas for products like that, spying on the competition, looking at hot sellers, Amazon movers and shakers, and things like that.

But you know from there I just try to get tons of ideas, get them all into this spreadsheet and my whole goal with this spreadsheet really is to just get like I said, 50, 100 products on there, get all the data on there, all the numbers and even though all of the estimates on what my profit margin is going to be, what my profit per unit is going to be, even though all that is just rough estimates, it really gives me a good comparative view of 100 different products and at that point it just becomes a game in numbers.

If you have a100 products in there that you’ve– kind of let your mind go wild and just put 100 different things in there, you are going to have at least one really good product and it’s going to be obvious just from a comparative view of the other products. So I don’t know if I explained that well, but that’s kind of my process for product research if that makes sense.

Steve: So just for the benefit of the listeners, Terapeak is a tool that essentially scraps all the eBay listings and I believe it scraps some of Amazon’s stuff as well, and gives you an idea what is selling well and what is not selling well. So if I could just summarize what you just told me Will, it sounds like you go and you kind of look at some of the hot sellers or– like, walk me through how you use Terapeak because I know how I use it. I’m just curious how you– do you look at the best sellers and then see if you can find the suppliers of the best selling items and then get your own and sell them?

Will: Yeah. That’s definitely one really good way to do it. Yes, so Terapeak like you said, eBay, data scrapper for the most part, but they actually– they have an exclusive deal with eBay and they are actually the only company that has access to eBay sales data and as you know, Amazon doesn’t give anyone their sales data.

Steve: Correct.

Will: So eBay really– Terapeak is really the only place to get this really, really in depth eCommerce data. I actually don’t know anywhere else that it really exists, I don’t know if you do.

Steve: No I don’t actually and for Etsy there used to be a tool, but it’s kind of become defunct over the years to scrape Etsy as well.

Will: Yeah. So that’s really the only reason I really recommend Terapeak. I always hate recommending any type of paid tool, but if you are getting into importing I definitely recommend it. They have seven-day free trial; I definitely recommend jumping on that trial even if it’s just for the seven days, even if it’s just for the week that you are doing product research. It’s going to expedite the process, so it’s just going to make it so much smoother. So…

Steve: So let me ask you this. How did you go from like airsoft guns to like beauty products? It just seems kind of random to me. So do you know anything about that market or was it just a number– purely the numbers?

Will: It was purely the numbers and for anyone that’s looking for a product right now, I’ve just recently seen a lot of beauty products, a lot of things like essential oils and things like that just have crazy margins right now. So for whatever reason, the margins are really good in that niche, so that’s where we’ve been. But yeah, after I got out of air soft, like I said that was right around the time I was going to college. So I actually went to college for about a year, two semesters before I dropped out, and I pretty much learnt nothing here in college but how to drink. So say I went to college for a little bit, after that didn’t do really any business in college which eventually really kind of depressed me. It was kind of amazing to see how college influenced me to become a less productive person.

Steve: Interesting.

Will: Yeah. And one thing I kind of thought too when I was in college is entrepreneurship really is just, you know, there is all these lessons that you have to learn in entrepreneurship and there is no way to learn them. You can’t learn them in school; there is no way of teaching them. You literally have to learn from going out there and making mistakes and getting stung basically. So my philosophy was I just wanted to get out of the system and start that journey and start going down those path of lessons.

So that’s what I did. I dropped back out and started the company Affluence that you were talking about. So that went pretty well. We actually took that public about a year and half after we launched it. So from there we took the money we made with that and then bought a company called organic color systems.

Steve: I see, okay.

Will: And basically again just the margins– when we were looking at– we went through tons and tons of different businesses trying to figure out which business we were going to invest and which business we wanted to spend our time growing next. And just going through it for whatever reason again, cosmetic industry the margins are just ridiculous. So that’s the business we ended up buying, kind of built out the take end of the business, the back end of the business, the automation and sales and everything.

Steve: So this company, were they manufacturing their own products or…?

Will: Yeah, they are actually– they are a distributor– they were a distributor for a manufacturer in the UK. And like I said, now we’ve grown it, now we have seven or eight different product lines and then one side of our warehouse actually just has one of my friends from high school just shipping out all of her random Amazon products and stuff like that.

Steve: So you don’t use FBA or…?

Will: Not really actually, no. We recommend that most of our clients do, but just a situation we are in; we are a distributor for seven or eight different brands. We have exclusive deals with most of the brands so we typically have to buy huge MOQs and stock our warehouse for six months a year at a time. So the FBA just– not only would it not make a ton of sense for our business, but also the business already had a warehouse when we bought it. So…

Steve: Okay. Yeah, but just in terms of sales, right, people are more likely to buy the prime products, right?

Will: Yeah definitely true. But we actually– I would say maybe five percent of our business’s revenue comes through Amazon, so actually that business specifically we actually focus a lot on the professional market, professional hair stylist and things like that. So now there is much on Amazon.

Steve: So you are kind of more like a wholesaler, right, essentially?

Will: Yeah. So we are a distributor for those seven or eight brands like I talked about. I know this is getting a little confusing for your readers.

Steve: There is a lot of stuff. Yeah, maybe we should just focus on one thing.

Will: Yeah.

Steve: Let’s focus a little bit on just the importing process. You’ve done a lot of this, right?

Will: Yeah definitely.

Steve: So let start with some of the main challenges with importing and some of the misconceptions on how difficult it is, and let’s just go from there.

Will: Okay, cool sounds good. So I guess what does your audience really have trouble with just the process aids here.

Steve: Most of them are a little bit scared of importing.

Will: Okay.

Steve: And they have problems finding products to sell which is why I kind of asked you some of those questions. So if you can just kind of walk me through your process from start to end, just at a high level, and I’ll just ask you more specific questions as you are talking.

Will: Yeah definitely. So the first thing we really talk about is– for all of our clients and stuff like, the first thing we talk about is really kind of laying the foundation and really getting a good upper level view of what you are going to trying to do. Like, I said we always recommend people start really small, find a product, find a supplier, which I’ll talk about in a second, but in terms of the top level view of the concept, you are really just trying to find a good product, a good supplier, buy a sample from that supplier, sell that sample, doing that is going to alleviate 90% of the risk of the business. And then from there, you are going to get pretty much immediately, you know, if you buy three samples and they sell, you are going to know right away if you want to buy more units of that product or not.

Steve: So when you say sell, do you sell on eBay, Amazon?

Will: We typically recommend our clients to sell on eBay just because if you make a mistake on eBay, not only is the lower quality buyers on eBay that are less likely to skew you in the reviews and everything, but also if you get a bad review on eBay, they are not going to ban your account for one bad feedback, whereas Amazon if your first feedback on Amazon is bad, I’ve seen them close accounts for that many times.

So we definitely recommend starting on eBay just because you can mistakes there, but yeah. So that’s really the top level view of it. So the first step obviously is that product research deep dive, really figuring out. And like I said, the way I do this is to just pull out a spreadsheet, get a list of products on there and just go through Terapeak and start just putting data in the spreadsheet basically. You want– the things that I really look at are the sell-through ratio, and the sell-through ratio is a number that you can only get through Terapeak, and the sell-through ratio is basically going to show you not if there’s– you know, people are always scared of, oh there is competition, there is other people selling this product, so can I sell it?

Don’t be worried about competition, you know, competition is a good thing because if there is no competition that means that there is no market there and there is no money to compete for. So definitely don’t be scared of competition. We need to be scared of market saturation. Are there still new buyers coming in, and that’s really what matters. So the sell-through ratio is basically going to measure the market saturation if there is too much competition or too little competition.

And so basically we recommend that people go for products that have at least a 30% sell-through rate which basically means that for every 10 listings that go up on EBay, three of them get sold. So we recommend at least going for a 30% sell-through ratio, obviously the higher you can get the better. The most successful clients we have get 50, 60% sell-through ratio on their products. So that’s a really important number, your sell-through ratio, obviously your average sell price– and this is a question we get all the time.

So when you are going through Terapeak and looking, you know, putting your average revenue for selling the product, your average sell price, we always combine the average sell price and the shipping price and that will give you your total revenue. So you want to get the total revenue in there and then obviously the cost of the product and that’s really the only three things that you need in the beginning. And we go through– and like I said, get a 100 different products on a spreadsheet and just get a good comparative view of 100 different products and figure out, out of those 100 which two or three are really hot sellers, where is the opportunity at, and from there move forward.

Steve: Okay. And then your next stop is usually Alibaba or…?

Will: Yeah, exactly. So once you have those two or three products then start going at Alibaba looking for suppliers. Obviously you only want to look for gold suppliers, that’s really the number one requirement. So we recommend our clients go through Alibaba, obviously look for gold suppliers only. All the other things are just kind of cherries on top; you have things like supplier assessments and things like that. Gold supplier is really the only minimum requirement, so go through– find how much good gold suppliers and just go out and message two or three of them.

And we usually just go out and one little hack that we always teach our clients to do is to act like their own secretary. So never act like the boss of your own business because when you are talking to these suppliers– there is a weird thing in Chinese culture, if you are the boss of a business, they kind of would look down on you and your business if you were the one speaking to some secretary at their company.

So we found that by acting like your own boss, not only does it kind of put it on a level playing field, make you look like a bigger company and a bigger importer, but it also buys you a lot of flexibility in that you can say, “Hey this price is pretty good but I have to go back and talk to my boss. Hey my boss said that this didn’t work out, I’m really sorry.” So it allows you to retain the relationship while being a little bit more assertive.

Steve: Okay. That’s good advice.

Will: Yeah, that’s one thing that we always recommend. So yeah, reach out to these suppliers as your own secretary and say, “Hey, my boss is looking for a new supplier for this product, you know, we are a large– we have branches all over the country that sell this product and we are looking for a new manufacturer. Can you send us a sample of five or whatever?” And what will usually happens is they’ll usually send you like an excel spreadsheet which is basically a catalogue of a bunch of different products and price specks, and shipping specks and things like that.

And pretty much you just kind of grow through and analyze the pictures, kind of have conversations with the supplier and see how you feel about them, how much you trust them. And obviously if you are really on a budget, you can really start an importing business with a 100 or 150 bucks if you needed to. So if you are really on a budget, obviously just get one or two samples from one supplier, but ideally you can get two or three samples from two or three different suppliers and then you pretty much wait for those to come in. In terms of how these get shipped and everything, it’s really quite simple, you generally just ask the supplier hey, can you ship this for me? And they pretty much just ship it through their DHL account. And ironically it’s actually much cheaper for you to do it that way too because you can actually benefit from their bulk shipping discounts, their bulk box discounts, tape and everything.

Steve: So Will, how do you deal with– so we import for our online store and what happens is sometimes we get samples but they aren’t the same as the production run that we get. So how do you kind of get around that aspect, quality control? Does that make sense?

Will: Yeah definitely, so one problem that we see a lot of our clients running into is when they get their samples, they’ll have another company’s logo on it and then they can’t sell it. So usually the way to get around that is just to ask when you are getting those samples, just make sure you asked for a blank production run with no other product logo on there or anything. A lot of times we’ll tell people that we are actually going to stamp the logo on there ourselves, so it needs to be blank.

Steve: Okay. Typically when we get samples, it’s usually off of some old production run of someone else. That’s what I was asking.

Will: Yeah. That’s really the only good way to get around that that we found is just asking for a fresh one right off the line. A lot of times if you ask for one that’s unbranded, you know, completely blank, they’ll pretty much have to give you a new one because a lot of times they are only producing and when they have a logo to put on them. So that’s really the only that we found out other than just asking.

Steve: Okay. What is your tactic of getting around high MOQs or minimum order quantities?

Will: Typically just pushing. It really– a lot of it has to do with the perception that you create about yourself and your company. So a lot of it has to do with that shipping hack that or– sorry, that secretary hack that I talked about. You really need to act as if– so, you know, don’t go way over board and start– one of the big mistakes that I see people make all the time, is they start talking about MOQs right off the first order.

They start asking what’s the lowest MOQ possible, how low can you bring this MOQ? I wouldn’t do that, definitely act as if, you know, act as if you are this huge company with 200 branches and 6000 sales people in the US and you need– you got a sample of five of these silicon baking mats, but you have 200 locations with 6000 sales people so now you need a sample of 500 silicon baking mats so you can get those to your main location and send those out to your sales people all over the country, so they can try it in their markets.

So that’s really the best we’ve seen. It’s just act as if– you know, most people are willing to bring their MOQs down. You just need to convince them. So that’s probably the best way we’ve seen is– because that kind of alleviates a lot of the risk of– if you say we have this websites that sells 20,000 units a day, they can go easily check that, but if you say we have 200 physical locations in the US and people are physically going out and selling these products and we need to get your– these samples in the hands of our sales people all over the country, and MOQ of 5000 is not going to work, we need a sample order of 500. That’s really been the best way that we’ve seen, and again using the secretary hack and that too, so you are saying, you know, “Well boss– you know, I’m really sorry, but my boss said that this is the way it has to be.”

Steve: Okay. And in terms of just kind of navigating the difference vendors on Alibaba, do you have any tips on how to distinguish the good from the bad and what you look for?

Will: You know, like we’re talking about earlier, it used to be really like the Wild Wild Western in the early 2000s. Alibaba was just this crazy place where scammers were– it was a scammer paradise. So it’s really changed a lot since then and it’s recently– Alibaba went public I think three or four months ago, and I want to say it was the biggest appeal of all time. So Alibaba I think– they are just improving so much. I think their big goal right now is really making a safer place to shop, and I think their goal is to kind of permeate the US market, the American market. So I think we are going to see Alibaba become much, much more like Amazon in the future. So in terms of staying safe on there, it’s getting safer every day, right now it’s relatively safe.

Like I said, just going through and buying from gold suppliers most of the time, you are going to be safe at this point. But in terms of alleviating the risk of importing in general, any time you are– even with your sample order and definitely anytime you are doing a large order, you need to use some sort of third party financial protection. So whether it’s PayPal, whether it’s Escrow, most of the time we recommend that people start with PayPal for their first couple of sample orders, and then move to Escrow once they are making thousands, 2000, $10,000 orders.

But you know, you really have to have that third part financial protection because then if the product isn’t up to your standard, or you are not satisfied with it or if they do scam you then you actually have some repercussion. You have some way to go back and actually get that money back. So, that alone is going to alleviate most of the risk of scammers on there.

Steve: Have you used the Alibaba Escrow services before?

Will: Yeah I have. And they actually– it seems like just in the past few weeks they’ve really built it out. I think they are kind of rebranding it as Alipay now, so I think they are trying to really become the PayPal of international payments at this point. So it’s going to be really interesting to see them grow in the future and just– things like Aliexpress too, more and more– I meet random people now that are like, “You teach about Alibaba. I just bought, you know, my Halloween costume on Alibaba or Aliexpress.”

Steve: Interesting.

Will: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Will: So it really is kind of starting to permeate the US culture and with how much money they just got from their IPO, give it another two years and I think we are really going to see some amazing growth out of them.

Steve: So at this point, let’s say I have some product ideas, I’ve gotten some samples; I’ve placed the bulk order, where do you typically sell your products? Do you go on Amazon first; do you establish your website? Like what’s your strategy after you have everything ready to go?

Will: So for your first sample, like I said, we always recommend eBay for the first sample.

Steve: Sure.

Will: Main reason being eBay has got really low quality buyers there, just kind of impulse buying, just kind of browsing and impulse buying. They are much more likely to leave good feedback and much less likely leave bad feedback, whereas Amazon buyers, you know, they are coming there to buy something, they are coming there because they need a fan and they want a fan with a great customer rating, and they want it in two days and they want it to work perfectly right out of the box.

So it’s just really much higher quality, much higher demands on Amazon but– so we recommend starting with eBay in terms of how to create the listing and everything. A lot of what we recommend is just going out there and copying what works already. So go out and find some listings that are working well, kind of make this weird amalgamation of it that is improving.

So build your listing like that and just sell the first few on eBay, and once you sell those first few samples, that too is going to alleviate a lot of the risk because what you’ll see a lot of times in importing is and where all the horror stories come from– because there are so many people that have stories about, oh I lost $1100 on importing, I lost $1500 on importing. Your first order doesn’t have to be that high. Most people assume that they have to buy 25, 50 of a product their first time, but you know, just buy three to five samples and sell those. Not only are you going to get to experiment with that supplier, you are also going to get to sell your product to actual customers with the actual expectations of your products.

So you’ll really get the true view of how your product’s quality is, if it’s really up to the standards of your customer, and you’ll also get the true sale price. It’s really easy to come up with really good margins in a spreadsheet, but you are never going to know what the actual sale price is, you are never going to know what you are actual revenue is until you go out there and actually sell it on the real open market, and there is no way to do that without samples. So just those first three to five samples, get them up on eBay, get them in and out the door as quick as possible, and that’s really going to get the ball rolling and then from that point it’s just getting that snow ball and keeping it going.

Steve: So assuming the eBay test passes, what is usually your next step? Do you start going to Amazon at that point and selling on Amazon? Do you start creating your own site? What is the ordering?

Will: Yeah, definitely. After eBay, after you know you really verified that the sample is going to work and the product is going to work, then we typically go back to the supplier and try to put in an order of 25 to 50.

Steve: Okay.

Will: And yeah, the next lowest hanging fruit usually is going to Amazon. Obviously it’s going to be different from product to product, but yeah definitely we recommend everyone at kind of that second stage start looking at Amazon, start trying to take advantage of Amazon because Amazon just gets so much traffic right now, you know, why not?

Steve: It’s almost like you can just put up anything at this point and it will sell. It’s kind of scary actually.

Will: Yeah, especially during the holiday season. We have a holiday jump start group right now, and I always talk to them about this concept of discounted risk. Any other time during the year, it’s still pretty risky to buy samples even if it’s three samples, five samples. There is still a chance that they are not going to sell, and the only time that’s really not true is during December. So anyone that’s starting importing in the month of December, early December you can get your products in the door and out the door in 20, 30 days and really verify your first products, verify it’s going to work and everything. Again it’s not nearly as risky as it usually is during December.

Steve: Absolutely. So I’m just curious and this is just based on running my own store. For us at least prices in China have been increasing dramatically as of late. I don’t know if you guys have been seeing the same thing, but are looking into other countries at this point?

Will: Yeah definitely. So for specifically for our cosmetics company and beauty company we’ve one supplier, one manufacturer in Taiwan which is basically China, and their prices have just gone through the roof in the past two years to the point where we might have to drop them. So yeah, we have seen the same exact thing and China’s economy in general, their wages are going up, in general the economy is really doing well over there. So I think what’s really starting to happen now is a lot of the reason that china was a manufacturing power house was because it had such low wages and it didn’t really have a middle class. For better or for worse, that’s one of the reasons.

So I think now since they are starting to kind of get into middle class and starting to become a more intelligent workers rather than manual worker, I think that whole industry is starting to kind of permeate into the rest of Asia. So I have seen places like Myanmar, places like Malaysia, all these places that are kind of surrounding China, Thailand, Cambodia, things like that– a lot of the actual manufacturing is starting to go out there now from what I’ve seen. And it’s good too because you can actually still find those same suppliers on Alibaba, it’s just a little bit tougher; they are not as well listed. But you can definitely filter down and find suppliers from any country there, so that does help.

Steve: Okay. Outside of Alibaba, are there any other places that you typically look for vendors?

Will: Just Google actually. So a lot of our client want to– even though we recommend against doing heavily regulated products, things like food or anything that you ingest pretty much, a lot of our customers decide that they want to go into this anyway. So for those people specifically we usually recommend that they import– source domestically. So we have like one client that is doing supplements, so things like Maca Powder, and things like that.

So to get around the requirements or all the red tape and everything and the regulations, we basically told them like you should just go on Google and start Googling Maca Powder white label or Maca Powder private label, Maca Powder wholesale and just going through and trying to find a domestic supplier that will be able to do this for you because then that domestic supplier is going have already gone through all the regulation, all the loopholes and everything.

So for people that are doing products like that we do recommend sourcing domestically and like I said, the way we do that is to typically just Google. A lot of the US based or I should say Western based private label manufacturers will have websites up and things like that, but they won’t be on Alibaba.

Steve: Okay. And then do you– when you are working with clients, do you actually go as far as– do you just primarily help them source, or do you actually help them get their brand off the ground as well?

Will: So we help to an extent, with the branding and the selling and everything. Right now our current mastermind group is actually specifically geared towards selling during the holidays and everything.

Steve: Okay.

Will: So yeah, not as much going through branding and everything, but definitely going through driving traffic, driving– especially the initial traffic, things like that.

Steve: Okay. And then it’s probably primarily through selling on Amazon. Is it accurate or…?

Will: Yeah. Most of our clients here make most of their money through Amazon and in terms of kind of like the third step– so we talked about getting the samples and getting your products up and eBay and just really sales channels first, and then kind of that second step would be ramping up your order sizes a little bit and starting to expand on the Amazon, and other established sales channels like that, taking advantage of those existing sales channels is really important. And then after you’ve kind of exhausted those two, all the other existing sales channels, then we really recommend that third step.

People start to build their own website, people build their own brand because branding and building your website really a different animal than just getting products and putting them up and letting someone else drive the traffic and convert it. You have to do– not only do you have to do everything you’ve been doing but now you actually have to do Amazon’s job too. You have to drive their traffic and convert the traffic and send it out so– and manage their customer relationship. So it really is a different animal: building your own website and building your own brand, and it’s the type of thing that you really have to go through those first two steps of building your business through existing sales channels first before you take on all that extra burden.

Steve: Okay, cool. Let’s see well what– I’ve been trying to think I mean you started at such a young age that our experience is just completely different. Are there any business books or any entrepreneurs in particular that have influenced you over the years?

Will: Yeah definitely. In terms of the people who’ve influenced me I’m sure a lot of the same people that have influenced you and your listeners. So a lot of the people in our market, people like Tim Farris, but yeah I mean people– Mark Cuban, for me specifically like I said my father is a really proficient entrepreneur, so I have a lot of respect for him. But yeah, in terms of books too my all time favorite book by far is ‘How to win friends and influence people,’ that’s the only one that I go back and re-read all the time. There is a really good book by a guy named Felix Dennis called How to get rich, and that’s a really good one too. He just has like a really vulgar way of teaching it.

Steve: That makes it entertaining I would imagine.

Will: Yeah definitely. He has one quote in there that has always stuck with me. He says, “If it flies, floats or fornicates rent it, it’s always cheaper. So he has a really good way of writing though. That’s a really good one for people who are just starting out that kind of need that inspiration coupled with that step by step action plan. He has a really good way of doing that.

Steve: Okay. And in terms of everything that you do related to importing and selling online, what are some of the online services that you use for your business that you just can’t live without?

Will: Specifically for importing, I mean our whole business really runs off QuickBooks, so QuickBooks has obviously been huge for us. But that’s really for– if I was just starting out again, my main goal is always to just keep it as simple as possible.

Steve: Okay.

Will: So in terms of tools and software and things like that, if I was just starting out, I would try to keep as many– keep it as simple as possible. So really the only things that you really, really need to get started in importing are Terapeak…

Steve: Alibaba.

Will: Alibaba, Amazon and eBay. Those four things really are all you need. And there is a lot of little tools that will help you manage inventory, that will help you optimize your listings once you start getting sales, that will track your sales and all sorts of things. But, it’s really easy to put the cart in front of the house and start thinking like– we get so many clients that before they even start looking for their first product, they are thinking like, “Well wait. What about this form 56-56 from the RIS, and what about CIFs from customs and how do I get this through customs and what do I do when my products get to the port? Do I just drive there and pick them up?”

It’s like there is so many questions that you can ask to complicate this process for yourself, but I really encourage listeners and anyone getting started in the importing and eCommerce or business in general. Don’t put the cart in front of the horse, you really have to think big and act small. So, you know, think big, have that big vision and everything, and then think like, what’s the smallest action I can possibly take to get there? And just one small step at a time just kind of build up and all the tools and everything, those will always be out there, those will make themselves apparent when they are actually going to solve a problem for you.

Steve: Awesome. That’s a really good advice Will and I wanted also to give you the opportunity to talk about Startup Brothers, and some of the courses and that sort of thing that you provide and where can people find you.

Will: Okay, awesome. Anyone can– like Steve said we really go all out in creating really actionable detailed, step by step guides on our blog. So check out Startupbros.com, check out all of our really in depths data driven guides and everything to see how you can copy what’s working for us in our business right now. And then in terms of what we are going to be doing, like I said, we have our current mastermind group is going to be closing up here in January 8th. So we are going to be launching a new importing gem start group, and basically we bring in a whole bunch of guest experts and things like that, people that have helped in my importing business and just kind of go through step by step, hold your hand and show you– go through as a group and kind of launch these importing businesses.

So this is going to be fourth time we are doing it, so we’ve gotten pretty good at this point. So definitely if you are interested in seeing our entire process A to Z, we have a free webinar in January 8th that will kind of show everything for free. So definitely be there.

Steve: Okay. Hopefully this will be recorded, I’m not sure this episode is going to air by then, but I’m sure you’ll have other webinars as well. I’ll link them up.

Will: Yeah definitely.

Steve: Hey, awesome Will. Really appreciate you coming on the show, great material, and great advice as always.

Will: Okay, awesome Steve. Yeah, I hope your listeners got a lot of value out of it. I know I’m kind of all over the place, so I hope there is some good tidbits in there for your listeners.

Steve: No-no-no. It was man, it was good.

Will: Awesome.

Steve: Cool, take care.

Will: Awesome. You too, thanks.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode. Will has been buying and selling goods from China for a very long time and he is a seasoned eCommerce store owner and not only that, he’s also an incredible writer and he does a great job articulating his experiences. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode59, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you leave me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep my podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m also giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to Mywifequiteherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

058: How Steven Essa Makes 6 Figures Giving Killer Online Webinars

Steven Essa

This podcast episode with Steven Essa was one of my favorites because I learned so much about the art of giving effective online webinars. Seriously, this episode was so jam packed with actionable tips that I found myself furiously taking notes during the interview.

In fact, Steven was so engaging that I barely spoke at all and he did most of the talking. He’s got tremendous energy and I know that you’ll get as much out of it as I did. Enjoy!

BTW, you can check out Steven’s websites at StevenEssa.com and X10Effect.com

What You’ll Learn

  • How Steven stumbled upon giving webinars for profit
  • How Robert Kiyosaki influenced Steven to take control of his life
  • The fine art of giving effective online webinars
  • How you should break down your presentation to maintain interest and sell your products
  • Should you give away your best stuff in the webinar?
  • How to get people excited about your information
  • How to do a webinar even if you have no audience or email list
  • How to start creating webinars now even if you don’t have a website
  • How to price your webinars
  • How to sell a product that you haven’t yet created

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I am giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. In this episode I’m going to be talking to Steven Essa. Now the reason why I decided to bring Stephen on the show is because I wanted to interview someone who makes a living with webinars. Now Steven is actually recognized as one of the leaders in the webinars niche, and today he speaks at major online business events, internet marketing events around the world and teaches people how to animate their webinar processes.

Now here is what I like about Steven, he is a hustler. The guy started out with no money at all when he was a heavy metal rocker, then he went through a bunch of jobs deep in the trenches like being telemarketer, a maintenance man, network marketer until he found his calling with webinars. Now personally I actually don’t have a lot of experience with webinars so it will be a real treat to learn from the guy. So with that, welcome to the show Stephen. How are you doing today man?

Essa: Yeah, great Steve. Thanks for having me on man.

Steve: Yeah, great to have you. So give us a quick background story in case people haven’t heard you before, and tell us about your business and how you got started with webinars.

Essa: Yeah, absolutely man. I think, you know, I was always been searching for a way to achieve financial freedom since I read Robert Kiyosaki’s book, “Cashflow Quadrant” in the year 2000 when I was banging my head up against the wall in a job doing telephone sales for a company in Australia here, and at the same time I was in band trying to make it in the music business. I had a dream of one day performing some big shows and all that and he worked very-very hard in the music business for 13 years which taught me a lot of business, taught me a lot of networking and the importance of marketing yourself and all of that stuff.

So we took that as far we could, we ended up in Los Angeles in 2003 to 2005, and they said, you know, it’s the worst time ever for music. So I just got really-really frustrated and said, “Well 13 years and now it’s over?” So it’s like– it wasn’t a very good plan. So I basically said to myself, “I’m going back to Australia where it’s nice and relaxed and it’s not as superficial, not as superficial as Hollywood.” And I basically just started to focus on creating a business and investing in real estate. And I tried to build a website, and I’m not a techy at all, so I think I had one meeting with a guy and that was the end of that business, and then I went into real estate and I started buying property and in 2008 pretty much got wiped out like many people who are highly leveraged.

So I thought– I went back to the Robert Kiyosaki book, I read eight years earlier and he said, “Build a business and invest in real estate.” So I was trying to invest in real estate as a business and I said, “Well I don’t want to go and buy a franchise and spend all this money or rent a store. And I have to basically pay for all that expense and I got no idea how to run a business.” So I looked online because online is cheap, it’s a cheap place to fail. And he said, “Look to fail as many– he said, ‘One in ten businesses makes it, nine out of 10 fails.” So he goes, “That just means you have to try 10 times.” And I thought, “Well I don’t mind trying 10 times if it’s online because most you’ll spend is a couple of grand.” And that’s what I did.

So initially I was working in a real estate job and I looked to help my boss’s business with his internet marketing. And it’s what I always tell people Steve is if you have don’t have a business right now, go and apply these stuff that we’re teaching and that you teach and your other experts teach. Go and apply it to someone’s business because one of my favorite mentors when I was growing up was Bruce Lee. I read in many of his books and he says in his book, “Knowledge is not enough.

We must apply what we know, otherwise it becomes lost.” And I went to internet marketing events and read books and started applying that to my boss’s business because I didn’t have a business. And I helped him make like 106 grand in sales using the presentation techniques I was learning and the copyrighting and all that sort of stuff, and it gave me confidence. I said, “Wow! I can do this for myself. If I can do it for him, I could do it for myself.” So I quit my job in 2008 and I started my own business at that point.

I basically run my first ever webinar, made $594 selling a product that I hadn’t created yet which was teaching churches how to make money, churches, and charities using internet marketing. And from there I made 4 grand, 10 grand, 20 grand, and 100 grand and it’s just sort of grown from there. I said to my mentor, “How good is this, you know, this webinar stuff?” And he said, “You should become the webinar guy.”

And I said, “No one is going to pay me to do webinar and teach him how to do webinars because they are so easy, right?” Who would pay to learn how to do– all you got to do is press record, have a PowerPoint presentation, and start talking. He said, “No, you’ll be surprised.” And eight million dollars later, it’s like– and five years down the track, he was right. It’s like it’s found a niche for me and I became the webinar guy.

Steve: So today you actually go around the world teaching people how to make money with webinars, is that right?

Essa: Yeah, that’s right exactly. We did a world tour. My wife and I– we said, “What’s the ultimate?” We really-really are passionate about helping people achieve financial freedom and achieve– get their message out there. Many, many great experts have great knowledge but they are working one on one in their business or their practice and they don’t have leverage.

So unfortunately they are going to die with their information in them when many people around the world could benefit from that information that they share. They could have a healing modality that no one knows about, that they could help people heal and there is all sorts of people that can cure cancer and do all these sorts of things that are amazing, but they are stuck in their little local town and they are very busy in their business, and they don’t have time to actually implement any of this.

And I teach people to– who is an expert how to leverage but also teaching other people to go these experts and help them set up a webinar business because they can get their information online and out there and they can pay you 50% for doing it. And that’s sort of what I do now– is I have business partners that I just control the backend, control the webinars and I own five companies now that are doing anything from 5 to 50 grand a month. And also we do is teach the expert how to present on a webinar, how to sell and leverage them.

Steve: Okay. You know, we are going to go through that in a lot more depth in today’s interview. I just thought I’d make a couple of comments. So one of the reasons– so I’ve done a couple webinars in my day and one of the reasons I don’t like to do them very often is because I got to prepare a really good presentation and a lot of times it’s one off thing, right? And so what I understand is you actually offer this software that allows replays of the webinars, right? So can you kind of comment on how that works?

Essa: Yeah absolutely. If you’re going to be doing the work you want to leverage it right. So you want to create a webinar presentation, run the webinar live, it forces you to actually do it and record it. And once you’ve recorded it– it’s not just my webinar software, there is many people who have webinar replay softwares out there that will automate your webinar. Mine is just one I created for myself, then customers started wanting it, so I made it available to my members and we sell it online, but basically it just allows to replay your webinar in one of many forms.

You can have it as a video that’s like people can watch the video and then when you say buy now, a buy now button can drop down and they can click on it and buy and that’s how you make money while you sleep. And then there is also scheduled replay webinars which allows them to watch it, but they can’t fast forward or rewind it, so it has a bit of a live field to it. Now when you’re marketing replay webinars to people, don’t say it’s a live webinar if it’s not, because deceiving and I think people these days will– you don’t want to blow your credibility in terms of saying, you know it’s a live webinar when it’s not.

I always tell people if it’s a replay, it’s still a replay but they have to watch it or at the best you just say, “Watch this webinar or watch this webinar online.” And then they know it’s scheduled at a certain time, they’ve got to come and watch it, but to be honest…

Steve: So you actually have to schedule it, even though it’s a replay you still have to schedule time to watch it?

Essa: There is one of three options, that is what I was going to say now. To be honest I just allow people– I have a play anytime option, I just let people watch it anytime. But I removed the control so they can’t fast forward and rewind because a good webinar presentation is a process that people need to go through in order to get into the buying frame. They need to see each section. And when I do, when I help people put together a webinar whether it’s at one of our events where we pick someone out of the crowd and do it from scratch or whether it’s one of my 75 grand clients– I go through the same process.

It’s the same template; our templates that we’ve created, they’ve probably done over $50 million in sales for us and our clients that have used them, so it’s a proven formula. I just have people fill those in and then we present it in 60 minutes or 90 minutes depending on how much content they’ve got and we make an offer at the end. And if they don’t have a product, even better we just create a product on paper and then we sell it and if people buy then you deliver it. It’s just more webinars, something we talked about before, just sell more webinars. Yeah.

Steve: Okay. And so you mentioned that you do these seminars across the world and you actually pick people from the audience and then just create a product from scratch. So what I was hoping to do today in this podcast is pretend that you are talking to me and I want to create some sort of product, but I have nothing. I don’t have an audience; I got nothing, so walk me through the process.

Essa: Yeah. So the first thing is who is the target market? Like what do you– what information…

Steve: Okay. Yes, so my target audience are people who want to create eCommerce stores. But let’s say I have no content, I got nothing. So what would you advise me?

Essa: Yeah. Basically what I’ll do is I want to put together a webinar with you. That’s the first the step, no matter what. Whether someone is in your position or not I’ll just sit there and go, “Okay, first we need to choose on who is the target market, who are the people that we want to target.” We want to choose people who want to create an eCommerce store or they already have an eCommerce store and they want to monetize it more. They are making a million dollars from their eCommerce store. There are people over 60 who have got eCommerce stores, or what is that target market, what can we identify is the common denominator with all of them, out of all of those things I’ve just mentioned or if you can tell me who is the target market.

Steve: Okay. So let’s– just for the sake of this example, lets beginners. Maybe people who want to start a family, so maybe they are in their early 30s; late 20s and they want to spend more time with their child so they want to start a business that they can kind of run from home.

Essa: Okay great excellent. They going to spend less time with their kids if they work from home let me tell you. No, I’m just kidding. Okay, so how to make– and what’s the best– have you actually done this? Have you made money from eCommerce sites?

Steve: Yes. So let’s say I have my own eCommerce site. Actually yeah, I have my own eCommerce site.

Essa: Great, excellent. What’s the best result you’ve got in a month in sales?

Steve: The first year that I launched it, I made six figures.

Essa: Okay, great. So if you could give me an exact figure that would be better because the more exact we are with the titles, the better. So people– instead of saying like how to make a $100,000 a year thanks to eCommerce sites, the headline I’d want is something like, discover how to generate $171,000 in 12 months thanks to eCommerce.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: Okay. So that would be title of the webinar. Just grab any title for now, it will do and let’s work now. If haven’t got that result then you say, “Discover how to build a highly profitable eCommerce website in five easy steps.” So we’ve charged in the target market. We could even say something like, ‘Attention Beginners.’ So spend a bit of time on working out who is the target market and come out with that title of the presentation and then we want have– create the introduction of the webinar which is about 10 minutes of content.

Any introduction on a webinar what you want to do is Steve is, number one when people come to your webinar you got to be quick to tell them what’s in it for them. They’ve registered, they’ve come to the webinar, you’ve got a couple of minutes at the beginning to really make them decide whether they’re going to pay attention to the webinar or if it’s a going be a webinar playing in the background like a radio. Because too many people these days they think, “I got 100 people to the webinar.” But you got to get them engaged, it’s not enough to have them there. You’ve done the hard work, now you’ve got to keep them there.

So when the webinar starts, if you use GoToWebinar, there is a lady that says, “Broadcast has started. All attendees are in listen only mode.” Right? As soon as that hits, and you’re sharing your title of your presentations on the screen, you got to get– “Hi, welcome to the webinar. It’s Steven Chou here and today you are going to discover how to make $171,500 in five easy steps building an eCommerce website, okay?

And today I am very excited because I’m going to show you how to retire with this strategy. I’m going to show you if you’ve been wanting to make more money, if you have been– I am going to show why eCommerce websites are the best thing out there since sliced bread and why you should use them and most importantly what to avoid when you’re doing them. Let’s get right into the content here.

So put down any distractions, grab your pens and pad and this an interactive webinar, so make sure you’re taking lots of notes. I’ll be grabbing questions at the end, so let’s get into it.” Then I want to basically put in a slide. Who is this webinar best for? Who is this webinar for? And what I want to do there is I want to touch on all the different demographics that we have there, the different target audiences. This webinar is for you if you’re a husband or wife that you want to work from home to spend time with your kids more. You are looking to replace your income. Ecommerce website is perfect because they are easy, you can do this and na-na-na. It’s perfect for you.

This is for you if you’ve got a product, a small business offline right now, but you want to move online and you’ve got a range of products. This webinar, we’re going to show you how to build an effective eCommerce website. This is going to be perfect for you if you’ve got some products and services already. This is for you if you don’t have any products or services. We show you how to white label stuff, so that if you don’t a product or service you are not sure what to do but you like the concept of eCommerce websites, we are going to show how to be effective with this strategy as well, and also this is for you are blah-blah-blah. So you are trying to– you want everyone on the webinar to say, “Ah, that’s me at one of those or more of those.”

Steve: Okay. And in this period is– you said five to 10 minutes of this?

Essa: Yeah. They still going with the five– we’re still in the first. These are some of the concepts within the first 10 minutes.

Steve: Got it.

Essa: These are things we want to touch on them. And then you want to get into the proof. So any proof– nothing sells like proof. So if you’ve got a screenshot or a bank account statement of you making that money, now black out all your banking details and stuff, just show the figure. All right, this is my bank account guys in 12 months, or this is my financial year review bank. This is 171,000, that’s my website. That’s what I did. Here is the front of the website, this is what it did, okay?

Here is a client of mine, he did– like I’ve got– one of my clients is a vet. He made 300 grand and sold his business in 12 months thanks to webinars, created a website called thewebinarvet.com; people can go and check that out. They can hear his testimonial on YouTube if they don’t believe me, it’s there. Also he made over a million dollars, he sends me an email, I put that he sent me in there. I show people, I’ve got a pilot he made 450,000 pounds thanks to webinars. I’ve made $8,000,000 thanks to webinars. I show my PayPal account somewhere.

But here is a webinar I ran last week. I want people to know that this is current. So I always update my testimonials as often as I can. Hey here is a– like I said to you at the start of the course. I just did 57 grand two weeks ago, last week I run a webinar, made a 100 grand selling 10, $10,000 products last week, right, to a boot camp we’re doing. So the more proof that you have the better, the easier it is to sell. If people don’t have proof Steve, they just got to find the statistics.

So they say something like, look nine out of 10 ecommerce websites don’t make money according to the Bureau of Statistics website, and you quote the source and you say, “Here is why they don’t make money, because they don’t follow the five steps that I’m showing you here, or look at this guys one out of every 10 people who comes to a webinar buys, right, whereas one out of every 100 on a website.” So webinars are much better conversion and you could sell products that are 10 times more higher in price. How do we know? Because we’ve tested this over and over again. This outs our research or other people’s research, quote the source.

And I look at that first introduction Steve like a lawyer, you know, when you watch your lawyer closing a case, he goes to the jury, and he or she says, “All right, here is the case. Here is the story. Here is the precedence that have been set before, here is the proof that we have that we’ve put forward to you; the gun had the fingerprints, the DNA, the blah-blah-blah.” My wife and I watch all these crime shows. So it’s basically putting that case forward and adding that credibility in the first 10 minutes. And as well as you can tell your story in there as well, but don’t do what everyone else does and go, “Yeah, my story is I left school and then I did this and then I did a white law thing.”

Make sure your story relates back to the audience. So I always say something like, you know, I failed school and I told people I failed school because I want people to think you don’t have to be smart to do webinars, right, because it’s true. You don’t have to be rocket scientist to do a webinar. And then I say, “My dad told me to get a safe secure job and have a trade to fall back on so I became a body mechanic. So I fixed smashed cars and I tell people that. I said, “Whose parents told them to get a safe secure job?” And people type in on the webinar, “Yes mine, mine.” I say, “Yeah Bob, Linda, Berry yeah, your parents told you job security, right?”

Now it’s relating back to them, okay? Instead of me saying, yeah, my dad told me to get a job, and it’s panel beating, I’m relating it back to them. Then I say, but my dream was to play music and be in a band. Who has a dream or a goal but because of time or money, you can’t do that. All day your are day dreaming about doing what you love but you can’t because you got to be in a job because you don’t have enough money and people always say, “Yeah, yeah that’s me too, right?” So I told them I am a musician, I told them where I’ve come from, but I’ve related everything back to them.

Then I say, “Then I got into real estate. Who’s invested in real estate, didn’t have enough cash flow before?” Yeah, absolutely that’s what happened to me. I realized I needed a business, so I started a webinar business and I made 10,000, 20,000, 100,000, and there is the proof, and that’s what I do is I teach people how to make money. Here I am today teaching people how to do this. So I give them my story of the important points that were turning points in my life but turning points that are going to relate back to the audience as well because that’s really what we want.

People buy from people they know, like, and trust. If they say, “Ah! That’s like me. My parents told me that too.” Now they have an affinity with you, they have something in common with you and the more you create that– it’s like at the start while we said, “This webinar is for you if you are looking to retire or looking to spend time with your family.” We want people saying, “Yeah, that’s me. The more you get them saying, “Yeah, that’s me.” The more they feel understood.

Steve: This is really good advice. I actually have this video as part of– incidentally I gave away a free six day mini course on how to start an online store and I started with an introductory video and I think I’m making some of the mistakes that you just mentioned. I basically tell my story, but I don’t probably do a good job of relating it back to the listener. So this is really good advice.

Essa: Yeah, awesome. It works really good, it works really good. And it’s okay, because when I started out, that was my story but then I started thinking about it, “Okay, why am I telling– always ask yourself, why am I telling them this.” How does this relate to them? How can I relate this back to them? Whatever you say on a webinar, how can I relate this back to the audience? That’s what I always look to do. And that whole section what we just covered there is the first 10 minutes, okay? If you are on a 90 minute webinar, then you want to do that in 15 minutes.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: Okay? And then we get into the content, and the content is the bulk of the presentation, and the content is where many people make a mistake because they fail to deliver content. If you are not making sales on your webinar, one of the primary reasons could be you are not delivering enough content, you are not demonstrating enough information, you are not demonstrating your skills enough. And a lot of people have a problem with the content they’ve got because if I give away everything Steve, what’s the point? They are not going to buy from me.

I said, “I challenge you to try and give away in the next 40 minutes as much information as you can. Everything you know about your topic, give it away in the next 40 minutes. So I challenge you to try, okay?”And there is no way you could do it, right? There is no way Steve you could give away everything you know about eCommerce websites in 40 minutes, is there?

Steve: No, there is not. But there always is this thing in the back of my mind that you might be giving away too much, right?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely. It’s a very, very common fear of a lot of people have. Let me tell you that the buyers are the buyers. On a webinar if you’ve got 10 people there, one of the people who is there is a buyer, okay, if you’ve got the right target audience there. Now the other people they are coming along this– there might be three or four people just sniffing around going, “Okay, I’ll just come along. I’ve got nothing to do and I’d rather come to an eCommerce– learn about eCommerce. Maybe I’ll pick up a couple of things, maybe I don’t know, I don’t really care.”

But there is someone there that when you say, “This is for you if you’ve got a family, and you’re looking to retire and whatever.” They going, “That’s me.” And then they are watching and they are going, “Wow! I really think I could do this,” and then you are demonstrating and you’re going, “Oh wow! That’s really easy and wow, how good is Steve at his teaching.” You know, that person who is out of those 10 is going to get excited and go, “Wow! Look what I learnt from Steve in 40 minutes. Imagine if I buy his course.”

Imagine the value, look at these templates. Imagine if he just gives me that $50 million template or that ecommerce template that he’s created $171,000 with, you know he’s just explained it, right? He’s just explained it but imagine if I get my hands on that template, that’s going to be so much faster if I work with Steve. After 40 minutes I’ve learnt so much, imagine what I’ll learn in his course eight modules and the templates and the couching calls with him and all of that stuff. That’s what happens to people, but if you don’t demonstrate enough, and it’s a fine line, you don’t want to turn it into a lecture.

So you wouldn’t want it– for example, you talking about eCommerce websites. In the five steps, you got to create three, five, or seven steps in the content, right? Three and five steps is the best, seven gets too much, right? Three or five steps to building a successful $171,000 per year eCommerce web business. What we want to do there is we don’t want to turn it into buy a domain name and here is how you buy a domain name. Go to Go Daddy then click there and then do that and then– and then what do you is go to the hosting and don’t use the $9.99 option, choose that option and then after that you’ve got that hosting.

And then go to this website here, it’s called eCommerce themes. I go here and I buy the theme and then I go into choosing the theme, then choose the theme there and then I go– add this to the WP admin, WordPress thing, now if you don’t have WordPress then here is what you click on.

You don’t want to turn it into like a — too much of a drill by a drill, step by step because you just don’t have enough time in 40 minutes and you are not completely– they aren’t convinced 100% they want to do this yet. So you want your steps, you want to give the fundamentals and a little bit of how to and some resources, but you can’t give them everything that’s in the course because you don’t have enough time to deliver it.

So at the end of 40 minutes, we wouldn’t have even gone through the first couple of sections and then you’ve left out all of the other stuff like how to get the product, where to source the products from, where to do this– you got to give an overview of every step, but don’t be afraid to sink in a little bit on each one and say, “Here is a resource that can help you do that, like you can buy themes for eCommerce websites here for like $100. We have our own themes.

Don’t be afraid to say we have our own themes, our proven templates that our students use available in our program. But hey guys, you could still go to a website likes this and buy it if you wanted to. There are some options for you or you can get them created, go to odesk.com and they’ll create, ask someone, look for a eCommerce expert. Just be careful of this and this when you do it that way and make sure– ask for the quote upfront. And you are there to help them as best as you can, you want to stir them in the right direction.

Let’s pretend in the first 40 minutes they are not going to buy from you, all right? They are going to leave there and you have to help them become successful whether they buy your product or not because that’s just the right thing to do. They are investing an hour with you, you promised to give away great information. We have to fulfill that promise, and those of us that have been to webinars where the guy just sold-sold-sold-sold-sold the whole time, we left feeling disgusting and we said, “We’re never going to another webinar with that guy again because he just sold-sold-sold- sold, delivered no content to us at all.”

The sale happens in that 40 minutes of content, that’s when the people who emerge– who say, “Wow! These awesome, I want more of this.” That’s what we want them to do. We want to whet their appetite, by the time we get to end of 40 minutes we’ve given them stories, we’ve illustrated, we’ve shared testimonials, case studies, people who’ve used that information. Here is how you do this; here is how you do that, here is what you do there, and then we recap that after 40 minutes.

Steve: Okay, all right. Yeah, that’s good stuff. So that accounts for 50 minutes. So you don’t sell anything until the very end, is that how you structure it?

Essa: That’s right, yeah. The last 10 minutes now– there is a lot of people out there that will say, “Oh you got to start selling in the middle because people leave on your webinar.” That is BS, that’s total BS.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: And if you don’t keep people interested enough in your content, right, if you’ve done your job properly on your webinar, they are going to hang around till the end and they are going watch your webinar because they’re just genuinely interested. A percentage of people are like, “Wow! I mean– I don’t even know what it is yet, but I mean I want to work with Steve.” They’ve made up their mind.

They’ll come up to you later and they’ll say to you, “You know what Steve, I really resonated with your story about what you said about your mum and how you want– how you’ve got a kid and you’re retired, you know, you tried to do this for your kid. I like you, I resonated with you, and I really see how this works. I see how you made the money, and I see how that works, and I really want to do this, and I want you to help me because you sound like a really, really good person.” They’ve already made up their mind.

If you think back to when you’ve bought something especially on a webinar you’ve made up your mind that you want to work with that person or you know that their information is going to be good in that book or the course that they are going to run. You’ve already made up your mind. It’s just about now; they have to give us an irresistible offer. Like one of my favorite movies, the God Father, “I’ll make him offer he can’t refuse.” You know what I mean?

You got to make them an offer they can’t refuse. And how do you do that? You stack the value. Now nothing– people give you money if you give them value, okay? And what I teach people in the close of your webinar, first before you close, you recap everything. You say, “Here is what we covered. Here is proof, I showed you how to do it, right? Step one was this, step two was this, step three was this, step four, step five was that.” That’s the recap.

And then you need a transition slide because Brian Tracy, one of the best salesman in the world and a sales trainer– he says, “The sales section is the bumpy part in the whole process when you are giving a sales pitch, when you are giving a sales talk or something like that, when you are asking for the order that’s when the hardest part is for most people, right?

Steve: Right.

Essa: And so to transition into that I use a slide that is something like– or you just say something like, “So there is the five steps guys, I taught you how to do that. So would you like the fast and easy way to make all these happen for you? Would you like to know an even faster way that you can make an eCommerce website making $171000 a year from? Would anyone want to know how to do that?” now you’ve just delivered 50 minutes of quality, right? They are going to be going, “Oh yes please,” right? Say, “Well if you do stick around because here is what I’m going to show. It’s called the eCommerce Mastery program, all right?” And if you don’t have a name for your program you just call it something-something mastery program. It’s just…

Steve: Okay.

Essa: It just becomes like, have they mastered building an eCommerce website, right?

Steve: Sure.

Essa: And you say, “Here is the program.” And if you don’t have a product right now Steve, it’s perfect because here is what I do. I tell my students put together eight, 10 or four, eight or 10 more webinars and also we need– is the topics that you are going to cover. So you to say people, “Okay, what’s the guaranteed formula to make all these happen the fast and easy way? Introducing our eCommerce Mastery program.

You’re going to get step by step instructions on how to implement these strategies right now and the great thing with our eCommerce Mastery program is that you’ll get– you’ll know exactly how to put a eCommerce website together the best way, the fast way, the easy way using our approven templates so you can start making money sooner, so you can retire faster, so you can make $171,000 a year. And instead of struggling to do it yourself, you’ll basically have a proven formula there for you.”

And then I say, “Webinar one, we are going to cover researching and market to look out what’s the best market and in this webinar we’ll talk about X, Y, Z, this and this and this. And the benefit of that is blah-blah-blah.” Now here is the biggest mistake people make Steve when they are doing it close on a webinar, they start talking about the features. “Let me tell everyone listening right now, no one wants to work with you one on one, no one wants to watch your DVDs, no one wants to watch your webinars, no one wants email support from you, no one wants anything from you.

They want the result of what that product or that one on one coaching call will do.” And people fail to close highly when they fail to tell the benefit of each of the features that they have. So instead of saying, “You are going to get this webinar which shows you how to research and in webinar two, you are going to get a webinar which shows you how to pick the best domain. In webinar three, you are going to learn how to get the best hosting and webinar four, you are going to learn how to get white label products and webinar five– instead of saying that you say, “Webinar one, we are going to show how to market research.

In this webinar we’ll look at the best markets to go into so that you make the most amount of money, so that you are starting off in a profitable niche. This is what gives you the best chance of making more money so you can retire sooner, so that it’s less headache to manage, so that you get to spend more time with your kids, you get to spend more time on things you want to do and that’s really what you want, isn’t it?

Steve: Okay. So instead of going over what your course offers, you just emphasize the benefits to the person who signs up for that particular webinar.

Essa: Exactly.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: I say 30% features, 70% benefits. So if you say you get this DVD set which is a weekend workshop with me and we show you– we basically go through the whole process, it’s amazing, it’s awesome, it’s blah-blah-blah, that’s 30%. The rest is you are going to learn how to build the business faster, you are going to go– you are going to be able to do it in two hours a week, you are going to be able to retire sooner, you are going to be able to have more cash flow, spend time with your kids, you are going to be able to buy properties with one cheque, you are going to be able to run a webinar, you are going to make money, enough money from that webinar to put a deposit on a house. How good is that going to feel? That’s what we teach in that webinar.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: You know what I mean. Instead of saying we show you how to put together an introduction, a middle and close, and how to put a product together, they don’t care about all that. They want the end result, so you got to remind them and don’t be afraid. If you know your target audience wants to retire and you’ve got a whole bunch of people on your webinar and they want to retire, quit their job and spend time with their family, don’t be afraid to say that 10 times in the close.

Remember guys when you do this, when you setup a eCommerce website the right way, you are going to be able to retire, spend time with your family. When was the last time you took your family on a holiday? You are going to be able to do this when you set it out and you can manage your eCommerce website when you are on holidays if you need to in just one hour. You can have the sales coming in, you make the money while you sleep, you wake up, you check your sales, you add a couple of extra products on it, you spend the rest of the day with your kids. Paint that picture of what life is going to be like after they own your product.

Steve: So the first webinar is free and then you charge for the subsequent ones. Is that…

Essa: That’s right, yes. If you didn’t have a product right now I would create, get you to create some more webinars, right? So four, eight, 10, or 12 over one per week. So you can run them live each week and you only have to record them the first time and customers will be really happy because they get to speak to you more. They get to ask questions and the good thing about creating your course this way Steve is that basically you can fix it on the go.

If you notice that your customers are too– falling behind and they are not keeping up with you and you are going too fast, you can basically– you can change it, you can change the course midstream and add in there an extra webinar or add in there speed it up or slow it down or add some more resources in there. If people rush out and they write a book and then they go and build a course and then they try and sell it when they haven’t got any feedback from anyone, it’s the worst thing you can do. You are not going to create a good product.

How do you create a good product? You market research, but you get people to pay for the market research by selling them the webinar series on the course, on the free webinar. You sell them the series and now you have people paying for market research and you are trying to make them successful as best you can so get testimonials for next time.

So I want take those customers over the first four, eight, 10, 12 weeks whatever you’ve created. I normally create eight week webinar series, and those webinars can be anything from five minutes to 90 minutes. Just as long as you teach me how to get those steps, that’s all I need, right? Give them the content and then give them some homework and see you next week. And then you report…

Steve: How much do you charge?

Essa: Depends on the product, you know, it’s like– normally for a little of your product normally something like you are offering there. For eight webinars, $297 is a good price point to start off with.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: And what I want to do is I want to make them as successful as possible. So the first lot of customers that I have, I want to call them up. I’ll call them up. Say we get 10 or 20 people signed up, I want the business owner who we’re starting a business with to call them up and say, “Why did you buy? What made you buy our course?” And they are going tell us. Those 20 people are going to tell us why they bought and that’s good information for the next free webinar we run. And then I’m going to say, “What’s your idea, what’s your topic, blah-blah-blah,” and I’m going to help them become successful because I want testimonials. Nothing sells like proof.

If you can help people do what you are saying and you get a testimonial that helps sell more on the next time you run it, right? And it helps them talk to other people and it’s what your product should be doing, your product should be getting results. Like I think my webinar costs– gets more results for people than any other internet marketing product that I know, and it’s more real results, because putting a webinar together works. When you do it the way we teach, it works and that’s why we have so many successful students.

So to me in a business, results is everything. We want to get– whatever we’ve got to do, bend over backwards to help that first bunch of customers get the result, that’s going to help us put the price up, it’s going to help us to add more value to it, get testimonials, sell more of them later on. And if you are selling more than one in 10 at $297 put the price up to $497, then $997, 2000 and that’s how I started. I started with a $300 product and now I sell a $50,000 product but my average product on a webinar I sell it $3000. I don’t have a product cheaper than that except my webinar replace offer which is $497, but I don’t sell that on a webinar. I just got a website for that, we don’t spend too much time focusing on that. We sell our $3000 webinar training and that sells by itself on autopilot.

Steve: Through your webinar replay.

Essa: Yes, through our webinar replay, exactly, yeah.

Steve: Okay. So let’s go over something else. So let’s say you’ve got the presentation. How do you actually get people to sign up for your webinar?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely. There is many, many ways. We cover a lot of information on how to do that. It’s the biggest question we get, but I’ll give you two easy ways that you can do that, right? The first one is joint ventures. First thing you need to do is start building your own list. If you are in online marketing, then you need to start building your list, right? And if you don’t have a GetResponse or AWeber or Infusionsoft or one shopping cart, MailChimp, you know accounts to capture names and email, that’s the first thing you need to be doing. You need to be capturing names and email addresses yourself, and every opportunity you want to capture names and email addresses at every opportunity.

At my event I actually show people how each person who comes to your webinar is worth $70 when you follow our sort of model of creating products at $300, then in $2000 and $10000, but we don’t have time to do it here, but basically each person who attends your webinar is worth a dollar amount if you are selling products and stuff. So you have to realize that building your own list is number one, critical and something you have to do every day. But the number one way to fill a webinar is to find people like me who’ve got $25,000 subscribers or more and ask them to mail to their list for you, for your webinar and give them a percentage of the profit if you make a sale.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: Yeah. It’s what I do every week, right? I either promote other people on my webinars and they sell, like I had a guy last night. Last night we run a webinar on Amazon. The guy made three sales so far at $500, right? We had like 80 people there. So conversion rate was a little bit lower than what we’d expect. He wasn’t a student of mine, he was just a guy I met at an event and he interviewed me and I said, “Okay, I’ll do a promotion for you for a 50-50 deal.” And I’m sure the webinar replay has already made sales.

If I check now in Infusionsoft I’m sure there is more sales coming from the replay, but basically find someone who has got a list, who will mail for you for a percentage of the sales because they can make you rich. Three or four guys like me can make you enough sales if you’ve got the right target audience, the right product, the right price; you make it irresistible, you’ll close 10%.

And if I can get 500 people registered for webinar I can get at least 200 to 300 showing up to watch it and then the rest of them on the replay. If you can close 10% of those, that’s 30, 40 sales at 300 or even $500 or a $1000, that’s 30, 40 grand. You are giving half away but– then you get other products and services for a higher price to those people who bought at the end of your eight weeks or 12 weeks course, you should offer a done for your service for 10 grand.

Steve: I see.

Essa: So once you’ve sold something for $300 or $500 then you– at the end of that, you say, “Hey, how can I help you more? We offer one on one, we offer this, we offer that. We do a done for you; we’ll build you your own eCommerce website for 10 grand.”

Steve: Got it.

Essa: All of that and that’s a 100% profit for you as well. So what I do is I spend 15 minutes or I tell people to spend 15 minutes every day looking for joint venture partners, create a spreadsheet and have your assistant email potential joint venture partners and keep chasing them up until you get them because a couple of those, we’ll make you a seven figure business quite easily.

Steve: So you mentioned the typical conversion rate for a well done webinar is on the order of 10% of the attendees, is that what you said?

Essa: That’s right. Yeah, that’s right.

Steve: Okay. And then do you use any sort of paid advertising like Facebook, adwords and that sort of thing typically?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: Absolutely. We totally do but I tell you now, if I lost everything tomorrow, if I lost everything and I had to start from scratch, I wouldn’t be starting off with Facebook ads because it’s so much harder and more expensive to do. And you can lose– what I always tell people is I’ve spent three grand on Facebook ads and made 30 grand, you know, I’ve made money with Facebook ads, but they are coming harder and harder to get them right. And if you are a beginner, it’s very-very hard.

If you hire someone to do it for you then great, but what you really– what the best use for your time is finding that JV partner because there is someone out there that needs more content for their database. When I do a JV webinar for someone like I did last night, the Amazon one, the guy delivered so much great information from me. Now, if I didn’t give that information to my 25000 people as option for them to sign up for that webinar, someone else will email them a webinar about kindle. You know what I mean? They’ll end up on someone else’s list.

Now why wouldn’t I want them to number one, make sure that the expert I’ve got– he is a good expert. He’s been doing it, he showed me proof how he is making money, 15 grand a month thanks to kindle. Why wouldn’t I want to put him through my list to my subscribers, it helps him. If he makes sales, he gets 50%, I get 50%, and my list gets great information. Even if they don’t buy they’ve gotten a resource, a great expert that they could reach out to, they could get help from if they want to buy the course later, or at least they know about it, and the webinar went for two hours and he was answering every question they had at the end.

So it’s another way– people say, “Why would someone want to promote me for that exact reason?” they are looking to promote more stuff to their list, they’ve got a list, they’ve got nothing else sell. The list– most of your list won’t buy product, so why wouldn’t you offer other people’s product to sell, right? So I could launch your webinar Steve, how to make a $171,000 a year thanks to eCommerce websites because I don’t have an eCommerce website, and most of the people in my list I think– there is only about three and half, 4000 of the people out of 25000 have bought something.

The rest are just on the list for information or their email addresses are bad or whatever it is. On your database there is only a certain number of active people and if you are not offering them something, they are buying stuff from other people. So why don’t you filter that and make a cut and bring the best experts to them?

Steve: Okay. So let’s take a step back and also talk about some of the tools that you use. So for example, webinar software, what do you use?

Essa: Webinar software, I just use GoToWebinar. I’ve got the same account that I setup in 2008. I think it’s $79 a month now for 100 people and people say, “Oh, but 100 people. That’s all you can have.” Well if you got a 100 people coming to your webinar, you can always upgrade it, but if you’ve got 100 people coming to your webinar every week then you are making way more than $79 a month unless you are doing something wrong.

Steve: Okay. And then in terms of collecting the email addresses for go to, do you use anything? You use Infusionsoft I thought I had you mention.

Essa: We’ve got five businesses and across those we’ve got one shopping cart, we’ve got two one shopping cart accounts, three Infusionsofts and our students– we teach them how to setup GetResponse because it’s 15 bucks a month, it’s cheap and you don’t need something so– as heavy as Infusionsoft when you are starting out. It’s a bit overwhelming for people and you don’t have a business yet.

So spend $200, $300 is a bit of a stretch for some people, so GetResponse or AWeber will do the job for you for 15, 20 bucks a month. GoToWebinar as well, 100 bucks a month or whatever and yeah, those are two main softwares that you need to collect names and emails and run webinars. We also have another tool we use LeadPages, which integrates really nice leads through those, so when people register for GoToWebinar, when you’ve set it up in LeadPages they automatically sign up to your AWeber account or your GetResponse account and the GoToWebinar at the same time. So that’s a really cool tool, Leadpages.net. These guys in the states made that. They are really-really clever, so that’s a good software to have.

Steve: What about Google Hangouts, have you ever tried running a webinar through hangouts?

Essa: Yeah. We’ve run webinars through Hangouts before and the software– first you need other software to actually capture names and emails for it, and secondly I don’t know about in the states but the internet speeds in Australia aren’t quite at that level yet where– you know, it’s a bit more laggy, it’s a bit more not as good quality, and at the end of the day I just didn’t have as much success with it and I didn’t find it as easy to use as GoToWebinar.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: But it’s a free software, Google Hangouts it works, whatever just choose the platform and roll with it and you’ll just become professional at that. On GoToWebinar and Google Hangouts you are going always have people on your webinar that have technical problems, okay? You are going to have a percentage of people that have a technical issue on their side; there is nothing you can do about it. You just got to send them a replay later. So I get people typing in questions, “I can’t see, I can’t see anything,” I say, “Don’t worry, I’ll send you a reply later.” And then they just go away and they don’t have to stress out anymore and they can watch the replay the next day.

Steve: Okay. And in terms of support, do you provide support to all the people who watch your webinars?

Essa: When they are watching a webinar– do you mean after they bought the products?

Steve: I mean after– yeah let’s say they bought the product. Yeah, let’s say they bought the product, yeah.

Essa: Yeah if they buy the product, yeah. We– it depends on the package. I mean, if you want to you can add support. Our $3000 program has email support; it also has a weekly group webinar which one of my head trainers runs. So they can get on a call every week and ask questions and interact with my head trainer, which she also allows them to present as well so they can get a student feedback and stuff like that, but that’s for $3000.

So it’s got to make sense financially, but if you are just starting out and you don’t have any money coming in, give away the whole house, give away everything for free as part of the package and then you put your price up when you are getting people successful. Because remember, once your calendar is full then you start putting the price up. I get a lot of people when I put the webinar to give and I say, “Throw in there some Skype sessions, throw in there email support and sell it for $297.” And they resist then I say, “Would you rather be busy and making a little bit of money or would you rather be not busy and not making any money?” You know what I mean?

Steve: That’s a lot of sense.

Essa: So I say, “Get busy.” If you are busy, busy people get stuff done and then you put the prices up. And next time you run it you go, “I’m putting the price up.” And then tell people on the webinar, “Guess what guys, this price is going up, okay? It’s going up. I’m going to do double the price very soon because I’m not going to have time to do this and they charge more money, so get it now while it’s cheap.”

Steve: So when does the actual website come into play? Do you always just do the webinars, but do you ever put that stuff on a website, like a membership site or is it always just webinars?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely. We’ve got a– we just build a membership site through WishList, WordPress. Wishlistmember.com I think they have a $97 plug-in and you plug it into WordPress. There is other sites out there like Kajabi.com and OptimizePress which is WordPress again, but you can basically build your own membership site or have someone build it for you for about $1000. Then you store those replay webinars that people paid for– you put them in there and you give them access to the membership.

You can charge them a fee but I recommend you just let them access the course they paid for because they’ve already paid for it for free. You can setup multiple levels and stuff like that, yeah. But we don’t spend a cent on that until we’ve made money, so we are only reinvesting money. It doesn’t make sense to spend stuff that you haven’t made on the business yet. So you got to reinvest a percentage of the money you’ve made into a membership site so that people can watch it after.

Steve: Okay. You know what’s hilarious about all this Steven is I thought…

Essa: You are doing it.

Steve: I’m doing it this way, but I thought it was very unconventional when I did it this way. Like, I launched without any content pretty much and I just kind of had buyers with the promise of content and then once I got these buyers, I started putting out the content. The only difference is I was doing it live to just a small set of people in the beginning. I wasn’t doing a whole bunch of webinars, but it sounds like your strategy would work a lot of better to expand and convert more people so.

Essa: Oh absolutely, absolutely.

Steve: Yeah.

Essa: It definitely works some. People say, “But Steve, doesn’t some people get upset that there is nothing there yet?” I know I always ask the audience. I always say, “Don’t ask me, ask the audience.” I say, “Who in the room here, who in this seminar room if I was selling a eight week webinar course for whatever price, $497 or whatever, who would rather watch the replay videos of those modules? Who would rather– put your hand up if you would rather watch the replay modules, or if you would rather me present that live to you each week where you can ask me questions at the end of each webinar.

Who would rather the replays, the video only? And always one or two people put their hand up but when I say, “Who would rather watch it live with me each week, and then I give you a copy of the replay if you can’t make it or if you want to watch it again?” And all the audience put their hand up. The audience wants to speak to a human being. This online that you can automate everything and whatever; they still want to be able to speak to a human being. They always prefer that over a video. Now they’ll take a video second, all right, they’ll take a video second.

So if you can show me how to build a eCommerce website in a video tutorial series that you’ve created, I’ll take it, but if you give me a choice then I can talk to Steve on the call each week and he’s going to run me through that eCommerce thing and I can put my hand up and ask a question and I get the replays, they are always going to take that option. So never be afraid to sell something that you haven’t created yet, just make sure you’ve got it created and it’s easy.

You just got to be one week ahead over the course or the modules. Now if you go halfway through and you go, “Guess what, I can probably create all the rest of them.” Create all the rest of them and send it to the customers and say, “Hey, I just created it all. If you’ve got any questions, email me. I’ll jump on a Skype call with you if you need to and whatever we are going to do to make you successful.” So it’s totally okay.

Steve: That is really great advice Steven. Hey man, I want to be respectful of your time. We’ve already been talking for 50 minutes, so just in enclosing where can people find more information about your webinar training classes?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely man. Well we finished the– I think we’ve finished the web business boot camp for this year, the tour. We did a world tour, my wife and I finished with that, but usually webbusinessbreakthrough.com is where we pull random attendees out of crowds and we did it all over world, but Steveessa.com just S-T-E-V-E-E-S-S-A.com– Steveessa.com is where you can check out my webinar where I talk about– I do a demonstration actually.

I pick someone on the webinar, do a webinar with them, and quickly show you how to automate the webinar, show you how to record and I also talk about the medicals and the module nuts, setting up webinars for other people and taking 50% of the company. And that’s– I’ve got one company that’s done like over $2 million now in three years, and I own half of that and that business partner has done 120 grand on a webinar with 13 people on there, and I make half of that and I’m not even there.

Steve: Crazy.

Essa: It’s a hugely powerful model. I call it the Medical center model where you get experts working for you. So in a medical center the model, the medical center owner is a smart one because he’s got the leverage, right? The doctors sort of pay a percentage, or pay a fee to him and her and they don’t have to go to work every day. So I’ll show you how to create a medical center model that you can make sales from.

Steve: Okay. And this is where you are sending them traffic from your list or is it just– how is this structured? What is your value add?

Essa: Yeah. Check out the webinar and you’ll see.

Steve: Okay, yeah. I’ll link up to it, I’ll link up to it.

Essa: It’s another podcast for you.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: There is many ways to do that. I don’t mean to be like avoiding, but there is many ways to do that. You can basically– a lot of businesses have lists already, but if they don’t you can yes absolutely set that up for your list, anything that you’ve got or you can go out and find JV partners for them, and make a cut of that, yeah.

Steve: Okay. All right, cool. I’ll link up all those resources in the show notes, and hey thanks a lot of coming on the show Steven. I really appreciate it.

Essa: It was my pleasure Steve. I hope people get value out of it and I hope more importantly you go out there and take action and get results.

Steve: All right man, take care.

Essa: Cheers man, bye-bye.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode. After talking with Steven, I actually went back and re-recorded all of my sales videos for my six day mini course, and I’m actually seeing the results and his techniques actually work. For more information about this episode go to Myquitherjob.com/episode58, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not always make me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice for my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

057: How To Use Influencer Marketing To Make 65K in 4 Months Selling Satin Lined Caps

Emmanuel Eleyae

Today’s interview is with my friend Emmanuel Eleyae, who runs SatinLinedCaps.com along with several members of his family.

What I find interesting about Emmanuel’s story is that he tried a bunch of different marketing tactics early on with his online store and they all failed. And then he tried influencer marketing using You Tube and hit the jackpot.

In this interview, you’ll learn how Emmanuel found famous You Tubers to promote his products and the services he uses to continually market his satin lined caps.

You also learn what it takes to create your own textile based product from complete scratch. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Emmanuel runs his company with members of his family who live all across the globe
  • How and where to source textile products within the US
  • Why Emmanuel decided to go with influencer marketing to promote his online store
  • How to find contract manufacturers to produce your products
  • How much Emmanuel invested to start this business
  • Where Emmanuel found the materials to produce his products
  • How to manage quality control
  • How and where to find influencers to promote your products
  • Why Emmanuel chose YouTube for marketing
  • The different types of YouTube ad formats that influencers can use to promote your products

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Emmanuel Elea with me on the podcast today. Now Emmanuel is someone who I ran into virtually on the ecommerce fuel forums and after hearing his back story I knew I wanted to have him on the show. Now Emmanuel and his sister sell satin lined caps, which are caps worn to protect hair from harsh conditions and extreme weather, and I was just chatting with Emmanuel before the interview before I hit record and it turns out to be a family business which I find very cool.

Now here’s the thing while their product is completely unique, it’s actually hard for them to market effectively because to the uneducated buyer these caps are just another article of clothing and as a result Emmanuel had a very hard time marketing his caps early on until he struck gold with a marketing medium that I’ve actually yet to try with my store and I’m eager to try after talking to him. And with that intro welcome to the show Emmanuel, how are you doing today man?

Emmanuel: I’m doing great. Good to be here.

Steve: Yeah so give us the background story and tell us about how satinlinecaps.com came to being, how you hooked up with and decide to make this into a family business with your sister.

Emmanuel: Sure absolutely, so about a year ago a year and a half ago, we took a read of “The Lean Start Up,” and I was working at Amazon performing at the time line performance when I was there. My sister actually we read it and we actually talked– she had an idea, she was in school for fashion at the time making clothes. So she had a problem that she had and she created a product, a satin line cap to help her you know because all the stuff in the market you know satin bonnet or other silk wraps and things like that and she kind of make it look like Angel Mimer walking around the house.

She wanted to be fashionable so she came up with the idea said hey she came to me a little while ago, about a year ago and said I have this idea, what do you think? I said well Lean Start Up stuff we’ve been reading ask 30 people what they think and everyone she talked to gave great reviews and they really loved it. And so I all right looks like we’re on to something, we put on Etsy, initially got some traction, got to about selling one or two a day and I said all right I think we’re on to something here. So I actually quit my job and my fiancé quit her job, and we decided to do it full time.

Steve: So you quit your job before it started making significant money?

Emmanuel: Yes it was kind of a…

Steve: Wow, okay.

Emmanuel: Leap of faith but at the same time I was a little bit ready, I was in the [Inaudible] [00:04:01] world and I had done that three years. I was in the military before Amazon and I have always wanted to do something entrepreneurial and here we were with a product where 30 different people spoke highly of it. So we were like why don’t we test it out, we ran 1000 units repeat to kind of test it out and it started going, so it was like I think this is time.

Steve: So let’s discuss the validation process here a little bit. So you mentioned you sold on Etsy and you asked 30 friends. Is there anything else that you did to just kind of give yourself the courage to take that leap of faith?

Emmanuel: Really it was– she asked her friends and then also I went around asking. So there were folks that I knew and some other ladies that I’ve been talking to kind of make it people that don’t know her potentially. And so every time I started talking to them they were like yeah I’ll take it, and I also asked would you pay for it? You know which was the big question and they all said yes, a resounding yes.

And they would describe to me the problem because I really don’t have hair, I’m bald and I know you can’t see me, but I don’t fully understand all that goes into hair care. They started to explain to me the concept and once I knew the people I was talking to were able to speak to me about what my product does, it was like okay I think we’re on to something here and that was enough for me.

Steve: Okay and then what’s kind of cool about your business is it’s a family business and it kind of spans all across the globe. So how did you kind of get all your family members on board and how does the interaction work since everyone lives in a different place?

Emmanuel: Sure it does get challenging, there’ll get challenge in time out of miscommunication at times but we do focus heavily on you know weekly meetings just to get everybody circle back in. We do Skype calls and a lot of phone calls. I’ve got my dad in Nigeria who helps to sell, and we have some relatives there. My sister is in Chicago right now going to school for journalism. I’ve got another sister and my mom down in Southern California who do the finance and some of the marketing, and me and my fiancé here we run the warehouse and do the operations. So we’re all over the place and we just focus on regular communication.

Steve: That’s cool, so I actually run a class as you know and a lot of my students are kind of interested in creating articles of clothing. So I’m a little curious how did you get your caps designed and manufactured, and can we just kind of go through that process?

Emmanuel: Sure we can and this is where my sister did the lion share. She did it all with help from my other sister and my mom, but she kind of was going through school and taking classes on making clothes, probably through January through the spring of last year. So she studied patterns and you know came up with the idea for the cap and it became challenging at that point– how do I scale? So she started looking around and researched contract manufacturers. At one point we were thinking of going with American Apparel which I didn’t even know they offered you know time on their machines to run stuff for you.

But we were actually able to find three or four manufacturers and through just the sampling process she would send them cut sheets and different specs for them to design out. They would send her back a sample, and the one that looked the best was the factory that we worked with down in Los Angeles [inaudible 00:07:12] factory. And it looked the best and they did a good job, so that’s where we chose to do our limited running and we’ve been using them ever since.

Steve: So how did you actually find these contract manufacturers?

Emmanuel: I think she pretty much stayed online. She went through online I remember she pinned a couple of times and there were a couple of websites– I have to get it for you– that kind of…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: Have a breakdown of here’s you know people who do manufacturing for this and some people who do manufacturing for that and I think Thomas Ned does some stuff like that try to aggregate a lot of different manufacturer’s state site.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of the design it was completely done by your sister?

Emmanuel: Yeah.

Steve: So you didn’t have to hire anyone to do that?

Emmanuel: Yeah, so it’s actually one of those like things in the story that always intrigue me that she went back to school to learn how to make clothes, and she took about three or four classes and she learned just enough to solve the problem that she had and she was done with school. So she was in the right class that taught her how to work with fabric, cut fabric, build sheets and specs, and different things and once she felt comfortable we went forward.

Steve: Okay and at any point did you actually consider doing any of the manufacturing overseas or were you planning on doing it in the US the whole time?

Emmanuel: And we have and that’s where I have been kind of reading your blog to figure out how really it’s all kind of happened so quickly because…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: As I said we launched the business since September 1st so we’re only about five months old or six months old or so. And it’s just a matter of time now just researching and figuring out who to go with. I’ve heard enough horror stories that it should be approached with caution.

Steve: Just for the sake of the listeners, one of the reasons why I had Emmanuel on is because he had– he actually had really explosive growth early on in the first couple of months of his business. I actually don’t remember the numbers Emmanuel, would you mind sharing what your first like two months numbers were in terms of your caps.

Emmanuel: Sure, it’s actually a funny story because I remember in September– September through October we were selling on Etsy and we were getting one to three a day, and it really wasn’t moving. So I set a goal you know let’s get to five slaps a day you know and then we hit this YouTube thing like I mentioned earlier. We took off, we were selling over 100 a day, so in about two and a half months we sold about $60,000 worth of product, completely emptied out our inventory for our MVP, and had 350 back orders before we could even get more inventory ready.

Steve: That’s awesome. Yeah so more on the manufacturing side, so you’re getting stuff I guess you mentioned in LA. How does the pricing differ between manufacturing in the US versus overseas, and is there a huge price discrepancy?

Emmanuel: Absolute– I’m still not entirely sure of that, I can tell you things I’ve heard like we were able to speak to a contact we made like a target in some other place and they gave us kind of upscale where they would make catch for about two to four dollars. That’s making 500,000 in a year– we’re making right now probably about eight to ten dollars a piece so…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: A little bit more– quite a bit more but to be able to say the word made in America and have turnaround time in four weeks is pretty beneficial to us.

Steve: Yeah and then how has quality control been?

Emmanuel: It’s challenging in terms of us not being able to go in while it’s being made and that’s mainly because we’re not actually physically in LA, none of us are there. I think they’d allow it if we wanted to. But in terms of the quality we haven’t had any issues with quality. Mainly the issues would come from our limited experience in design like Grace did go to school and she’s learned, but we’re still trying to figure out how a label should be applied you know and making sure that we communicate that well to them, you know the little minutia details. How the stitches should be applied and little things like that.

We had one design challenge that we had in our last run where they’d given us feedback that the way we made the label actually adds two weeks to the time to make a slap or for setting that cap which we didn’t know. So we tried to change it by adding a fold but that didn’t really work because then they weren’t able to sell it a certain way, so there was actually a little bit of a lip on the label, it wasn’t sewn down with the fold. So it actually as you pull off the slap it might catch on your hair a little bit sometimes. So some of those– that was more our fault and I talked to them, I was like hey what’s going on, and they said hey that’s what you guys made.

We’ve gone back replaced those units and now we’re going with a different label maker who can actually give us the folds that we need. But you know those little learnings I think, working with a manufacturer who works with small business and that was what we stated. So they work with small business, doing limited batches, giving the flexibility to make those kind of changes and correct them.

Steve: What was the minimum run that one of these manufacturers demanded?

Emmanuel: So for us it was 1000 units.

Steve: 1000 units okay. All right it’s not too much.

Emmanuel: No, not bad at all.

Steve: And in terms of just working with them in terms of fixing things, so would they just make a sample and then you would comment on it, and then they would redo another one?

Emmanuel: Absolutely.

Steve: Or, okay.

Emmanuel: We did have to…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: Provide the materials though, so that’s one thing they didn’t provide.

Steve: Okay and where did you shop for materials?

Emmanuel: So we went– at first we started– this is not an interesting story. We just went to the garment district and we picked them up almost retail you know it’s– they call them [inaudible 00:12:40] and I’ve learned all this myself the hard way but these [inaudible 00:12:44] you go down there and you pick some material off the show and you just take it right down to the manufacturer and they’ll produce a sample for you. Where that became interesting is that’s how we did it the first time.

We sold all our units and didn’t really have exactly what the skew was, what the color was color was, color matching the exact materials and when we went back to produce a round of 5000 units, it was almost completely different colors for the same color we’d chosen if that makes sense. Because the way they work is you take the overruns from larger manufacturers and just whatever is there happens to be there. So there are some colors we couldn’t even find anymore in that district. So we had to go through an actually get a textile wholesaler who is also in LA, Synergy Textiles and now we’re far more standardized with our colors, our patterns, our materials.

Steve: And, how many different styles did you launch with? I was just curious.

Emmanuel: We launched with five colors.

Steve: Five? Okay.

Emmanuel: Yeah just to keep it simple. Now I think we’re up to 11and we’re getting ready to produce four or five more colors and probably three or four more sizes as well, because there was a lot of feedback we got was you know I love the cap, but it’s just too tight or it’s just too big.

Steve: Actually that’s another question I had, how do you determine how many of each size to produce?

Emmanuel: I’m learning that now. In fact I’m in schedule to go through that this weekend talk through and my sister is actually going to design now in different sizes and we’re going to try again like we did before and just talk to some folks who have different head sizes and see how comfortable it fits. So that that way we try going through and finding sizing guides– I know they’re out there somewhere. I just haven’t been able to find them like with the general public wears what sizes, the average size for head size and things like that which she did a little bit to get the initial one, because it was one size fits all. So now as we get more and more gradual it’s harder and harder to find that information, so if you’re aware of any or if anybody knows I’d love to get some help on that.

Steve: Yeah I mean it’s a good question because your product is a little more complex and it actually needs to fit very well, right? It’s not like a t-shirt or something else along those lines so…

Emmanuel: For many reasons because I mean you’re sleeping with the cap, so you’re going to be wearing it for an extended period of time, so it needs to be comfortable.

Steve: Yeah is there any way– have you looked into making it adjustable, I don’t know if that’s possible but…

Emmanuel: Yeah that’s, you’re getting fancy there sir, but absolutely that would be the ideal for us. So after we get this run done and we’re getting stocked up again, meet these challenges that’s one that’s on our road map to try and work through that would be the ideal, if we could just make it something that’s tied off or stable, we can go back to having less skews because from the operation side the last thing I want is just an explosion of skews to hold here at the warehouse and to track forecasting for it to make and different things like that.

Steve: Absolutely, so any lessons learnt that you care to share with the listeners about just about the whole manufacturing process?

Emmanuel: Yeah, so give yourself enough time, that’s the biggest thing because we kind of ran into a situation. We had plenty of time in our initial run and everything was great and was sitting in a warehouse, but once it sold out we were sitting there with no inventory and orders coming in, and it was tough to get the manufacturer to work at the pace that we needed. So in those cases I don’t know if it’s give yourself enough time or is it a matter of optimism– gauging optimism and forecasting. If we had more inventory– but again we would’ve had to have known.

Steve: Yeah.

Emmanuel: So it’s kind of a fringy thing, but for sure give yourself time. It makes it much easier if you show up– like this inventory run we’re doing now, we already have inventory, so we’re going to have to invest a little bit more, and we’re going to make another run early enough, so that we can do the sampling. Now so for our labels we’re going to actually– if we’re changing anything to any piece, we’re going to send it to the manufacturer so he can make it at his scale, at his– in his way and then send it back to us.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: We’re starting this early we wouldn’t have the ability to do that unlike our hurry up run, it was early, here is the materials and go.

Steve: Sure. Yeah no I mean I think that happens to everybody, like we actually run out of inventory this winter because– and we’ve been running for multiple years because we started selling at Amazon and we just couldn’t keep up with the demand there, so I mean it’s really hard to predict.

Emmanuel: Yeah. But at least giving yourself enough time allows you like we talked about that label issue we had.

Steve: Yeah.

Emmanuel: If we had the ability to at least maybe if we don’t have time, just make enough time for that part. So that way you can see if you made a change, make sure they make it the way you want because just looking at it we would’ve caught that issue with the label.

Steve: Right.

Emmanuel: So even if we rushed– I think that would be the advice I give is always give yourself enough time for sampling.

Steve: And in terms of just like a minimum investment to create an article of clothing, how much would you recommend?

Emmanuel: So we started– I had some money saved up. Our entire business started with $10,000.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: So with that we were able to get the initial run of inventory, get a developer– not a developer, a designer to make our website which is a whole another topic, lesson learned there. And also get the Etsy store set up, get the little mix and match like a printer little warehouse signed up for several such services like stamps.com and things like that.

Steve: Sure. Okay so let’s talk about some of the other issues with your business regarding marketing your products. So what were some of the other challenges that you faced when you first launched?

Emmanuel: I will tell you they can all probably be wrapped up in one big one, it’s probably just inexperience.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: We just didn’t know what we didn’t know, but to be more specific things like ads– that’s a whole world into itself and there’s ads everywhere. There’s Google ads, there Etsy ads, Facebook, Twitter, all the different kinds of ads that can be done and we just really didn’t know. So we tried and we experimented, we run Etsy ads, and we didn’t see much alloy from that, so we ended up cutting that off about two three months in. We run Google ads and I’m not sure if we had the right strategy with that because it might have worked it might not, but the other thing was the piece of analytics and we run Google analytics. So even when we had the big run up where we were selling over 100 units a day, we weren’t even sure where our customers were coming from and so…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: Analytics, the ads, the different things that we can do, social media, we were trying it all.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And we weren’t really tracking it well which we kind of rectified it a little bit now using– being very disappointed with the track of our links and Google analytics set up and some other things.

Steve: So I’m just curious since you sell caps like what keywords did you bid on with some of the clasper click tools, and was it hard to kind of differentiate your product when you were bidding on search terms?

Emmanuel: So for us it wasn’t that difficult because in terms of the satin lined cap, there aren’t many out there and in fact most of them are called satin bonnets or sleep caps, so they’re…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: Pretty niched kind of words, but the other problem with that is that there wasn’t much search traffic for it. So it was kind of a chicken or egg thing you know do we go with what we want and then not get the traffic, or do we go with one of these high level terms that get traffic but really doesn’t fit for us.

So those were a lot of the words that we used satin lining sleep cap, we’ve moved on now to trying other things that are broader as we’ve defined, because we actually did do surveys to get feedback from our customers on what they like about it. So now we’ve moved into more hair care type terms. So things that they say they liked about it is that it minimized dried hair, I don’t have to deal with it in the morning, my tangled hair, frizzy hair. It prevents a lot of these problems, so now we’re using more of those key words for our ads.

Steve: I see that’s actually a very interesting point that you just brought up. So people aren’t searching for satin lined caps per se in volume, but they are searching for ways to improve their hair which kinds of just opens up a huge market right there.

Emmanuel: Exactly.

Steve: Right. Okay.

Emmanuel: That’s probably been our biggest learning over this, it’s just the messaging and the positioning of the cap because we started out trying to set up a satin cap that is fashionable which there’s a very small segment of population that actually knows what a satin cap does for your hair and protects your hair. So we were broadening it out, so the education aspect of it. And then the words that we use and the education that we were doing kind of had to fit in with what they used it for, not necessarily the fact that they had one.

So that market– we could go out to that market, but we’re going to have a bigger market, so we needed to go after the problem that this generic satin or silk solves, which is the dry hair or the hair frizzy hair, keeping moisture in your hair, protecting you from the cotton pillow case. And so once we started going after the problem it solved versus you know the product itself, yeah it made things a lot easier to pick keywords that are much higher and terms to search from.

Steve: And you can probably end up charging more too because I know– I’m sure there’s a lot of people out there who would be willing to pay a lot of money to have healthy hair.

Emmanuel: Exactly.

Steve: As opposed to just another fashion item.

Emmanuel: And that was one of the biggest things we learnt and the feedback we got from our customers themselves. You know when we are selling to people who already bought a satin cap are competing with very low cost solutions out there, you know a durag which is not a very expensive product and our price point is much higher than a durag. However, the solution we are offering is not a durag, it’s not a satin bonnet, it’s also fashionable cap to that market.

And then to folks that don’t even know about the satin it’s kind of fashion as a given, it needs to look good, I don’t want it to look like a satin bonnet otherwise I’ve corrupted satin bonnet. And so now I get the benefits of healthy hair, wear a fashionable cap and really a lot of the messaging we’re starting to build in now is kind of things we are learning is you know when we go pay $120 to get a nice haircut or blowout or something at the salon, it may last you two or three days. But if you sleep with the satin lined cap you’ll double or triple that investment. It will last a week or more of that hair style that you put in.

So that messaging you know now all of a sudden if I spend $120 now lasts twice as long that’s 2o, 40 bucks. If you can actually do that math it’s like an investment of $30 in a slap isn’t that much. And I can do this over and over again for months, and that’s a drop in the bucket compared to the benefit of the bucks.

Steve: So let’s talk about that message. So how did you actually end up finding the medium to get the message out about your products?

Emmanuel: The medium– so for us it was YouTube.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: YouTube has been the biggest benefit for us and not even like ads on YouTube; it was pretty much getting sponsored videos. So like I said I don’t have much hair, I’m not really big into the hair care space. So it was really– the next thing was well can I find people who look like that. And then add in can I find people who have hair, who have this problem and also have their own audience who they engage with visually. YouTube was the perfect platform for that. and I wish I could say that I planned it that way, but it was one of you know 20 different things we are trying and it took off.

And we had several YouTubers reach out to– not reach out but we reached out to them and they agreed to wear it. They talked about how the slack has become a staple in their routine. You know it went beyond just a satin bonnet or durag or a cap and it became this is what I used to keep my hair from freezing and tangling, and I use it in my routine every four days. You know when I wash my hair this is what I wear afterwards. You know they made it very clear how that someone who has never even heard of this or even seen one, could engage with and use it to solve a problem that they have.

Steve: So can you kind of go into depth about the process, like how did you find the people to reach out to and then what did your initial contact look like and how did you get them to actually endorse your product?

Emmanuel: Sure and that’s– there is two different ways we did it. Now the first one I’ll go into is just the manual time consuming kind of we went door to door basically. So went on YouTube, we found personalities we thought would fit great with our brand, fit great with the product that we were looking for and would get into the healthy lifestyle. And then we just went to the about section and then just click send them a message. But before we did that we actually crafted an email. So the email itself we had had in there who we were, what we are doing, how excited we were about this opportunity for their viewers– we tried to close it on their viewers. Viewers would like this product. We think it will be a good fit.

And then we actually created our own YouTube video where was my sister basically saying you know I love your brand, thank you for even being interested or taking the time within this video. I would love to partner with you in solving this problem for you and your viewers. So we hit the send message, sent it to all of them. We did it for 32 when we initially launched on September. We didn’t hear anything back for almost two months, like it took a while. And then we only heard back from about three of them. And one of them actually was the only one who said yes he admired us and we want now to give it a shot.

And she was the one that really built our business because she had a subscriber base of about 250,000 subscribers. Put in the video and was very passionate about. She in fact I’ve just got an email from her the other day. She still uses the product. She really liked it. And that came through in the video.

Steve: So you sent out 30, 10% responded and maybe just– you had a 3% hit ratio on someone who actually create the video to endorse the product. What was in it for the YouTube person?

Emmanuel: So in that respect, in that instance there was nothing upfront.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: You know we initially later on we did provide a donation just hear please continue doing what you are doing, like you are doing a great job and the message you have resonates. So we brought her a donation later. But really there was nothing in it for her except the love of the product which…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: That is why it was so successful. There were other You Tubers. There was one other– I’m sorry I missed that that actually did reply about three months later. They got us ready for December, she would you know agreed to include us in her December favorites video. Now that one was up front, she is very upfront about it. You know I have a slot open if you want it just 500 bucks. So sure…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And at that point we had seen the result of the first one, so $500 wasn’t much of an issue at all, so yes please do it. And sure enough we had– I think we are getting a 10X ROI on each of those videos.

Steve: Yeah actually can we comment on what happened after that first video once it went live?

Emmanuel: Sure after that first video I think we generated about– we sold about 40 or 50 a day after the very first video. She had– and when I say the first video she did two first. So the first YouTube…

Steve: Oh wow, okay.

Emmanuel: She did the second video. We actually were over 100 a day. And within in less than a week we had sold out all of our inventory. And then the December video and it gets kind of muddy, I can’t really tribute exactly how. But I know with all the YouTube page stuff that we did, we were also tried to work with FameBid and you know they’re like 1,200 bucks. One made $24,000 that month.

Steve: So how does it work? Do you give them some sort of special tracking link or a coupon code, like how do you track these sales?

Emmanuel: And that goes back to the lessons learnt about the tracking. At the time I didn’t track anything at all.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: So now we are starting to do that. For every video that gets made, they get their own specific tracking link so we can see exactly which traffic came from YouTube, from that You Tuber and from that video.

Steve: And there is really no way for someone to actually click on something, right? They actually have to type in the URL on their browser. Is that right?

Emmanuel: For the YouTube video?

Steve: Yes.

Emmanuel: No they– in the comments box, they can actually have the link and so they can put now here is what this video is about, here is a transcript and then here is a link to all the products in this video.

Steve: I see.

Emmanuel: What we did see was there was a lot of direct in Google analytics. A lot came from direct during that month. So I’m thinking what happened is they watched it and then a few days later remembered the satin lined cap thing and we have a lot of our search– the highest keyword search where they would get us from the terms satin lined cap.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: So my guess is they saw it, they thought about it then came back and bought.

Steve: And how do you actually reach out– I haven’t done this before so how do you actually reach out to a random YouTube person? There is a contact button you say on the…

Emmanuel: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: If you watch the video or if you go to their channel– not the actual video, the channel there is an about section. And so they’ll have– I think it has a little like send me a message button or sometimes what a lot of them will have if you get into the YouTubers who have 20, 50,000 subscribers. They’ll let you have their business inquiries email here. They will work with a multi channel network.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: I’ve run into a lot of those which were agencies, which those can be pretty hostile because you’d rather pay the YouTube fee and also the agency fee as well which can be pretty high.

Steve: So you mentioned that it took several months for one of these people to respond. So and I understand this is actually a large part of your strategy today. So how do you kind of streamline the process so that you are constantly getting mentions?

Emmanuel: Sure and that was another one we would get– we heard from a friend of ours you know that there was a site called FameBid. And so that was one thing we started doing in November kind of low key. That’s where that extra you know 6, 700 bucks came from is we just put out basically your own the website. You put out a campaign saying we are a brand looking for YouTube personalities. And so they put that out, they have a network of about 6,000 personalities they work with, and people bid on your proposal. They send you proposals. So a lot of them came in 90, $100.

They’re pretty clear that you know they’re people just kind of up and coming if you have that low bit of amount you can bid. You just send a proposal off from 100 to 250, 250 all the way up over $1,000. So I just said ours are very small just $100 to $250, and I got folks who had you know 10,000 subscribers, 5,000 subscribers. But either way their bids were low 90 bucks, 50 bucks and they would produce videos. So that’s where we had eight of them produced for us. And so at the same time that the lady who was doing the December favorites video that had charged us 500, they were coming out at the same time. So that’s kind of what made it muddy.

Well fast forward to January I kind of wanted to re-engage that and go very aggressive with it. So actually when we found out that they have what’s called a brand VIP program where they will actually assign you an account manager who does all that leg work for you.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: So now it’s incredible and I’m kind of my goal is to just set a budget of $5,000 every month, talk to other cap manager, and then they go out there and with that budget I think with this budget– just going around she was able to find 11 different YouTubers and really there was very little input from us. She was giving a track of the links and she will give us the videos when they are– she will give us the names of the YouTubers for us to approve, then they will give us the videos when they are ready for us to approve and then they go out.

Steve: So I had a question about how you kind of decide which YouTuber will actually provide an ROI for you. Like do you actually screen their videos and do you get an idea of how many people actually view their video once it actually goes live, like what’s the process?

Emmanuel: Sure and that’s– part of that whole learning that we did was trying to guess. So we had the initial getting the list of 32. And that was really just my sister who created the product and my other sister is dead. The lady is in the business actually looked at who would this work best for and who can spread it best, and so we just get feel an intuition. And then from that we actually use that same kind of gut feeling intuition for the proposals that came in, because when we put out a proposal we got like 40 something YouTubers that came back, and they all put it in there what they can do for us. And there are six different types of videos you can make.

And we just tried a whole bunch of different types, we had favorites videos going out, we had [hall] videos, we had tutorial videos. From that after having about nine or ten of them done, and of course seeing the most successful one that we had, it was a routine.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: The videos that work best for us are the ones where someone was saying not, “Hey look what I bought, this is great,” or someone sent this to me. It was someone saying, here is the problem with my head, this product solves that problem phenomenally and I’m going to show you how I use it so that you can you them the same way– a tutorial video.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: That worked extremely well for us. So now all our videos that we are having made are just that.

Steve: So when these YouTubers make these videos, is your product the only product that’s mentioned?

Emmanuel: Not always.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And if you use something like FameBid you can specify that, like so to take away the FameBid the two videos we had downloaded two personalities. One was a December favorites videos where other products were being mentioned. Actually both of them were. In fact in the original YouTuber she also had other products she basically called it her nightly hair care routine. So at first it kind of seemed like we don’t want to be mentioned with others, but we also had the competing idea that you know we don’t want to have a video just about ours because it would be obviously a sponsored video.

Steve: I see.

Emmanuel: Unless we do a good job. So we kind of wanted to work it in. So it actually worked out well. And so when they had the December favorites where it was just here is a lot of different products, it didn’t do as well as the one that said here’s the products with specific pinpoint.

Steve: Got it.

Emmanuel: So if we had three or four shampoos and different things, and then our SLAP as part of that, and so people were going to buy all of them.

Steve: So what are the six types of videos?

Emmanuel: If I remember correctly there is the [inaudible] [00:34:38] there is the…

Steve: What’s that first one?

Emmanuel: A [inaudible] [00:34:40] is just you know they went shopping and they brought a whole bunch of stuff backward then.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: You know they are opening their bag you know, there is get ready with me videos which is kind of like the routine video I’m describing. There is tutorial videos where you are showing someone how to do something. And if you give me a moment I can actually pull it up.

Steve: Okay, yeah I’m just curious. This is all new to me, so it’s very interesting.

Emmanuel: Okay. Then there is specific like sponsored videos where it’s a video where it’s just you. Just you and your product and that’s it.

Steve: Okay. And are they required to say that it’s a sponsored video?

Emmanuel: I think so, I’m not sure the rules on that, but I think if they bought it themselves they don’t have to say it’s sponsored video, I don’t know. Don’t pull me on that.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: But if it was sent to them I think most of them are pretty good about mentioning, “Hey this was sent to me.”

Steve: Okay. I think that was what four?

Emmanuel: Four, yeah I’m trying to find…

Steve: There is two more.

Emmanuel: Yeah there is two more out there that I’m working on bringing in.

Steve: Actually you can probably just get back to me later on that.

Emmanuel: Sure.

Steve: I’ll just put it in the show notes, so it’s cool. So going forward with your business is this sort of influence to a marketer? Is that you are going to be your primary channel or do you have other things in the works?

Emmanuel: I’m sorry I missed the question but I actually found them.

Steve: Oh you did okay yeah why don’t we– so what were the last two?

Emmanuel: There was the review video, a plug mention, a [whole] video, a look book and that was one I forgot, a favorites video and a tutorial.

Steve: What’s a look book?

Emmanuel: A look book they actually put it on, but we did a few of these as well. They actually put it on and style it, because we are just one cap you know it’s hard to see what will that look like with my outfit. So they’ll do three or four different outfits with the cap on.

Steve: Oh I see. And how much– what’s the cost like depending on the audience? Like how would…

Emmanuel: It depends.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: With the fame of the platform you are able to just put out a proposal, and then they come back to you.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And I can give you kind of relatively I worked with a multi channel agency for a little bit. And for one YouTuber to do one video was $4,000, one on FameBid it was a 1000 for the same YouTube.

Steve: Interesting.

Emmanuel: So just the highlight how huge a difference it is when you work with them directly versus through an agency.

Steve: Okay, so for that $1,000 how many subscribers did they have?

Emmanuel: I think that one was well over 350,000 or 500,000, they had quite a few.

Steve: Oh wow okay. So this is like an alternative to television. And it sounds like it’s just as effective or more effective.

Emmanuel: It’s the equivalent.

Steve: Yeah.

Emmanuel: I think it’s– the more I read about it and there is others starting again to us, I’m reading other blogs and things, it truly is. And it’s surprising to see how many people actually sit and watch subscriber channels; it’s almost like sitcom television. Every week they have a regularly scheduled post where they put out a video and then in there, there may be even commercials and things like that.

Steve: Yeah.

Emmanuel: People watch that more than they do TV you know who and other things, it’s incredible. We spoke to celebrities in there and what’s nice is their fan bases are very-very targeted.

Steve: Yes.

Emmanuel: So you find one that fits your brand message, I mean it’s almost a slam dunk where you know even if five– 1% of their population actually goes and buys one, that’s enough to hit your monthly quarter at least for us at this stage.

Steve: Oh yeah for sure. So the other question that I asked you while you were looking things up was what else do you have in the pipeline in terms of marketing your shop besides the influencer marketing?

Emmanuel: Perfect. So we are doing a couple of other things. We learned through that process you know building lists. So we actually– you can believe it, we didn’t even have a email sign up form on our website when we first launched. So we started that and started collecting email address, we got about 2,000. And it’s true what they say about the there is money in the email list because now every two weeks we send out a list an email. And we’re getting probably about a 6% conversion just off of our emails.

Steve: Nice.

Emmanuel: So yeah that’s working really well. So we are really being very robust with that. We are tying it to a blog, we actually putting out more blogs. Our own YouTube videos like tutorials and how to wear it and things like that. Then we then send out through email and put it on to our blog and things like that.

Steve: So what’s worked the best so far, probably email I would guess.

Emmanuel: Absolutely by far email has been the best.

Steve: Okay and oh sorry…

Emmanuel: The main focus of our marketing efforts is along with the email and the blogs we are also in the social media. We are really tracking all that, I mentioned being very disciplined with trackable links and things. And I actually was listening to one of your podcasts, heard about mixed panel. So I probably will be getting that started soon just to kind to get a funnel going. And I’ve gotten some of the little bit more experiential landing pages. So for targeted responses to like ads if we start going that round with ads, have very specific you know this is why you are clicking and here is why you are here on the landing page.

Steve: Just curious what form of social media is working the best for you guys?

Emmanuel: Oddly enough Pinterest.

Steve: It’s not odd, it’s pour best also. Yeah.

Emmanuel: It converts well. We don’t get hardly any traffic from it at all, but it converts really-really well. We get a lot of engagement on engagement front just within the platform from Instagram, a lot from Instagram.

Steve: Interesting.

Emmanuel: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And then we also have Facebook which works pretty well just an all around general you know poster, you can get some clicks through. It hasn’t converted hardly at all for us, but we do get click throughs from the site. And then Twitter we just haven’t really done much on that at all.

Steve: Yeah actually Twitter is something I haven’t tried yet either, but from what I’ve heard anecdotally it’s not as effective as the other platforms.

Emmanuel: Yeah.

Steve: Well that’s cool. So you mentioned “The Lean Start Up” as one of the books that kind of influenced you. Were there any other books as well that you kind of recommend that the listeners read?

Emmanuel: Sure, well for every single one of those you know I think I’ve read them all, Lean Start Up, [Inaudible] [00:40:48] now re-brandings coming out and customer development. I have actually been– I used to do a lot of reading books you know kind of game planning and I also love blogs. A lot of blogs running information, Quick Sprout, and things like that to figure out what the social media thing is. And ecommerce field of course I’m on there, there is a lot of clear information, I’m always impressed to see because it’s really niche, right?

Steve: Yes.

Emmanuel: There is not a lot out there for a specifically independent ecommerce store owners. So they’ve got a lot of niche content there and SEO models, I take a lot and look at a lot of them, and looks at their stuff as well.

Steve: That’s awesome. Well hey Emmanuel we’ve been chatting for a while now and I want to be respectful of your time. If anyone has any questions about influencer marketing or your products, where can they find you?

Emmanuel: Sure they can just reach out to me on my email emmanuel@gracerlayer.com, and I’m always more than willing to help out.

Steve: Cool and I’ll be sure to link that up in the show notes. Emmanuel thanks a lot for coming on the show, I really appreciate your time, and I’m just really excited with what you’ve been able to do with influencer marketing.

Emmanuel: Thank you so much. And if they want to come to the website too it’s Shopslaps.com.

Steve: Awesome, I’ll link that up. Thanks a lot for coming on the show Emmanuel.

Emmanuel: You take care.

Steve: Take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode as much as I did. What I like about Emmanuel is that he tried a bunch of different things without success, he didn’t give up, and then he stumbled upon the one marketing technique that vaulted his business to the top.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode57. And if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

056: How JD Roth Started GetRichSlowly And Inspired A Personal Finance Blogging Revolution

JD Roth

Today’s interview is a very special to me because this person is someone who inspired me to start my own blog back in 2009. JD Roth is the founder of GetRichSlowly.org and he was one of my blogging idols early on.

Today, he writes at JDRoth.com and his blog is still one of the very few that I read on a regular basis. He’s an amazing writer and I love how he can make even mundane topics interesting through the power of storytelling. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How JD Roth got the idea for GetRichSlowly.org
  • The key to creating a successful blog
  • Why JD ultimately decided to sell his website
  • Why you should get more personal with your content
  • The power of storytelling
  • Why SEO shouldn’t be your number one priority
  • How GetRichSlowly.org made its money

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I have a very special guest on the show J.D. Roth, now for as long as I’ve been blogging, I’ve always only followed a handful of personal finance blogs and especially getrichslowly.org created by none other than J.D. Now I actually met J.D. inside of a Super Shuttle on the way to FinCon and I have to admit when I first saw him in the back seat behind me I was kind of star struck.

Here was the father, actually not the father the grandfather of personal finance blogging in the same van as me and I was pleasantly surprised to find that J.D. was super cool and down to earth. Now J.D. later sold Get Rich Slowly for a nice seven-figure sum, stopped blogging for a while altogether, went back and then recently left to start his to start a different blog altogether. And what I really like about J.D. is that he writes from the soul and all these articles are super personal, engaging, and we can all learn a lot from him on how to create a loyal audience. And with that intro welcome to the show J.D., how are you doing today?

JD: Thanks Steve, I’m doing great.

Steve: I thought you’d enjoy that grandfather of personal finance.

JD: Well you know people kept calling me the Godfather, but I’m not the Godfather, Flexo or Luke from Consumerism Commentary. He’s the godfather of personal finance blogging,

Steve: Yeah he certainly is and what does that make Jim then?

JD: Oh that’s a great question. We’ve got to come up with the name for him.

Steve: I don’t think he has a nickname yet, I’ll have to give him one.

JD: He’s like a mastermind.

Steve: The mastermind.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So J.D. give us a quick background story about GRS and just take us way back to when GRS got started.

JD: Sure, so I would say there is a lot of different threads that combined to lead to Get Rich Slowly and in retrospect this seems pretty clear that I was destined to start something like that, but I could never have predicted it. So I went through college, I got a psychology degree and while I was getting a psychology degree, I was also getting myself deep in debt, and not like student loans like a lot of people who go to college, but I was racking up debt in the form of credit cards. I graduated from college with a credit card habit. That credit habit just got worse as I as time went on.

Also this time I like writing I’ve always been a writer ever since I was in grade school, and so all these things are coming together, I got on the web the early days of the web. I had a web journal before it was called the blog; we used to call them web journals. And all of these things just kind of gradually let up so that in 2004, my then wife and I bought a new house, and on paper we could afford the house but in reality when we purchased it I felt like I was just drowning in debt because I had over $35000 in consumer debt. All of a sudden we’re taking on this new mortgage and is all sorts of work that needs to be done to this house, because it’s 100 year old house, and I just felt like I was really-really struggling.

Around this time some friends recognized that I was in need of help and so they recommended a couple of books, including Dave Ramsey’s Total Money makeover, and Your Money or Your Life by Joe Dominguez and Vicki Robin. And I read these books, I thought oh it kind of makes sense of and then I read some more books that I borrowed from a library and eventually I realized that there seems to be some common themes in these books. In one of the book one of the themes was that although there was no reliable way to get rich quickly, there were ways that people could get rich slowly.

And that so I wrote about this idea that you can get rich slowly, I wrote about this on my personal site Folded Space. And after I wrote about this for whatever reason, a lot of people liked what I had written, and it gave me this idea, maybe I can start a blog about personal finance. I thought it would be the first blog about personal finance. It turns out there were already some out there, including Consumerism Commentary from the Godfather Flexo.

And so I started Get Rich Slowly, I started to share my progress with money. I thought I can improve my own situation and maybe help other people improve theirs. And as just kind of an afterthought I put some ads on it because I thought maybe I can make some money along the way. And little did I know that this whole project would change my life in all sorts of ways, including financially.

Steve: So just curious when you first started writing, was the intention to make money or was it just more like a journal?

JD: Well, it wasn’t strictly a journal; I mean my personal site was more like a journal. Get Rich Slowly was definitely it was a way for me to hash out what I was learning about money. And so I gave my three goals where number one, improve my own situation and number two, to improve and to help other people improve their situations. And I definitely did start out with the intent to make money, but I thought maybe I would make $100 a month or $200 a month, just a little bit of money to help me get out of debt more quickly. I had no idea that it would become a business.

Steve: Okay and then you know when you were– you’re not a technical person are you J.D.?

JD: Moderately, I mean…

Steve: Moderately, okay.

JD: At one time I thought I was going to become a computer programmer, so I actually got a couple of gigs doing programming but…

Steve: Okay, and so in terms of putting up the website that wasn’t really a big deal for you, and did you invest a lot of money into this blog early on?

JD: No-no-no-no.

Steve: Okay.

JD: No way at all.

Steve: Okay.

JD: At first everything was hand coded back in the early days back when I said I had a web journal. I was hand coding my website. I say that my…

Steve: Oh okay.

JD: My current skills with web design are very 1998 because that’s just kind of where the flow is. I was on the cutting-edge in 1998 but never developed beyond that. So when it came to Get Rich Slowly, I used a standard WordPress out of the box theme. I adjusted a little bit, I flipped the header image I remember I thought it was pretty hilarious for doing that. And it was kind of an abstract thing so nobody could tell, and then I made some modifications with– I never made like heavy modifications.

Steve: Okay, now I was just curious for my own knowledge and…

JD: Yeah.

Steve: You know one thing that kind of drew me to GRS was just the quality of the content, like if you looked at some of the other personal finance blogs it was just more generic material, but everything with yours; it had a lot of depth to it. So I just wanted to ask a little bit about your content strategy early on, is it something that was deliberate in the way you were writing or…

JD: Well, I would say it was intentional. I don’t know whether deliberate is the right word, but I think calling it a strategy really overstates it.

Steve: Okay.

JD: I was just writing the way I write, I was just writing the way I talk. I was being natural. To me as you know, I’m a strong believer in story and the power of story, and so I don’t like, I know that when I go to websites or read books or magazine articles I don’t like the old dry stuff, so why do I want to produce that? I want to produce the kind of material that I would want to read and so that means putting some personality into it, talking about my cats, talking about my ex-wife and I we had a garden.

So I had an ongoing series where every summer, I would chronicle how we were doing with our garden and whether we were making money with the garden and so on. For a long time I talked about how I wanted to buy a mini cooper, I had this thing I really wanted my mini cooper, and so little touches like that made the site more personal I think.

Steve: I just have a question about that eventually you sold GRS.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So does writing in such a personal fashion affect the sellability of a site?

JD: Well it did to a degree, and when I sold the site, the people who were talking to me about buying it– this is one of the concerns they did have. And so as part of the purchase agreement what they wanted was for me to stick around for three years, they wanted to write a contract where I would stick around for three years…

Steve: Okay.

JD: So that it would be a gradual transition, and at the time that I sold it though I wanted out, I was done I thought, and so I turned that down. So they went back to the drawing board making back and they offered me 30% less and I could walk away. Now the ironic thing about all this is, I stuck around for the three years after all, I turned out I couldn’t tear myself away, I was so devoted to the site that I stuck around and I edited it, and I wrote for it and managed it. And so I shouldn’t have turned down that first offer.

Steve: Right, yeah who would have known?

JD: Yeah you make the best decisions you can with the information you have at the time.

Steve: So I’m just curious though if you were to give advice to someone starting their own blog today, would you still advice them to be a lot more personal about it?

JD: Yeah oh…

Steve: Okay.

JD: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

JD: I feel like today– when I look at not just personal finance blogs but a lot of other blogs that are started today, so many of the sites are generic and they could be written by anyone. And so where’s the incentive for anybody to come back to that site? But on the other hand, if you look at the sites that seem to be successful, the new sites I think of somebody like Mr. Money Mustache and his site is relatively new.

And when he started it, it was at a time where people were saying well, nobody can have the same kind of success that Jim and J.D. and Flexo had because they started at the beginning. And yet you look at what Mr. Money Mustache has been able to do, he absolutely has had that total success, if not more so. And it’s because he’s been personal, he has a distinct style, and I think there are other people who are able to do this kind of thing too.

Steve: Okay and the only reason why I asked is you know I look at a whole bunch of different blogs and some of them are just like these blogs with a whole bunch of different authors and different personalities, but a lot of this stuff is on the more generic side, yet it still does pretty well.

JD: Of course.

Steve: And so I was just wondering what your opinion on you know going that route is as opposed to just going completely personal, like the way you and Mr. Money Mustache has proceeded.

JD: I don’t think there is anything wrong with that. I think it’s a set of different set of challenges. In some ways you make your content more accessible to everybody, and yet at the same time I think it’s like less interesting if that makes sense.

Steve: Yeah.

JD: It is like going to read just generic Wikipedia entry on a Roth IRA instead of a story from somebody…

Steve: Right.

JD: Writing about how they’ve done a Roth IRA.

Steve: Yeah no, I completely agree with you. I was just kind of curious why some of those sites are actually successful, like I’d much rather read a story based site like what you were saying that’s very personal. And you know it is just interesting to note that, so if you were to do it all over again you would not have changed anything in the way that you proceeded with GRS.

JD: No, absolutely not.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And you know I tried to have a balance, I think it’s important to note that not every article was a story based article. My story and my life formed the backbone of the site, and I shared any time something new or interesting happened I would share that. But at the same time, I would say most articles were actually spurred by something else that I’d read online.

So maybe I’ve gone to the money magazine website and they have an article on something, maybe I agreed with it or maybe I disagreed with it. And so I would quote a little bit from that article, the one that spurred my– whatever train of thought I had and then I will offer my own feedback to the article, either expanding on what was said or contradicting what they said, and so that’s how most of the articles at Get Rich Slowly worked.

Steve: Okay.

JD: They retained a personal voice, but they were often responses to other things that were out there on the web. And then there’s like a third type of article where it was just like purely informational, like How to start a Roth IRA, or which savings account is best and so on.

Steve: Okay and you know assuming that the content is good and was good, you know what was kind of your early strategy to obtain traffic?

JD: Again strategy implies much more than what I had. So I was very fortunate to have been around on the web from the early days of the web, and in fact I had also some online connections from even before the web came to existence from news groups and so on. And as time developed I participated in communities. There were different communities online, comic book communities, or movie serial communities, just different communities that I was a member of.

And so when I started Get Rich Slowly I’d shared this not like in a spammy sort of way, but I just like oh yeah you guys shared the comic book place forum, I just started this site and I wrote about how much I’m spending on comic books ha-ha-ha-ha, and I never thought oh I’m intentionally sharing this to try to get traffic. But the result is because I had these existing connections, and because I shared the site with the people in my personal life and there is another difference, a lot of people nowadays are anonymous bloggers, where as I was not anonymous in anyway and I share with a lot of people.

Steve: Right, yes.

JD: And by sharing with as many people as possible, I picked up some readers and some influential readers who started sharing the site in other places. For example Life Hacker, one of the editors at Life Hacker was an early reader of Get Rich Slowly, and so she would share articles around.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of– let’s say you had to start all over again, how would you proceed, you know in the present day?

JD: That’s a great question, Jim and Flexo and I have talked about this quite a bit actually because obviously we know a whole lot more than we did when we started. And obviously the whole ecosystem has changed, but at the same time I don’t think I could change much because it would be untrue to who I am.

Often at conferences I downplay the role of SEO and I really think that search engine optimization– I think too many people look at that as a primary or secondary method of obtaining traffic and success, and I would argue that it ought not be a primary or secondary concern, it should be a side effect. You should do all of the other things, provide great content, tell good stories, and do things and services to the readers first and the SEO is a byproduct or something that you go to when you don’t have anything else to do, then you look at the SEO and it’s like one of the last things you think of and not the first.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of GRS, Get Rich Slowly’s traffic, was it mostly search or was it mostly direct and recurring traffic?

JD: That’s a great question. I looked at it recently and told somebody the answer and I forget what it was to be honest, it was a large percentage was recurring traffic, like direct referral type stuff.

Steve: Okay.

JD: There is still plenty that was search based, but it was less so than most sites.

Steve: The reason why I’m asking you this is because and we’re going to probably get into this little bit later, but in terms of making money. A lot of times the search customers are the best customers in terms of a monetary standpoint.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And so it’s funny when you said that SEO should not be even the primary or secondary form of traffic that you should be focusing on, but so how do you kind of balance the monetary aspects with you know your own personal style?

JD: What I would argue is that the best SEO is a well written article because what happens when you have an article that people want to read and want to share, is that they do share it on other websites and it gets linked around. And so you could spend hours optimizing your keywords in a specific article on Roth IRAs to try and get traffic for Roth IRAs, but if somebody else goes along and writes a long story about how they set up their Roth IRA– I don’t know how you would actually make that interesting– this is just but– and it gets shared around at Reddit or on Facebook or at Life Hacker two.

All of these links back totally overpower your keyword optimization because this other person has managed to get high quality links and many of them, and so– now I’ve lost the track of what your original question was, but I feel like doing– following my method you do get SEO benefits, but it’s a different type of SEO if that makes sense. And another thing I would argue is if you build a large following and a huge number of readers, you end up getting a lot more search traffic too than you might think.

Steve: Okay, so let me just kind of rephrase that question a little bit.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So instead of focusing directly on SEO, so what do you focus on? So outside the content, let’s say the content is great in terms of social media, e-mail like what would you advise people to focus on?

JD: Well, that’s a great question Steve. For me I recognize that some of the things that I don’t do there’s actually value in it. I’m not very good with social media, you and I talked before you started recording about how I’m a very poor marketer. I don’t like marketing, I hate it in fact, I hate self promotion. And as a result, I don’t do a lot with social media that I could do and I know that…

Steve: Okay.

JD: Some of my colleagues and friends are very successful with social media, and you also mentioned e-mail lists. I know from talking with some of my friends and colleagues like Ramit Sethi from “I Will Teach You to Be Rich” and Chris Guillebeau from The Arts of Non-Conformity, these people prize their e-mail lists very highly, and they nurture them, they grow them and they protect them. And it’s because– you talked about search traffic being a source of income, well these people believe that the e-mail lists are actually the greatest source of income.

Steve: I would tend to agree with them.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So…

JD: I’ve never done anything to try market to an email list, and yet I recognize that people that I respect highly praise their value.

Steve: It’s interesting because you know the way Get Rich Slowly kind of evolved was pretty much– it sounds like through just straight word of mouth and through the power of the content, is that…?

JD: Yeah that’s the impression I get, I mean I didn’t do any kind of marketing, I didn’t do any kind of search engine optimization, it was just by being shared around.

Steve: Okay and what was the business model exactly and how did how did it make money?

JD: Okay that’s a question I can answer and then we’ll have– I want to point out that there’s– before I answer it directly, I want to point out that there’s no one right way to build a blog. There’s no one right way to make money online. There all sorts of different strategies that work and you’ve got– your listeners have to find the strategies that best fit their particular– I don’t know method or personality or whatever it is. And so the same is true with advertising or making money from the website directly. In my case, I very much followed the traditional magazine type of monetization and by that I mean I have the content and around the content were ads– were display ads and…

Steve: Okay.

JD: Those were Google ads, they were banner ads that people paid me directly for, and it was only after a couple of years that I came to understand the power of affiliate ads. I didn’t– it was Jim Wang actually, he told me at the very first blogging get together that I ever went to in San Francisco. He’s like JD, how come you have not monetized your savings account page? I was like I don’t know what you mean, and so he said well you can do these affiliate programs and you’ll get paid every time somebody signs up for a savings account. I was like oh all right, I’ll try it.

It totally revolutionized my model and but nowadays I’ve also seen that there are people who like Remit initially, with I Will Teach You To Be Rich, he used the site more as an advertisement for himself. He didn’t monetize the site directly, but he was trying to promote himself to get speaking gigs, and then to sell his print books. And nowadays, he uses it to promote his courses.

And Chris Guillebeau has used his site to market e-books and other products, and I’ve had a little bit of taste of that because my latest project, which we don’t have to go into much depth but I’m happy to talk about, is a course that I did for Chris Guillebeau about personal finance. And so that was the first time I’d done any really non-traditional type income strategy I guess.

Steve: This is all really interesting because you know I had Jim Wang on the show earlier.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And his strategy for monetizing his blog was to rank for specific search terms and then go through affiliate offers, and it’s just interesting hearing both your perspectives, different perspectives on how to monetize a blog I guess, so…

JD: Well, and that’s why Jim and Flexo and I we’ve talked the three of us at some point opt to form a partnership because we each have very different skill sets. And yet we work well together, we know each other, we trust each other, and I suck at the whole search engine optimization stuff. I don’t like it, Jim is good at it, he likes it, so if we worked in a partnership that could be his focus, I could focus on creating some content. It’s an interesting thing, but we don’t have any kind of firm plant, but we’ve definitely talked about it.

Steve: Yeah I mean Jim is really good at optimizing something to death.

JD: Yes.

Steve: And extracting every last dollar out of something I think and yeah your content is awesome.

JD: Thanks.

Steve: I mean you’re just a natural writer.

JD: Thank you.

Steve: So let’s talk a little bit about some of the challenges early on in the early phases of Get Rich Slowly.

JD: Okay.

Steve: How does one get those advertising placements? How does one get those affiliate offers and get them to actually convert?

JD: Well, I don’t know if I’m going to have any useful information for you on this particular topic. For me again I started with the Google ads and anyone can get AdSense or at least I think…

Steve: Sure.

JD: Anyone can get AdSense, it’s not necessarily going to convert, but if you have enough traffic, especially on particular pages, you will make some income. Eventually, I had people approach me directly and offer display ads.

Steve: Okay.

JD: So figuring out how much to charge was a very difficult thing for me. I didn’t know I mean this is still back in earlyish days and you kind of had to feel things out. I would suspect that even today people had to fill things out. You don’t want to charge so much that you scare off advertisers, but on the other hand if you don’t charge enough you’ll leave money on the table. And so figuring out what people are willing to pay is a very important thing. With the affiliate offers I know that nowadays the market has changed somewhat. I hear about people all the time who are being dropped from programs.

Steve: Yes.

JD: Because they don’t convert enough. And so that’s actually an interesting challenge and I don’t know– I feel like if that’s happening to you and your monetization strategy is to use affiliate programs but you don’t have enough traffic, well then you’ve got to find ways to build traffic. You’ve got to change your focus for a while and maybe not focus on the affiliate program. Get rid of them altogether and instead focus on something else until your site has enough traffic that you can say, hey let me try it again.

Steve: Well let me ask you this you mentioned that Jim came to you and said, hey how come you are not monetizing your savings account article.

JD: Right.

Steve: What did you change to– did you just throw an affiliate link at the end?

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And that was it– okay.

JD: So what I had– the way the savings account article was structured in 2007, 2008 it was just– it was no more than me asking which online savings account is best. Our online [Inaudible] [00:27:32] savings account is best. And it was an honest question, I didn’t– I wasn’t thinking about SEO or anything. I was asking my readers because I didn’t have an online savings account. And I said okay I’m thinking about getting one, here are some of the ones I found and the rates they have. And back in 2007, 2008 rates were higher, and what you think of these accounts and which ones do you guys prefer?

And I had no links to start with. All I had was the information about their interest rates and links– well I had links to the sites but they weren’t affiliate links. And I got hundreds of comments; I got all sorts of traffic from that. And so about a year later was when Jim recommended that I add the affiliate links and I did, and they were just simple affiliate links for whatever programs I could find. And I didn’t do anything else other than that.

Steve: No that makes– I mean just the topic of that article just kind of lends very naturally to affiliate marketing actually.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And it sounds like it wasn’t intentional.

JD: No it wasn’t.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And even when I added the links I didn’t put up banner ads or anything like that. I just put the links on the– well for each individual account itself. Now one thing I will say Steve is even though I was never good at the advertising, I was pretty savvy about when I saw that I was getting an influx of traffic from some place I would quickly go add a line or two to my article at the bottom saying, hey if you like this you should sign up for my RSS feed or my email.

And I don’t remember exactly how I did it; I don’t know if there are still there the company that bought me recently might have taken the– these few line tags of these articles. But they were very effective in creating or capturing a lot of new readers. So whenever I saw somebody that was getting a lot of traffic for a particular article, I would add that so that I could try to recruit new regular readers.

Steve: That’s actually a really good tip; I mean I think everyone should just go through their analytics to find out which pages are gaining the most traffic. See if you can add a sign up form, or see if you can add an affiliate link that’s kind of related to that high traffic article.

JD: Yeah absolutely. I don’t do– I’ve said that I don’t do SEO and I don’t do the marketing very well, but one thing I did once I realized that oh certain pages get more traffic, is I went through and I tried to figure out how I could monetize these individual pages in order to obtain more traffic. Now you recently had Toni from the Happy Housewife on, and she stole one of my top pages. It doesn’t bother me now that I don’t have an active role in Get Rich Slowly, and I never really had a chance to monetize it and I’m not sure how I would have monetized it, but it was about do it yourself Christmas guess.

And that was one of the last articles I wrote before I sold the site. And it didn’t have a lot of traffic the first year, but the second year the year after I sold the site it was a– I got a huge traffic push from that particular article. And I suggested to the company that bought the site that they should do something to monetize that page and they never did. But Toni I think I mentioned it to Toni and she said, well fine I’ll take care of it. So sure enough she built the page, took over the ranking for that word, gets lots of traffic, and I don’t actually know what she’s done to monetize it, but I think she was very savvy in doing that.

Steve: You know it’s funny J.D. you know just based on talking to you, it sound like your overall strategy is to just put out the best more shareable content possible. Eventually you know it will get shared around and it’ll start getting traffic, it will start ranking just naturally and then go back, find out what’s performing well, and then just monetize based on your highest traffic pages, right?

JD: Yeah, I have never like actually articulated it in that way but yes, that’s exactly how I go about it, or how I would go about it if I were actively trying to run a blog as a business right now.

Steve: Yeah and I think the key from talking to you is you know focus on creating really good shareable content. And then the rest will just kind of take or care for itself over time.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And you know what you said about SEO is totally true with my blog. I had articles that I had written in the past. It took like a year maybe a year and half to start ranking, but once it starts ranking the traffic just starts pouring in.

JD: Yeah. And another thing I would say is I feel like everything you do with your website, with your blog should be in service of the reader. Anything that is not in service of the reader is going to actively discourage people from returning to your site. And so you have to walk a fine line because ads are obviously not in service of the reader. On the other hand certain ads can be. So like when I’m adding affiliate links– okay the affiliate links don’t help anybody besides me and the bank I guess. But if the reader is going to go and follow those links– anyhow I don’t have an issue with it.

The same thing with like referring people to Amazon even at my personal site today I’m always linking to Amazon. I just did it this morning, sharing about the different equipment I’m buying so that I can learn how to do video podcasts. And so I feel like– yes create shareable content and also try to structure your site so that it’s very reader friendly. So that it’s– the things you are doing don’t frustrate people and make them want to go away.

Steve: So what’s your view on AdSense then, just then curious then?

JD: I don’t hate ads and I don’t love it. To me it’s like a necessary evil in a way. I just removed it from my own site recently but my personal site right now does not generate a lot of income, so it’s not a big deal.

Steve: Right okay. Hey I was hoping we could talk about the sale a little bit.

JD: Sure.

Steve: You mentioned that when you were ready to sell Get Rich Slowly you were just done with it. So what were your motivations?

JD: Well I had a few motivations going on. First of all the site had been creating more and more income. It had gone from being– when I first started the site it generated a few bucks a day and then bumped up to being a few hundred dollars a month. And then eventually it was a few thousand dollars a month, so that about two years into it I was able to quit my day job to focus on the blog full time.

Then I– both my lawyer and my accountant and my wife, they asked me to stop sharing my incomes stuff, so I did. But the income continued to grow and grow, until toward the end I’m not allowed to say exactly how much I was earning, but I could say that I was earning more and more in one month from the site than I used to earn in a year from my job.

Steve: Wow.

JD: And this was towards the end of 2008, beginning of 2009. And if you’ll remember that’s right around when the economy crushed. And although my revenue continued to climb and climb and climb, I felt like I could see the writing on the wall. I felt like interest rates were beginning to drop, and I figured if interest rates were going to drop then people would sign up for fewer savings accounts, they would have– I only recently began to put credit card out on the site, and I figured well if people are having problems paying their debts, there are going to be fewer people interested in credit cards.

The bottom line is financially I thought now is a good time to sell. I’m making a lot more than I ever have and I feel like the economy is crushing.

Steve: Okay.

JD: Plus at the same time there was stuff going on my personal life. I was beginning to have doubts about my marriage, and I felt like this was taking too much time away from that. My best friend committed suicide which is something that I shared on the site. And there was just a whole lot of stuff going on that was making me want to get out of there.

Steve: Okay.

JD: I was unhappy. And so I had been ignoring people who would approach me and say oh I want to buy your site, I thought they were joking. I made a resolution at the beginning of 2009 that instead of ignoring these people I would listen to what they had to say. And eventually I realized, oh they were serious and in fact they were very-very serious and are willing to offer a lot of money.

Steve: So did you actually go out to find your ultimate buyer or did they find you?

JD: How did this work? So before the sale, I had one company– let’s call them company A approach me and said, hey we want to look at your site or we want to buy it. And I was like, okay how much do you offer? And they said, well we don’t know, we need to see your financial statements. And so I asked my attorney and my accountant should I show them, and they said of course they don’t have any other way to make an offer unless they see your stuff. So company A took a look at the financial statement and while they were doing this I decided I would get some advice.

And I went out and I did some searches to find people who had sold sites before. And I contacted a couple and I asked them how things had gone. And they said, well you know you should really hire an investment banker if you are serious. And I thought, well okay. So company A came back with an offer and it was a big number. It was a little bit bigger than what I thought would be my walk away number. And I was like, all right I’ll check with an investment banker.

And the investment banker said, you know you’ve already done a great job. You’ve got more out of it than we thought you could get, but we still think you should let us take it to other companies. And I said, all right well maybe one more. So they took it to company B and company B came back and made a better offer, and I ultimately sold to company B.

Steve: Okay and how did you determine what a fair offer was? Like what were the multiples– what’s the reasonable multiple for a blog at that time?

JD: Oh let’s see, there was a banking blog that sold for like 10 times…

Steve: Yes I remember. I can’t remember what it’s called right now but yeah.

JD: No I can’t either, but I thought that was unreasonable. And from talking to other people when I was waiting for company A’s offer to come in, I talked to other people and I decided that maybe three to five times earnings will be reasonable. And that’s right in line with like a standard valuation for a brick and mortar business.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And it might be a little bit higher, I think brick and mortar business is probably three times earnings. And so I decided based on trailing 12 month revenues what I looked at. So just kind of a rolling number that wasn’t your last 12 months of revenue. I decided– I think it was about five times– no three times is what I wanted Steve.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And so when company A came back with four times, and so I thought, oh well that’s perfectly reasonable.

Steve: Wow, okay and so it sounds like it’s just kind of naturally happened, people were coming to you, you just do a little bit of due diligence, figured out what your number was essentially and…

JD: Yeah. I mean there was a lot of work behind the scenes because I was calling everybody I could to ask information. I have somebody I consider a mentor who is– he teaches business classes here in Portland. And so I called him and talked to him, and he went through all sorts of stuff with me. And things like get as much of the money upfront as you can, and all these other things. And it was very interesting.

Steve: You know I know most people don’t have lawyers and accountants on retainer, did you have one on retainer or did you just get one for this?

JD: No, I’m very fortunate in that my best friend from grade school is my attorney and one of my best friends now is my accountant. They still charge me a lot of money, don’t get me wrong. I’m able to just contact them and say, hey this is what is going on and take them out to lunch and they allow me to pick their brains.

Steve: Okay. And I didn’t want to get too much into this, but in terms of just the terms of the sale, can you just briefly highlight what some of the different options were? You said get as much money upfront?

JD: Yeah.

Steve: What would be some of the other aspects of the deal where you wouldn’t get money upfront?

JD: Okay, so when you sell a company or a large asset, you don’t get paid all at once, it’s kind of a buyout. And so different– when somebody buys asset and in this case they bought an asset rather than a company, they bought the website. So it could have been structured so that they pay me very little upfront and then there was an earn out over a period of time…

Steve: Okay.

JD: Or what I pushed for was to get as much– actually the investment bankers were the ones who did the negotiating. We tried to get as much money upfront and a smaller payout in the long term. And I think we probably got less money because of that because obviously money loses its value a little bit in time. So and plus if you are asking for a lot upfront they are going to be less willing to part with it, but that’s how we structured it.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of the investment banker, do you recommend going with one and what percentage do they take?

JD: I can’t remember exactly– our deal was a little different because I had already done so much of leg work by the time they got involved.

Steve: Okay.

JD: But my guess is right around 10%. I don’t have the numbers of the top of my head Steve.

Steve: No that’s okay, just a ball park is fine, okay.

JD: Yeah and ball park is I think 5 to 10% is what– it’s basically like selling a house.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And you want– excuse me, you want somebody there who knows the ins and outs, unless you’ve done it a number of times before. And so it was very handy to have them. I felt protected, I felt like they were looking out for my best interest.

Steve: Okay. And I’m going to make you feel a little bit uncomfortable now.

JD: Go ahead.

Steve: And I’m going to ask you about your course.

JD: Yeah, all right.

Steve: Because I know you are not a marketer.

JD: Right.

Steve: You don’t like pushing anything. So you know I thought I’d just get it out of you somehow. But you know these days you know you are not affiliated with Get Rich Slowly anymore. You have your own blog at, was it– you told me…

JD: It’s Jdroth.com is the URL.

Steve: Okay.

JD: But I call it folded space which is what I called my blog 10, 15 years ago.

Steve: Okay. And you recently started dabbling in info products, right?

JD: Yes.

Steve: So let’s talk about your latest info products.

JD: Okay so I met mentioned before I’m friends with Chris Guillebeau who runs The Art of Non-Conformity. He’s written a number of books like The Happiness of Pursuit and $100 Startup. He is the prime force behind the World Domination Summit here in Portland which I’ve worked and done him– I worked on with him. So he suggested over a year ago now that he is like J.D. you know I have this series of courses– he calls them Unconventional Guides. So it’s like the Unconventional Guide to travel, or the Unconventional Guide to publishing. He is like I want to do an Unconventional Guide to Money, and I want you to write it.

And so we collaborated and he provided the marketing arm and the design and all that, and I spent several months putting together this Get Rich Slowly course which is a year-long course. It’s basically a series of weekly emails, but to me the part I’m proudest of is the guide. It’s this 120 page book really that contains my– it basically boils down my entire personal finance philosophy into a 120 pages. And I framed it in terms of managing your personal finances like a business would manage their finances. I say I want people to be the chief financial officer of their own lives. And to be honest Steve I’m really-really proud of this guide because I feel like it’s the best work I’ve ever done.

Steve: Wow, you know what’s funny is you don’t call yourself a marketer and you know I would definitely not call you a marketer, but it’s just you naturally market your stuff through your passion if you know what I mean.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So it’s not intentional and you don’t have any ulterior motives. It’s just the way you present things is just– it’s just kind of naturally lands to being sold.

JD: Right and you know that’s actually another thing that’s kind of hard when it comes to marketing the course, because I am proud of it and I do want to share it with people, but I don’t need the money. Through the sale of Get Rich Slowly and careful management of the money that I got from that, I don’t need any more money. And so I’m not going to argue with earning more money, but it makes– I’m not motivated to market I guess than I would be if I weren’t in this position.

Steve: Sure I’ll be sure to link up this course in the show notes, but you know outside of your course are there any books that you’ve kind of read that have really influenced your way of thinking over the years?

JD: Yeah you know the funny thing is I often say that the best personal finance books aren’t about personal finance, and I mean that. So I guess– here is what I mean, so there is a book written by a guy named George Leonard and the book is called Mastery, and to me this is the best book that anybody who is trying to get out of debt can read. It talks about– he frames it in terms of trying to master martial art. And he talks about how you have to go from beginner and you have to just put in the work. And you have to struggle with getting better and then kind of losing some progress, and then getting better and then losing some progress.

And so this book Mastery is a great book for people who are trying to get out of debt or accomplish anything difficult. There is another book that I really like; it’s called The Magic of Thinking Big by David Schwartz. And it’s a book– it’s a very– it’s from the early 1960s, and it’s kind of got a very mad men type style in a way. It’s got some old fashioned language, but it’s a great book about positive thinking, setting goals, overcoming fear, and just doing the things you want to do. And it seems hawky [ph] at first but it’s a fantastic book.

Steve: Interesting.

JD: But perhaps I think the most influential book I’ve ever read is a book called How I Found Freedom in an UnFree World, and it’s by a guy named Harry Browne. Now Harry Browne is best known for being the Libertarian candidate for president in 1996 and 2000, but I don’t think people should hold that against him. This book was written in the early 1970s and how I Found Freedom in an UnFree World, it’s all about letting go of what other people think of you, what you think other people think of you, and instead of trying to live up to other people’s expectations, just live life on your own terms. And it seems so tride and so hawky, and yet presented the way he presents it, it’s just fantastic, I love the book.

Steve: Okay, I’ll definitely have to check that one out. I haven’t actually heard of any of the three books that you mentioned. So it’s actually– yeah it’s good for me. Yeah you know usually people talk about The Lean Start Up, or The 4 Hour work Week, and it’s kind of refreshing to hear three fresh new books.

JD: Yeah, I think Mastery is probably the most obscure of those and the Magic of Thinking Big is the least obscure that was a huge best seller.

Steve: Cool.

JD: You’ll find copies in any like thrift store.

Steve: So J.D. you know we’ve been talking for quite a while. You know if anyone wants to get a hold of you, where can they find you?

JD: Well my personal site right now is Jdroth.com. The blog is called Folded Space. And I have been writing a lot about overcoming fear, finding happiness, pursuing freedom. And more and more I’m prepping for my big project in 2015, which is going to be travelling around the United States and interviewing people about their lives and talking about their personal finance stories too. And so I’m kind of in transition phase there, and The Get Rich Slowly course, the year-long Get Rich Slowly Course lives at Moneytoolbox.com.

Steve: Okay. You know travelling around the US sounds like something Chris Guillebeau would do.

JD: Yes-yes-yes, but Chris is– you and I talked before the show about how I used to be a very strong introvert, and Chris is very much that. And he does travel around and he does meet people, but I think it’s tough, I think it takes a toll on him. And for me I’m going to be intentionally an extrovert and my goal is to get out there and meet as many people as possible. And to listen to what they have to say about their life experience, what have they found about purpose and passion and happiness, and probably about personal finance too.

Steve: That sounds like a really cool project. I will have to link that up too once you get the website up for that.

JD: Yeah. It’s a few months away, but it’s definitely in the works.

Steve: Okay, anyway J.D. thanks for coming on the show, a real pleasure talking to you today.

JD: It was great Steve, thanks so much.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. I have been a huge fan of J.D. Roth for as long as I can remember. And to be honest I’m still kind of giddy that I got to interview the grandfather of personal finance blogging.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode56. And if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review, because when you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support this show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to Mywifequiteherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

055: How Steve Scott Makes 6 Figures Selling Non Fiction Kindle Ebooks

Steve Scott

Steve Scott is a very prolific writer on the Amazon Kindle platform and he makes anywhere from 20-60K per month selling ebooks.

In this interview, he reveals the exact methods he uses to sell hundreds of books a day and the right way to sell on the Amazon Kindle platform.

Also, be sure to check out his blog at SteveScottSite.com

What You’ll Learn

  • How Steve makes 20-60K per month selling books
  • How Steve sells hundreds of books a day on the Kindle platform
  • How to gather email addresses from people who buy your ebook
  • How to find a lucrative topic to write about
  • How Steve gets his books up in the ranks of Amazon
  • How long each book should be in length
  • How to launch an ebook effectively
  • How Steve brainstorms and puts together his books

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. In this episode I’m going to be talking to Steve Scott. Now the reason why I decided to bring Steve on the show is because I wanted to interview someone who makes a living selling Kindle E-Books. Now I was just looking at one of his income reports just now and he averages several hundred book sales per day, and that’s pretty crazy.

Now Steve’s book sales allows him to live a very flexible lifestyle and travel the world. And unlike Johnny Andrews who I had on my show last time, Steve actually focuses on nonfiction Kindle books and generates a very good and reliable income from it. Anyways today I’m hoping that Steve will reveal some of his book promotion strategies with us. So without further ado welcome Steve, what’s up man?

Scott: Thanks for having me on Steve. Actually it’s funny you mentioned Johnny Andrews; I’m talking to him later today for the first time. So I’m kind of excited to hook up with him to see what he is up to.

Steve: Yeah it will be interesting to compare kind of your strategies with what he talked about a couple of weeks ago. He focuses on fiction books; I think he does off the wall fiction books.

Scott: Yeah something like that but yeah I kind of– I definitely agree because I thought I heard him say once about how he really just narrows down on one thing and just keeps on creating content for the same audience which I completely agree with him on that one.

Steve: Yeah and he was saying something about how fiction books seem to outsell the nonfiction ones. I’ll get you a commentary on that a little bit later.

Scott: Sure.

Steve: But give us the quick background story, tell us about how you kind of got started with this whole thing and all the sort of businesses that you run.

Scott: Sure. I guess I’ll give the very-very brief overview of kind of my history but I started with online marketing about 10 years ago. So 2004 I kind of run a couple of business, it’s just kind of what a lot of people do when they first get it started. I just kind of fell for all the get rich quick scams and tried my hand at a bunch of different things. So I fumbled along for about two years till around late 2005 early 2006 when I got into what I call authority affiliate marketing. The idea there is just you pick a niche, you create an email list, and you try marketing to that particular email list.

So I did that for pretty successfully from 2006 to 2012, but around 2012– actually even before that I was really kind of souring on the niche I pick. It’s mostly like the dating niche and just– it was just really not part of who I was at that point of my life. So I would say around 2010 is when I started Steve Scott site, and again that’s kind of another way I kind of fumbled along. But I spent a year or two trying to figure out the whole blogging thing. And eventually I started talking about internet business and stuff because that’s honestly what I knew best about.

I guess that was my biggest authority knowing about how to run an affiliate business and internet business in general. And in 2012 in September I just started to really focus in on kindle books. I already published a couple of them previously but I saw that they sold fairly well, like they were selling five to ten copies a day which in my opinion wasn’t too bad of an income for something that wasn’t too hard to write. So in September 2012 I decided to just focus completely on the kindle stuff and kind of the rest as they say is history. So since then guess it’s been two years now, I’ve been almost 90% of my time just focusing on writing kindle books.

Steve: Cool man, so I actually just had a quick question before…

Scott: Sure.

Steve: We delve in to the whole kindle thing. Can you kind of– you mentioned you have Steve Scott site and you were doing affiliate marketing. Can you comment on kind of– by going all in on kindle you kind of relying on Amazon as your platform and your selling platform, right?

Scott: Yes…

Steve: Versus your blog which you have your own platform and that sort of thing. So can you just kind of talk about you know putting all your eggs in the Amazon basket versus your own stuff?

Scott: Yes let me do the big caveat at the beginning, this is a very dangerous strategy and I’m fully aware of the danger of it, and for anyone out there who is messing around with Google and have built niche sites around the Google algorithm you know how painful it can be when you build your site around one platform. So that said with both my kind of what I call the Steve Scott kindle books which are about internet business and internet marketing, and the habit books which are kind of the website behind this developgoodhabits.com. I would say both of them are– my primarily strategy is to build an email list behind them.

So if anything ever happens to Amazon at least I have the email list and I can do a quick pivot and perhaps publish on other platforms. But yeah I would say definitely it’s relying on one platform for your income is definitely scary. And like I said it’s something I do but you should really think carefully about before going ahead and doing it. I guess if you have any more questions about that?

Steve: Yeah actually since we are talking about it, so how do you get the email addresses from the people that you sell books to on Amazon?

Scott: Sure the first thing I do is I actually have an email offer inside the first 10% of every book. And when people either whether they are browsing for the book or when they go download it or buy it, the first thing they will generally see is a free email offer. So it’s which I’m sure you’ve talked about on plenty of other podcast but it’s your typical free piece of content that if you sign in for your email list they get it and then they are now a subscriber.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: What I like about the Amazon platform is that these are all potentially– I’ll say the large percentage are actual buyers instead of just tire kickers or freebie seekers. And I’ll say beyond that I also try to expand on my email list by– right now let’s say I have a better blog, blog posts are two per week. And I do slide share and I do a couple of other things that kind of bolster my email list through other traffic strategies. But I’d say right now the main driver of my email subscribers is the kindle platform. So it kind of built on one another like a snowball effect.

Steve: Okay so you basically have a URL in your book?

Scott: Yes.

Steve: And they have to type it in and then they enter in something and you give them something free that kind of adds to the content of the book, is that..?

Scott: Yeah absolutely. I would say as an example for the develop good habits there is the 77 good habits to live a better life. And actually with the way Kindle is you can just tap on the link and it just– the actual email capture page is through lead pages and they just auto populate just an email subscription box right inside the kindle platform, so…

Steve: Oh okay cool.

Scott: You literally don’t even have to leave your kindle app to even sign up for my email list.

Steve: I see okay. That’s pretty cool and then after do you try to sell them on other books on the kindle platform or do you sell them on your own site as well?

Scott: I try to sell them a little bit. I have a real small kind of a warming Auto responder sequence, so it’s about three, or four emails, I forget the email. And it’s just it introduces me there as one that actually really describe a really deeply personal story, it’s called How Habits Saved My Life and that’s actually about kind of what I went through when I first got into online business, and how I kind of became a better person because I developed good habits. And then it was just– it’s a couple of other smaller kind of emails. So the idea here is just kind of introduce them to me as a person, as an author.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And I definitely recommend my kindle books inside the email list by like the first, I would say the first 10 days or so. I try to keep as pitch free as possible.

Steve: Okay-okay all right. So let’s talk a little bit more about just publishing books. So first of all I’m going to kind of ask you some questions about what it takes to become successful author. But can you first give the audience an idea of how you are doing today in terms of books sold, and how many books do you actually have out?

Scott: I have 46 books right now.

Steve: Wow okay.

Scott: And that’s further across three I would almost say 3.5 platforms, maybe I’ll explain this. There’s the internet books, I tried for a while because I’m lazy like everyone else. I tried outsourcing a whole line of children’s animal books. And they still make a couple of hundred dollars a month that really I just I learn a lot of hard lessons about what it takes to outsource content and really it was pretty brutal for me.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: The habit books which are throwing the best and I’m actually just starting to take my books and have them translated into different languages, like I just published my first German book about Habits about a week ago. So I’m trying to build up that market as well. That’s…

Steve: So let’s see, you have children’s books, you have internet money, and making money I guess online type of books?

Scott: Yes.

Steve: And then Habits books which are more personal development type of books?

Scott: Absolutely yes.

Steve: Okay and then so what’s like the breakdown? How many of each do you kind of sell on a given month as an example?

Scott: I would say maybe 0.5% would be the children’s books and I would say another 15 to 20% would be the Steve Scott books, and then the bulk of it are the habit books. And those are the ones that have really taken off pretty much what I’ve been focusing on for the last year or so.

Steve: Okay and so just curious, do these books ever have to get re-written as things go out of date?

Scott: I would say definitely the internet business books I almost feel like some of them either I want to take down because the content is outdated or just completely revamp them. The habit books not so much, but there is one book that really took off, did really well but I made a lot of very critical flaws in them just the way I wrote them, the way I presented the content and stuff I did include. So I would definitely want to rewrite that book and actually that’s what I’m planning on doing for December just do a complete revamp of the habit staging book.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of the breakdown of what you make on your own site versus kindle, what is kind of the breakdown? Are you almost all in kindle right now?

Scott: I would say yeah I’m 100% in for the Amazon platform with a bit of a sub breakdown where I generate some income from Create Space which is like 1000 or $2000 a month. And some income from ECX which is the audible platform for Amazon and that works out to be about 3 or $5000 a month.

Steve: Okay and so you are pretty much easily doing six figures doing all of your books stuff on Amazon, right?

Scott: Yeah definitely, like my highest month has been $60,000.

Steve: Wow.

Scott: But I hesitate saying that because now it’s like people are saying, oh Steve is currently making $60,000 a month. No it’s just the one month. I would say recently it’s been anywhere from the 40 to $20,000 like most recent month it was down to $20,000. So it definitely fluctuates.

Steve: Wow okay that’s a lot of books and these books are all like in the range of like 2.99 each, right?

Scott: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So it’s very high value in business.

Steve: Okay, okay. Cool so let’s say I have a book I want to write. Can you just kind of walk me through the process and the overall high level strategy for making a living doing this?

Scott: I would say take a step back and not think of a book you want to write. I will almost say you start with a niche. And I really think I did listen to the interview with Johnny Andrews that you did, but I’ve heard him on other podcasts and I would definitely agree with what he says for the fact that you really want to like narrow down into one particular topic other if you are a fiction writer narrow down into a specific genre. Or if you are a nonfiction writer narrow down into a specific topic.

And I would start by really researching that topic and just making sure it’s something that sells well on Amazon. And when I first started the habits market I went through a whole like bunch of stuff for– I checked to see if there is just people blogging about it. And off the top of my head obviously habits you think of zenhabits.net.

Steve: Sure yes.

Scott: And there is [inaudible 00:12:50] I know he writes about habits. You also want to go to Amazon to see if people talk about habits, see what type of books are selling on Amazon. And at the time there really wasn’t too much written about habits. Sadly I think I’ve had to kind of create my own competition because all sorts of habits books now. But at the time there was– actually which is still really doing well. There is The Power of Habit by Charles Duhigg which has been selling– it’s just a monster seller for the last couple of years and I absolutely love that book. And I could see the potential that people really kind of want to learn about like habit development.

I poked around Amazon, I looked at it and the litmus test I like to use is when you are looking at particular type of books you just click on the book description, go down to the product description and you’ll see a number says Amazon best seller ranking. And if you see consistently on a number of books if you see books that are selling under the number 30,000, that generally means they sell at least five or so copies a day. If I see a couple of books like that that have a pretty high sales ranking like that, then that means that there is definitely people interested in that particular topic.

But I did that your basic keyword research, I went to Google the AdWords.google.com, kind of looked at the different key words to see if there is demand for it. And I’m sure you’ve talked about this with blogging, but I tried to see if I could come up with 50 topics just off the top of my head what can I write about. At that point when you know you have a lot of stuff to write about, you know there is demand and then I would say it’s time to actually narrow down on your actual book topics.

Steve: Okay so that kind of implies that you are writing a lot of little books as opposed to a gigantic monolithic book on a subject?

Scott: Yeah definitely. I would say a good example when I kind of– I guess I discovered this strategy with the third book. I want to talk like kindle publishing but obviously I didn’t really know too much about it so instead of just writing one massive book about kindle publishing I wrote How to Discover Best Selling Book Ideas. And it covered what I just talked about, how to actually vet a certain idea, make sure if it will actually do well on Amazon platform. So instead of just writing about everything kindle, I just wrote about one particular topic.

And instead of pricing a book at 4.99, 5.99, 6.99, I just took one topic, wrote about 15 to 20,000 words, and really drove down at that one particular topic. And honestly that’s been my business model ever since then. Just finding one topic and really focusing on a good solution.

Steve: Okay, but that kind of implies that you need to write a lot of books.

Scott: Yes.

Steve: Right? Okay.

Scott: Definitely and I will be very honest and say it’s not the most passive strategy in the world. You definitely have to have a lot of button shared time and really sit down and dedicate yourself to writing at least five to ten hours a week I would say at the bare minimum.

Steve: Okay so this ranking is Amazon sort of ranking of 30,000. So you are kind of shooting for around five book sales per day for a given book is that…?

Scott: That was at the very least for me like I want to know at least if the idea takes off or at least sell five copies a day. And I’ve with a lot almost all my books I’ve sold way more than that, but there have been a few that just kind of bombed and never really went anywhere and I feel the times that those ones bombed is when I didn’t pay attention to that role.

Steve: Okay and so the ones that bombed, you didn’t look at any sort of seller rank?

Scott: Yeah I just kind of– I kind of went with what I thought people would want and that’s like instead of actually what I’m starting to do now is I’m actually starting to have dialogs in my email list asking them questions about what type of content they want, almost like you would with the products. You start asking questions like what type– for instance what type of habit would you like to learn. And recently with the book I’m currently developing I’ve found that people really having trouble with exercise.

And I guess more about the motivation behind what type of exercise or getting motivation to exercise, and then answer a bunch of follow ups questions for that and really try to drill down on particular problems that they are facing.

Steve: Do you actually do pre sales with your email list as well?

Scott: Not really.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: Because I guess it’s just a matter of the publishing schedule I try to maintain is pretty fast, it’s about– now it’s about every six to eight weeks. So trying to promote new books, old books, recommend blog posts, I just I find there is a lot going on. So once a while I casually mention what I’m working on. But I almost use like the questions as you know way as pre-sale deal before I actually release the book.

Steve: Okay and then if you were to just kind of look back and compare the books that bomb versus the ones that were successful, what are some other things that you did that made a book bomb or be successful?

Scott: I would say the problem is I actually do follow the same process each time. So sometimes certain books just don’t take off and…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: There is no other reason maybe because I did that properly. But I will say definitely what I just talk about is not talking to people first and finding out if it’s actually something that they want. And I guess the one or two books that really stunk up the place, they were more just me lecturing about something instead of actually just offering a solution to what people actually have told me that they are going through. I would say I’m drawing a blank on what else…

Steve: So it had nothing to do with the promotion process, the book development process. You think it was like the content? The nature of the con…

Scott: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I would say that the scope of what I was talking about obviously the nature of the actual content itself. Like sometimes when I just didn’t write as well as I could have, that comes out later on after the book is sold a lot and then people just come back with their actual honest feedback. Like I mention habit stacking before that sold extremely well, but it wasn’t until a month or two later that I realized that there were some major critical flaws to it so…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: You will get those feedbacks and that feedback will be later on. But as far as like having a process– usually the process I’m actually constantly trying to improve on my launch process and trying to get a little bit better each time.

Steve: Okay and so the first step in your process is to find a niche or a pretty broad reaching topic that you feel like you can expand upon with multiple books. Is that kind of accurate?

Scott: Yeah absolutely, and just for me I just I always kind of be in the habits anyway, so it felt like kind of a natural segway for what I want to write about. And it does give me some flexibility for what I can talk about.

Steve: Okay and then let’s say you’ve started writing and you’ve gotten some feedback from people and then you are done, what are some of the next steps?

Scott: I would say its button share time and that’s really just a simple matter of taking an idea and I’m going to run this process real quick because…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: It’s actually kind of a lengthy one but I like to do a brain damp just take out a couple of pieces of paper, write down everything you know about a particular topic. If you are not really sure about a certain aspect, that’s something you might need to research, at least write down I need to research this particular section of the book. And literally it’s like a complete brain storm, and I would say spend a couple of hours doing this. And what I would like to do next is take a stack of index cards and just flash out the actual book itself.

So I’ll take the eight or ten points of the book that I find are really the strongest points that can be broken down into subsections. So I take those and those will act as my chapters. And I literally go from crossing off ideas from the brain damp on that sheet of paper and putting it on to index cards. And the reason I pick index cards and I guess as an aside people of kindle also do the same thing with the scrivener software, I just– I’ve never really been a huge personal fan of scrivener but other people absolutely love it.

But you can do the same thing or sort an idea just you doing on your computer instead of the in person or like with actual physical index cards. So with index cards then I just separate them. I kind of reorganize them, I rip up sections I just don’t think it will really work, and I cross off sections. I try as much as possible to make a really tied book with the index cards. From there I’ll just do kind of a string of a consciousness writing rough drafts. I’ll just literally write down everything I know, almost using index cards just when you see one line I’ll just write as much as I know about that topic.

And the first draft is really, it’s ugly as sin, it’s terrible looking, but it’s important to kind of get that out of the way. So your idea here is you are kind of overcoming writers block and just not staring at the cursor of death wondering what to write next. So you just– you blast through that rough draft and then the second third and forth draft you really try to clean up and polish it. And I’m at the point now where actually by the time I hit the forth draft I pass off the one editor. She comes back, I get the corrections, and I pass off to a second editor. I’m sort of relying more on teams to actually kind of refine the book and make sure it’s tight and as good as possible.

Steve: So you actually have two editors for your books?

Scott: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I would say the one almost acts as the developmental editor where she really will come back and make some suggestions, talk about stuff that should be deleted or stuff that should be added, that sort of thing, fact check, or link check, that sort of thing.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And then there is a second editor he kind does more like a proof reading kind of final run through with that just to make sure everything is good to go.

Steve: So you absolute recommend having someone else tale a look at it before you publish?

Scott: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: When I first got started actually a friend of mine he looked it over. But I would say you almost want to pay someone to do it professionally, someone that actually has experience for instance. You can hire someone from anywhere form point five cents, so half a cent to two cents a word. That’s generally the going rate at least for that hire people for.

Steve: Okay and then interesting. For your first books did you try to do it all yourself in the beginning?

Scott: Yes and that’s…

Steve: Okay

Scott: That’s why I’m so bullish about editors now. I made the rookie mistake of assuming since I knew the content that people would just see the content and not see the typos and the grammar mistakes. And it wasn’t until like the seventh or eighth book that I realized like wow this is– I’m getting frequent comments about typos. And maybe even though I proof read it, I looked over a bunch of times it’s just– there is something about when you look over your own stuff, your mind thinks it sees what’s supposed to be there and not what’s actually there. And I for instance I miss words sometimes. I sometimes say words double. It’s just stupid mistakes, but when you are too into it you just don’t see the critical errors that you are making.

Steve: Okay and then they also take care of all the formatting and everything also, right?

Scott: The formatting is something I’m still trying to find the right formatter for but that’s actually someone else you need to hire for. I tend to do everything through Microsoft word and I save as a web filtered file, and that if you are getting started that’s okay, but you might want to consider hiring someone to do formatting for you. And that’s actually…

Steve: Wow okay.

Scott: Truth be told I’m still trying to find the right way to format my books. So just I’d say that’s one of my major flaws of my business right now is not having the best formatting.

Steve: Okay but it sounds like from a priority perspective you are doing pretty well without one. So it’s definitely not necessary.

Scott: Yeah but I don’t know I like the idea of continuous improvement. So I’m always trying to get a little better at self with every feature book.

Steve: So one thing that Johnny mentioned in the last interview was the book cover was one of the most important factors. So how do you deal with the book cover in your case?

Steve: Yeah I completely 100% agree with him.

Scott: Okay.

Steve: I was very fortunate that early on I found a really good book cover designer, and again I look at book cover design as an investment not an expenditure. And I really feel that’s an important distinction because people– I feel a little off that really they don’t really want to spend money on their book cover and I feel it literally has a direct correlation between sales and what people are looking at. And the mistake I see is they’ll go to Fiverr and they’ll just hire someone for five bucks who’ll create a really simple looking cover. And I just I think they’re shooting themselves in the foot, but I have a professional cover designer. He sends back a couple of photos that he found from I stock photo.

We talk about the concept of the book and he kind of tells me what base image to buy, I go buy and he handles the rest. But it’s– I guess it’s just a matter of really trusting the guy or girl that you work with and having an ongoing conversation about what you actually need for your book cover design, but that’s something that unless you’re a really good graphic designer you shouldn’t be doing it yourself, and you should be willing to spend a little bit of money on it.

Steve: Okay how did you find your guy?

Scott: I just went through Elance and…

Steve: Elance, okay.

Scott: I just– I do what I call a human split test, well I do this a lot of new projects is I’ll hire two people to do kind of the same project and I’ll just find the one who responds the quickest, who seems more interested in the project and not just trying to cross off the list but actually is engaged, and kind of the overall quality of their work and just by putting two people together you really have a good idea of who is the best candidate.

Steve: Okay and then what about in terms of naming your book, that’s probably really important as well right?

Scott: Absolutely and I feel that is the success of the habit stacking books since I came up with a pretty clever name. One of those names just kind of came to me but what I’ve done in the past and actually what I still kind of do is I’ve gone to sites like Copy Blogger or other places that have really good titles and I’ve literally copied and pasted all their titles into a swipe file. And I have just a binder full of swipe files of all these different websites, if I find a good title of something, I’ll throw that in there as well. And every time I come with a title I’ll pull it out, I’ll look at different words and I’ll literally run through 20, 30 titles tweaking and cutting and asking people’s opinions here and there, but it takes me a couple of hours to come up with a good title.

Steve: So in terms of the strategy for your title, is it kind of along the same lines of coming up with a headline for a blog post that you want it to be very clickable?

Scott: Definitely.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: Yeah I guess there’s an argument that people are kind of hating on Clickbait right now, but…

Steve: Yeah.

Scott: But yeah you definitely want to– you want to class something fairly clever. I tend to gravitate towards two or three word main title, like a book I just released a daily entrepreneur or something like that or habit stacking, something that creates a little bit of curiosity, and the sub headline actually gives a little more of an explanation about what the book is about.

Steve: Okay so that’s the strategy that you use, kind of like a shorter title and then the sub headline kind of describes what the book’s more about and that’s kind of entice– the subheading is where you actually entice the person to…

Scott: Yeah [Inaudible] [00:27:18].

Steve: Hold on one sec Steve you’re breaking up.

Scott: [Inaudible] [00:27:28] 33 success habits for small…

Steve: You still there Steve?

Scott: Yup still here.

Steve: Okay I think you’re going to have to start that section over, I lost it all.

Scott: Where did you lastly lose me?

Steve: You were– let’s see what we were just talking about, what were we just talking about?

Scott: The headlines and sub headlines I was kind of giving a for instance.

Steve: Yeah so I think I lost you when I asked you that question about so the sub headline is more about getting the person into entice a person to buy and then you started talking about, so that’s when you started breaking up.

Scott: Okay so just let me know when you want to start again.

Steve: Yeah go ahead.

Scott: Okay.

Steve: Yeah.

Scott: So basically with the sub headline again you’re right, it kind of gets people to really understand what the book is about, so for instance I just mentioned my book The Daily Entrepreneur. The sub headline is 33 success habits for small business owners, freelancers, and aspiring 9-5 escape artist. It’s definitely a mouthful and I had a couple a little bit of brush back for that but I felt it was important to kind of touch on different people who might be interested in learning about entrepreneurial habits so…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: The idea there is with the sub headline you really want to kind of drill down and almost zero in on your target audience and who’d be most interested in your book.

Steve: Okay and then all those words fit on the cover?

Scott: It’s my cover artist is pretty good, it’s definitely small fonts, but I would say you don’t have to get as wordy as I was on that particular title, like I tend to– my subtitle is a little bit short, I just for me that was personal teaching because a lot of people like say for instance if you’re a tax consultant and that you work for yourself you’re technically a freelancer or you’re an entrepreneur but you might not consider yourself an entrepreneur. And so I was trying to like hit all those touch points at different people who might be interested in the book.

Steve: Okay. No it makes sense; it’s actually a pretty enticing title. So let’s talk about the most important part, how did people find you? Like what’s your promotion strategy?

Scott: Honestly my biggest promotion strategy is the email list that we talk about, that we just talked about before.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So I really try to get as many people on my email list as possible and actually I would consider that more important than the blog and the kindle books and all that. I really just– I try to build that email list as big as possible and have them as engaged as possible.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So when I launch a book I actually do a kind of a slow roll out lately. So I’ll email my Steve Scott list people interested in internet business stuff and they– even though a lot times my books don’t really directly relate to internet business people still pick it up because they might find it interesting or it just talks about productivity, that sort of thing. So I’ll email them on a Monday, then I’ll email my “Develop Good Habits” list on a Tuesday. Wednesday I’ll do social media, so I’ll do like the Facebook, Twitter, couple of Facebook groups that I’m in, and actually that’s what I was currently doing today.

And Thursday I’ll do kind of last chance the book is going up to its normal price at 2.99, I’ll do that on Thursday and same thing on Friday. So I try to consistently promote it throughout the week and I do a lot of other little things like I’ll change the advertisement and creatives on my blog, a couple other places that people tend to click on my website that sort of thing. So I try to do it really slow and consistent that Amazon algorithm will start to see that this new book is getting consistent level of sales and they’re more inclined to give it a little more visibility on their platform.

I find that when I do that, when I price a book for 99 cents through a solid week of promoting it, about the week mark maybe after 10 days or so Amazon starts to really pick up the slack, starts to promote on their end through email campaigns and posing on the hot the top 100 list, the hot new releases list, and a couple other sections on Amazon. Eventually they’ll see that this is a book that people want and they’ll start promoting it through their end, and it’s almost like a reverse 80-20 rule. So at first I do 80% of the effort, Amazon does 20%, and after about 20, about 10 days or so it reverses where Amazon does 80% of the marketing for me.

Steve: Okay so let me just summarize what you just said. So your basic strategy is to give it that initial push until it reaches a point where Amazon recognizes that it’s a best seller or it’s going to sell well, then they take over from there.

Scott: Yeah exactly and…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And then sometime honestly it’s some like mentioned before some books just don’t take off, like even during the week I’ll see that book X doesn’t compare to the sales that I see in my end compared to book Y. So sometimes you almost know within the first couple of days that a book might not sell as well as you think. And in my opinion that’s okay because it’s like even if a book makes a couple of sales a day it’s still part of a catalogue, it still helps your overall brand but yeah…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I really try to emphasize pushing everything on Amazon, that’s actually really why I’ve put all my eggs in one basket because I feel that yes there are other book platforms but all the stuff that Amazon gives you is worth the exclusivity that you have to give and be part of the KDP select program.

Steve: So what is the– how many books do you have to sell to get Amazon to recognize you and start taking over?

Scott: I would say at least a couple of hundred and…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: That’s why honestly for most people– most people don’t necessarily should necessarily do what I do because I do a pretty large email list so it works for me. But if you can get at least 50-100 sales on your own, they might want to consider it. The alternative strategy is to put your book in KDP select and give it away for free for five days and that’s part of the– that’s one of the tools that Amazon gives you is you can weigh a book for a free first for a certain amount of days and when it goes back to paid it might shoot up the page charts, and actually if you look on my blog at stevescottsite.com/book–launch…

Steve: I’ll link that up don’t worry.

Scott: Yeah I’ll give the link, my friend Nick Lopper actually had a really good successful free book launch and he actually wrote a whole blog post that details the whole strategy that he followed. So there are ways and actually, I guess this is great for people that really don’t have a large e-mail list that you almost want to launch a book for free instead of launching it for– at 99 cents.

Steve: Okay can we just talk about KDP versus KDP select for a little bit.

Scott: Sure, when you join Amazon anyone can join Amazon, put the book up there and if you just put in the normal KDP, you can also sell the book on Barnes & Noble, Kobo, Apple, all the other book platforms or you could even sell on your own blog, you could sell pretty much anywhere. If you join KDP select you have to sign a 90 day exclusivity contract where no more than 10% of your content can be sold or distributed anywhere else. So for all intents and purposes the book has to be unique to just Amazon and nowhere else.

A lot people complain about that but I think Jim Crow from Author Marketing Club, he says the best that it’s really only 90 days when compared to traditionally published book that can take away four, five years of the contract and it’s really not that big of a deal. And if you put a book in there for 90 days and it doesn’t work for you then you can roll it out to other platforms. And I just like it because you get either the five free days like I talked about or you can also do what’s called a countdown deal where you drop your book down to 99 cents, and there’s for a week and there’s like a little ticking clock that kind of gives a little bit of scarcity to the book and people are more inclined to buy when they think it’s only temporarily at a low price.

And actually the part of the program that’s really– people really starting to enjoy are starting to really joy is what’s called kindle unlimited. And if you join kindle unlimited as a reader you pay 10 bucks a month and you can just read unlimited amount of books. On the author end you get a dollar fifty, most recently last March you get it about a dollar fifty Per kindle unlimited download, and I would say right now about a third of my sales are coming from Kindle Unlimited download, so…

Steve: Really?

Scott: Yeah.

Steve: Interesting.

Scott: It’s pretty substantial. You don’t make as much on a per unit sale, but you get a decent amount of income and also it helps with your ranking. So say if 50% of your sales are kindle unlimited they still count that as sales, they don’t count that as something separate, and so it helps with your ranking algorithm.

Steve: You know I’ve heard of some people giving away their books for free and not being on KDP select. So have you seen that happen, and if so what’s kind of the advantage of KDP select at that point?

Scott: Can you explain like they give it away…

Steve: They made it zero dollars by telling Amazon…

Scott: Oh yeah, that’s the perma-free technique, and that’s kind of a backdoor technique you can do with Amazon where you post a book on Amazon, you drop it to 99 cents and then you publish it elsewhere on other platforms through smashwords.com, and you price it down to zero like basically give it away for free there. And then when you see that the– once you see the smash words distributes to other platforms you find those websites, you find the link and you go back to Amazon and tell them you have it for free at these websites and a lot of times you need your buddies to do it.

That’s why you need a couple of people telling Amazon that they found this book for free on other websites, and then ultimately or eventually Amazon will price match it and drop it down the zero cents or just completely free. And the idea there is when you have a free book it kind of acts as an entry point to your funnel. So I know a lot of fiction writers, they’ll take the first part of their series and given away for free, and hopefully hook people on their content and then get readers to go on to buy their second third fourth and fifth book.

Steve: Okay and then if you get that successfully working, then what are some of the other advantages of KDP select at that point?

Scott: I would say if you have a perma-free book– I guess some people don’t really want to give away the book permanently for free. They actually generally want to sell it.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So it acts almost like the free almost acts as the sales tool, as a way to attract attention to not only that book, but potentially other books on a catalog. So the idea is they give their book away for free for a couple days to get some extra visibility, and then when the book goes back up to its pay price people will be picking it up. There’s a higher success chance of all people buying as one price.

Steve: Okay but just because it’s zero dollars you can still raise it at anytime right?

Scott: Yeah you could and with the KDP select with those five free days you can raise it at any point during the promotion, you could just immediately stop it in the middle of promotion if you don’t like the numbers or you just you aren’t getting any value from it.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: With the countdown deals where you’re pricing a book temporarily for 99 cents, you’re locked into that discount for whatever time that you select.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of getting visibility in search and getting reviews, do you have a strategy on that?

Scott: Yeah that’s, it’s– I’ll be honest it’s hard to do when you’re releasing books on a regular basis. If you have one or two books out there, it’s easy to build a bunch of people who are willing to go and leave reviews, but when you have continuous books it’s definitely a challenge. What I like to do is every time someone e-mails me or that asks or talks about something I wrote in the book or compliments me on a book or generally seems like their interested in the book, I’ll reply back. I’ll talk to them and hopefully solve whatever problem that they’re facing and then I’ll ask for a review.

I’ll give him a direct link to my book and say can you go– if you have a chance can you just leave a couple sentences review, it really helps. And if they actually go back and do that, then I just say I’m building a street team, I’m building a group of people who will receive a free book in the future, do you want to be part of it? And if they decide to join then every time I have a new book I just e-mail the select group of people and same thing I just– my new book is out, would you mind leaving a review if you find it useful. And I really– it’s a really light touch point where you don’t say go leave me a five star review, just say leave a review.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I find that I can get anywhere from five to fifteen reviews during the first week and then I have built some cache with my e-mail list that a lot of time they’ll after reading a book for a week or so they’ll go leave reviews. It definitely– I definitely build initial view on my end through just the connections and from my street team. Little overtime just the organic nature of Amazon people the reviews will roll in and I do have a review request in the back of every single book and…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: There are a couple of other things I’m currently testing as well.

Steve: So in terms of reviews are they huge in terms of getting visibility for the book?

Scott: I would say absolutely with the caveat of don’t stress out too much about it, because I’ve actually seen a couple of books of mine have two reviews on them and then they’ve actually still sold really well, so they’re not…

Steve: Interesting.

Scott: They’re not the end of the world like some people make it out to be like if you don’t get 50 reviews your books are going to tank, like I’ve successfully sold books with less than a dozen reviews on them. And I would say another thing like you’re going to get negative reviews and it’s important to pay attention to the content review of just– if it’s something that really adds no value don’t worry about it, but if you keep on seeing stuff pop-up in reviews itself or multiple reviews, then pay close attention to it and try to fix whatever error they’re pointing out. Because no matter how hard you try, you’re going to make mistakes in the book and it’s just a matter of trying to improve on it, and just engaging even negative review people and just finding out how you can better help them.

Steve: So you respond to negative reviews?

Scott: Actually a lot of times I don’t. I actually I almost caution not doing it, but if it’s something that even if it’s negative review its actually valuable I’ll actually come back and thank them and let them know that’s something I’m working on, it’s something I’m going to fix, but if it’s just…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I’ve had a couple– I’ve only done this two or three times where I got into a debate with somebody and that’s just someone who was really negative and hostile. And the one time in particular that I’m thinking of is just someone who literally attacked my character and accused me of all sorts of awful things, but I felt at that point I– anyway it was like three pages long, it was like the longest review I’ve ever read.

Steve: Wow.

Scott: So I felt I had to defend my stuff because it was– no matter what I try to prove the guy still just doesn’t believe me, so I just you know you can– you’re going to get some hate if you do well on– if anything people are just going to hate you for no reason.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So I try not to let it affect my day, but when I feel I have to I will reply back, but most of the times I just try to ignore them.

Steve: Okay I can’t imagine that’s a good use of your time to respond to a three page rant.

Scott: No, not at all, it’s like the reminisce of a crazy person.

Steve: So a couple other questions. It is kind of more kind of more random, so you mentioned that each of your books you try to keep it 20,000 words, is that accurate?

Scott: I would say at first I definitely dipped under the 15,000 words and in the last year or so I tried hit 20,000, actually my most recent book I hit 35,000. So again it kind of goes back to continuous improvement. I feel that Amazon is getting more competitive, so I’m trying to increase the content, just really try to add a lot more value in every book, but keep it at the same 2.99 price point.

Steve: Right so you mentioned 2.99 price point, is there something magical about that price point?

Scott: I would say for me absolutely it’s– that is the lowest price point where you get the 70% commission rate from Amazon. So if you dip under 2.99 you go to 2.98 or down to 99 cents Amazon only gives you 35% of the sales commission. So you basically have to sell seven times the amount of books to make up for that difference. So say you sell seven books, at 99 cents equals the same money you make from one sale at 2.99, so…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I like the 2.99 price point because I consider each book an entry point into my overall brand, so if someone is interested in cleaning up their inbox or something like that, they can check out that book and they go on and like that, they know that there’s a bunch of other books that they can check out as well. So I like to get them in as the lowest price point as possible and hopefully hook them into reading more books.

Steve: Would you say the majority of customers buy more than one book?

Scott: I would say the people who don’t like me; they definitely don’t buy more than one book.

Steve: Oh yeah obviously yeah.

Scott: But I would say yeah my customers absolutely I get a ton of emails saying oh this is like the 9th book I’ve read by you, so it’s something you definitely you love hearing, at least I love hearing that.

Steve: So it sounds like you’re not banking on any single book. You’re just trying to get someone in your list where you can introduce them to your entire library of products essentially.

Scott: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And I also kind of with the countdown deals I definitely run a lot of deals for 99 cents on a lot of my books because even if it’s discounted and I don’t make a lot of money on that particular book, I know that they might be more inclined to check out my other books. For me it’s a long term strategy, I’m just trying to get as many customers and eyeballs as possible.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of the actual book creation process typically how long does it take you to pump out a book?

Scott: I would say when I first started; I literally was doing them every three weeks. Now it’s almost…

Steve: Wow, okay.

Scott: Double to six, sometimes six to eight weeks now. Again I’m trying to get a little bit better with each book, so it’s taking a little bit longer.

Steve: Okay, well three weeks sounds just like a really short amount of time for me actually.

Scott: Yeah.

Steve: I mean you’re writing like every day for many hours, right?

Scott: Yeah, I was definitely a lot unhappier when I did that, because that was I would say that was 20, 30 hours of writing a week, and it was just– the pace was insane and I guess I could do it if I had to now, but it wasn’t very enjoyable.

Steve: Okay. And then in terms of do you ever use ghost writers?

Scott: I’ve tried, I definitely tried with the animal picture books, and I think I talked about that, that was kind of a failed experiment. Now once– usually in every book there’s one or two sections that are just more research based that just require a list of websites or a list of tools, that sort of thing. So I’ll definitely outsource a small portion of like 1000, 2000 words just go find information on this. I usually just send my VA to do that and but everything else I try to keep it either me writing, or on the most recent book I worked with a collaborator I have, like she wrote a lot of it as well.

Steve: Okay and mainly that, so it doesn’t affect your overall brand, right? Your whole library that you’re trying to create.

Scott: Yeah definitely and I feel that some people are actually– have managed to successfully build a kindle business off of ghostwriting. I just– I haven’t seen a great example of it and my own life or from my own experience, but I’m sure there’s someone out there who is doing really well, he or she is probably not talking about it.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of recommendations on how to get started. Are there any books that helped you get started, or where did you find the resources for yourself?

Scott: I’m trying to think of books that are not self-serving; like I dove a book called Writing Habit Mastery that…

Steve: It doesn’t matter, you can be self-serving; I’m going to link up a lot of your…

Scott: Okay.

Steve: I’m going to ask you for your best sellers and link them up in the show notes so…

Scott: Oddly enough, the only resources– I didn’t really read a lot of books on it. I just more check out podcasts and just kind of got into the mindset of a writer and some of my favorites are The Creative Pen and The Self Publishing Podcast. Those are– and The Sell More Books Show, those are three podcasts I regularly enjoy and the idea that it’s not really necessarily with the writing process, but kind of the mindset of an author, and what it’s like to legitimately to build a business. It is not the sexiest business in the world, but there is a mindset that if you’re willing to put forth daily effort, you can actually make a good business out of it, but you have to– it’s like a year, it’s a multi-year process, it is not an overnight success.

Steve: Sure absolutely as with any business. Are there any online services that you kind of use to help you promote your books that you care to mention?

Scott: Honestly, it’s really– my online business is really run through e-mail marketing, so it’s AWeber…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: Which I’m sure you talk about and really for me it’s been Facebook, just connecting with people, talking with other customers, or just joining groups with other authors and connecting with them. And it’s again I guess it’s more of a day-to-day strategy instead of an actual– I guess you have to put a lot of time in actually connecting with people and the payoff is when you have a book people are more inclined to go and buy it, but it’s not like I can go on Facebook and just blast 100 different pages which is go buy my book, you have to build those connections.

Steve: Do you ever buy ads or anything like that?

Scott: I have tried one, I can’t really talk about because I signed an NDA for that, but I tried it that didn’t really work out. I’ve tried Facebook ads that didn’t really pan, it’s just it’s hard because price points are so low that…

Steve: Yeah, exactly

Scott: You’re not making much money on– especially if you’re launching a book. I literally make 35 cents on every book purchased during a launch. So there’s almost no way to make the math work.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I know there is Bookpub.com, people absolutely love it, but Book Pub does not like me. I submitted to them like six times already and they just– they keep on rejecting me. I’m going to keep trying, but I would say for everyone listening if you can get a book into Book Pub, it’s definitely worth your investment. I think it’s a couple of hundred dollars, but it it’ll definitely pay for itself, and I have a couple of friends who have done really well with book pub promo.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And there’s a couple other sites I just I haven’t really successfully done anything with them, so I really can’t say if it’s good or not.

Steve: Okay sounds good man. Hey Steve we’ve been talking for 48 minutes and I really appreciate your time. If anyone wants to find you, where can they reach you?

Scott: I guess two places, there’s stevescottsite.com and I talk about all things like kindle publishing there. But I’m actually starting a podcast in about a month or so and that’s going to be selfpublishingquestions.com. It will probably still be built as we’re talking that’s when the podcast goes live, but I know it’s definitely going to be hopefully launched by the end of November.

Steve: Okay, you know I can wait to have this podcast out until then, then I’ll link up your podcast in the show notes.

Scott: Sure, that will be great.

Steve: Sound good? All right, hey Steve thanks for coming on the show man, really learned a lot today.

Scott: Thanks for having me on, it’s great.

Steve: All right take care.

Scott: Bye.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode. Way back in episode 35 I had another successful kindle author Johnny Andrews on the show, and it’s been really interesting to hear the differences in strategy between the two authors. And the important lesson here is that it doesn’t matter what type of books you write, whether they be nonfiction or fiction, there’s definitely money to be made on the Kindle platform. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode55.

And if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to Mywifequiteherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

054: How Spencer Haws Created Long Tail Pro – My Favorite Tool For Keyword Research

Spencer Haws

I’ve been following Spencer’s blog, NichePursuits.com, for quite some time now and I’ve always been a huge fan.

Not only does Spencer have a ton of experience with building out niche sites and keyword research but he has also created the best keyword research tool on the market with Long Tail Pro

In this interview, you’ll learn about what’s working with SEO and how Spencer created a leading software product with no technical experience at all!

What You’ll Learn

  • How and why Spencer diversified his business
  • Why Spencer moved away from using private blog networks
  • What’s working with SEO today
  • How Spencer came up with the idea for Long Tail Pro
  • How search engine optimization has evolved
  • How to design software without being technical
  • How to market software in a competitive environment
  • How Spencer got the word out about Long Tail Pro in the very beginning
  • Why Spencer moved Long Tail Pro towards a SAAS model
  • How to do keyword research properly
  • How long it takes to rank keywords on search

Other Resources And Books

Transcript (Coming Soon!)

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m thrilled to have Spencer Haws on the show. Now I’ve actually been following Spencer for quite some time now. He runs the popular blog nichepursuits.com, where he teaches others how to start niche online businesses. Now he’s also the creator of Long Tail Pro, which is one of the best keyword research tools on the market today.

And here’s what’s cool about Spencer you know for one, he’s a family man with four kids which I greatly admire, and two he’s build dozens of profitable niche sites and constantly is evolving his strategy as the internet landscape changes, and personally I love following his site and his podcasts for his insights into SEO and keyword research. And with that intro welcome to the show Spencer, how are you doing today man?

Spencer: Hey I’m doing great thanks so much for having me on the podcast. I love talking business. So always enjoy doing the interviews.

Steve: Yeah so you know I know a lot of people in the audience probably know who you are already, but if you wouldn’t mind giving the brief intro about how you kind of got started with this whole online thing, what your blog is all about, that’d be just awesome.

Spencer: Yeah absolutely, so I started dabbling building websites just on the side, almost as a hobby, just to see if I could build websites while I was working on my full-time job. I was actually in business banking primarily in business banking and finance for about eight years and so it was back in all roughly 2006 that I started dabbling building out websites on the side just to see what I can do, not even to try and make money at first.

And then sort of along the way I started learning more about okay how do you actually get traffic? What are these search engine things and how does all work? Oh I actually have to do keyword research and all these sorts of thing until eventually I was like, you know I can actually make some money if I put my mind to it and try to rank well in Google and other search engines.

And so if you fast forward to 2011 by that time I had built out dozens and dozens of small niche sites that targeted a different Long Tail keywords and I was making enough money from those small niche sites, it had actually exceeded my day job income in March of 2011. And so I quit my job, and I’ve been blogging kind of about that on NichePursuits.com ever since.

And of course, right around 2011 the same time I quit my job, I also went out and created the keyword research tool Long Tail Pro, which has become a big part of my business. So I’m running that software company along with creating not only niche sites now I sort of moved on to focusing on bigger sites. If you will, instead of dozens and dozens of sites I’m focusing on one or two sort of bigger sites, and of course we can dive into that. But yet I sort of I am involved in doing all those things, including buying and selling sites and shared all my blog and hopefully people reading can follow along the journey for themselves as well.

Steve: I’m just curious for my own knowledge. When did the kids kind of start coming into play?

Spencer: Yeah.

Steve: And did you do all this stuff before you started having kids or…?

Spencer: Oh man, so I got married in 2002 and we had our first child in 2004…

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And so nope I did it all with the kids, with the full-time job, we now have four kids as you mentioned, and they range in ages from ten to six months.

Steve: Okay and this is just for the listeners there’s no excuse for not able to start something with kids because Spencer’s got four of them. All right like I mentioned in your intro, you’ve tried a bunch of different things when it comes to making money online and that’s actually something I really admire. Now my audience is primarily composed of people who are searching for the best way for them you know from a personality standpoint to make money online.

So I’d like to kind of start by talking about the beginning of your journey, where you used to own a lot more smaller niche sites that generated a smaller amount of income each and then kind of how that all evolved in to Long Tail Pro and your overall strategy today. So let’s start with the smaller niche sites, so you mention that you no longer own that many niche sites, so kind of what has involved overtime and why don’t you own as many today?

Spencer: Yes, so the search engines are always evolving. You know you have Google that sends– that can send an enormous amount of traffic to your website if you’re ranking at the top of Google. And so when I was first getting started, I was just understanding SEO and found out ways that were fairly simple with link building and proper keyword research to get very small websites ranked very quickly in Google. And that worked very-very well for a few years. Google’s evolved to where they are no longer ranking things based off of the links that are so easy to get I guess…

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Is a good way to put, so there certain link building tactics like you know just using article directories, or other very easy to get links that you used to be able to use, those no longer works. So Google has come out with the Pad update, the Penguin updates all these algorithmic updates where they no longer are ranking these on sort of link profiles these simple you know five page niche sites.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: So it’s more important now if you want to get that free traffic from Google you have to build a proper site, you have to do proper link building and content marketing, and all these tactics that you really just need to be pursuing in order to get that traffic anymore.

Steve: Okay so can you just kind of quickly comment on some of these strategies and what is working and what is no longer working in SEO today?

Spencer: Yeah absolutely, so there’s been you know different tactics to build links and rank in Google for a long time. And so I won’t go over all of those, but sort of one of the most recent ones that even today still a lot of people use and talk about that I no longer use is a private blog networks or PBN links. Essentially people are out building several websites and then they use this network of blogs to link to other websites.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And that’s a tactic that people have used for a long time and continue to use, but I’ve decided you know what it’s just too risky, I’m no longer going to be doing that. I want to think about what does Google want to see? I mean if a Google employee was to look at your website and to look at the links, that you’re using to try and rank your website, will they see that as a shady tactic or will they see that as you know something valuable, are these real and actual links.

And so I’m out trying to pursue the more natural links you know that you get when you produce great content, you know you produce something awesome and people take notice and they want to link to it, they want to mention on their blog. Those are the types of links that you want to pursue these days.

Steve: Okay and then for the people who don’t follow your blog is there a reason why you did a 180 just recently on the PBNs?

Spencer: Yeah so– you know it’s– that’s kind of a painful question you know. But of course, you know there’s always a reason why strategies change because I had been using PBNs previously on several of my niche sites, and on a lot of those links got devalued. Basically one of the networks that I was using, whether it was that Google found out, or what exactly happened, but Google no longer found value in those links.

And because of that all of– not all but a lot of my niche sites were penalized in the rankings so they no longer ranked well, and so yeah I went from on some of my– a couple of you know the sites that I had earning you know a couple thousand dollars to now earning you know may be a couple hundred dollars.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: You know and so some of my sites were penalized. It kind of opened my eyes and said you know what if I want to do this long term, I really need to take a long term approach, and use those strategies that will be around for a long time.

Steve: Okay. And so, in terms of building links today which is probably still the primary indicator of rankings today, would you agree with that?

Spencer: Yeah it still is yep.

Steve: Okay, so given that the PBNs and the easier ways to obtain links are kind of being slowly devalued away, what are some low hanging fruit ways of building links today in your opinion, like what do you do with the niche site today when you’re first starting out?

Spencer: Yes so there’s so many different things that you can do. When it comes down to it and I don’t know if this is a low hanging fruit, but it’s something that works all the time.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And that is just creating a really great resource and this doesn’t have to be difficult, and it’s hard to sort of explain, but this could just be a huge list post. You know you combine a list of the top 100 whatever you know those are sort of some things that work well you know. So a huge resource, a huge list post or something that you produce on your blog, and then you reach out to the top you know 100 or 150 people in your niche other bloggers either via twitter or e-mail and say hey I just produced this awesome resource you know, would you mind re-tweeting this or would you mind mentioning it.

You know just reach out to people that are in your niche and you will get a certain percentage that will link to that, whether that’s 5% or 10% you know I don’t know. And it kind of depends, but that’s just a great strategy that can get links.

Steve: Interesting, so I actually get those e-mails almost every other day and I tend to ignore them, so I was just wondering if you had a strategy for reaching out.

Spencer: Yeah, so one thing that you can do I mean certainly if people are– and I get the same e-mails right. You know, so people that have never contacted me before and e-mail me out of the blue, that usually is not going to be a super effective e-mail, so long term you want to be building a relationship with people in your niche. And so you contacting them before you ask them to do something is always great, but you can still reach out, you know maybe you and I aren’t responding to a lot of those e-mails but you know 5% of the people do respond to those e-mails…

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And do put links on their websites. But another strategy is to reach out via Twitter; it’s so much easier to ask somebody to, hey will you re-tweet this? Rather than, hey will you put a link on your blog for me, and so you can get shares on Twitter very easily. It’s not that difficult for somebody to hit the re-tweet button and that’s all they have to do.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And those re-tweets and re-shares can get your information, can get your content in front of other eyeballs and that will lead to sort of natural links on the back and other people that maybe you didn’t reach out to will see it and will indeed link to that.

Steve: Okay and then the way you kind of build out your relationships do you do cold e-mail? Do you go to conferences? How do you cut it build up your network?

Spencer: Yeah, I mean all of the above and it kind of depends on what type of site perhaps that you are building, is this your only site? Certainly if you have just one site and you’re focusing on that one site only attending the conferences and you know trying to go out and do guest posts and reaching out to everybody is the way to go. If you have a few sites you might need to do some other things, where it’s more cold e-mails, and contacting people in a larger manner I guess if you will.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: That can work and of course this is just one you know tactic. There’s lots of other things that you can do as well.

Steve: Okay and I’m going to ask you some leading questions to get the Long Tail Pro here. So how important is the actual keywords that your targeting in terms of ranking and search?

Spencer: You know it really is still critical, it is.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: I mean when people– people search for things using keywords. That’s just the way the search engines work, and so it doesn’t matter how authoritative, I mean let’s take a super authoritative website you know Whitehouse.gov. You know it doesn’t show up for searches that it’s not related to right, so it’s never going to show up for the search term dog training even though it’s maybe the most authoritative website out there. There’s so much more to ranking in Google than authority.

There is relativeness. Okay, so there’s how relevant is the keyword to the website? So when you do keyword research and you want to rank for a certain term, it is so critical that you look at not only you know how many people are searching for things each month and other things related to the keyword stats themselves, but how competitive is the first page of Google for this particular search term. And so you know I can’t harp on it enough that if you want to rank in Google, you have to be doing keyword research.

Steve: And it’s also important in your opinion right to create something that’s very focused on the keywords that you’re trying to target, right?

Spencer: Yes, absolutely. So you want to you know include the keyword in the title of your page and you want it to be related you know just by simply mentioning sort of off handedly in one of your blog post probably isn’t going to get you to rank for that keyword. You need to make it a focus of that blog post, a focus of that website to give it the attention it deserves to create a great resource surrounding that one particular keyword.

Steve: Okay then prior to you having Long Tail Pro, how were you doing this niche research?

Spencer: Yes, so for a long time Google has had the free keyword tool that the Google ad words keyword tools, or the Google keyword planner…

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: That I used, and I also used other tools are out there like Market Samurai that help you get the search volume and other keyword stats related to those keywords. But I really I wasn’t happy with the options that were out there because it took a long time to do a lot of keyword research just for different reasons. Some of the limitations of the keyword tools wouldn’t let you search for a lot of keywords very quickly, and so that’s one of the main reasons I went on decided to create my own keyword research tool.

Steve: Okay, and then so what sets Long Tail Pro apart from let’s say Market Samurai.

Spencer: Yeah, so one of the key differences is like I mentioned just the ability to do lots of keyword research quickly, and specifically Market Samurai only allows you to input one seed keyword at once, you input that one seed keyword to get back 800 related results. And if you don’t see anything you like you have to then go back and input another seed keyword and go through the whole process.

Whereas Long Tail Pro you can input let’s say 10 seed keywords at once and you know get back 800 results for each of those or 8000 results overall. And so you can look at lots of keywords and filter them all at once to really give you sort of the best of the best keywords very quickly. So it’s a huge timesaver, it’s faster overall just the workflow, and it gets you the results in an easy to use manner. So overall it’s just faster and easier to use.

Steve: Okay and then you’re not technical, right are you? Are you a programmer?

Spencer: I am not a programmer.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: So I’ve had to hire a developer to help me build out the software itself yeah.

Steve: So let’s say you want to develop Long Tail Pro from scratch, how you find the programmers to help you?

Spencer: Yeah you know it is not an easy task I’ll tell you that. You know I, when I first created Long Tail Pro I hired somebody didn’t really know what I was doing, and you know long story short, that first version of Long Tail Pro no longer exists. I immediately had to go back and hire somebody else to do it properly if you will. So you know my advice well okay, so the way that I found my programmer is actually on Elance.com.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: I lucked out a little bit, but my advice is just communicate as much as possible before you hire anybody whether that’s through Skype, through phone calls, e-mails, make sure that both of you are on the same page and that you’re communicating well with what’s expected during the project, what’s expected after the project and everything.

Another big piece of advice that I give is to hire somebody that’s great, not somebody that is cheap, and so usually I’m willing to pay top dollar if it’s the best programmer out there. Usually you make up so much money on the back end when you get a great developer because they do it right the first time, or they understand your project better. There’s usually a good reason that they cost more.

Steve: Okay and then do top programmers hang out Elance?

Spencer: Luckily I found some and yes I will say that there are other great programmers out there, they you know I don’t know if they’re few and far between, but you certainly have to weed through a lot of applicants to find the best.

Steve: Okay and so let’s say okay you’ve already started developing Long Tail Pro at this point, and it comes time to market the tool, but then you didn’t come first right? Guys like Market Samurai came before you, and so how did you kind of market your tool and unseat some of the industry leaders like Market Samurai?

Spencer: Yeah, absolutely so one of the reasons that I felt like I could sort of make a dent in the market is because I was the primary market for keyword research tools. I was you know the person that was out buying these and doing lots and lots of keyword research. So I understood the market intimately well, and in fact I still believe that I understand the market way better than the guys in Market Samurai.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Those guys are they’re developers, they’re programmers they– I could be wrong but I don’t think they’re guys that are out doing lots of keyword research. They came up with a great initial product idea, and they developed it, but they’re marketers and developers they’re not people doing keyword research. And so for that reason there’s a few sort of quirks within Long Tail Pro that make it difficult to use and not as quick.

And so by being a little bit different, to answer your question, I was just enough, my product was just enough different from Market Samurai that people were like ah I get it, I want use Long Tail Pro because input multiple seed keywords at once. Filter your keywords and all your data before you run the data. So you don’t have to go back and do it all a second time and just a lot of the way that it flowed people got it. And were like this is so much easier, it’s so much faster, I’m saving tons of time by using Long Tail Pro.

Steve: Did you have the blog before Long Tail Pro or how did you get the initial people to buy?

Spencer: Yeah, I did have the blog for a little while before I created Long Tail Pro, and so I did have a small e-mail list. It wasn’t huge. I try to remember, but it was you know maybe a 1000 people on my e-mail list or something like that. And so of course yes I e-mailed my e-mail list to get a few of the first sales almost more of just beta testing, but then I also did a special offer on the Warrior Forum and I got some more sales that way.

And that was kind of the first version not a ton of sales if you will, but enough to kind of be out there and know that people liked it, and to give me the courage to go on and further develop, further build my audience, and further market the product.

Steve: Okay, so let’s talk about the Warrior Forum a little bit. So what are kind of the rules of listing something on there?

Spencer: So I know that they do have specific rules, it’s been a while since I’ve listed anything there, but it costs somewhere I think it was around 50 bucks to get a sort of classified listing or a special offer listing somebody had to go through and manually approve the listing, but I will say that overall it’s fairly– the rules are fairly loose…

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: You know on the Warrior Forum, so there’s lots of things there. Some are good, some are bad. So you have to you know if you go to the Warrior Forum you do have to weed through a lot of things to find the good and the bad products, but it is a great marketplace. There are tons of people there, tons of people looking for products to buy in the Internet marketing niche. So it was a great place for me to start because it gave me that built-in audience that you know I really didn’t have.

Steve: So how do you actually get the word out about your tool today and obviously is more established now, but how do you get new customers?

Spencer: Yeah so now a lot of it does come through my blog over nichepursuits.com, so a lot of my consistent just blogging and content marketing of my blog, people find out about me, and then of course find out about Long Tail Pro. So that drives a lot of traffic, but I also have a lot of affiliates that promote the software for me. People that I’ve reached out to and just build relationships with over the past three or four years that I’ve been blogging. Guys like Pat Flynn, of course you know sell quite a bit for me, Chris Guthrie, the Empire Flippers and several other affiliates that I have that just know the tool know me, and like Long Tail Pro and are willing to help me sell it.

Steve: And then do they– do you buy ads as well or is it just primary affiliate network and then your blog and you podcast?

Spencer: Yeah, that’s primarily it, I have tested paid traffic, but I do not do a lot of it on a regular basis.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: But you know that could change like I said I’m kind of always testing and tweaking, but that really is never been a major source for me.

Steve: I’m just curious in terms of your niche sites versus Long Tail Pro, like what’s the breakdown in percentage of revenue.

Spencer: Yeah so Long Tail Pro has grown a ton since I launched it back in 2011 and it definitely is a majority of my business now.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: I would say that it’s– let me just try to think here. You know it’s somewhere around 65-75% of my overall business.

Steve: Wow, okay.

Spencer: It is probably Long Tail Pro, yeah so yeah it’s a great little business for sure.

Steve: So do you feel like you kind of need to continue doing the niche research stuff to keep Long Tail Pro at the forefront in that industry?

Spencer: You know I probably wouldn’t have to.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Do I feel like I need to? Yeah I enjoy it; Long Time Pro is established itself enough that you know it would do just fine without my blog I think. There is so many other things that I could be doing to promote it and it’s you know it gets mentioned on lots of blog sort of naturally without my involvement at this point.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: But having said that, my first love is building niche sites and creating those sites.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And so I have no intention of giving that up. I enjoy it too much and it certainly does have a benefit.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: To sort of keeping up the growth of Long Tail Pro. But that’s– you know I didn’t really create the blog because of Long Tail Pro. I really created it out of my love of just building online businesses in general.

Steve: Right. And then you saw a need and you essentially just scratched your own niche so to speak, right? To fix your own problems, correct?

Spencer: Yeah absolutely, for sure.

Steve: So I had a couple of questions just about the economics of the software. Now I know the base versionary tools kind of this one time lifetime feed, right? But how do the economics work because I know you are probably grabbing data from the Google keyword tool also, right using the APIs. So those are constantly changing, right? Because I know Market Samurai is always breaking down because something is changing. So when you charge a onetime fee, how does it kind of work out because you have to constantly be keeping Long Tail Pro up to date, right?

Spencer: Yap absolutely. So there are a lot of pieces to the puzzle. You know you mentioned one of them. There are other APIs that we use that change or you know things happen. What we do, we have to constantly be back updating the tool. And so every single month you know I’m paying a pretty descent chunk of money to my developer to keep the software up to date.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: So there are a lot of ongoing course. So also to give some of the background of the stories, so there has always been a onetime purchase price for the base version of Long Tail Pro. However in I believe it was January of 2013 so about a year and a half or so after I created Long Tail Pro, I added a monthly subscription option. I added the platinum version which is a $17 a month charge for people that want to have some additional features, the platinum features. And so that has added significant stability to my overall you know month to month income and improve the economics if you will over just a onetime cost.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: So that recurring piece that I’ve added was a very smart business decision.

Steve: And what percentage of the people actually go platinum?

Spencer: It’s a little bit over 50%.

Steve: Oh wow okay.

Spencer: More than half of people that buy go for the platinum option.

Steve: And what do you get for platinum?

Spencer: So there is a few additional features. There is the ability to add your own list of keywords if you want to add up to 10,000 keywords at once. You can throw that into the tool and I’ll give you all the data back for that. And you can save your favorites and do some other things with sorting and organizing favorite keywords that you want to highlight and save. And then the biggest function at least the people use the most is the keyword competitiveness calculations. So we’ve come up with an algorithm that calculates how difficult it would be to rank on the first page of Google for any given keyword.

So you are researching you know best survival knife and the platinum version of Long Tail Pro will speed up a number between zero and 100 to tell you this is how difficult it would be to rank in Google. So it gives a very simple number that makes it really almost as easy as just glancing at the keyword, you see the number and you know how hard or easy it is to rank in Google.

Steve: Okay and then does this– so I’m just trying to think of this from an ecommerce perspective. Let’s say the front page of search is full of big box stores like J.C. Penney’s, Macy’s, your algorithm kind of takes the domain authority into account in terms of ranking?

Spencer: Correct.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Yeah it takes a domain authority, the page authority, the number of links, and how relevant the results are to the specific keyword, and a couple of other you know little calculations in there and spits out an overall number.

Steve: And I’m just curious, how do you kind of test the validity of these rankings?

Spencer: Yeah so I spend a lot through my own experience you know I’ve been doing a ton of keyword research over the years. And so that specific calculation is based on a lot of my own experience that I’ve seen and tested to know whether or not you know the results are valid. So it’s one of those things that we try to stay on the forefront of sort of searching through optimization, and the most recent data that’s available and we make sure that that formula sort of matches the most up to date things that Google are doing or changing.

Steve: Good because I know Moz like has a bunch of set keywords that they use for their Moz cast. Do you have like a similar way of testing, like where you have you pick some keywords in a variety of different categories and just kind of validate whether your rankings make sense?

Spencer: Yes. So I you know I don’t have a specific set that I always do over and over again I guess if you will sort of like that, but I am in there testing across various niches and of course we get a lot of feedback from our users.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: You know they’ll let us know hey this looks like an anomaly you know why is that? You know and so we are doing a lot of testing on our own and then of course getting feedback from users. And by and large our users are very-very happy with the results and they feel like they are very-very accurate.

Steve: Okay and so let’s walk through a complete example.

Spencer: Okay.

Steve: So let’s say I wanted to start a niche ecommerce store. How does one use the LTP to find these opportunities and kind of walk me through the basic strategy and in sequence?

Spencer: Yeah, so what you would do is initially you have to start with some sort of seed keyword, right?

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Or seed keywords. And so you know if you have an idea for an ecommerce store already, of course you would input sea keywords related to whatever that is.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: You know that kind of depends on everybody. Some people might need to do some initial brainstorming to actually find out what you know are they interested in you know sort of baby products or furniture or whatever that may be. So I don’t know how deep you want to dive into all of that. But at some point you need…

Steve: Let’s do survival knives because you might know a little bit about that.

Spencer: Okay sure yeah. Yap I do, for people listening I built out a niche site based on survival knives. So what you would want to do is input you know some seed keywords…

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Related to survival knives, so of course yeah you are going to input survival knives. And then if you go over to if you want to just I like to use things like Amazon and eBay that might list a bunch of survival knives. So if I go over to Amazon or eBay it might you know list something like tactical knives or pocket knives or you know hunting knives. So you know you can get five or six or ten sort of related phrases and then you just input all of those into Long Tail Pro. And what that will do is then generate 800 related keywords for each of those seed keywords.

So you know if you input survival knife it will give you 800 keywords. If you input tactical knife it will give you 800 keywords. And then you’ve got this huge list of keywords that you can then start to narrow down. And using Long Tail Pro you can filter based on– if you only want to see keywords that get over a 1,000 searches a month and less than 25,000 searches a month you can input those filters. And there is other filtering options such as how many words are in the phrase? Or how much advertisers are paying for that keyword?

So you would want to filter that down. I would usually say keywords you want over a 1,000 searches a month. Usually the keywords that are paying the most have a cost per click of over 50 cents or sometimes a dollar.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And that’s going to narrow down your options significantly, right?

Steve: So how do you determine the thousand searches? Like how much traffic do you assume that you can be able to get with a 1,000 searches for example?

Spencer: Yeah so that’s really just a base you know. And every niche is going to be different for how many searches you get. But if you only got traffic from that one keyword that got a thousand searches a month, you know if you are ranked to the top of Google they usually say you can get about 42% of that traffic. So that’s you know that’s only 420 visitors a month for that one particular keyword. But we know that you’ll get a lot related Long Tail keywords. And then of course once you build out other pages within the niche you’ll get more traffic just depending on what you are targeting.

But it’s good to make that distinction somewhere. You want to whether that’s a 1,000 or you decide that’s 2,000 you want to have some sort of minimum so that you know you have a big enough niche that you are in.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And I’ve sort of drawn that line at a 1,000 for the sites that I build.

Steve: Okay and so if you’ve chosen a primary keyword how do you kind of estimate the overall traffic including the long tail that you are going to get. Do you just kind of add up all the Long Tail keyword phrases that you can get or do you kind of make some estimate off of like a base keyword like survival knife for example?

Spencer: Right and so you can do both. And there is no magic formula, I mean at the end of the day a lot of this is not a perfect science.

Steve: Sure.

Spencer: Because you’re going to get searches from Long Tail keywords that you didn’t expect or you know vice versa. So you want to look at yes the overall market. You know how many people are searching for a more general term like survival knife. And then but probably the better way is to kind of look at all the keywords that you are going to be targeting on your site and do some sort of calculation based on that.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Yeah.

Steve: And okay so let’s say we have like some keywords that we want to target. Like you chose to target best survival knife, right?

Spencer: Yap.

Steve: Do you mention the tool that it also speed out 800 related Long Tail keyword phrases, how do you use that data?

Spencer: Yeah so once you’ve kind of filtered that data down let’s say maybe you are left with 100 keywords that kind of meet your search find criteria. And then at that point– a lot of these is a little bit of learning. Some people may go through every single one of those keywords, but just with my own experience I might be able to only look at 20 or 30 of those just from knowing hey this probably isn’t a good keyword phrase, and that comes through experience. But then you start once you’ve narrowed down at least you then start looking at how difficult would that be to rank in Google.

And so this where that keyword competitiveness calculation comes into play. You in Long Tail Pro you could just click the calculate casey [ph] button next to each of those keywords, and it’s going to give you a number between zero and 100 to let you know how easy or difficult those keywords are.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And so you know that’s probably what you would want to do is go through there and then sort of sort them by easiest to rank for in Google. And then you probably want to actually look at the actual results in Google and kind of make it the final determination based on what you see in Google. And you know just what the keyword is if you feel confident writing about it, does it make sense that sort of thing.

Steve: Okay and so once you have these keywords I guess what’s natural then is a blog or some sort of content based medium to actually try and rank for those words with content, is that…?

Spencer: Yeah that’s what I do is…

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: All of my sites are content based and so you know if we pick best survival knife like I did I created you know a nice informational article about what might be the best survival knife. I created a chart with the top 50 knives that you know users could then sort by reading and reviews and price and all sorts of other things. So you want to create a great resource that people can come to and actually use. And then you’ll do that across basically every keyword that you target on your sight, you want to create a new article, a new piece of content that can rank in Google, and people can read and find information from.

Steve: Okay and in terms of commercial intent do you have any guidelines? Do you look at the search results to determine commercial intent or is it based on the AdWords cost per click that people are paying?

Spencer: Right. So I usually I’m looking at the AdWords cost per click.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And well and two things, so the AdWords cost per click and the amount of advertisers that you know are bidding on that keyword. So if you have a high cost per click and there is lots of advertisers you will know that that’s commercial keyword, right?

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Because there is a lot of advertisers there, whereas even if you have a high cost per click and there is only one or two advertisers that probably is not a super commercial keyword, just because there is not lots of advertisers. So you kind of want to have both if you can. That’s what I look at and again most of my sites are informational. I’m not creating ecommerce sites like you usually are or maybe your readers are. So there maybe some things you do slightly differently you know just depending on what of type of site you are creating.

Steve: Yeah I was just more curious on how you would tailor your strategies for ecommerce, like if you were actually trying to sell a physical good to somebody. But I know you haven’t really done it, but I was just curious what your take and using Long Tail Pro for that purpose basically.

Spencer: Yeah so I mean I think you know using those metrics that I mentioned you know, so the amount of advertisers and the cost per click that’s going to give you a really good idea of how commercial that keyword is.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: But then certainly I mean it’s just natural that if you are building an ecommerce site you are going to want to focus on keywords that are more product based instead of informational based most likely.

Steve: Okay and then I know your strategy has evolved recently or relatively recently to more targeting authority type of sites. So if you were to start all over today from complete scratch what would be some of you advice to readers out there who are trying to create a profitable niche site.

Spencer: Right, the big difference I guess between then and now looking at my own timeline is just that I pursued a lot of short lived tactics, I was just trying to ranking quickly ranking Google as quickly as possible and wasn’t concerned with the long term longetivity of the site. And so that would be my advice is that people out there should try and build something that’s going to be around for years to come.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And expect that to be the case because that’s going to get you the most bang free your buck over the long term. And it will take a little bit longer to rank a larger site or an authority site if you will in Google. But it’s something that once you do it, it should be there for a long time. And so that would be my advice is don’t try to focus on short lived tactics. Try to focus on quality, how can you actually help your users, and build out a really great resource that you are proud to show other people.

Steve: So does that imply that you kind of advocate targeting some of the more competitive keywords at this point if you are going to be in it for the long haul?

Spencer: Not necessarily, so…

Steve: I know that’s a vague question but…

Spencer: No-no that’s a great question. It’s a great question. You know there is lots of different– you know each website will end up targeting lots of different keywords you know. Again if we go back to my best survival knife site, so I may start off by targeting much lower competition keywords and that is what I advocate is still try to target very low competition keywords because that will help you rank quicker.

But in the long term if you build up a great resource you might be able to rank for the keyword like survival knife or these more competitive keywords. So I would still start with the lower competition keywords but long term if you build a great enough resource you can potentially start ranking for these bigger keywords.

Steve: Okay so if I can just summarize what you said, so you use Long Tail Pro and you have it spared a bunch of Long Tail keywords, which tend to be low competition, right because of the longer tail and then you start writing pieces of content that’s specifically tailor those long tail keywords and then gradually over time you should start ranking for some of the more competitive keywords as everything gets indexed. Is that kind of accurate?

Spencer: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: That’s correct and as your site gets more authoritative maybe you weren’t targeting some of those more competitive keywords, you can then do so once you have that authority. So whether it’s your old articles that may be start ranking for competitive keywords, or if you create new articles to start ranking for those you can do that as well.

Steve: Okay and I get this question all the time in my class so I thought I’d ask you as well. People often ask me how long things will take to actually even show up or get ranked in search. And if you’ve done your niche research properly and you’ve used the guidelines in Long Tail Pro, what is the shortest period of time that you’ve ever seen something rank like in the front page?

Spencer: Yeah and this varies greatly from market to market.

Steve: Of course.

Spencer: I’ve seen things rank as quickly as within a month.

Steve: Really?

Spencer: Yeah.

Steve: Wow! Okay.

Spencer: That is not the norm you know that sort of if somebody picks an extremely low competition keyword and anyway everything falls into place. Usually the norm is going to be four to five months.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: You know before things start to really show up very well in Google. There just tends to be a longer waiting period now. Google takes a little bit longer usually to start ranking things.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of your overall SEO back linking strategy, it sounds like– I know the answer to this question but I thought I’d ask anyways. Do you do anything gray hat at this point? Now I would consider PBNs almost gray black hat but do you do anything kind of in the fringe right now for your sites?

Spencer: You know I’ve become pretty boring now. You know I used to be pretty involved in sort of the fringe I guess link building strategies. But I have given all of that up. You know I’m just honestly outbuilding great content. We are emailing people directly. We are you know just producing content that can be shared, that’s about it. You know we are not doing anything sort of shady or questionable if you will.

Steve: Okay so at this point basically your strategies sound like it’s a lot of outreach, producing great stuff that people actually want to share and link to as opposed to any short term tactics like PBNs and that sort of thing.

Spencer: Yap absolutely.

Steve: That’s very boring Spencer, I was hoping…

Spencer: I know I’m sorry.

Steve: Because you know Glen Allsopp, right?

Spencer: Yes.

Steve: He is been putting a link of some of his articles but he’s been talking about PBNs and all these other stuff that he does. And he’s been like pointing out specific examples of larger companies doing some shady tactics and getting away with it. So it’s just interesting that you guys are like complete opposites.

Spencer: Yeah I mean we used to be similar in the fact that we both use PBNs and he did a huge basically in response– I did a huge blog post about you know I’m no longer using PBNs and sort of the next day he had a big response blog post and says, “I am still using PBNs.” So that was kind of fun so Glen and I did a little back and forth but that’s fine. You know everybody has their own tactics and their own opinions about what they should do. I’ve just you know I’ve been in this game long enough and I’ve seen the ups and downs of what can work in Google long enough.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: That I’ve just decided you know what I’m going to do what Google really wants me to do, I’m going to just produce great content and give links naturally.

Steve: Okay and then the final question I want to ask you is you’ve done a lot for ranking niche sites, for affiliate marketing and just AdSense and that sort of thing. But just curious how come you haven’t given physical products a try just yet?

Spencer: You know I think a big reason that I never got involved in physical products and this could be totally a wrong reason I guess is that I was drawn to affiliate sites and AdSense sites because of the hands off nature of them. You know it’s something that I don’t have any customers, they click the link and I get paid and that’s it. You know I don’t have to do customer service and everything else that’s involved. Whereas a physical product I felt like it was just more hands on work, more dealing with whether that’s returns or emails from customers and that sort of thing.

That’s I mean that’s the reason is really it seemed more hands on and you have to remember back in the day I was building out you know dozens and dozens of these niche sites. That was my focus was just building out the next big site, I don’t want to be back answering customer emails.

Steve: Sure.

Spencer: In regards to that.

Steve: Although you could argue that Long Tail Pro prior requires a lot of support, right?

Spencer: Sure absolutely no it does. It does, and so I don’t know if I have a good reason for not keeping physical products at this point.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: No I’ve been very intrigued with ecommerce sites; I just have never done it up to this point.

Steve: Okay, sounds good man. So hey Spencer we’ve already been talking for quite a while. Where can people find you and learn more about your tools and the niche sites that you’ve been working on?

Spencer: Yeah so the best place really is for people to go to my blog over at nichepursuits.com and in addition I’m on Twitter @nichepursuits and if they want to go directly and find out about Long Tail Pro they could go to Longtailpro.com.

Steve: Okay, sounds good Spencer. Hey I really appreciate the time and it was great talking.

Spencer: Awesome thank you so much, and for everybody listening just yeah thanks I appreciate it and hopefully everybody learnt a thing or two.

Steve: All right, take care man.

Spencer: Hey thanks a lot will see you.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that interview. What I like about Spencer is that he is constantly trying new things to test the limits of SEO. And he’s created by far the best keyword research tool out there with Long Tail Pro. Now what’s also cool about Spencer is that he is not a programmer yet he has managed to create a fairly complex piece of software.

For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode54, and if you enjoyed listening to this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show very easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to Mywifequiteherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I manage to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

053: How Chris Guthrie Makes 6 Figures Selling WordPress Plugins Online

Chris Guthrie

I met Chris Guthrie at the Fincon Expo and I’m really glad that we had a chance to hang out. Chris is well known for making 6 figures with the Amazon Associates program and he also runs a 6 figure business selling WordPress plugins called BoostWP.com.

A lot of people believe that you have to know how to code in order to succeed in selling software. But not only is Chris not a technical guy, but he has found a way to get tens of thousands of websites to use his plugins. If you are interested in creating and selling WordPress plugins online, then this interview is a must listen. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Chris came up with the idea for his cash cow WordPress plugin EasyAZon
  • How to find a software person as a partner
  • How Chris comes up with ideas for winning WordPress plugins
  • How to make sure your plugin will make money before you start coding
  • Chris’ biggest mistake when developing software online
  • Why Chris moved over to the freemium model
  • How important is it to get your plugin on WordPress.org
  • Do plugin reviews matter at all?
  • How to handle software support for a WordPress plugin
  • Why Chris moved away from developing WordPress themes to plugins
  • How to launch a WordPress plugin

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I have Chris Guthrie on the show. Now Chris is actually somebody who I’ve known about for quite some time now, but we finally got to meet face to face at FinCon several weeks ago. Now Chris runs a bunch of sites including an awesome entrepreneurship blog at entrepreneurboost.com where he openly talks about all his business exploits. But I actually brought him on the show today to talk about his WordPress plugin company boostwp.com.

Now Chris is now the first entrepreneur that I’ve had on the show who creates WordPress plugins for his business. Now he is probably best known for his awesome plugin called EasyAzon, which allows people to easily insert Amazon affiliate links on their blogs. Now in the past I’ve actually thought about selling my own WordPress plugins as well. So I’m really interested in hearing about his story and with that welcome to the show Chris, really glad to have you on today.

Chris: Thank you so much Steve, I would like to first say that that was a fantastic introduction, I felt quite pleased here.

Steve: And incidentally I first heard about Chris– this is just for the listeners– he was one of the guys that generated a lot of buzz when he made six figures being an Amazon affiliate, and considering that you only get from 3-6% revenue off of that, that’s a pretty impressive fete.

Chris: Yeah have I known what I knew about– that you could do a lot more of selling products on Amazon I probably done that before that’s probably another conversation…

Steve: Yeah-yeah we’re here to talk about boostwp today. So give us a quick background story. Tell us about the business and how you got started with it, and then why specifically WordPress plugins.

Chris: Yes so I think that the best way to probably get into it is to just talk about the first plugin that I did and basically you know you mentioned that I was doing Amazon affiliate things. That’s actually how I was able to leave my day job full time was when the Amazon came to pass that– well I got fired– that’s probably another conversation.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Anyway that was five years ago and then I was making good money from Amazon’s affiliate program, and just kind of frustrated with the process of creating links, and you have to go to amazon.com click the link to this page button, the little grey bar at the top of your screen and you’ve got like text link and you’ve got grab the code put it back in your site and then you have a link right?

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And so this can just be done within WordPress. So while I’m writing I can just make the links there. And so I set out on a quest and a long journey– no it wasn’t long I guess I looked into trying to find out who I could hire to do that because I’m not a programmer.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And so yeah, so I started that way.

Steve: And then is EasyAzon that’s your most popular plugin?

Chris: Yeah that’s probably the most popular one. It’s been around the longest and so we’ve invested the most time, money, and promotion and everyone kind of knows about it most than the others I guess.

Steve: Okay and so you mentioned that you’re not a programmer or anything, so how did you find someone to develop this plugin with you?

Chris: Yeah, so that’s actually a really common question that people have when it comes to software development if the person is not a software person. And so in my case I actually just went to a local WordPress meet up, and I basically just looked around and I was like who here develops WordPress plugins?

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And I just kind of introduced myself to people and I think I ended up the organizer, and this is almost several years ago now, but the organizer had known someone else, Nick Warnes is his name. And so I worked with him and basically went out to lunch and we talked about the project and it was great because I was based in Seattle at the time and so was he.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then I said, “Hey you seem like a sharp guy, let’s do this.”

Steve: So was this like an equal partnership or…?

Chris: So this one actually I just paid him as a contract type thing.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Chris: I mean it was the first time that I had sold a plugin before, and generally I don’t like to do partnership unless I know that I can provide a lot of value.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And so at that time I didn’t know how well I would do and I also figured that he didn’t want to work with someone with an unproven yet who knows if I’m going sell this the new one type of thing so…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I just paid him and then you know we can talk more about how that relationship eventually developed into a partnership but…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: That was the initial stage.

Steve: And then you know how much did it cost to create this first plugin of yours?

Chris: I believe it was $4000 or so.

Steve: Okay, so that’s actually not too bad and you talked about the idea– you got the idea for this plugin because you were trying to do Amazon affiliate links and you wanted an easy way to do that. And I know now that in your shop you have a whole bunch of plugins. So what is actually your process for deciding which plugin idea to actually pursue?

Chris: Primarily it’s just based on a lot of personal need and also just based on what I see in the market place. So I mean I’ve been making money with websites for nearly a decade, I’ve been in full time for about five years now. And so I kind of just– I can look at websites and see okay this site could be making more money if I do this, or I could be getting more email subscribers if I look at my blog and say the same thing about some of the things in my site, but that’s not my primary business site. I guess I just don’t worry too much about it anyway, so I look at just things that I know will work so…

Steve: Let’s talk about your second best plugin for example, how did you get the idea for that?

Chris: Yeah the second best one I’d say– let me think here probably I did a few different plugins that are related to Amazon, they were separate types of things.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But those ones were going to be shifting into EasyAzon, so I’d probably say better links probably would be the second most popular.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And that was one that we launched earlier this year.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And…

Steve: How did you how did you get the idea for that one?

Chris: Yeah so mainly we’re just– because we’re in your company and bootstrapped and just kind of generating revenue from EasyAzon and some of the other plugins and software things. I thought okay let’s try and build something that we know that people will want to use on a daily basis in their blog and so it’s basically a link shortening tool, but…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: One that does a lot of things better than what the other ones do. So for example knowing how many clicks you get on your blog is nice for your blog post. But knowing actually where those clicks came from is kind of more important because then you can determine this one post on my blog is getting a lot of traffic and also driving a lot of clicks, but potentially affiliate clicks or clicks to some sales page and then you can see okay there is some– so you have that business intelligence to see what you might want to do.

Steve: You’re talking about in terms of like the source whether they came from search or referring source or that sort of thing?

Chris: More so that when people are on the actual page they can then see– so if you’re at yourwebsite.com/home then you could see the clicks that are coming for that specific link on that specific page. So most of the other plugins wouldn’t really do that, and I suppose you can get fancy with Google analytics and do it but that’s just too…

Steve: That’s more tedious for sure.

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: Yeah. Cool so you know when you went out to create this plugin, so did you kind of validate your idea with a small audience before you invested the cash, or did you just go for it?

Chris: With this one by then we were pretty much partners together and so we just– we went pretty much went after it and so…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Lately the strategy has been to do an initial light version that we offer through wordpress.org and then the premium version that we sell through the site. And we’ve seen some chunks of sales through that, but typically it’s just better to just focus on signs of the growth than focusing on the free version I found.

Steve: Okay. So is the free version kind of your way of validating the idea like how do you– pretend you just created this plugin, or you have an idea for a plugin, do you kind of run the idea by your audience or your list first, or do you kind of put out this free version, see if it gets traction, what’s the ordering of things?

Chris: Typically I’ll talk with people to see if it’s something that they’d like, but a lot of times it’s just– sometimes I really think that I would like because it’s like annoying to me.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I just know, I kind of just know that I think other people are going to do it and I guess it’s because I’ve done a lot of these before. It’s so far they’ve been doing exemplarily well, just kind of coming with that strategy, but I suppose that isn’t the best answer to your question in terms of…

Steve: Oh no-no-no I mean I mean just curious if you did that because you know it’s a big project right?

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: If you’re going to put out some software. If you’re going to spend all this time creating and debugging and all that sort of thing you kind of want to know it’s going to sell, right?

Chris: Yeah and so I guess I should say to you the reason why my answer is like that and since it’s just kind of like based on my decision and then also talking to Nick to see if he thinks it’s something that’s you know easy to get to minimum viable product. Then you know we can kind of go that way, but yeah if you’re first starting out I would not advice just doing that “oh it’s something I might like.” You’d want to really determine if there’s an audience you can sell to and then you know what type of channel you can use or what type of platform you can leverage do that. So for EasyAzon that was a first one…

Steve: Right.

Chris: I already leveraged the blog because I was talking about Amazon affiliate marketing so often.

Steve: Yeah-yeah-yeah you were known for being the Amazon affiliate guy, so EasyAzon was probably a pretty easy sell, right?

Chris: Yeah-yeah and it was pretty-pretty quickly I think probably the initial launch paid the development cost and then just you know continue to earn money each month. You know over– earning four figures pretty much and then continuing on since then so…

Steve: So what is your– so not talking about EasyAzon you know EasyAzon aside, what is in general your strategy for getting people to actually just try your plugins. Now you mentioned you have a freemium model, is that right?

Chris: So a few different ways with boostwp we’re young enough to where we’re still kind of playing with the model. Right now we have a subscription type service we offer all of the plugins that we develop and then we do new plugins each month.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But most likely we’ll shift to yearly just because we found that people use those plugins– you kind of have to match similar to what the rest of the market place is doing in terms of how they’re pricing things. So I noticed that you know some– they’re just aren’t that many plugin companies doing it that way.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And you kind of think about the way the audience is used to paying for something. So for example books you know they’re used to paying at a certain price point and at a certain way, and so the same is kind of safe for WordPress plugins, but yeah so…

Steve: Yeah I know adobe has a similar pricing search where you get access to all their tools by paying this monthly fee and that’s what you’re kind of doing, right?

Chris: Yeah-yeah and then to go back to your question I don’t think I really answered it was how we get people to try. A lot of it is just kind of leveraging the established platform that from being out and doing this for so long. But then also to just contacting where there are other influential bloggers and just getting more people using our stuff. And the long term strategy for boostwp is still early is we’ll have a podcast and we already have a bunch of podcast episodes recorded just getting ready to launch that, and then also doing more content marketing and driving traffic to that way. Sort of be kind of more traditional marketing in the sense for that.

Steve: Okay and so when you mention leveraging your existing network, this is like an audience that you build from– is this from entrepreneur boost or is this from a different blog?

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: How did you get those yeah?

Chris: Yeah primarily from that blog and also just meeting so many people that that run blogs because it’s kind of like there aren’t a ton of people that do it full time for a living.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I’ve been on online businesses and so you kind of get to know what a lot of people want and so yeah so that’s primarily.

Steve: Let’s talk about that a little bit, so where have you met a lot of these entrepreneurs?

Chris: A lot of times I just reach out to people. I do try and go to events, for a while I hadn’t gone to any event like a couple of years and then we had kids and I thought “Hey I should try and go to some events.” And that’s where we met, but yeah I mean that’s where I would meet a lot of people because you know if you reach out to say a blogger that you respect or you think they’re doing something interesting, really in any niche I guess they’re always really busy, but if you can meet them at a conference that’s the time when you know they’re right in front of you and you can have a conversation typically.

Steve: Okay, but if you’re like a nobody, let’s say how do you outreach to someone?

Chris: I mean even when I was a nobody I would say hey. I would just talk to people, I mean I think that yeah I mean I guess it comes onto where your strategies is right? If you’re trying to get people to use your software I think you even look to see what paying plan it is they might already have that you can solve…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then come to them with the solution to the problem you know they have. I think that yeah something that doesn’t immediately self serving I suppose.

Steve: I see, so I was just curious so like let’s say you have this plugin and you were trying to get me to use it for example, would you kind of start the conversation off like do you have a problem doing this and this? Or would you try to just start a conversation first?

Chris: I would just start a conversation first and…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I mean I’m guess I typically don’t do a lot of just that outreach in terms of trying to generate sales because I just– I think it’s difficult, right? To do that it’s more for me to just connect with other people that are doing well and then I can say “Hey we have software that can probably help you out and…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And here you go.

Steve: So is your strategy also to– do you give away the plugins to the like the big names so then you can just say like this guy so and so– this big name uses the plugin?

Chris: Yeah I can, I’ve done that in the past where I give it up, but then if I’m giving friends then I’ll say pay this pay me, I’ll say just pay because then I’ll say you are a paying customer.

Steve: Okay got it.

Chris: Yeah I mean I think it’s– the thing to it is if what you’re building doesn’t provide more value than what you’re charging for then you’re already going to kind of have an uphill battle as it is. And so I mean for EasyAzon for example it’s– I can pretty much tell people if you’re making money from amazons affiliate program you’re not using this then you’re making less money than you could be, and it’s a pretty easy argument to make especially since the cost isn’t too that at all.

Steve: Okay and do you ever use any sort of paid advertising to advertise your plugins?

Chris: I haven’t, but I hired a new team member earlier this year, well I only guess it was only months ago. I hired a part time and then put them on full time but that’s one of the things that he’ll be probably working on and then– but yeah I haven’t really done a lot with that.

Steve: Okay just curious so mainly it’s just relying on kind of your own network and your own lists thus far and just word of mouth?

Chris: Yeah and I mean the other thing too is because I’ve been doing different types of products and software type thing for so long, it’s– I don’t know maybe it’s almost laziness in a sense it sounds maybe lazy, but you know I’ve been able to just kind of say, here is this product and I know it’s a problem that you have because others I see complained about elsewhere, or I see it you know else in the market and here’s our solution that’s in my opinion better. And then because I can send an email to tens of thousands of people then it’s usually successful.

Steve: Okay and then that list was just leveraged before you even started basically?

Chris: Yeah-yeah.

Steve: Okay based on your Amazon affiliates success, right?

Chris: That but then also just like multiple things such as like billing and selling a website for six figures and buying and selling websites making money from…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: All sorts of random stuff talking about it and…

Steve: It’s mainly just people you’ve gathered over time?

Chris: Yeah and then also from selling your products. So every time you can sell a new product you’ve got new customers and that’s the one thing too I’ll say is that people that are on your email list that are buyers are like 100 times more valuable to you and your business than people that sign up for a freebie through your site. At least that’s what I found, I know that if you have someone sign up for something free then you can kind of send them down your list of emails and all that and obviously eventually sell to them, but yeah so anyways…

Steve: Let’s talk about that freemium model a little bit here, was it always like that where you gave away something for free, and then charge for an extra feature?

Chris: No I mean typically that’s actually more recently that we’ve been doing that more and just a sense of trying to get our plugins into more people WordPress installs.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Like going back to that earlier point, so we have for better links probably we have an importing tool that can allow people to import from another popular plugin I will not mention the name but…

Steve: I know which plugin you’re talking about.

Chris: Yeah so that’s kind of like one thing. The other– really it’s just it started with just the premium version, right? I mean for EasyAzon I was like I just paid this guy, I should say Nick– I just paid Nick you know four grand or so to do a first version. I’ve got to make some money back to pay for this thing and then it was just sewn to that so yeah.

Steve: I’m just curious how has going to the freemium model– has that affected sales positively negatively or just kind of flat?

Chris: I think it’s somewhat positive, I think it’s still in the point where we potentially just need more plugins and there are more people using them to really see a huge amount. I noticed most I have Google analytics tracking for a Google gold or whatever it is to track freemium driven sales for EasyAzon from wordpress.org and other types of spots the plugin is delivered and given for free. And I’ve seen a pretty good chunk of sale, I get a pretty steady stream of sales coming through, I actually wish I had the exact numbers in front of me so I can tell you I’m on this.

Steve: No that’s okay we don’t need exact numbers. I’m Just curious though do you do anything let’s say someone signs up for the free version, what do you do? Do you do anything to kind of push them over to the premium version like do you have this email sequence or something that tries to convince?

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: Okay and how does that work?

Chris: Yeah so right now if you want to go to EasyAzon.com you would see that there is pro versions and also we’re using like a pop up plugins, so when people try to leave– not that it will stop them from leaving but it will just you know the pop up will appear and people can enter their email to download the free version.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then we have a pretty good opt in rate with that because people are like “oh free” we’ll track…

Steve: Right.

Chris: And then so the first email is just the delivery of the plugin and then I set up the sequence very long ago, so I can’t recall all what it is but yeah basically just send them down and talk about what people can do if they were to upgrade to pro etcetera.

Steve: Okay and then at some point once that sequence expires you don’t bother them again right it’s…?

Chris: Yeah typically not, I mean I haven’t really I’m using Infusionsoft for…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: We’re using Infusionsoft for boostwp and then I use Aweber for my– the initial business I started with.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And so there’s a lot of nice things you can do with campaigns and everything in Infusionsoft, but there’s also like a matter of actually building them.

Steve: Okay yeah-yeah of course. I was just curious also what percentage of your freemium customers– so number one I was just curious for my own knowledge, what percentage actually install the plugin, and then what percentage actually upgrade to the premium model?

Chris: I don’t have those exact numbers here with me.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Yeah, I’m sorry.

Steve: That’s all right you know ball park or…?

Chris: I’d say so the people that actually– that download it’s I don’t even– I don’t think I even have– because the problem this was the challenge I guess and this is probably something good to point out, is that because WordPress plugins are it’s like a distributed software model where you’re getting customers some software and they can go and install it. At least the current version right now we’re not using like a license tracking system to you know to do that. We’re going to do that in the fourth version that we release in November, but some customers really you know it’s not easy to do that and then also to WordPress has a lot of strict guidelines to what you can and can’t do with your plugins. Like you can’t really call back to your server to see where your plugins install that.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So that’s actually a big challenge when you’re doing things with WordPress versus like building your own sass app for example.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Then you kind of have to also play by the rules but then it’s also a matter of you know being able to leverage the fact that there is a market place of millions of bloggers that can potentially be downloading and trying out your free version and that’s also a value there too.

Steve: Okay. Is this a WordPress rule just on the platform or is it just a rule to get listened on wordpress.org?

Chris: WordPress.org they have specific rules about what you can and can’t do with plugins that are listed there. And there’s things like you can’t for example if you have a feature in a pro version you can’t list it and then grey out like a check box like they can’t click it type of thing.

Steve: Interesting. Okay.

Chris: Yeah there’s a lot of kind of nuances to that. I don’t recall the exact you know every single one…

Steve: Sure.

Chris: Other thing that I know that Nick knows and I know that we have to plan the playground–play by the rules in their playground I guess.

Steve: Okay and so how important is it to actually get listed on wordpress.org in terms of sales?

Chris: I don’t think it’s actually that important. I mean I think really honestly the only reason why we did that was to test to see you know if we could get start driving some sales through that and we have. And so it’s been valuable in that sense. But before that we hadn’t even done a free version. For version one and two it was only paid. And so I don’t think that you need– like if you listen to this and you think, I have an idea for WordPress plugin and I’m trying to decide you don’t have to go with the free version actually. You could just go with a premium version then just do a minimum version.

I mean that’s because we are doing so many and we have so many different projects that we have planned out, and we are going to be hiring another developer in January. You know we have to kind of go with just the initial, here is the value over the general value the software can provide. And let’s just get to that as quickly as possible with the least amount of fluff. And then if people adopt it well then we could try and really invest even more time into it type of thing.

Steve: Okay. So it’s kind of that MVP model so to speak?

Chris: Yeah I completely believe that. I think that a lot of like programmer type entrepreneurs they’ll end up– this is just from my personal experience speaking with them. So it might sound like I’m bashing it but they’ll end up you know kind of getting into this feature creep mentality where they are like this thing you know uses really like and then they’ll never really launch something whereas my attitude is to just launch it as quickly– as soon as possible after you’ve made sure they aren’t any bugs and everything, but that’s kind of yeah that’s what I’d say.

Steve: Okay. And then I was just curious do plugin reviews matter on WordPress.org? Like do you make an effort to gather reviews for your plugins?

Chris: No, I haven’t really made much of an effort. I mean I wish I could say I have a WordPress.org plugin that has you know a million downloads, and I have all these amazing data to share. But I mean it is still you know I don’t– getting elsewhere [inaudible] [00:23:59] has only been a more recent thing.

Steve: Okay. I mean you are doing well and that’s why I’m asking so I was just– it sounds like WordPress.org isn’t like a necessity per say. Like if you do you’re marking right on your own you should be fine.

Chris: Yeah I mean there is a lot of six and seven figure plugins that well maybe not certain figures, but I know there is a lot of six figure earning plugins a year that don’t even have a free version at wordpress.org.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But yeah.

Steve: Okay. And then I wanted to talk also and this is one of my fears of writing my own WordPress plugin. This is a technical product and most of the people you are dealing with are not technical. So how do you deal with support?

Chris: Yeah so that’s actually a good question because you get a lot of it even if you make everything really clear. And then it’s actually shocking how many support requests you can get if something isn’t unclear and then you realize you have to go back and do something. So let me actually kind of go back and unpack that.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So the way that I do the plugins is I create the help videos and I go through everything that’s covers the main kind of components of the plugin, and then try to make sure if there are any specific errors that people can get tripped up on for example. So EasyAzon has you have to get Amazon access key and an access secret key type thing from their system to access their API.

Steve: Right.

Chris: So basically there is some problem that could happen there. So I think it kind of go like step by step through every single thing and actually show them on their screen where you doing to set everything up. So I’ll do video guides and then I have– because we sell multiple different plugins, I always put the videos in the same section. So it’s always just the end of the domain name and then just how hyphen to.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So that’s like the first line of the defense it would be all the WordPress, all the videos, and then step by step videos you know I use Camtasia studio to record those, and I zoom into the screen and use the mouse cursor effect where you can highlight it. I have seen some people and I’m not sure why they would do this, but they don’t actually zoom into their screen when they are doing support. But then you don’t realize that people might be on like smaller browser or small resolution monitors or just they might not be able to see.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So that’s like the first line, and the next would be support desk. And so we have four people in the support desk so that we can answer email tickets to them. So we use fresh desk right now.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then I like that one quite a bit actually I need to be moving over the other company to that system too.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But yeah and so we just have some support reps that help there.

Steve: You guys have a phone line?

Chris: We don’t have a phone line at this time. No I think it would be difficult to do that because there are so many things that are so visual about you know doing it, it will become challenging. It might be cost prohibitive too. I guess thinking about the pricing.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: If someone is going to call and then take an hour to…

Steve: Yeah, yeah.

Chris: Do something…

Steve: Do you do live chat then or it is just email?

Chris: Just email.

Steve: Just email.

Chris: But then we have– another thing too is with the videos, that is one thing I should mention too is because I’ve sold plugins and I’ve also sold themes. So plugins are much different than themes in terms of support that you need to do, and that it’s a lot less.

Steve: Okay plugins are a lot less support, okay.

Chris: Yeah there is a lot of less support typically because it’s just you know this is what the plugin can do. And then you check these boxes and it will do or not do that feature, able or not able. And with themes people will say things like, “I want my theme– I want my website to look like this.” And they’ll point out some other website that’s using an entirely different theme and it’s like you have no idea how they are going to arrive to that point. And then it’s like you have to try and deal with that, so yeah that’s…

Steve: So it sounds like more of the story, do not develop themes.

Chris: If you going to do themes and you are going to do like some type of life time license scenario, then I don’t know what to tell you other than good luck I guess you know.

Steve: Let’s talk about that because you recently went over to this subscription based model. Before you were offering free support, right?

Chris: Yeah I mean before it was pretty much a huge mistake to say, “Hey when you buy this plugin you can get life time updates.” But then sure enough I’m going to be living for hopefully quite some time and I hope that this business stays around for quite some time, and new features and new versions cost money. And I guess this goes back to I didn’t really know that much about this. And I didn’t really– I should have sought out people that were doing this to ask their advice before I did that because I think that that– and that’s actually a mistake that a few other friends have wanted to do plugins have made.

I have tried to tell them to avoid making is to do like lifetime support updates. And I kind of compare to Bill Gates releasing their original windows version and saying lifetime updates. Can you imagine how ridiculous that would be? And had I thought of that really or had anyone said that to me then I would have avoided that costly mistake, because people– you are going to have people that really enjoy your software and they want to keep using it. And if you can have an annual type renewal where they can upgrade to get the new features then that’s really a way to kind of grow your business beyond just trying to find new customers. And I think that’s actually the biggest mistake I’ve made with this business model.

Steve: Okay and then this institution based model is nice too, right? Because you get recurrent payments and that sort of thing and support isn’t as much of a problem at that point?

Chris: Yeah I mean it’s pretty much yeah.

Steve: Okay so I was curious also, do you have like a specific role out strategy to avoid like a sudden influx of bugs and complaints that you can’t handle?

Chris: Yeah we do a lot a lot of internal testing and then we don’t have like a beta squad per say, like a group of customers that can test ahead of time. But that’s something that we are considering doing because– but again it comes back to partnering with someone that’s really good.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Nick’s one of the best developers I’ve ever worked with. And that’s why I said, “Hey we should work together on this business and this is kind of the vision I have and I know that you can do it because you’ve done these other plugins.” And I think that definitely comes back to making sure you hire or work with someone rather that’s really good because otherwise you will end up with a lot of bugs. So typically we don’t get too many because his code is really solid.

Steve: Okay and well tested probably.

Chris: Yeah exactly.

Steve: Okay and then you know and again this is a question mainly for my benefit sorry listeners. But you know WordPress gets updated like every several months, right?

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: How the heck do you maintain the code for all the different versions? Is it just a constant updating battle?

Chris: Well that’s a good question; I want to just go back to another example actually. So I used to do [inaudible] [00:30:54] forums.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Years before this and that’s how I first started making money. And now you know you’d have these updates and then just stuff would break. And it was just like huge nightmare but that’s not really the case with WordPress. I have yet to actually have an update that WordPress goes to really cause some huge massive failure with the plugin.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So that’s nice I guess you know because that’s a huge time circus to have to continuously change things just because WordPress is being updated.

Steve: Okay so that implies that WordPress is a very robust sort of upgrade policy so to speak.

Chris: Yeah it just doesn’t seem to [inaudible] [00:31:33]. They have been some things that have happened with you know like WordPress, but a lot of those things kind of come back to the themes actually. So…

Steve: Okay, right crushing with themes and that sort of thing.

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: And I had a couple of questions on just pricing. So how do you kind of determine pricing for your plugin and then how does support cost kind of factor into that pricing?

Chris: Yeah so I typically just– so when I first started I priced EasyAzon at $47.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I think I might have done like an initial discount pricing for a time limited period, which I would suggest doing because scarcity in the marketing is really powerful and especially if it’s real scarcity. So obviously you want to increase the price if you say you are going to. But yeah so that was the initial price that I went at. And I just kind of looked at what competitors were doing to see what they were charging. And so yeah typically it’s just I’ve looked to see what other are charging and then where I started out before worked well.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And I’ve done some price increases and tests to see you know if there is any discounts not discounts to any drops off in sales, but– and then through gorgeous support. So typically right now you know we get a lot of support requests, but the revenue regenerates much-much higher than the support amount that we pay.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then also I do some support, but it’s only stuff I guess past initial few people.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So it’s not using too much of my time either. So it’s really not a huge amount of it. And I think it goes about to the earlier point I was saying about with WordPress themes you’ve got a lot of different things that can– and I don’t know maybe there is someone out there listening and saying, hey you had a really bad theme developer or something that I don’t know.

Steve: I’ll try to get someone who develops themes on the show Nick.

Chris: Yeah that would be good. And I’ve only done a few themes and so I only know from that. If he explains then I don’t want to do them. At least for now until we have more team ever seem– make it viable but yeah.

Steve: Okay. And you know, what are some of the biggest challenges that you’ve kind of come across in developing plugins?

Chris: I think that the biggest is that anytime you have an idea for what it is you want to accomplish through a plugin or whatever product it might be, it’s just always going to take longer than you expect it will. I think that’s something that I hear people always say and then you think as a listener you might be thinking that you know that’s not the case. But that’s always case. There is always like features that’s slowly creep in that you just have to have, and that’s the challenge to kind of bail again.

So I think it’s just a matter of making sure you plan appropriately and then additionally because we try to be prolific with the amount of software that we release. I think the key thing too is to make sure you set deadlines up. So it’s kind of I guess a battle all right between those two.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But when we set a specific deadline we also use we also have affiliates to help sell our plugins. And if we set a deadline there are a date that we are going to launch on, then we have to make sure we hit that date so that’s the right way they can kind of help make sure we get on track.

Steve: Okay and then about what were we just talking about Chris sorry.

Chris: Yeah we were just talking about some of the challenges with [inaudible] [00:35:00]

Steve: No there was a specific challenge that I was just going to ask you about but I can’t remember. Okay so if I wanted to create a WordPress plugin today, what would be like your key piece of advice?

Chris: Key piece of advice would be to just look at what the minimum version you can do.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: That you can then charge for. And if you have enough capital that actually support then maybe you could do it for free initially, but I mean if you are using like donations or something like that that try and make money then I’m laughing while I’m talking because this is not going to work.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Because I’ve talked to some other developers that have those and they say, “I think I’ve got a donation once a few years ago.” You have to charge to prove your value. People really value things based on what they pay for them.

Steve: I remember my question now, when you are in the design portion, the design face of your plug in, do you use any sort of software or tools to help you kind of plan out how you want the plugging to look and function?

Chris: So initially I would you know I did like some mark ups just– I can’t remember if I used pen and paper enough, but I did use pen and paper for another project that I’m doing with a different– for assess thing that we are building. But yeah I just use for that one actually sheets of paper and [inaudible] [00:36:27] just sitted on a flight while I was going actually to FinCon.

Steve: Really?

Chris: Yeah so I just as I marked it up and then I handed it up to developers. Yeah so I typically would just use that. I don’t use anything like balsamic or any of those wire framing tools. But I think that comes back to you as well that I have worked with Nick for several years now versus when I hired him as a contractor and then now that we are business partners. And it’s kind of like he is really good at UI and kind of understanding how like what the best flow would be. And then after he gets initial version to me I can kind of okay I think we should change this around because of this reason, right?

And also too with WordPress at least the way that we design plugins we try not to actually make the UIB you know look a lot different than what you experience already in WordPress. So we will re-use a lot of the assets in there. So like if you’d go and you click the EasyAzon button in your WordPress post editor, it pops up the window that looks like the media window where you want to upload images.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So it’s similar in that way.

Steve: Okay. All right and then just in terms of understanding the mechanics of how to create a WordPress plugin, did you guys learn from any books? Like can you recommend any books on it?

Chris: I don’t know any books because I have never– I don’t know I’ve never written the line of code in a WordPress plugin before.

Steve: Okay, but even just the process is there– like how did you guys learn? Or is it Nick or?

Chris: Yeah Nick who knows maybe he could be a good guest for you but yeah he started freelancing and all other stuff yeah but he– I think that he just kind of learns because you know it was something that he could do, and then he had clients asking for it and so started doing that. But I don’t know I’d have to follow up with Nick to see exactly what he did.

Steve: Okay and what about just marketing in general? Where did you get your jobs, is it all experience or did you read any books as well that influenced you?

Chris: Primarily experience.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And just lots of trying to make sure that you just take action. I think that a lot of people would talk about the things that they want to do, like for example I have friends that say, “Oh it’s cool you make money online and you have these online businesses and you work from home and all that.” And then it seems like they are interested in actually learning more and I start to get such ruin in my mouse. My mouse starts to run on my own minute and then they ask all these questions and then they never do or say anything.

So I think it’s just a matter of you know say or listen to this podcasts right now. I said this on another one– another podcasts and I was like don’t become an expert at listening to podcasts. You’ve got to be able to take what you learn from whatever it is and then actually do something.

Steve: Are you trying to get my listeners to stop listening to my podcast Chris, is that what is going on here?

Chris: I’m just saying they can listen to your podcast within as long as they get home say they listen to it on their drive to work, and then you know they can get on and actually do something. That’s all I’m saying.

Steve: And just curious how long you know after you released your first plugin did it actually gain traction to make sales? Was it pretty immediate or?

Chris: It was pretty immediate and I guess– and it comes down to maybe you’d have a better guess if you had someone that had to start with no existing platform. It sounds like…

Steve: Let me ask you this, if you had no platform what would you have done?

Chris: I don’t know if I would have done one. I don’t even know if I would have done a plugin, maybe I don’t know. I think I probably would have just tried to look up other people that were doing plugins to see what they did and then try to talk to them and say, hey you know I tried to find someone that did a plugin that wasn’t at all similar in any market to what I was doing and said, “Hey this is the plugin I’m looking to build you know how did you get your first users or things like that.” And it’s obviously the same for a lot of businesses. You could see you know or how did this Sass Company get started. Do some research and try to find out about that or whatever. So…

Steve: Yeah I mean I ask you that for a reason because I think establishing some sort of platform before you do anything is very important. That way you always have an initial set of customers to sell to right when you launch, right?

Chris: Yeah I wish I knew the name of the company. It’s either like Unbounce or someone else. But I hope it’s not them because that might be their competitor but it was– one of their co-founders who have been writing blog posts for months and months about conversion rates type stuff. And when they release their tool they had always people that have been reading and they had you know they’ve been building their email list and all that to help. So I really think that you know pre-launch you know getting a pre-launch list and that actually launching something is really important. And making in an advance and trying to really push it.

Steve: Yes so Chris we’ve already been chatting for about 40 minutes. If anyone has any questions for you just about your plugins or just writing a plugin in general, where can they find you?

Chris: Yeah so the best place to find me would probably just through my blog entrepreneurboost.com and I’ll say slash Steve, so I can know where you came from, and I’ll set up a page that says you know includes my contact and so just some of the other random projects that I’ve been doing over the last few years. Not only saying random because it’s just I’ve done a lot of different things. Some of them have taken off and then others have you know not been as good enough, but I still learnt from them.

Steve: Okay yeah and Chris has got a great blog you guys should all go check it out on entrepreneurboost.com. It talks about some really cools stuff and he often mentions numbers to back it up as well. So it’s pretty cool.

Chris: Yeah, yeah that’s what I like to do.

Steve: All right Chris hey thanks a lot for coming on the show man. I really appreciate your time.

Chris: Thanks Steve.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that interview. Chris is awesome, and what I find interesting about his story is that he discovered a problem while running his own WordPress site and decided to develop a solution to his own problem. Plus he is not a programmer which just goes to show that you don’t really need to have a technical background to do software development.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode53, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to ITunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps to keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show very easily and get awesome business advice from my guest. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral either to someone else or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequiteherjob.com/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!